Folio Archives
Canto Six

Chapter One
Jaräsandha-paräjaya
Jaräsandha's Defeat

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

kåñëäya väsudeväya
    devaké-nandanäya ca
nanda-gopa-kumaräya
     govindäya namo namaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; kåñëäya—to Lord Kåñëa; väsudeväya—the son of Vasudeva; devaké-nandanäya—the son of Devcaké; ca—and; nanda-gopa-kumaräya—the son of Nanda-gopa; govindäya—to the happiness of the cows, land and senses; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances.

     Çré Närada said: I offer my respectful obeisances to Lord Kåñëa, the son of Vasudeva, Devaké, and the gopa Nanda, and the happiness of the cows, land, and senses.

Text 2

çrutaà tava mukhäd brahman
     mathurä-khaëòam adbhutam
vada mäà dvärakä-khaëòaà
     çré-kåñëa-caritämåtam

     çrutam—heard; tava—of you; mukhät—from the mouth; brahman—Obrähmaëa; mathurä-khaëòam—the Mathura-kahnda; adbhutam—wonderful; vada—tell; mäm—me; dvärakä-khaëòam—the Dvärakä-khaëòa; çré-kåñëa-caritämåtam—filled with the nectar of Lord Kåñëa's pastimes.

     O brähmaëa, now that I have heard from your mouth the wonderful Mathurä-khaëòa, please tell me the Dvärakä-khaëòa, which is filled with the nectar of Lord Kåñëa's transcendental pastimes.

Text 3

vivähäù kati puträç ca
     kati pauträ ramä-pateù
sarvaà vada mahä-buddhe
     dvärakä-väsa-käraëam

     vivähäù-wives; kati—how many?; puträù—children; ca—; kati—how many?; pauträ—grandchildren; ramä-pateù—of the husabnd of the goddess of fortune; sarvam—all; vada—tell; mahä-buddhe—O intelligent one; dvärakä-väsa-käraëam—the reason for residing in Dvaraka.

     How many wives did He have? How many children? How many grandchildren? Tell me the reason He chose to live in Dvärakä. O wise one, please tell me everything.

Text 4

çré-närada uväca 

asti-präpté mahiñyau dve
     måte kaàse mahä-bale
jaräsandha-gåhaà duùkhäj
     jagmatur maithileçvara

     çré-närada uväca-Çré Närada said; asti-präpté—Asati and Prapti; mahiñyau—queens; dve—two; måte—dead; kaàse—Kaàsa; mahä-bale—very powerful; jaräsandha-gåham—to Jarasandha's house; duùkhät—unhappily; jagmatuù—went; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, after the death of powerful Kaàsa, his two queens, Asti and Präpti unhappily went to Jaräsandha's home.

Text 5

tan-mukhät kaàsa-maraëaà
     çrutvä kruddho jara-sütaù
ayädavéà mahéà kartuà
     udyato 'bhün mahä-balaù

     tan-mukhät—from their mouths; kaàsa-maraëam—the death of Kaàsa; çrutvä—hearing; kruddhaù—angry; jara-sütaù—Jarasandha; ayädavém—without Yädavas; mahém—the earth; kartum—to make; udyataù—determined; abhüt—became; mahä-balaù—powerful.

     When from their mouths he heard of Kaàsa's death, Jaräsandha becxame angry and decided to make the earth a place where no Yädavas lived.

Text 6

akñauhiëébhir viàçatyä
     tisrbhiç cäpi samvåtaù
ramyäà mahä-puréà räjann
     äyayau balavän nåpaù

     akñauhiëébhiù—akñauhiëés; viàçatyä—with twenty; tisrbhiù—three; cäpi—and; samvåtaù—accompanined; ramyäm—beautiful; mahä-purém—great city; räjann—O king; äyayau—went; balavän—poweful; nåpaù—king.

     Accompanied by 23 akñauhiëé divisions, powerful King Jaräsandha went to beautiful Mathurä City.

Text 7

bhayäturäà puréà vékñya
     tat-senäà sindhu-nädiném
sabhäyäà bhagavän säkñäd
     baladevam uväca ha

     bhayäturäm—terrified; purém—the city; vékñya—seeing; tat-senäm—that army; sindhu-nädiném—roaring like the ocean; sabhäyäm—in the assembly; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—personally; baladevam—to Lord Balaräma; uväca—said; ha—indeed.

     Seeing that the entire city was terrified of that great army roaring like the ocean, in the royal assembly Lord Kåñëa said to Balaräma:

Text 8

sarvaà cäsya balaà räma
     hantavyaà vai na saàçayaù
mägadhas tu na hantavyo
     bhüyaù kartä balodyamam

     sarvam—all; ca—and; asya—of him; balam—the army; räma—O Balaräma; hantavyam—should be killed; vai—indeed; na—not; saàçayaù—doubt; mägadhaù—the kin gof Magadha; tu—indeed; na—not; hantavyaù—to be killed; bhüyaù—more; kartä—by the doer; balodyamam—power.

     O Balaräma, this army should be destroyed, but Jaräsandha should not be killed. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 9

jaräsandha-nimittena
     bharaà vai bhubhujäà bhuvaù
sarvaà cätra hariñyämi
     kariñyämi priyaà satäm

     jaräsandha-nimittena—by Jarasandha; bharam—burden; vai—indeed; bhubhujäm—of kings; bhuvaù—of the earth; sarvam—all; ca—and; atra—here; hariñyämi—I will remove; kariñyämi—I will do; priyam—pleasure; satäm—of the devotees.

     I will remove the great burden of demonic kings Jaräsandha has placed on this earth. In this way I will please the devotees.

Text 10

evaà vadati kåñëe vai
     vaikuëöhäc ca rathau çubhau
abhütäm ägatau räjan
     sarveñäà paçyatäà ca tau

     evam—thus; vadati—speasking; kåñëe—Kåñëa; vai—indeed; vaikuëöhät—from Vaikuëöha; ca—and; rathau—two chariots; çubhau—beautiful; abhütäm—were; ägatau—come; räjan—O king; sarveñäm—as all; paçyatäm—watched; ca—and; tau—they.

     O king, as Lord Kåñëa spoke these words two beautiful chariots arrived from Vaikuëöhaloka as everyone watched.

Text 11

samäruhya rathau sädyo
     räma-kåñëau mahä-balau
yädavänäà balaiù sükñmais
     tvaraà nirjagmatuù purät

     samäruhya—climbing; rathau—the chariots; sädyaù—at once; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; mahä-balau—powerful; yädavänäm—of the Yädavas; balaiù—with the armies; sükñmaiù—small; tvaram—at once; nirjagmatuù—left; purät—the city.

     Mounting these chariots, and accompanied by a small Yädava army, Kåñëa and Balaräma at once left the city.

Text 12

yädavänäà mägadhänäà
     paçyadbhir divijair divi
babhüva tumulaà yuddhaà
     adbhutaà roma-harñaëam

     yädavänäm—of the Yädavas; mägadhänäm—and the Magadhas; paçyadbhiù—looking; divijaiù—by the demiugods; divi—in heaven; babhüva—was; tumulam—uproar; yuddham—fight; adbhutam—astonishing; roma-harñaëam—making th body's hairs stand erect.

     As the demigods in heaven watched, the Yädavas and Mägadhas fought a tumultuous battle that made the hairs of the body stand erect with wonder.

Text 13

akñauhiëébhir daçabhé
     rathärüòho mahä-balaù
çré-kåñëasya puraù pürvaà
     yuyudhe mägadheçvaraù

     akñauhiëébhiù—with aksauhinis; daçabhé—ten; rathärüòhaù—mounted ona  chariot; mahä-balaù—powerful; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; puraù—in the presence; pürvam—before; yuyudhe—fought; mägadheçvaraù—Jarasandha.

     Riding on a chariot, and accompanied by ten akñauhiëé divisons, Jaräsandha fought with Lord Kåñëa.

Text 14

païcabhiç cäkñauhiëébhir
     dhäåöaräñöraù suyodhanaù
yuyodha yädavaiù särdhaà
     jaräsandha-sahäya-kåt

     païcabhiù—with five; ca—and; akñauhiëébhiù—aksauhinis; dhäåöaräñöraù—Dhrtarastra's son; suyodhanaù—Duryodhana; yuyodha—fought; yädavaiù—the Yädavas; särdham—with; jaräsandha-sahäya-kåt—helping Jarasandha.

     Accompanied by five akñauhiëé divisons, Dhåtaräñöra's son Duryodhana also fought on jaräsandha's side against the Yädavas.

Text 15

païcabhiç ca tathä räjan
     vindhyä-deçädhipo balé
tisrbhiç ca mahä-yuddhe
     baìga-nätho mahä-balaù

     païcabhiù—with five; ca—and; tathä—so; räjan—O king; vindhyä-deçädhipaù—the king of Vindhya-desa; balé—powerful; tisrbhiù—with three; ca—and; mahä-yuddhe—in the great battle; baìga-näthaù—the king of Bengal; mahä-balaù—powerful.

     O king, accompanied by five akñauhiëés, the powerful king of Vindhyä-deça fought on Jaräsandha's side. Accompanied by three akñauhiëés, the powerful king of Bengal also fought on Jaräsandha's side.

Text 16

evam anye 'pi räjäno
     jaräsandha-vaçänugäù
präëaiù sahäyaà kurvantau
     jaräsandhasya maithila

     evam—thus; anye—other; api—also; räjänaù—kings; jaräsandha-vaçänugäù—vassals of Jarasnadha; präëaiù—with their lives; sahäyam—help; kurvantau—doing; jaräsandhasya—of Jarasnadha; maithila—O king of Mithila.

     O king of Mithilä, many other kings, Jaräsandha's vassals, gave their lives to help him in the battle.

Text 17

bäëändhakäre saïjäte
     çatru-senä-samäkule
öäìkaraà çärìga-dhanuñaù
     çärìga-dhanvä cakära ha

     bäëändhakäre—in a darkness of arrows; saïjäte—manifested; çatru-senä-samäkule—the enemy armies; öäìkaram—twanging; çärìga-dhanuñaù—of the Çärìga bow; çärìga-dhanvä—the holder of the Çärìga bow; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     When the enemy armies darkened the sky with a shower of arrows, Lord Kåñëa filled the sky with the twanging sounds of His Çärìga bow.

Text 18

nanäda tena brahmäëòaà
     sapta-lokair bilaiù saha
vicelur dig-gajäs tärä
     ejad-bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam

     nanäda—echoed; tena—by that; brahmäëòam—the universe; sapta-lokaiù—with seven planets; bilaiù—with outer space; saha—with; viceluù—shook; dig—of the directions; gajäù—the elephants; tara—the stars; ejad-bhü-khaëòa-maëòalamthe earth.

     The entire universe, with the seven planetary systems and the vast regions of outer space, echoed with that sound. The earth, the stars, and the elephants that hold up the directions all trembled.

Text 19

tadaiva badhiré-bhütaà
     çatrüëäà sainya-maëòalam
utpatanto häya yuddhäd
     gajäs tu vimukhäs tataù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; badhiré-bhütam—deafened; çatrüëäm—of enemies; sainya-maëòalam—the circle of the armies; utpatantaù—jumping; häya—horses; yuddhät—from the battle; gajäù—elephants; tu—indeed; vimukhäù—turned away; tataù—then.

     Then there was a deafening noise in the circle of the enemy armies, and the horses and elephants fled the battlefield. 

Text 20

dudräva tad-balaà sarvaà
     öäìkaräd bhaya-vihvalam
pratépam etya gavyütiù
     punas taträjagäma ha

     dudräva—fled; tad-balam—that army; sarvam—all; öäìkarät—from the twanging sound; bhaya-vihvalam—terrified; pratépam—in the other direction; etya—going; gavyütiù—two miles; punaù—again; tatra—there; äjagäma—came; ha—indeed.

     When it heard the twanging of Lord Kåñëa's bow, Jaräsandha's army became terrified and ran two miles from the battlefield.

Text 21

evaà çärìgaà samuccärya
     taòit-piìga-sphurat-prabham
bäëaughaç chädayäm äsa
     jaräsandha-balaà hariù

     evam—thus; çärìgam—the Çärìga  bow; samuccärya—lifting; taòit-piìga-sphurat-prabham—glistening like lightning; bäëaughaù—a flood of arrows; chädayäm äsa—made a shadow; jaräsandha-balam—on Jarasandha's army; hariù—Lord Kåñëa.

     Then, lifting His Çärìga bow glistening like lightning, Lord Kåñëa unleased a flood of arrows that made a great shadow over Jaräsandha's army. 

Text 22

cürëé-bhütä rathä räjan
     bäëaughaiù çärìga-dhanvanaù
cürëa-cakrä nipetuù kau
     hata-sütäç ca näyakäù

     cürëé-bhütäù—broken to pieces; rathä—the chariots; räjan—O king; bäëaughaiù—with the flood of arrows; çärìga-dhanvanaù—from the Çärìga bow; cürëa-cakräù—broken to pieces; nipetuù—fell; kau—to the ground; hata—killed; sütäù—charioteers; ca—and; näyakäù—warriors.

     O king, the flood of arrows from the Çärìga bow broke the chariots into pieces. Their wheels broken, the chariots crashed to the ground and the warriors and charioteers on them all died. 

Text 23

dvidha-bhütä gajä bäëais
     calitä gajibhiù saha
säçva-vähäs tathäsväç ca
     bäëaiù saïchinna-kandharäù

     dvidha-bhütä—cut in half; gajä—the elephants; bäëaiù—by arrows; calitä—moving; gajibhiù—with elephant riders; saha—with; säçva—with horses; vähäù—riding; tathä—so; asväù—horses; ca—and; bäëaiù—with arrows; saïchinna—severed; kandharäù—necks.

     The many arrows cut the elephants and their riders into two pieces and severed the heads of the horses and horsemen. 

Text 24

tathä vérä mahä-yuddhe
     bhinnoräç chinna-mastakäù
viçérëa-kavacäù petur
     bäëaughaiç chinna-saàçayäù

     tathä—then; vérä—the warriors; mahä-yuddhe—in that great battle; bhinna—wounded; uräù—chests; chinna-mastakäù—severed heads; viçérëa—broken; kavacäù—armor; petuù—fell; bäëaughaiç—with the flood of arrows; chinna-saàçayäù—their hopes broken.

     Their armor broken, chests wounded, and heads severed by the flood of arrows, the warriors in that great batlle fell, their hopes shattered.

Text 25

adho-mukhä ürdhva-mukhäs
     chinna-dehä nåpätmajäù
rejü raëäìgane räjan
     bhäëòa-vyühä ivähatäù

     adho-mukhäù—faces down; ürdhva-mukhäù—faces up; chinna-dehä—broken bodies; nåpätmajäù—princes; rejü—shone; raëäìgane—in the batllefield; räjan—O king; bhäëòa-vyühä—pots; iva—like; ähatäù—broken.

     O king, their faces up or down and their bodies broken, the princes littered the battlefield like so many broken earthen pots.

Text 26

kñaëa-mätreëa tad-yuddhe
     çata-kroça-vilambitä
äpagäbhün mahä-durgä
     rudhira-srava-sambhaväù

     kñaëa-mätreëa—for a moment; tad-yuddhe—in that battle; çata-kroça-vilambitä—for two hundred miles; äpagä—a river; abhüt—was; mahä-durgä—impassable; rudhira-srava-sambhaväù—created from flowing blood.

     In that battle there was for two-hundred miles a flowing river of blood, . . .

Text 27

dvipa-grähä coñöra-khara-
     kabandhäçvädi-kacchapä
çiçumära-rathä keça-
     çaivalä bhuja-sarpiëé

     dvipa—the elephants; grähä—crocodiles; ca—and; uñöra—camels; khara—mules; kabandha—headless corpses; açva—horses; ädi—beginning with; kacchapä—turtles; çiçumära—porpoises; rathä—chariots; keça—hair; çaivalä—moss; bhuja—arms; sarpiëé—snakes.

 . . . where the elephants were crocodiles, the camels, mules, horses, and headless corpses giant turtles, the chariots porpoises, the severed arms snakes, . . .

Text 28

kara-ménä mauli-ratna-
     hära-kuëòala-çarkarä
çastra-çuktiç chinna-çaìkhä
     cämara-dhvaja-saikatä

     kara—hands; ménä—fish; mauli—crown; ratna—jewels; hära—necklaces; kuëòala—earrings; çarkarä—pebbles; çastra—weapons; çuktiù—oysters; chinna-çaìkhä—severed heads; cämara—camaras; dhvaja—flags; saikatä—on the sandy beach.

 . . . the severed hands fish, the helmets, earrings, and jewel necklaces pebbles, the weapons oysters, the severed heads cämaras and flags on the sandy shore, . . .

Text 29

rathäìgävarta-samyuktä
     senä-dvaya-taöävåtä
çata-yojana-vistérëä
     babhau vaitäraëé yathä

     rathäìga—chariot wheels; ävarta-samyuktä—with whirlpools; senä—armies; dvaya—two; taöa—shores; ävåtä—filled; çata-yojana-vistérëä—eight hundred miles; babhau—shone; vaitäraëé—the vaitarani river in the hellihs worlds; yathä—as.

 . . . and the chariot wheels whirlpools. The two armies its shores, that river flowed for eight hundred miles like the river Vaitaraëé in the hellish worlds.

Text 30

pramathä bhairavä bhütä
     veöalä yoginé-gaëäù
aööa-häsaà prakurvanto
     nåtyanto raëa-maëòale

     pramathä—goblins; bhairavä—bhairavas; bhütä—ghosts; veöalä—vetalas; yoginé-gaëäù—yoginis; aööa—loud; häsam—laughter; prakurvantaù—doing; nåtyantaù—dancing; raëa-maëòale—in the battlefield.

     Laughing uproariously, many goblins, ghosts, bhairavas, veöaläs and yoginés danced in the battlefield.

Text 31

pibanto rudhiraà çaçvat
     kapälena nåpeçvara
harasya muëòa-mälärthaà
     jagåhus te siräàsi ca

     pibantaù—drinking; rudhiram—blood; çaçvat—again and again; kapälena—with a skull; nåpeçvara—O king of kings; harasya—of Lord Çiva; muëòa-mälärtham—for the garland of skulls; jagåhuù—took; te—they; siräàsi—heads; ca—and.

     O king of kings, again and again they drank the blood of the dead. They gathered many skulls for Lord Çiva's garland of skulls.

Text 32

siàhärüòhä bhadrakälé
     òäkiné-çata-samvåtä
pibanté rudhiraà coñëaà
     säööa-häsaà cakära ha

     siàha—on a lion; ärüòhä—riding; bhadrakälé—Bhadrakälé; òäkiné—with witches; çata—a hundred; samvåtä—accompanied; pibanté—drinking; rudhiram—blood; ca—and; uñëam—warm; säööa-häsam—with loud laughter; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     Riding on a lion, and accompanied a hundred female goblins, goddess Bhadrakälé drank the warm blood of the dead and laughed uproariously.

Text 33

vidyädharyaç ca svarga-sthä
     gandharvyo 'psarasas tathä
kñatra-dharma-sthitän vérän
     vavrire deva-rüpiëaù

     vidyädharyaù—Vidyadharis; ca—and; svarga-sthä—in Svargaloka; gandharvyaù—Gandharvis; apsarasaù—Apsaras; tathä—so; kñatra-dharma-sthitän—folloing ksatriya-dharma; vérän—warriors; vavrire—chose; deva-rüpiëaù—the forms of demigods.

     The warriors that died nobly upholding the principles of kñatriya-dharma became demigods and the Vidyädharé, Gandharvés, and Apsarä demigoddesses of Svargaloka selected them to be their husbands.

Text 34

gåhitvä tän kalir abhüt
     täsäà paty-artham ambare
mamänurüpä tenaiva
     iti tad-gata-cetasäm

     gåhitvä—taking; tän—them; kaliù—a quarrel; abhüt—was; täsäm—of them; paty-artham—for the sake of the husband; ambare—in the sky; mama—me; anurüpä—like; tena—by that; eva—indeed; iti—thus; tad-gata-cetasam—their hearts gone to them.

     Many demigoddess desiring him as her husband, they quarreled over each hero. They each thought, "He is perfect for me."

Text 35

kecid vérä dharma-parä
     raëa-raìgän na calitäù
yayur viñëu-padaà divyaà
     bhittvä märtaëòa-maëòalam

     kecit—some; vérä—warriors; dharma-parä—devoted to duty; raëa-raìgän—from the battlefield; na—not; calitäù—fled; yayuù—went; viñëu—of Lord Viñëu; padam—to the abode; divyam—transcendental; bhittvä—breaking; märtaëòa-maëòalam—the circle of the sun.

     Some heroes, staunchly devoted to duty and not fleeing the battlefield, passed through the circle of the sun and went to the transcendental abode of Lord Viñëu.

Text 36

çeñaà balaà samäkåñya
     baladevo halena vai
muçalenähanat kruddhas
     trailokya-bala-dhärakaù

     çeñam—the remainder; balam—army; samäkåñya—dragging; baladevaù—Lord Balaräma; halena—by firce; vai—indeed; muçalena—with His club; ahanat—killed; kruddhaù—angry; trailokya-bala-dhärakaù—having the strength of the three worlds.

     Possessing all the strength in the three worlds, angry Lord Balaräma killed all the remaining soldiers with His club.

Texts 37-39

evaà sainye kñayaà yäte
     jaräsandhasya sarvataù
suyodhano vindhyä-nätho
     baìga-näthas tathaiva ca

sarve vidudruvur yuddhäd
     bhaya-bhétä itas tataù
jaräsandho mahä-véryo
     nägäyuta-samo bale

rathenägatavän räjan
     baladevasya sammukhe
samäkåñya halägreëa
     jaräsandha-rathaà çubham

     evam—this; sainye—in the army; kñayam—destruction; yäte—attained; jaräsandhasya—of Jarasandha; sarvataù—in all respects; suyodhanaù—Duryodhana; vindhyä-näthaù—the king of Vindhyä-deça; baìga-näthaù—the king of Bengal; tathä—so; eva—indeed; ca—and; sarve—all; vidudruvuù—fled; yuddhät—from the battle; bhaya-bhétä—frightened; itaù—here; tataù—and there; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; mahä-véryaù—very strong; nägäyuta-samaù—equal to ten thousand elephants; bale—in strength; rathena—by chation; ägatavän—come; räjan—O king; baladevasya—of Lord Balaräma; sammukhe—in the presence; samäkåñya—dragging; halägreëa—by the tip of His plow; jaräsandha-ratham—Jarasandha's chariot; çubham—beautiful.

     When Jaräsandha's army was completely destroyed, the king of Vindhyä-deça, the king of Bengal, and Duryodhana became terrified and fled here and there. Then Jaräsandha, who was as strong as ten thousand elephants, drove his chariot to meet Lord Balaräma. With the tip of His plow Lord Balaräma caught the beautiful chariot and dragged it here and there.

Text 40

cürëayäm äsa sahasä
     musalena yadüttamaù
jaräsandho 'pi viratho
     hatäçvo hata-särathiù

     cürëayäm äsa—broke to pieces; sahasä—at once; musalena—ith His club; yadüttamaù—the best of the Yädavas; jaräsandhaù—Jaräsandha; api—also; virathaù—without a chariot; hata—dead; açvaù—horses; hata—dead; särathiù—charioteer.

     Then Lord Balaräma, the best of the Yädavas, broke the chariot to pieces. Now Jaräsandha had no chariot and his horses and charioteer had been killed.

Text 41

jagräha balinaà dorbhyäà
     santyaktvä çastra-saàhitam
tayor yuddham abhüd ghoraà
     bähübhyäà raëa-maëòale

     jagräha—grabbed; balinam—strong; dorbhyäm—with both arms; santyaktvä—abandoning; çastra-saàhitam—weapons; tayoù—of them; yuddham—fight; abhüt—was; ghoram—horrible; bähübhyäm—with both arms; raëa-maëòale—in the battlefield.

     Then Lord Balaräma threw away His weapons and with both hands grabbed powerful Jaräsandha. Hand-to-hand they fought a terrible duel in the battlefield.

Texts 42 and 43

paçyatäà divi devänäà
     naräëäà bhuvi maithila
urasä çirasä caiva
     bähübhyäà pädayoù påthak

yuyudhäte malla-yuddhe
     siàhäv iva mahä-bale
tayoç ca yuddhyatoù sarvaà
     kñuëëaà bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam

     paçyatäm—looking; divi—in heaven; devänäm—of the demigods; naräëäm—of the humans; bhuvi—on the earth; maithila—O king of Mithila; urasä—with the chest; çirasä—with the head; ca—and; eva—indeed; bähübhyäm—with arms; pädayoù—with feet; påthak—specific; yuyudhäte—fought; malla-yuddhe—in wrestling; siàhäv—two lions; iva—like; mahä-bale—in great strength; tayoç—of them; ca—and; yuddhyatoù—fighting; sarvam—all; kñuëëam—pounded; bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam—the circle of the earth.

     O king of Mithilä, as the demigods in heaven and the humans on earth watched, Lord Balaräma and Jaräsandha wrestled arm-to-arm, foot-to-foot, chest-to-chest, and head-to-head, like two very powerful lions. As they fought the circle of the earth became crushed and broken.

Texts 44-47

sthaléva sahasä räjaàs
     cakampe ghaöikä-dvayam
gåhétvä bhuja-daëòäbhyäà
     jaräsandhaà yadüttamaù

bhü-påñöhe pothayäm äsa
     kamäëòalum ivärbhakaù
rämas tad-upari sthitvä
     hantuà çatruà jarä-sutam

jagräha musalaà ghoraà
     krodha-pürita-vigrahaù
paripürëatamenätha
     çré-kåñëena mahätmanä

niväritas tadaiväçu
     taà mumoca yadüttamaù
tapase kåta-saìkalpo
     vréòito 'pi jarä-sutaù

     sthalé—the place; iva—like; sahasä—at once; räjan—O king; cakampe—trembled; ghaöikä-dvayam—for an hour; gåhétvä—grabbing; bhuja-daëòäbhyäm—with both arms; jaräsandham—Jaräsandha; yadüttamaù—the best of the Yädavas; bhü-påñöhe—on the ground; pothayäm äsa—threw; kamäëòalum—a kamandalu; iva—like; arbhakaù—a child; rämaù—Lord Balaräma; tat—him; upari—on; sthitvä—staying; hantum—to kill; çatrum—the enemy; jarä-sutam—Jaräsandha; jagräha—grabbed; musalam—a club; ghoram—terrible; krodha-pürita-vigrahaù—His body filled with anger; paripürëatamena—by the Supreme Personality of Godhead; atha—then; çré-kåñëena—by Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanä—the Supreme Lord; niväritaù—stopped; tadä—then; eva—indeed; äçu——at once; tam—him; mumoca—released; yadüttamaù—the best of the Yädavas; tapase—for suffering; kåta-saìkalpaù—decided; vréòitaù—embarrassed; api—also; jarä-sutaù—Jaräsandha.

     O king, for an hour the earth shook. Then Lord Balaräma, the best of the Yädavas, His transcendental body filled with anger, grabbed Jaräsandha with both hands, threw him to the ground as a child throws a kamaëòalu, jumped on him, grabbed a terrible club, and was about to kill him, when Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, stopped Him. Lord Balaräma at once released him. Now Jaräsandha was humiliated and his heart was filled with pain. 

Texts 48-51

nivärito mantri-mukhyair
     mägadhän mägadho yayau
itthaà jitvä jaräsandhaà
     mädhavo madhusüdanaù

äyodhana-gataà vittaà
     sarvaà nétvä sukhävaham
yädavän agrataù kåtvä
     baladeva-samanvitaù

upagéyamäna-vijayaù
     suta-mägadha-vandibhiù
çaìkha-dundubhi-nädena
     brahma-ghoñeëa bhüyasä

viveça mathuräà säkñät
     paripürëatamaù svayam

     niväritaù—stopped; mantri-mukhyaiù—by the important counselors; mägadhän—to magadha-desa; mägadhaù—Jaräsandha; yayau—went; ittham—thus; jitvä—defeating; jaräsandham—Jaräsandha; mädhavaù—the husband of the goddess of fortune; madhusüdanaù—the killer of Madhu; äyodhana-gatam—attained by fighting; vittam—wealth; sarvam—all; nétvä—taking; sukhävaham—pleasing; yädavän—to the Yädavas; agrataù—in the presence; kåtvä—making; baladeva-samanvitaù—with Lord Balaräma; upagéyamäna-vijayaù—His glories being sung; suta-mägadha-vandibhiù—by the Sutas, Magadhas, and Vandis; çaìkha-dundubhi-nädena—with the sound of conchshells and drums; brahma-ghoñeëa—with the sound of the Vedas; bhüyasä—abundant; viveça—entered; mathuräm—Mathurä; säkñät—directly; paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; svaya—Himself.

     Advised by his counselors, Jaräsandha returned to Magadha-deça. In this way Lord Kåñëa, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, the husband of the goddess of fortune and the killer of the Madhu demon, defeated Jaräsandha, took all the wealth plundered in the fight, placed it before the Yädavas, and, His glories proclaimed by the Sütas, Mägadhas, and Vandés, and by the chanting of the Vedas and the sounds of the conchshells and drums, in Lord Balaräma's company entered Mathurä City.

Texts 52 and 53

samarcito maìgala-läja-puñpaiù
     paçyan puréà maìgala-kumbha-yuktäm
pétämbaraù syäma-tanuù çubhäìgaù
     sphurat-kiréöäìgada-kuëòala-prabhaù

çärìgädi-çasträstra-dharo hasan-mukhas
     täläìka-yukto garuòa-dhvajaù svayam
udyad-viloläçva-rathaù surärcitaù
     sametya räjänam asau balià dadau

     samarcitä—worshiped; maìgala-läja-puñpaiù—with auspicious flowers and grains; paçyan—seeing; purém—the city; maìgala-kumbha—auspicious pots; yuktäm—with; pétämbaraù—in yellow garments; syäma-tanuù—His body dark; çubhäìgaù—His limbs handsome; sphurat—glistening; kiréöa—crown; aìgada—armlets; kuëòala—earrings; prabhaù—splendor; çärìgädi—beginning eith the Çärìga bow; çastra-astra-dharaù—holding many weapons; hasan-mukhaù—smiling; täläìka-yuktaù—with the mark of  palm tree; garuòa-dhvajaù—with the flag of Garuòa; svayam—personally; udyad-viloläçva-rathaù—on a chariot pulled by restless horses; sura—by the demigods; arcitaù—worshiped; sametya—going; räjänäm—to the king; asau—He; balim—offering; dadau—gave.

     Worshiped by showers of grains and flowers and gazing at the city filled with beautiful spires, His garments yellow, His complexion dark, His limbs handsome and graceful, His crown, armlets, and earrings glittering with great splendor, and His face smiling, carrying the Çärìga bow and many other weapons, caarrying the palm-tree insignia and the Garuòa flag, riding on a chariot pulled by restless horses, and worshiped by the demigods, Lord Kåñëa approached King Ugrasena and gave a vassal's offering to him.
.pa

Chapter Two
Çré Dvärakä-väsa-kathana
Residence in Çré Dvärakä

Text 1

punas tatra jaräsandhas
     täv utyäkñauhiëé-balaù
yuyudhe yadubhiù çéghraà
     punaù kåñëa-paräjitaù

     punaù—again; tatra—there; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; täv—Them; utya—approaching; akñauhiëé-balaù—with an army of many aksauhinis; yuyudhe—fought; yadubhiù—with the Yädavas; çéghram—quickly; punaù—again; kåñëa—by Lord Kåñëa; paräjitaù—defeated.

     Again Jaräsandha approached Kåñëa and Balaräma with an army of many akñauhiëés, again he fought with the Yädavas, and again Lord Kåñëa quickly defeated him.

Text 2

çré-kåñëa-tejasä sarve
     yädavä våddhim ägatäù
dhanur-gajädibhiù çaçvat
     präpta-luëöhana-sähasaù

     çré-kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; tejasäby the power; sarve—all; yädavä—the Yädavas; våddhim—increase; ägatäù—attained; dhanuù—of bows; gaja—and elephants; ädibhiù—beginning with; çaçvat—always; präpta—attained; luëöhana-sähasaù—plunder.

     The Yädavas again and again plundered great wealth and many bows, elephants, and other things from the armies defeated by Lord Kåñëa transcendental power.

Text 3

präpte ca sahasä räjan
     vinä yuddhaà puraiva hi
arbhakä jala-häriëyas
     cakruù çatrv-apahäraëam

     präpte—attained; ca—and; sahasä—at once; räjan—O king; vinä—without; yuddham—a fight; purä—before; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; arbhakä—children; jala-häriëyaù—carrying water; cakruù—did; çatru—from the enemies; apahäraëam—plunder.

     O king, without having to fight, the little girls carrying water to the Yädava soldiers could easily take what they wanted from the slain soldiers of the enemy.

Text 4

çatru-dravyaà ca saàhartuà
     vékñantaù kréta-väsasaù
nägarä mäthuräù sarve
     paraà harñam upägatäù

     çatru—of the enemy; dravyam—the property; ca—and; saàhartum—to take; vékñantaù—seeing; kréta—bought; väsasaù—garments; nägarä—people; mäthuräù—of Mathurä; sarve—all; param—great; harñam—happiness; upägatäù—attained.

     Seeing the valuable garments and property of the enemy soldiers, the people of Mathurä became very happy.

Text 5

evaà sapta-daça kåtvä
     kñéëa-sainyo jarä-sutaù
añöa-daçama-saìgräme
     ägantuà ca mano 'karot

     evam—thus; sapta-daça—17; kåtvä—making; kñéëa-sainyaù—destroyed army; jarä-sutaù—Jarasandha; añöa-daçama-saìgräme—in the eighteenth battle; ägantum—to go; ca—and; manaù—mind; akarot—did.

     Even though his army had been destroyed seventeen times in this way, Jaräsandha still fixed his mind on an eighteenth war.

Text 6

mayä praëoditaù käla-
     yavano vai mahä-balaù
rurodha mathuräà kruddho
     mleccha-koöi-samävåtaù

     mayä—by me; praëoditaù—sent; kälayavanaù—Kalayavana; vai—indeed; mahä-balaù—very powerful; rurodha—besieged; mathuräm—Mathurä; kruddhaù—qngry; mleccha-koöi-samävåtaù—with ten million mlecchas.

     Then, encouraged by me, powerful King Kälayavana beseiged Mathurä with an army of ten million mlecchas.

Text 7

mlecchänäà ca balaà vékñya
     sva-puraà bhaya-vihvalam
bhayaà cobhayataù präptaà
     rämeëäcintayad dhariù

     mlecchänäm—of mlecchas; ca—and; balam—the amry; vékñya—seeing; sva-puram—at His city; bhaya-vihvalam—ovcercome with fear; bhayam—fear; ca—and; ubhayataù—of both; präptam—attained; rämeëa—with Balaräma; acintayat—thought; dhariù—Lord Kåñëa.

     Seeing that their city was terrified of the mleccha army, Kåñëa and Balaräma considered what to do. 

Text 8

sva-jïäti-bandhu-rakñärthaà
     samudre bhéma-nädini
cakära dvärakä-durgaà
     eka-ratreëa mädhavaù

     sva-jïäti-bandhu-rakñärtham—to protecte His friends and relatives; samudre—in the ocean; bhéma-nädini—with terrible roaring sounds; cakära—did; dvärakä-durgam—the fort of Dvärakä; eka-ratreëa—in one night; mädhavaù—Lord Kåñëa.

     Then, in one night Lord Kåñëa built the Dvärakä fort in the middle of the ocean filled with fearful roaring sounds.

Text 9

yaträñöa-dik-päla-siddhir
     viçvakarma-vinirmitä
sarvä vaikuëöha-sampattir
     dåçyate mokña-kaìkñibhiù

     yatra—where; añöa—8; dik—directions; päla—protecting; siddhiù—perfection; viçvakarma-vinirmitä—built by Viçvakarmä; sarva—all; vaikuëöha-sampattiù—the opulences of Vaikuëöha; dåçyate—is seen; mokña-kaìkñibhiù—by they who yearn fro liberation.

     Viçvakarmä arranged that all eight directions were perfectly protected. They who yearn for liberatuion could see that city had all the opulences of Vaikuëöha.

Text 10

hariù sarva-janaà tatra
     nétvä yogena maithila
puräd rämam anujïäpya
     nirgato 'bhün niräyudhaù

     hariù—Kåñëa; sarva-janam—everyone; tatra—there; nétvä—taking; yogena—by His mystic power; maithila—O king of Mithila; purät—from Mathurä; rämam—Balaräma; anujïäpya—taking permission; nirgataù—departed; abhüt—became; niräyudhaù—without weapons.

     By His mystic power Lord Kåñëa then took all the people of Mathurä to Dvärakä. O king of Mithilä, after taking His leave of Lord Balaräma, Lord Kåñëa, now unarmed, went outside the Mathurä City walls. 

Text 11

niräyudhaà harià jïätvä
     mayoktair lakñaëaiù khalaù
nirayudhaù sa taà yoddhuà
     padätiù svayam ägataù

     niräyudham—unarmed; harim—Kåñëa; jïätvä—understanding; mayä—by me; uktaiù—described; lakñaëaiù—by the characteristics; khalaù—the demon; nirayudhaù—unarmed; sa—he; tam—to Him; yoddhum—to fight; padätiù—on foot; svayam—personally; ägataù—approached.

     Aware, by the description I had given him, that this unarmed person was Kåñëa, the demon put down his arms and walked to Kåñëa to start a fight.

Text 12

paräì-mukhaà pradravantaà
     duräpaà yoginäm api
jighåkñus taà cänvadhävat
     sainikänäà prapaçyatäm

     paräì-mukham—turning His face; pradravantam—fleeing; duräpam—not approachable; yoginäm—by the yogis; api—even; jighåkñuù—wishing to catch; tam—Him; ca—and; anvadhävat—ran behind; sainikänäm—as the soldiers; prapaçyatäm—watched.

     Then Kåñëa turned and fled. As the host of soldiers watched, Kälayavana ran in pursuit of Lord Kåñëa, whom even the great yogés cannot catch.

Text 13

hasta-präptaà vapus tasmai
     darçayann iva mädhavaù
düraà gataù çyämalädreù
     präviçat kandaraà tvaram

     hasta—in the hand; präptam—attained; vapuù—the form; tasmai—to him; darçayann—showing; iva—as if; mädhavaù—Lord Kåñëa; düram—far away; gataù—went; çyämalädreù—a black mountain; präviçat—entered; kandaram—a cave; tvaram—quickly.

     Seeming only a hand's legnth away, Lord Kåñëa ran a great distance and finally entered the cave of a black mountain.

Text 14

mucukundo yatra cäste
     mandhätå-tanayo mahän
asurebhyaù purä rakñäà
     devänäà yaç cakära ha

     mucukundaù—Mucukunda; yatra—where; ca—and; äste—is; mandhätå-tanayaù—the son of King Mandhata; mahän—great; asurebhyaù—from the demons; purä—previously; rakñäm—protection; devänäm—of the demigods; yaç—who; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     In that cave stayed King Mandhätä noble son Mucukunda, who in ancient times protected the demigods from the demons.

Text 15

ahar-niçaà na suñväpa
     deva-senä-paro nåpa
tam ücur devatäù sarve
     prasannä räja-sattamam

     ahaù—day; niçam—and night; na—not; suñväpa—slept; deva-senä-paraù—the commander-in-chief of the demigods' armies; nåpa—O king; tam—to him; ücuù—said; devatäù—the demigods; sarve—all; prasannä—pleased; räja-sattamam—the best of kings.

     O king, as the commander-in-chief of the demigods' armies, he had not slept for many days and nights. Pleased with him, all the demigods finally approached that great king and said:

Text 16

varaà varäya bho räjan
     yat te manasi vartate
natvä tän präha räjendraù
     karomi çayanaà param

     varam—a boon; varäya—please choose; bhaù—O; räjan—king; yat—what; te—of you; manasi—in the heart; vartate—is; natvä—bowing down; tän—to them; präha—said; räjendraù—that king of kings; karomi—I do; çayanam—sleep; param—great.

     "O king, please ask for a boon. Ask for whatever is in your heart." Bowing down to them, that king of kings said: "I wish to sleep a great sleep.

Texts 17 and 18

çayanänte hareù säkñäd-
     darçanaà me bhavatv alam
yo madhye bodhayen mäà vai
     çayanaà tv apy acetanam

sa mayä dåñöa-matras tu
     bhäsmé-bhavatu tat-kñaëät
tathä ca coktaù suñväpa
     räjä kåta-yuge purä

     çayanänte—at the end of the sleep; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; säkñäd-—direwct; darçanam—the sight; me—of me; bhavatv—masy be; alam—greatly; yaù—one who; madhye—in the middle; bodhayet—awakens; mäm—me; vai—indeed; çayanam—sleeping; tv—indeed; apy—indeed; acetanam—unconscious; sa—he; mayä—by me; dåñöa-matraù—simply by a glance; tu—indeed; bhäsmé-bhavatu—may be burned to ashes; tat-kñaëät—from that moment; tathä—so; ca—and; ca—and; uktaù—said; suñväpa—slept; räja—the king; kåta—in Satya-yuga; yuge—in the yuga; purä—in ancient times.

     "When my sleep is over I will see Lord Kåñëa directly. Anyone who wakens me before that, while I am still sleeping, I will burn to ashes with a glance." After speaking these words in ancient times, in the Satya-yuga, King Mucukunda went to sleep.

Text 19

tatra praviñöo yavano
     matvä pétämbaraà ca tam
tatäòa yavanaù kruddhaù
     padenäçu mahä-khalaù

     tatra—there; praviñöaù—entered; yavanaù—kalayavana; matvä—thinking; pétämbaram—Lord Kåñëa; ca—and; tam—him; tatäòa—hit; yavanaù—the yavana; kruddhaù—angry; padena—with his foot; äçu—at once; mahä-khalaù—the great demon.

     Entering that cave, the great demon Kälayavana at once kicked King Mucukunda, thinking him to be Lord Kåñëa, 

Text 20

mucukundaù samutthäya
     çanair unmilya so 'kñiné
äçäù prapaçyaàs taà pärçve
     sthitaà kälaà dadarça ha

     mucukundaù—Mucukunda; samutthäya—waking up; çanaiù—slowly; unmilya—opening; saù—he; akñiné—eyes; äçäù—in all directions; prapaçyan—looking; tam—him; pärçve—at the side; sthitam—standing; kälam—Kalayavana; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed.

     Slowly opening his eyes, Mucukunda became awake. Looking in all directions, he finally saw Kälayavana standing at his side.

Text 21

sa tävat tasya ruñöasya
     dåñöi-pätena maithila
dehajenägninä dagdho
     bhäsmasäd abhavat kñaëät

     sa—he; tävat—then; tasya—of him; ruñöasya—angry; dåñöi-pätena—by a glance; maithila—O king of Mithila; dehajena—born from his own body; agninä—by a fire; dagdhaù—burned; bhäsmasät—to ashes; abhavat—became; kñaëät—in a moment.

     O king of Mithilä, then King Mucukunda became angry and with a single glance burned to demon to ashes in a moment.

Text 22

bhäsmé-bhüte ca yavane
     paripürëatamaù svayam
svarüpaà darçayäm äsa
     mucukundäya dhémate

     bhäsmé-bhüte—burned to ashes; ca—and; yavane—when Kalayavana; paripürëatamaù—the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; svayam—personally; svarüpam—His own form; darçayäm äsa—showed; mucukundäya—to Mucukunda; dhémate—wise.

     When Kälayavana was thus burned to ashes, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa, showed His own form to wise Mucukunda, a form that . . .

Text 23

koöi-sürya-pratékäçe
     jyotiñäà maëòale prabhum
sthitaà sphuöat-kiréöärkaà
     kuëòaläìgada-nüpuram

     koöi-sürya-pratékäçe—splendid as ten million suns; jyotiñäm—of light; maëòale—in a circle; prabhum—the Lord; sthitam—standing; sphuöat-kiréöa—a splendid crown; arkam—a sun; kuëòala—with earrings; aìgada—armlets; nüpuram—and anklets.

 . . . was splendid as ten million suns, circled with light, all-powerful, decorated with a crown splendid as the sun, decorated with earrings, armlets, and anklets, . . . 

Text 24

çrévatsäìkaà catur-bähuà
     padmäkñaà vana-mälinam
koöi-kandarpa-lavaëaà
     käla-megha-sama-prabham

     çrévatsäìkam—marked with Çrévatsa; catur-bähum—with four arms; padmäkñam—lotus eyes; vana-mälinam—a forest garland; koöi—ten million; kandarpa—Kamadevas; lavaëam—handsome; käla-megha-sama-prabham—splendid as a black cloud.

 . . . had lotus eyes and four arms, was marked with Çrévatsa and decorated with a forest garland, was splendid like a black cloud, and was more handsome than ten million Kämadevas.

Text 25

dåñövä räjä harñito 'pi
     samutthäya kåtäïjaliù
paripürëatamaà jïätvä
     bhaktyä taà praëanäma ha

     dåñövä—seeing; räjä—the king; harñitaù—filled with happiness; api—also; samutthäya—rising; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; paripürëatamam—the original Supreme Personality of Godhead; jïätvä—understanding; bhaktyä—with devotion; tam—to Him; praëanäma—bowed down; ha—certainly.

     Gazing at this form and aware that this was the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, King Mucukunda became filled with happiness. First he stood with folded hands and then He bowed before the Lord with great devotion.

Text 26

çré-mucukunda uväca 

kåñëäya vasudeväya
     devaké-nandanäya ca
nanda-gopa-kumaräya
     govindäya namo namaù

     çré-mucukunda uväca—Çré Mucukunda said; kåñëäya—the Supreme Lord; vasudeväya—unto the son of Vasudeva; devaké-nandanäya—unto the son of Devaké; ca—and; nanda-gopa—Nanda and the cowherd men; kumaräya—unto their son; govindäya—unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who enlivens the cows and the senses; namaù—respectful obeisances; namaù—obeisances.

     Çré Mucukunda said: Let me offer my respectful obeisances unto the Lord, who has become the son of Vasudeva, the pleasure of Devaké, the boy of Nanda and the other cowherd men of Våndävana, and the enlivener of the cows and the senses.*

Text 27

namaù paìkaja-näbhäya
     namaù paìkaja-mäline
namaù paìkaja-neträya
     namas te paìkajäìghraye

     namaù—all respectful obeisances; paìkaja-näbhäya—unto the Lord who has a specific depression resembling a lotus flower in the center ofHis abdomen; namaù—obeisances; paìkaja-mäline—one who is always decorated with a garland of lotus flowers; namaù—obeisances; paìkaja-neträya—one whose galnce is as cooling as a lotus flower; namaù te—respectful obeisances unto You; paìkajäìghraye—unto You, the soles of whose feet are engraved with lotus flowers (and who are therefore said to possess lotus feet).

     My respectful obeisances are unto you, O Lord, whose abdomen is marked with a dpression like a lotus flower, who are always decorated with garlands of lotus flowers, whose glance is as cool as the lotus, and whose feet are engraved with lotuses.* 

Text 28

namaù kåñëäya suddhäya
     brahmaëe paramätmane
praëata-kleça-näçäya
     govindäya namo namaù

     namaù—obeisances; kåñëäya—to Kåñëa; suddhäya—pure; brahmaëe—the Supreme; paramätmane—the Supersoul; praëata—of the surrendered souls; kleça—the sufferings; näçäya—the destruction; govindäya—to the pleasure of the cows and senses; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances.

     My respectful obeisances are unto supremely pure Lord Kåñëa, who is both the impersonal Brahman and the all-pervading Supersoul, who is the enlivener of the cows and the senses, and who destroys the sufferings of the surrendered devotees.

Text 29

namo 'stv anantäya sahasra-mürtaye
     sahasra-pädäkñi-çiroru-bähave
sahasra-nämne puruñäya çäçvate
     sahasra-koöé-yuga-dhäriëe namaù

     namaù—obeisances; astu—may be; anantäya—limitless; sahasra-mürtaye—a thousand forms; sahasra—a thousand; päda—feet; akñi—eyes; çira—heads; uru—thighs; bähave—and arms; sahasra-nämne—a thousand names; puruñäya—the Supreme Person; çäçvate—eternal; sahasra—thousand; koöi—ten million; yuga—yugas; dhäriëe—holding; namaù—obeisances.

     My respectful obeisances are unto limitless Lord Kåñëa, who appears in millions of forms, who has millions of feet, eyes, heads, thighs, and arms, who has millions of names, who is the eternal Supreme Person, and who maintains the worlds for billions of yugas. 

Text 30

hare mat-samaù patäké nästi bhümau
     tathä tvat-samo nästi päpäpahäré
iti tvaà ca matvä jagannätha deva
     yathecchä bhavet te tathä mäà kuru tvam

     hare—O Lord Kåñëa; mat-samaù—equal to me; patäké—a sinner; na—not; asti—is; bhümau—on the earth; tathä—so; tvat-samaù—equal to You; na—not; asti—is; päpa—sins; apahäré—removing; iti—thus; tvam—to You; ca—and; matvä—bowing; jagannätha—O master of the worlds; deva—O Lord; yathä—as; icchä—desire; bhavet—may be; te—of You; tathä—so; mäm—to Me; kuru—do; tvam—You.

     O Lord Kåñëa, in this world no one is as sinful as I and no one is as purifying as You. Therefore, O master of the worlds, O effulgent Lord, please consider my case and do what You wish.

Text 31

çré-närada uväca 

evaà stuto hariù säkñät
     paramänanda-vigrahaù
jïätvä taà nirguëäà bhaktaà
     präha gambhirayä girä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; stutaù—praised; hariù—Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; paramänanda—transcendental bliss; vigrahaù—form; jïätvä—understanding; tam—him; nirguëam—beyond ther modes of narture; bhaktam—a devotee; präha—spoke; gambhirayä—deep; girä—with a voice.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing these prayers, and aware that Mucukunda's devotion was beyond the touch of the mades of nature, Lord Kåñëa, whose form is filled with transcendental bliss, spoke with a deep voice.

Text 32

çré-bhagavän uväca 

dhanyas tvaà räja-çardüla
     dhanyä te vimalä matiù
nairapekñyena divyena
     bhakti-bhävena püritä

     çré-bhagavän uväca—thre Supreme Personality of Godhead said; dhanyaù—fortunate; tvam—you; räja-çardüla—O tiger of kings; dhanyä—fortunate; te—of you; vimalä—the pure; matiù—thoughts; nairapekñyena—with perfect renunciation; divyena—with transcendental; bhakti-bhävena—love; püritä—filled.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O tiger of kings, you are fortunate. Your pure thoughts are glorious. They are filled with perfect renunciation and splendid transcendental love.

Text 33

adyaiva gaccha mad-dhäma
     badary-äkhyaà mad-äçrayaù
tatraiva tu tapas taptvä
     bhütvä brähmaëa-puìgavaù

     adya—now; eva—indeed; gaccha—go; mad-dhäma—to My abode; badary-äkhyam—named Badari; mad-äçrayaù—My shelter; tatra—there; eva—indeed; tu—indeed; {}; tapaù—austerities; taptvä—perform; bhütvä—having done; brähmaëa-puìgavaù—the best of brähmaëas.

     Go at once to My abode named Badarikäçrama. By performing austerities there you will become the best of brähmaëas.

Text 34

prema-lakñaëayä bhaktyä
     mad-dhäma prakåteù param
präpsyasi tvaà mahä-räja
     yato nävartate gataù

     prema-lakñaëayä—characterized by love; bhaktyä—by devotional service; mad-dhäma—to My abode; prakåteù—the world of matter; param—above; präpsyasi—you will attain; tvam—you; mahä-räja—O great king; yataù—from which; na—not; ävartate—returns; gataù—having gone.

     O great king, by serving Me with loving devotion You will attain My own abode, which is above the world of matter. They who go there never return to the world of birth and death.

Text 35

çré-närada uväca 

itthaà stutvä harià natvä
     parikramya natänanaù
niçcakräma guhä-durgäc
     chré-kåñëa-prema-vihvalaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; stutvä—praying; harim—to Lord Kåñëa; natvä—bowing down; parikramya—cicumambulating; natänanaù—with bowed head; niçcakräma—left; guhä-durgät—the mountain cave; çré-kåñëa-prema-vihvalaù—filled with love for Lord Kåñëa.

     Çré Närada said: After offering prayers, bowing down, and with bowed head circumambulating the Lord, King Mucukunda, now overwhelmed with love for Lord Kåñëa, left the mountain cave.

Text 36

dväpare kñullakä martyä
     täla-vrkña-çatocchritam
dåñövä taà dudruvur märge
     bhaya-bhétä itas tataù

     dväpare—in Dvapara-yuga; kñullakä—short; martyä—living beings; täla-vrkña-çatocchritam—as tall as a hundered palm trees; dåñövä—seeing; tam—him; dudruvuù—fled; märge—on the road; bhaya-bhétä—terrified; itaù—here; tataù—and there.

     The Dväpara-yuga people, who were all very short, became terrified and fled when on the road they saw King Mucukunda, who was tall as a hundred palm trees.

Texts 37 and 38

mä bhaiñöety abhayaà yacchan
     jagäma diçam uttaram
evaà dattvä varaà tasmai
     mucukundäya dhémate

bhagavän punar ävrajya
     mathuräà mleccha-veñöitäm
hatvä mleccha-balaà sarvaà
     tad-dhanäny acchinad balät

     mä—don't; bhaiñöa—be afraid; iti—thus; abhayam—fearlessness; yacchan—giving; jagäma—went; diçam—to the direction; uttaram—north; evam—thus; dattvä—giving; varam—a benediction; tasmai—to him; mucukundäya—Mucukunda; dhémate—wise; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; punaù—again; ävrajya—returning; mathuräm—to Mathurä; mleccha-veñöitäm—surrounded by mlecchas; hatvä—killing; mleccha-balam—the mleccha army; sarvam—entire; tad-dhanäny—their wealth; acchinat—broke; balät—forcibly.

     Saying, "Don't be afraid", Mucukunda removed their fears and continued north. Then Lord Kåñëa, after giving His blessings to wise Mucukunda, returned to Mathurä City, which was surrounded by the mlecchas. The Lord killed the entire mleccha army and forcibly broke the mlecchas' power.

Text 39

atha räjä jaräsandho
     yoddhum abhyuditaù punaù
ähüya mägadhän viprän
     muhürtädeça-käriëaù

     atha—then; räjä—King; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; yoddhum—to fight; abhyuditaù—eager; punaù—again; ähüya—calling; mägadhän—of Magadha; viprän—the brähmaëas; muhürtädeça-käriëaù—giving instruction fro the proper time.

     Then King Jaräsandha, eager to fight again with Lord Kåñëa, called together the great astrologer-brähmaëas of the Mägadha country.

Text 40

prähedaà väsudeväkhyaà
     jitvä yady ägato hy aham
sarvän sampüjayiñyämi
     sadä yuñmat-padäçraye

     präha—said; idam—this; väsudeväkhyam—named Väsudeva; jitvä—defeating; yady—if; ägataù—returned; hy—indeed; aham—I; sarvän—all; sampüjayiñyämi—I will worship; sadä—forever; yuñmat-padäçraye—the shelter of your feet.

     Jaräsandha said to them: If I defeat Kåñëa, when I return I will take shelter of your feet and worship you all forever.

Text 41

kärägäreñu yävad vai
     sthitä bhavata bho dvijäù
paräjito 'haà va yuñmän
     haniñyämi na saàçayaù

     kärägäreñu—in prison; yävat—when; vai—indeed; sthitä—situated; bhavata—you; bhaù—O; dvijaù—brähmaëas; paräjitaù—defeated; aham—I; va—or; yuñmän—you all; haniñyämi—I will kill; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     But if I am defeated and imprisoned, I will kill you all. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 42

evam uktvä dvijän räjä
     jaräsandho mahä-balaù
äjagämäçu mathuräà
     trayo-viàçaty-anéka-paù

     evam—thus; uktvä—speaking; dvijän—to the brähmaëas; räjä—King; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; mahä-balaù—very powerful; äjagäma—went; äçu—at once; mathuräm—to Mathurä; trayo-viàçaty-anéka-paù—at the head of 23 armies.

     After speaking these words, powerful King Jaräsandha, taking with him 23 army divisions, quickly went to Mathurä City.

Texts 43-45

brahma-väkyam åtaà kartuà
     sva-pratijïäà vihäya ca
manuñya-ceñöäm äpannau
     sva-puräd bhéta-bhétavat

räma-kåñëau parau devau
     padbhyäà dudruvatur drutam
paläyamänau tau vékñya
     mägadhaù prahasan bhåçam

anvadhävad rathänékair
     brahma-väkyam anusmaran
dakñinäçaà gatäv itthaà
     pravarñaëa-girau haré

     brahma—of the brähmaëas; väkyam—the statement; åtam—proper; kartum—to do; sva-pratijïäm—his own promise; vihäya—abandoning; ca—and; manuñya-ceñöäm—the actions of human beings; äpannau—attained; sva-purät—from his city; bhéta-bhétavat—as if terrified; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; parau devau—ther two Supreme Lord; padbhyäm—on foot; dudruvatuù—ran; drutam—quickly; paläyamänau—fleeing; tau—Them; vékñya—seeing; mägadhaù—the king of Magadha; prahasan—laughing; bhåçam—greatly; anvadhävat—followed; rathänékaiù—with chariot soldiewrs; brahma-väkyam—the brähmaëas' words; anusmaran—remembering; dakñinäçam—to the south; gatäv—direction; ittham—thus; pravarñaëa-girau—on Mount Pravarsana; haré—the two Supreme Lords.

     Seeing Kåñëa and Balaräma fleeing on foot as if They were ordinary terrified human beings, Jaräsandha laughed aloud. At first he was determined not to keep the promise he made to the brähmaëas. Then, with many chariot warriors pursuing Kåñëa and Balaräma as They ran south to Mount Pravarñaëa, he remembered his words to the brähmaëas.

Text 46

yasmin nilénau jïätvä täv
     edhobhis taà dadäha ha
bhäsmé-bhüte vane jäte
     dahyamäna-tata-gireù

     yasmin—in which; nilénau—entered; jïätvä—knowing; täv—Them; edhobhiù—with fire; tam—that; dadäha—set afire; ha—indeed; bhäsmé-bhüte—burned to ashes; vane—the forest; jäte—manifested; dahyamäna-tata-gireù—of the burning mountain.

     Aware that Kåñëa and Balaräma were hiding in the mountain, Jaräsandha set the mountain on fire and burned all its forests to ashes.

Text 47

daçaika-yojanottuìgät
     samutpatya sureçvarau
alakñyamanäv aribhir
     dvärakäyaà nipetatuù

     daçaika-yojana—eleven yojanas; uttuìgät—from the height; samutpatya—jumping; sureçvarau—the two Supreme Personality of Godheads; alakñyamanäv—unseen; aribhiù—by the enemies; dvärakäyam—in Dvärakä; nipetatuù—fell.

     Jumping from a height of eighty-eight miles, Kåñëa and Balaräma, the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead, unseen by Their enemies, landed in Dvärakä.

Text 48

so 'pi dagdhau ca tau matvä
     mägadhendro mahä-balaù
mägadhän prayayau véro
     vädayan jaya-dundubhén

     saù—he; api—also; dagdhau—burned; ca—and; tau—Them; matvä—thinking; mägadhendraù—the king of Magadha; mahä-balaù—very powerful; mägadhän—to the couinrty of Magadha; prayayau—returned; véraù—a hero; vädayan—making sound; jaya-dundubhén—the drums of victory.

     Thinking that Kåñëa and Balaräma had been burned to death, powerful Jaräsandha returned to the country of Mägadha, where he was a hero and the drums of victory sounded.

Text 49

brähmaëän püjayäm äsa
     bhaktyä paramayä nåpa
yasya vipraù sahäyo 'sti
     kutas tasya paräjayaù

     brähmaëän—the brähmaëas; püjayäm äsa—worshiped; bhaktyä—with devotion; paramayä—great; nåpa—O king; yasya—of whom; vipraù—a brähmaëa; sahäyaù—the helper; asti—is; kutaù—how?; tasya—of him; paräjayaù—defeat.

     With great devotion Jaräsandha worshiped the brähmaëas. How can there be defeat for one helped by a brähmaëa?
.pa

Chapter Three
Çré Baladeva-vivähotsava
Lord Balaräma's Wedding

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

itthaà mayä te kathitaà
     dvärakä-väsa-käraëam
vivähädi-kathäù sarvä
     vadiñyämi pareçayoù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; dvärakä-väsa—residence in Dvaraka; käraëam—the cause; viväha—wedding; ädi—beginning with; kathäù—topic; sarva—all; vadiñyämi—I will tell; pareçayoù—of the two Supreme Personality of Godheads.

     In this way I have described to you the reason the Lord lives in Dvärakä. Now I will tell you everything of the marriages of Kåñëa and Balaräma, the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead.

Text 2 

pürvaà çré-baladevasya
     vivähaà çåëu maithila
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     äyur-vardhanam uttamam

     pürvam—before; çré-baladevasya—of Lord Balaräma; viväham—the wedding; çåëu—please hear; maithila—O king of Mithila; sarva-päpa—all sins; haram—removing; puëyam—sacred; äyur-vardhanam—increasing the duration of life; uttamam—transcendental.

     O king of Mithilä, please hear the story of Lord Balaräma's wedding, a sacred and transcendental story that removes all sins and increases the span of one's life.

Text 3 

änarto näma räjäbhüt
     sürya-vaàse mahä-manäù
yan-nämnänarta-deçaù syät
     samudre bhéma-nädini

     änartaù—Anarta; näma—name; räjä—a king; abhüt—was; sürya-vaàse—in the sun-god's dynasty; mahä-manäù—nible-hearted; yan-nämnä—by whose name; änarta-deçaù—the country of Anarta; syät—is; samudre—in the ocean; bhéma-nädini—filled with terrible sounds.

     A noble-hearted king named Änarta was born in the sürya dynasty. The country of Änarta-deça, which was created where there once was only the ocean filled with terrible sounds, was named after him.

Text 4 

raivato näma tat-putras
     cakravarté guëäkaraù
räjyaà cakära sa puréà
     vinirmäya kuçasthalém

     raivataù—Raivata; näma—named; tat-putraù—his son; cakravarté—emperor; guëäkaraù—virtuous; räjyam—the empire; cakära—did; sa—he; purém—to the capitol; vinirmäya—created; kuçasthalém—Kuçasthalé.

     His son was the virtuous king Raivata, who ruled the kingdom from his capitol Kuçasthalé.

Text 5 

tasya putra-çataà cäséd
     revaté näma kanyakä
sarvottamaà ciraïjévaà
     sundaraà varam icchaté

     tasya—of him; putra-çatam—a hundred sons; ca—and; äsét—was; revaté—Revaté; näma—named; kanyakä—a daughter; sarvottamam—the best of all; ciraïjévam—who would live a long time; sundaram—handsom; varam—husband; icchati—desires.

     He had a hundred sons and one daughter. His daughter, who was named Revaté, yearned to have a husband that was handsome, lived eternally, and was better than all other men.

Text 6 

ekadä ratham ästhäya
     hema-ratna-vibhüñitam
äropya svaà duhitaraà
     raivataù paryaöan bhuvam

     ekadä—one day; ratham—a chariot; ästhäya—mounting; hema-ratna-vibhüñitam—decorated with gold and jewels; äropya—placing; svam—own; duhitaram—daughter; raivataù—King Raivata; paryaöan—wandered; bhuvam—the earth.

     One day he placed his daughter on a chariot decorated with gold and jewels, and wandered the earth to find a proper husband.

Text 7 

präpto yoga-balenäpi
     brahmalokaà çubhävaham
kanyä-varaà pariprañöuà
     brahmäëaà praëanäma ha

     präptaù—attained; yoga-balena—by mystic power; api—also; brahmalokam—Brahmaloka; çubhävaham—auspicious; kanyä-varam—husband for her daughter; paariprañöum—to ask; brahmäëam—Brahma; praëanäma—bowed down; ha—indeed.

     By his mystic power he traveled to Brahmaloka. His intention to ask for a proper husband for his daughter, he bowed before the demigod Brahmä

Text 8 

gäyantyäà pürva-cittyäà ca
     sthito labdha-kñaëaù kñaëam
eka-cittaà vidhià jïätvä
     sväbhipräyaà nyavedayat

     gäyantyam—singing; pürva-cittyäm—Purvacitti; ca—and; sthitaù—situated; labdha-kñaëaù—finding a proper moment; kñaëam—a moment; eka-cittam—one thought; vidhim—to Brahma; jïätvä—understanding; sväbhipräyam—his intention; nyavedayat—spoke.

     As the apsarä Pürvacitti was singing, he found his opportunity. Aware that now he had Brahmä's attention, he spoke what was in his heart.

Text 9 

çré-raivata uväca 

paraù puräëo jagad-aìkuro 'bhüù
     pürëaù parätmä parameçvaro 'si
sthitaù sadä dhämani pärameñöhya
     såjasy alaà päsi ca hiàsasédam

     çré-raivataù—Çré Raivata; uväca—said; paraù—great; puräëaù—ancient; jagad-aìkuraù—from whom the universe has sprouted; abhüù—you are; pürëaù—perfect; parätmä—the great soul; parameçvaraù—the supreme controller; asi—you are; sthitaù—situated; sadä—always; dhämani—in your abode; pärameñöhya—O Brahmä; såjasy—you create; alam—greatly; pasi—protect; ca—and; hiàsasi—destroy; idam—this universe.

     Çré Raivata said: You are the greatest, the oldest, the seed from which this universe has sprouted, the great soul and the great controller. O Brahmä, you stay always in your own abode. You create, maintain, and destroy this universe.

Text 10 

vedä mukhaà dharma uras tathaiva
     påñöhaà hy adharmaç ca manur manéñä
aìgäni devä asuräç ca pädäù
     sarvä såtir deva tanus tava syät

     vedäù—the Vedas; mukham—mouth; dharma—religion; uraù—chest; {}; tatha—so; eva—indeed; påñöham—back; hy—indeed; adharmaç—irreligion; ca—and; manuù—Manu; manéñä—intelligence; aìgäni—limbs; devä—the demigods; asuräç—the demons; ca—and; pädäù—feet; sarvä—all; såtiù—creation; deva—O lord; tanuù—the body; tava—of you; syät—is.

     O lord, the Vedas are Your mouth, religion is your chest, irreligion is your back, Manu is your intelligence, the demigods are your limbs, the demons are your feet, and this entire creation is your body.

Text 11 

karoñi hastämalakaà ca viçvaà
     netuà prabhuù särathivad guëeñu
ekas tvam ekaà ca vidhäya jälaà
     grasiñyase sarvam ivorëanäbhiù

     karoñi—you do; hasta—in the hand; ämalakam—an amalaka fruit; ca—and; viçvam—the universe; netum—to bring; prabhuù—able; särathivat—like a charioteer; guëeñu—among the modes; ekaù—one; tvam—you; ekam—one; ca—and; vidhäya—placing; jälam—network; grasiñyase—you will swallow; sarvam—all; iva—like; urëanäbhiù—a spider.

     This universe is like a small ämalaka fruit in your hand. You are like a charioteer driving this universe through the modes of nature. You are like a spider and this universe is your web. In the future you will swallow up this entire universe.

Text 12 

mahendra-dhiñëyaà tava vaçyam asti
     kià särvabhaumaà kim u yoga-siddhiù
yaù pärameñöhyaà ca sadä sthito 'si
     tasmai namo 'nanta-guëäya bhümne

     mahendra-dhiñëyam—the abode of Lord Indra; tava—of you; vaçyam—under the control; asti—is; kim—what?; särvabhaumam—supremacy; kim—what?; u—indeed; yoga-siddhiù—the perfection of yoga; yaù—what; pärameñöhyam—supremacy; ca—and; sadä—always; sthitaù—situated; asi—you are; tasmai—to him; namaù—obeisances; ananta-guëäya—limitless virtues; bhümne—to the lord.

     The realm of King Indra is under your control, what to speak of the realms of ordinary kings or the perfections of yoga. You always stay in the highest realm. To you, O lord of limitless virtue, I offer my respectful obeisances.

Text 13 

bhavän svayambhür jagatäà pitämaho
     vidhe sura-jyeñöha iti prabhävataù
asya varaà sarva-guëaà ciräyuñaà
     vadäçu mäà divyam açeña-darçanaù

     bhavän—you; svayambhüù—self-born; jagatäm—of the universes; pitämahaù—the granfather; vidhe—O Brahmä; sura-jyeñöha—the best of the demigods; iti—thus; prabhävataù—by the power; asya—of him; varam—husband; sarva-guëam—having all virtues; ciräyuñam—living eternally; vada—please tell; äçu—at once; mäm—to me; divyam—divine; açeña-darçanaù—seeing everything.

     You are self-born. You are the grandfather of all in the universe. You are the best of the demigods. You see everything. O lord, please tell me who should become my daughter's husband, a divine husband that lives forever and has all virtues.

Text 14 

çré-närada uväca 

etac chrutvä tato brahmä
     svayambhüù sarva-darçanaù
raivataà präha räjänaà
     prahasann iva maithila

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; etac—this; chrutvä—hearing; tataù—then; brahmä—Brahmä; svayambhüù—self-born; sarva-darçanaù—seeing everything; raivatam—to Raivata; präha—said; räjänam—King; prahasann—smiling; iva—like; maithila—O king of Mithila.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, when he heard these words, self-born Brahmä, who sees everything, smiled and spoke to King Raivata.

Text 15 

çré-brahmoväca 

atra kñaëena he räjan
     bhuvi kälo mahä-balé
tvaraà vyatitas tri-nava-
     catur-yuga-vikalpitaù

     çré-brahmä uväca—Çré Brahmä said; atra—here; kñaëena—in a moment; he—O; räjan—king; bhuvi—on the earth; kälaù—time; mahä-balé—very powerful; tvaram—quickly; vyatitaù—surpassing; tri-nava-catur-yuga-vikalpitaù—counted as four yugas.

     Çré Brahmä said: O king, a moment in this realm of Brahmaloka is equal to four yugas on the earth.

Text 16 

na santi martya-loke tat-
     puträù pauträù sa-bändhaväù
tat-putra-pautra-naptåëäà
     goträëi ca na çåëmahe

     na—not; santi—are; martya-loke—on the earth; tat-puträù—your children; pauträù—grandchildren; sa-bändhaväù—relatives; tat-putra-pautra-naptåëäm—their children, gandchildren, great-grandchilren; goträëi—descnedents; ca—and; na—not; çåëmahe—we hear.

     Your children, grandchildren, and other relatives are no longer on the earth. We do not hear anything of the descendents of your children, grandchildren, or great grandchildren. The dynasty no longer exists.

Text 17 

tad gaccha sarva-mukhyäya
     nara-ratnäya çäçvate
kanyä-ratnam idaà räjan
     baladeväya dehi bhoù

     tat—therefore; gaccha—go; sarva-mukhyäya—to the best of all; nara-ratnäya—the jewel of men; çäçvate—eternal; kanyä-ratnam—jewel of girls; idam—this; räjan—O king; baladeväya—to Lord Balaräma; dehi—give; bhoù—Oh.

     Therefore you should approach Lord Balaräma, who is the best of all, the jewel of men, and the person that lives eternally, and offer your jewel-daughter to Him.

Text 18 

paripürëatamau säkñäd
     golokädhipaté prabhü
bhuvo bhärävatäräyä-
     vatérëau bala-keçavau

     paripürëatamau—the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead; säkñät—directly; golokädhipaté—the two masters of Goloka; prabhü—the two Lords; bhuvaù—of the earth; bhära—the burden; avatäräya—to remove; avatérëau—descended; bala—Balaräma; keçavau—and Kåñëa.

     Kåñëa and Balaräma are the two original Supreme Personalities of Godhead. They are Goloka's two masters, who have descended to remove the earth's burden.

Text 19 

asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-paté
     vasudevätmajau haré
dvärakäyaà viräjete
     yadubhir bhakta-vatsalau

     asaìkhya—numberless; brahmäëòa—of universes; paté—the masters; vasudevätmajau—the sons of Vasudeva; haré—the two Lords; dvärakäyam—in Dvärakä; viräjete—are splendidly manifest; yadubhiù—with the Yädavas; bhakta-vatsalau—kind to Their devotees.

     Kåñëa and Balaräma, who are the two Supreme Lords, who are the two masters of numberless universes, who are Vasudeva's two sons, and who are kind to Their devotees, are now spleniddly manifest in Dvärakä, with the Yädavas as Their companions.

Text 20 

çré-närada uväca 

atha çrutvä vidhià natvä
     raivato nåpa-sattamaù
äyayau dvärakäà bhüyaù
     samåddhaà taà samåddhibhiù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; çrutvä—hearing; vidhim—to Brahmä; natvä—bowing; revataù—Raivata; nåpa—of kings; sattamaù—the best; äyayau—went; dvärakäm—to Dvärtakä; bhüyaù—greatly; samåddham—opulent; tam—that; samåddhibhiù—with opulences.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing these words, the great king Raivata bowed down before Lord Brahmä and then quickly went to the supremely opulent city of Dvärakä.

Text 21 

päribarhe rathaà dattvä
     viçvakarma-vinirmitam
sahasra-haya-samyuktaà
     divya-yojana-viståtam

     päribarhe—as a wedding present; ratham—a chariot; dattvä—giving; viçvakarma-vinirmitam—made by Viçvakarmä; sahasra—a thousand; haya—horses; samyuktam—with; divya-yojana-viståtam—eight celestial miles long.

     As a wedding present he gave a chariot built by Viçvakarmä that was eight celestial miles long and yoked with a thousand horses, . . . 

Text 22 

divyämbaräni ratnäni
     brahma-dattäni maithila
datväyayau tapas taptuà
     badary-äkhyaà çubhävaham

     divya—splendid; ämbaräni—garments; ratnäni—jewels; brahma-dattäni—given by Brahma; maithila—O king of Mithila; datvä—giving; äyayau—went; tapaù—austerities; taptum—to perform; badary-äkhyam—named Badarikasrama; çubhävaham—the auspicious place.

 . . . and he also gave many splendid garments and jewels he had received from Brahmä. After giving these gifts he left to perform austerities at sacred Badarikäçrama.

Text 23 

tadä mahotsavaç cäséd
     yadu-puryäà gåhe gåhe
saìkarñaëo 'tha bhagavän
     revatyä viraräja ha

     tadä—then; mahotsavaç—a great festival; ca—and; äsét—was; yadu-puryäm—in the capitol of the Yädavass; gåhe—in home; gåhe—after home; saìkarñaëaù—Lord Balaräma; atha—then; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; revatyä—with Revaté; viraräja—was splendidly manifested; ha—indeed.

     Then there was a great festival in the capitol of the Yädavas. In home after home the Supreme Lord Balaräma appeared with Çrématé Revaté.

Text 24 

baladeva-vivähasya
     kathäà yaù çåëuyän naraù
sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù
     paräà siddhim aväpnuyät

     baladeva—of Lord Balaräma; vivähasya—of the wedding; kathäm—the topic; yaù—one who; çåëuyän—hears; naraù—a person; sarva-päpa—all sins; vinirmuktaù—pree; paräm—the supreme; siddhim—perfection; aväpnuyät—attains.

     One who hears this story of Lord Balaräma's wedding becomes free of all sins and attains the supreme perfection.
.pa

Chapter Four
Kuëòina-pura-yäna
Journey to the City of Kuëòina

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

atha çré-kåñëadevasya
     vivähaà çåëu maithila
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     catur-varga-phala-pradam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atha—then; çré-kåñëadevasya—of Çré Kåñëa; viväham—the wedding; çåëu—pleasehear; maithila—Oking of Mithila; sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; catur-varga-phala-pradam—giving the four goals of life. 

     Çré Närada said: O king of Mithilä, please hear the story of Lord Kåñëa's wedding, a sacred story that removes all sins and grants the four goals of life.

Text 2 

bhéñmako näma räjäbhüd
     vidarbheñu pratäpavän
kuëòinädhipatiù çrémän
     sarva-dharma-vidäà varaù

     bhéñmakaù—Bhiñmaka; näma—named; räjä—a king; abhüt—was; vidarbheñu—in the country of Vidarbha; pratäpavän—powerful; kuëòinädhipatiù—the ruler of Kundina; çrémän—handsome; sarva-dharma-vidäm—of the knowers of religion; varaù—the best.

     In the country of Vidarbha there was a powerful king named Bhéñmaka, who ruled from his capitol Kuëòina. He was handsome and glorious and he was the best of the knowers of true religion.

Text 3 

rukmiëé tat-sutä jätä
     çriyo mäträti-sundaré
koöi-candra-pratékäça
     guëa-bhüñaëa-bhüñitä

     rukmiëé—Rukmiëé; tat-sutä—his daughter; jätä—born; çriyaù—than the goddess of fortune; mäträ—measure; ati-sundaré—more beautiful; koöi—ten million; candra—moons; pratékäçä—splendor; guëa-bhüñaëa-bhüñitä—decorated with transcendental virtues.

     He had a daughter named Rukmiëé, who was more beautiful than the goddess of fortune. She was decorated with all virtues and was more glorious than ten million moons.

Text 4 

çrutvaikadä purä sä vai
     man-mukhäc chré-harer guëän
paripürëatamaà taà vai
     sa mene sädåçaà patim

     çrutvä—hearing; ekadä—once; purä—before; sä—she; vai—inded; man-mukhät—from my mouth; chré-hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; guëän—the virtues; paripürëatamam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tam—Him; vai—indeed; sa—she; mene—considered; sädåçam—like Him; patim—husband.

     From my mouth she once heard the transcendental virtues of Lord Kåñëa. From that day she thought of attaining a husband like Him, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 5 

tad-rüpaà sa-guëaà çrutvä
     man-mukhät préti-vardhanät
sädåçéà çré-haris täà vai
     samudvoòhuà mano dadhe

     tad-rüpam—hear beauty; sa-guëam—and virtues; çrutvä—hearing; man-mukhät—from my mouth; priti-vardhanät—because of the increase of love; sädåçém—like her; çré-hariù—Lord Kåñëa; tam—her; vai—indeed; samudvoòhum—to marry; manaù—the mind; dadhe—fixed.

     From my mouth Lord Kåñëa heard of her beauty and virtues. He fell in love with her and fixed his heart on marrying a girl like her.

Text 6 

kåñëa-bhäva-vidä räjïä
     sarva-dharma-vidä bhåçam
bhéñmakenaiva kåñëäya
     dätuà täà niçcayaù kåtaù

     kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; bhäva—of the love; vidä—knowing; räjïä—by the king; sarva-dharma-vidä—aware of all religios principles; bhåçam—greatly; bhéñmakena—by Bhiñmaka; eva—indeed; kåñëäya—to Lord Kåñëa; dätum—to give; täm—her; niçcayaù—determination; kåtaù—did.

     Aware that Lord Kåñëa had fallen in love with his daughter, King Bhéñmaka, who knew all about true religion, decided to give his daughter to Him.

Text 7 

yuva-räjas tato rukmé
     taà nivärya prayatnataù
kåñëa-çatruà mahä-véraà
     çiçupälam amanyata

     yuva-räjaù—the prince; tataù—then; rukmé—Rukmé; tam—him; nivärya—stopping; prayatnataù—with great effort; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; çatrum—the enemy; mahä-véram—the great warrior; çiçupälam—Çiçupäla; amanyata—thought.

     With a great effort prince Rukmé stopped him. Rukmé thought his sister should be given to Çiçupäla, a great warrior who was Kåñëa's enemy.

Text 8 

tataù khinna-manäù bhaiñmé
     çré-kåñëäya mahätmane
dütaà svaà preñayäm äsa
     brähmaëaà mithileçvara

     tataù—then; khinna-manäù—depressed; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; çré-kåñëäya—to Çré Kåñëa; mahätmane—noble-hearted; dütam—a messenger; svam—own; preñayäm äsa—sent; brähmaëam—a brähmaëa; mithileçvara—O king of Mithila.

     Dejected, Rukmiëé sent a brähmaëa messenger to noble-hearted Lord Kåñëa.

Text 9 

sa dvärakäà gato divyaà
     çré-kåñëena prapüjitaù
bhuktaväàs tatra cäséno
     viçränto mandire hareù

     sa—he; dvärakäm—to Dvaraka; gataù—went; divyam—transcendental; çré-kåñëena—by Çré Kåñëa; prapüjitaù—worshiped; bhuktavän—ate; tatra—there; ca—and; äsénaù—sat; viçräntaù—rested; mandire—in the palace; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa.

     Arriving at glorious Dvärakä, the brähmaëa was worshiped by Lord Kåñëa. The brähmaëa sat, ate, and rested in Lord Kåñëa's palace.

Text 10 

påcchate kuçalaà sarvaà
     çré-kåñëäya mahätmane
brähmaëas tad-anujïätas
     tasmai sarvam avarëayat

     påcchate—asks; kuçalam—welfare; sarvam—all; çré-kåñëäya—to Çré Kåñëa; mahätmane—noble-hearted; brähmaëaù—the brähmaëa; tad-anujïätaù—with His pwermission; tasmai—to Him; sarvam—all; avarëayat—relates.

     First the brähmaëa inquired about noble-hearted Lord Kåñëa's welfare. Then, with the Lord's permission, the brähmaëa recited Rukmiëé's letter to Him:

Text 11 

svasti çrékära-païcäòhye
     nityänanda-mahodadhau
çrémad-divya-guëaiù pürëe
     koöiço natayo mama

     svasti—greetings; çrékära-païcäòhye—rich with five opulences; nityänanda-mahodadhau—a great oceanof eternal bliss; çrémad-divya-guëaiù—with splendid transcendental virtues; pürëe—filled; koöiçaù—millions; natayaù—obeisances; mama—of me.

     "Greetings to You, the master of five opulences, a great ocean of eternal bliss, filled with splendid divine virtues. I bow down before You millions and millions of times.

Text 12 

çam aträstu ca taträstu
     tatas tvat-patram ägatam
näradoktena vacasä
     jïäto 'si prakåteù paraù

     çam—happiness; atra—here; astu—may be; ca—and; tatra—there; astu—may be; tataù—then; tvat-patram—Your letter; ägatam—arrived; närada—of Närada; uktena—spoken; vacasä—by the words; jïätaù—understood; asi—You are; prakåteù—the material world; paraù—beyond.

     "Your letter brought happiness everywhere. From Närada Muni's words I can understand that You are beyond the world of matter.

Text 13 

sarvaà jänäsi sarvajïas
     tathä vakñye vaco rahaù
véra-bhägaà tu mäà viddhi
     tvaà gåhäëa mahä-mate

     sarvam—everything; jänäsi—You know; sarvajïaù—all-knowing; tathä—then; vakñye—I will say; vacaù—words; rahaù—in private; véra—of a hero; bhägam—the prize; tu—indeed; mäm—me; viddhi—please know; tvam—You; gåhäëa—please take; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one.

     "Although You know everything, I shall tell know something in private: Please know that I am a prize to be grasped by a hero like You. O noble-hearted one, please take me by force.

Text 14 

mä caidyaù pratigåhëéyäd
     yathä siàha-balià mågaù
kathaà tvam udvahe durge
     sthitam iti ca tac chåëu

     mä—not; caidyaù—Sisupala; pratigåhëéyät—should take; yathä—as; siàha-balim—the prize of a lion; mågaù—a deer; katham—how?; tvam—You; udvahe—in taking away; durge—in the fortress; sthitam—staying; iti—thus; ca—and; tat—this; çåëu—please hear.

     As a deer should not take the lion's prize, so Çiçupäla should not take me. How can You kidnap me while I am in the fortress of this palace? Please listen.

Text 15 

pürve dyuù kula-devyäs tu
     yaträsti mahaté hare
ägamiñyämy ahaà tatra
     tatra mäà tvaà gåhäëa bhoù

     pürve—before; dyuù—the day; kula-devyäù—of the family deity of goddess Durgä; tu—indeed; yäträ—festival; asti—is; mahaté—great; hare—O Kåñëa; ägamiñyämy—I will come; aham—I; tatra—there; tatra—there; mäm—me; tvam—you; gåhäëa—please kidnap; bhoù—O.

     One day before the wedding there will be a great festival for goddess Durgä, our family's deity. O Kåñëa, I will go to that festival and You can kidnap me then. 

Text 16 

çré-närada uväca 

rukmiëyäs tam abhipräyaà
     çrutvä brähmaëa-bhäñitam
rathaù samyujyatäm äçu
     därukaà präha mänadaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; rukmiëyäù—of Rukmiëé; tam—that; abhipräyam—intention; çrutvä—hearing; brähmaëa—by the brähmaëa; bhäñitam—spoken; rathaù—a chariot; samyujyatäm—should be prepared; äçu—at once; därukam—to Däruka; präha—said; mänadaù—honorable Kåñëa.

     Çré Närada said: When he heard the brähmaëa recite Rukmiëé's letter, noble Kåñëa said to Däruka, "Prepare a chariot at once."

Texts 17-20 

paçcimäyäà tadä rätrau
     vaikuëöha-prabhavaà param
kiìkiné-jäla-samyuktaà
     hema-ratna-khacit-prabham

sad-açvaiù çaibya-sugréva-
     meghapuñpa-balähakaiù
niyojitair därukeëa
     caïcalaiç cäru-cämaraiù

yuktaà mahä-rathaà divyaà
     sahasräditya-varcasam
äruhya säratheù påñöhe
     dhåtvä çré-päda-paìkajam

sva-hastena dvijaà tasmin
     samäropya ramä-patiù
vidarbhän prayayau räjan
     chré-kåñëo bhagavän hariù

     paçcimayam—in the west; tadä—there; rätrau—at night; vaikuëöha-prabhavam—the power of Vaikuëöha; param—great; kiìkiné-jäla-samyuktam—with tinkling ornaments; hema-ratna-khacit-prabham—splendid with gold and jewels; sad-açvaiù—with horses; çaibya-sugréva-meghapuñpa-balähakaiù—Saibya, Sugréva, Meghapuñpa, and Balähaka; niyojitaiù—yoked; därukeëa—by Daruka; caïcalaiù—restless; cäru-cämaraiù—with beautifulcamaras; yuktam—endowed; mahä-ratham—greeat chariot; divyam—splendid; sahasräditya-varcasam—splendid as a thousand suns; äruhya—mounting; säratheù—of the charioteer; påñöhe—at the beck; dhåtvä—holding; çré-päda-paìkajam—His glorious lotus feet; sva-hastena—with His own hand; dvijam—the brähmaëa; tasmin—in that; samäropya—placing; ramä-patiù—the goddess of fortune's husband; vidarbhän—to the country of Vidarbha; prayayau—went; räjan—O king; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hariù—Lord Hari.

     That night a chariot from Vaikuëöha appeared in the west. It was decorated with gold, jewels, and a network of tinkling ornaments and was splendid like a thousand suns. Däruka yoked to it the restless cämara-decorated horses Çaibya, Sugréva, Meghapuñpa, and Balähaka, and then mounted the chariot behind them. Then Lord Kåñëa, the goddess of fortune's husband, placed His own lotus feet on the chariot, and with His own hand pulled the brähmaëa onto the chariot. O king, then the Lord went to the country of Vidarbha. 

Text 21 

kåñëaà caikaà gataà hartuà
     kanyäà tu nåpa-maëòalät
kali-praçaìkito rämaù
     çrutvä bhrätå-sahäya-kåt

     kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; ca—and; ekam—alone; gatam—gone; hartum—to kidnap; kanyäm—the girl; tu—indeed; nåpa-maëòalät—from the circle of kings; kali—of a quarrel; praçaìkitaù—afraid; rämaù—Balaräma; çrutvä—hearing; bhrätå-sahäya-kåt—helping His brother.

     Hearing that Lord Kåñëa had gone alone to kidnap Rukmiëé from the circle of kings, and fearing a quarrel would follow, Lord Balaräma prepared to help His brother.

Text 22 

nétvä yadu-balaà sarvaà
     samartha-bala-vähanam
vipakñéyän nåpän jetuà
     balaù paçcäd yayau tvaram

     nétvä—bringing; yadu-balam—the Yädavas army; sarvam—all; samartha-bala-vähanam—powerful; vipakñéyän—to the enemies; nåpän—kings; jetum—to defeat; balaù—Balaräma; paçcät—then; yayau—went; tvaram—quickly.

     Taking with Him all the Yädavas' powerful armies, Lord Balaräma went to defeat the enemy kings.

Text 23 

kuëòinopavanaà präptaù
     sa-dvijaù sa-ratho hariù
santasthau tintiëé-vrkñe
     ästéryäçva-paricchadam

     kuëòina—of Kundina; upavanam—the gardens; präptaù—attained; sa-dvijaù—with the brähmaëa; sa-rathaù—by chariot; hariù—Kåñëa; santasthau—stayed; tintiëé-vrkñe—under a tintini tree; ästérya—placing; äçva-paricchadam—the horses.

     Arriving at the gardens outside Kuëòina, Kåñëa and the brähmaëa stayed under a tintiëé tree as Däruka untied the horses.

Text 24 

durät sandåçyate tasmät
     kuëòinaà tu puraà param
dérgha-durga-samäyuktaà
     sapta-yojana-vartulam

     durät—from afar; sandåçyate—is seen; tasmät—from that; kuëòinam—Kundina; tu—indeed; puram—the city; param—great; dérgha—great; durga—fortress; samäyuktam—with; sapta-yojana-vartulam—seven yojanas around.

     In the distance they could see the great city of Kuëòina, which stood within a great fortress 56 miles around.

Text 25 

durlaìghyä durgamä yatra
     parikhä jala-püritä
dhanuù-çataà viñörtästi
     cäturmasya-nadéva sä

     durlaìghyä—unscalable; durgamä—unapproachable; yatra—where; parikhä—a moat; jala-püritä—filled with watger; dhanuù-çatam—a hundred dhanuhs; viñörtä—extended; asti—is; cäturmasya—during the monsoon; nadé—a river; iva—like; sa—it.

     That fort was encircled by an impassable moat a hundred bows wide and overflowing with water like a river swollen by the monsoon.

Text 26 

païcäçad-dhasta-mänena
     durga-bhittis tathordhva-gä
yatra ramyäëi harmyäëi
     sphurad-dhema-çikhäni ca

     païcäçad-dhasta-mänena—fifty hands in measurement; durga-bhittiù—a great wall; tathä—so; ürdhva—above; gä—gone; yatra—where; ramyäëi—beuatiful; harmyäëi—palaces; sphurad-dhema-çikhäni—with glitening golden roofs; ca—also.

     The city was surrounded by a wall fifty hands high. In the city were many beautiful palaces with glistening golden roofs.

Text 27 

hema-kmbha-dhvaja-sphurjat-
     tolakäni virejire
pärävatä mauyüräç ca
     yatra tatra patanti ca

     hema—golden; kumbha—spires; dhvaja—flags; sphurjat—glistening; tolakäni—ornaments; virejire—shone; pärävatä—paravata birds; mauyüräù—peacocks; ca—and; yatra—here; tatra—and there; patanti—fly; ca—and.

     There were many flags, glittering ornaments, and splendid golden spires. Many peacocks and pärävatas flew here and there.

Text 28 

çiçpuäläya sväà kanyäà
     däsyan räjä tu bhéñmakaù
cakre viväha-sambhära-
     saïcayaà ratna-maëòape

     çiçpuäläya—to Sisupala; svam—his own; kanyäm—daughter; däsyan—about to give; räja—King; tu—indeed; bhéñmakaù—Bhismaka; cakre—did; viväha-sambhära-saïcayam—preparation for the wedding; ratna-maëòape—in a jeweled pavilion.

     About to offer his daughter to Siçupäla, King Bhéñmaka made elaborate wedding preparations in a jewel pavilion.

Text 29 

géta-maìgala-samyukte
     narébhir bhavanottame
raräja rukmiëé räjan
     siddhibhir bhür yathä bhuvi

     géta—music; maìgala—auspiciousness; samyukte—with; narébhiù—by women; bhavanottame—in a palace; raräja—shone; rukmiëé—Rukmiëé; räjan—O king; siddhibhiù—with perfections; bhüù—the earth; yathä—as; bhuvi—on the earth.

     As goddess Earth is splendidly manifested among many mystic powers in the earthly realm, so Rukmiëé was splendidly manifested among many women in a palace filled with beautiful music.

Text 30 

atharva-vid-dvijä bhaiñméà
     su-snatäà ratna-väsasäm
cakrur mantrais tathä rakñäà
     baddhvä çäntià vidhäya ca

     atharva—the Atharva Veda; vit—knowing; dvijäù—brähmaëas; bhaiñmém—to Rukmiëé; su-snatam—carefully bathed; ratna-väsasam—with precious jewels and valuable garments; cakruù—did; mantraiù—with mantras; tathä—then; rakñäm—protection; baddhvä—binding; çäntim—peace; vidhäya—placing; ca—and.

     Then brähmaëas learned in the Atharva Veda approached the carefuully bathed and decorated with exquisite garments and precious jewels Rukmiëé, chanted mantras for her protection and tied on her an amulet. 

Texts 31-33 

haimänäà bhara-lakñaà ca
     muktänäà dvi-guëaà tathä
sahasra-bhäraà vasträëäà
     dhenünäm arbudäni ñaö

gajäyutaà rathänäà ca
     daça-lakñaà manoharam
daça-koöi-hayänäà ca
     gudädi-tila-parvatän

sahasraà svarëa-paträëäà
     bhüñaëänäà tathäyutam
viprebhyaù pradadau räjä
     bhéñmako 'ti-mahä-manäù

     haimänäm—of gold; bhara-lakñam—a hundred thousand bharas; ca—and; muktänäm—of pearls; dvi-guëam—double; tathä—so; sahasra—a thousand; bhäram—bharas; vasträëäm—of garments; dhenünäm—of cows; arbudäni—a hundred million; ñaö—six; gaja—of elephants; ayutam—tne thousand; rathänäm—of chariots; ca—and; daça-lakñam—a million; manoharam—beautiful; daça-koöi-hayänäm—a hundred million horses; ca—and; gudädi-tila-parvatän—mountains of grains and molasses; sahasram—a thousand; svarëa-paträëäm—golden cups; bhüñaëänäm—of ornaments; tathä—so; ayutam—ten thousand; viprebhyaù—to the brähmaëas; pradadau—gave; räjan—O king; bhéñmakaù—Bhismaka; ati-mahä-manäù—very noble-hearted.

     The  noble-hearted King Bhéñmaka gave in charity to the brähmaëas a hundred thousand bharas of gold, twice that much in pearls, a thousand bharas of valuable garments, six hundred million cows, a hundred million horses, many mountains of grains and molasses, a thousand golden cups, and ten thousand ornaments.

Text 34 

tathä vai damaghoñasya
     çiçupäläya vai dvijäù
cakruù çäntià paraà pürvaà
     rakñä-bandhana-rüpiëém

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; dämaghoñasya—Of Damaghosa; çiçupäläya—to Sisupala; vai—indeed; dvijäù—brähmaëas; cakruù—did; çäntim—peace; param—grat; pürvam—before; rakñä-bandhana-rüpiëém—for protection.

     Then, on Damaghoña's order, the brähmaëas gave a protective amulet to Çiçupäla.

Texts 35-37 

brähmaëair maìgala-snänaà
     pati-kaïcuka-çobhitam
mukuöopari vibhräjat-
     puñpa-mauli-dharaà çubham

hara-kaìkana-keyüra-
     çikhämaëi-vibhüñitam
maìgalair géta-väditrair
     gandhäkñata-vicarcitam

äcära-läjaiù suvaraà
     çiçupälaà vidhäya ca
äropya kariëaà proccaà
     dämaghoño viniryayau

     brähmaëaiù—by the brähmaëas; maìgala-snänam—an auspicious bath; pati—of the king; kaïcuka—in garments; çobhitam—splendid; mukuöa—crown; upari—above; vibhräjat—shining; puñpa—of flowers; mauli—a crown; dharam—wearing; çubham—handsome; hära—necklaces; kaìkana—bracelets; keyüra—armlets; çikhä—crown; maëi—jewels; vibhüñitam—decorated; maìgalaiù—with auspicious; géta—singing; väditraiù—and instrumental music; gandhäkñata-vicarcitam—asnointed with sweet fragrances; äcära-läjaiù—with showers of grain; suvaram—bridegroom; çiçupälam—Sisupala; vidhäya—placing; ca—and; äropya—mounting; kariëam—an elephant; proccam—great; dämaghoñaù—Damaghosa; viniryayau—left.

     Placing his son, Çiçupäla, who had been ritually bathed by the brähmaëas, who was elegantly dressed as the bridegroom, who wore a crown decorated with splendid flowers, who wore necklaces, bracelets, armlets, and crest jewels, who was anointed with sweet fragrances, and who was greated with auspicious singing, instrumental music, and a shower of grains, on a great elephant, and then himself climbing on that elephant, King Damaghoña left his own city.

Text 38 

jaräsandhena çälvena
     dantavakreëa dhématä
virürathena pauëòreëa
     päåñëi-grähena maithila

vikarñan mahatéà senäà
     damaghoño mahä-balaù
dundubhén nädayän dérghän
     äyayau kuëòinaà puram

     jaräsandhena—with Jarasandha; çälvena—withe Salva; dantavakreëa—with Dantavakra; dhématä—intelligent; virürathena—with Viduratha; pauëòreëa—with Punrdaka; päåñëi-grähena—protecting the rear of the army; maithila—O king of Mithila; vikarñan—pulling; mahatém—great; senäm—army; damaghoñaù—Damaghosa; mahä-balaù—very powerful; {}; dundubhén—drums; nädayän—sounding; dérghän—long; äyayau—came; kuëòinam—to Kundina; puram—city.

     Accompanied by Jaräsandha, Çalva, intelligent Dantavakra, and Vidüratha, and with Pauëòraka at the rear, powerful King Damaghoña, bringing with him a great army sounding kettledrums, went to Kuëòina City.

Text 40

sammukhäd yadu-devasya
     çrutvodyogaà nåpäù pare
sahasraçaù samäjagmuù
     çiçupäla-sahäyinaù

     sammukhät—from the presence; yadu-devasya—of Lord Kåñëa, the Yädavas' king; çrutvä—hearing; udyogam—eagerness; nåpaù—kings; pare—other; sahasraçaù—thousands; samäjagmuù—came çiçupäla-sahäyinaù—Sisupala's allies.

     Hearing that Lord Kåñëa had come, many thousands of other kings, all Çiçupäla's allies, eagerly came.

Texts 41-43 

bhéñmako hy agrato gatvä
     sampüjya vidhivan nåpam
käçméra-kambalair divyä-
     ruëaiù samudra-sambhavaiù

maëòiteñu ca sarveñu
     muktä-däma-vilambiñu
saugandhikaiù puñpa-rasai
     räñöreñu çibireñu ca

varäìganä-nåtya-läsan-
     mådaìgeñu dhvanatsu ca
niveçayäm äsa nåpair
     vidarbhädhipatir mahän

     bhéñmakaù—Bhismaka; hy—indeed; agrataù—before; gatvä—going; sampüjya—worshiping; vidhivän—according to the rules; nåpam—the king; käçméra—from Kasmira; kambalaiù—with wollen cadars; divyä—splendid; aruëaiù—red coral; samudra-sambhavaiù—born from the sea; maëòiteñu—decorated; ca—and; sarveñu—all; muktä-däma-vilambiñu—with necklaces of pearls; saugandhikaiù—fragrant; puñpa-rasai—with the nectar of flowers; räñöreñu—in the kingdoms; çibireñu—in the camps; ca—and; varäìganä—of prostitutes; nåtya—dancing; läsat—splendid; mådaìgeñu—drums; dhvanatsu—sounding; ca—and; niveçayäm äsa—made to enter; nåpaiù—with the kings; vidarbhädhipatiù—the king od Vidarbha; mahän—great.

     King Bhéñmaka went to greet the kings. As drums sounded and dancing-girls danced in the military encampment, Bhéñmaka worshiped the kings and decorated them with woolen shawls from Kashmir, ornaments of red coral gathered from the ocean, pearl necklaces, and flower fragrances.
.pa

Chapter Five
Çré Rukmiëé-nirgamana
The Kidnapping of Çré Rukmiëé

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

dhyäyanté kåñëa-pädäbjaà
     bhaiñmé kamala-locanä
moghaà vä manute värtäà
     megha-çyämam acintayat

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; dhyäyanté—meditating; kåñëa-pädäbjam—on Çré Kåñëa's lotus feet; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; kamala-locanä—lotus-eyed; mogham—in vain; vä—or; manute—thought; värtäm—the news; megha-çyämam—dark as a monsoon cloud; acintayat—thought.

     Çré Närada said: Although she thought her letter must have been fruitless, lotus-eyed Rukmiëé continued to meditate on Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet. Again and again she thought of Lord Kåñëa, who is splendid as a dark monsoon cloud.

Text 2 

çré-rukmiëy uväca 

aho tri-yämäntarito viväho
     mamaiva nägacchati kåñëacandraù
na vedmi kià käraëam atra dhätar
     nävartate 'dyäpi ca bhümi-devaù

     çré-rukmiëy uväca—Çré Rukmiëé said; ahaù—Oh; tri-yämäntaritaù—in nine hours; vivähaù—wedding; mama—my; eva—indeed; na—not; ägacchati—has come; kåñëacandraù—Kåñëa; na—not; vedmi—I know; kim—what?; käraëam—the cause; atra—here; dhätaù—O creator Brahmä; na—not; ävartate—returns; adya—today; api—even; ca—and; bhümi-devaù—the brähmaëa.

     Çré Rukmiëé said: My wedding will be in nine hours, and still Çré Kåñëacandra has not come. I don't understand. O destiny, what is the reason for this delay? The brähmaëa-messenger I sent has not returned either.

Text 3 

yadüttamo deva-varo mamaiña
     dåñövä hi kiïcit kaluñaà vidhätaù
kåtodyamo nünam atéva hasta-
     grähe na cägacchati kià karomi

     yadüttamaù—the best of the Yädavas; deva-varaù—the master of the demigods; mama—of me; eña—He; dåñövä—having seen; hi—indeed; kiïcit—something; kaluñam—impurity; vidhätaù—placed; kåta—done; udyamaù—effort; nünam—indeed; atéva—greatly; hasta—by the hand; grähe—grasped; na—not; ca—and; ägacchati—comes; kim—what?; karomi—shall I do.

     Perhaps Lord Kåñëa, the master of the demigods and the best of the Yädavas, looks at me and sees that I am sinful and impure. Perhaps that is why He has not come to take my hand.

Text 4 

hä durbhagäyäç ca na me vidhätä
     na sänukülaù kila candra-mauliù
na caika-danto vimukhä ca gauré
     gavo hi vipräç ca na sänükuläù

     hä—O; durbhagäyäç—of misfortune; ca—and; na—not; me—of me; vidhätä—Brahmä; na—not; sänukülaù—kind; kila—indeed; candra-mauliù—Lord çiva; na—not; ca—and; eka-dantaù—Gaëeça; vimukhä—averse; ca—and; gauré—Gauré; gavaù—cows; hi—indeed; vipräç—brähmaëas; ca—and; na—not; sänükuläù—kind.

     Brahmä is not kind to unfortunate me. Çiva is not kind. Gaëeça is not kind. Pärvaté is not kind. The cows and the brähmaëas are not kind to me. 

Text 5 

çré-närada uväca 

evaà vicintayanté sä
     bhaiñmé gehhäööa-bhümiñu
paribhramanté çré-kåñëaà
     paçyanti gåha-çekharät

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; vicintayanté—thinking; sä—sh; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; gehhäööa-bhümiñu—in the top of th palace; paribhramanté—walking; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; paçyanti—sees; gåha-çekharät—from the top of the room.

     Çré Närada said: As she was thinking these thoughts and pacing back and forth in a room high in the palace, Rukmiëé suddenly saw Çré Kåñëa below.

Text 6 

tadaiva tasyä vämäìgaà
     asphurat pratibhäñaëam
tena prasannä çré-bhaiñmé
     käla-jïä sarva-maìgalä

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; tasyäù—of her; vämäìgam—the left side of the body; asphurat—trembled; pratibhäñaëam—an answer; tena—by that; prasannä—pleased; çré-bhaiñmé—Çré Rukmiëé; käla-jïä—aware of auspicious times; sarva-maìgalä—all auspicious.

     At that moment the left side of her body trembled. That trembling was the reply to her questions. Aware of the nature of this good omen, all-beautiful and auspicious Çré Rukmiëé was very pleased.

Text 7 

kåñëa-praëodito vipraù
     sadyaç cägatavaàs tadä
çré-kåñëägamanaà tasyai
     çanaiù sarvaà çaçaàsa ha

     kåñëa-praëoditaù—sent by Lord Kåñëa; vipraù—the brähmaëa; sadyaç—at once; ca—and; ägatavan—arrived; tadä—then; çré-kåñëägamanam—the arrival of Çré Kåñëa; tasyai—to her; çanaiù—gradually; sarvam—all; çaçaàsa—related; ha—indeed.

     Sent by Lord Kåñëa, the brähmaëa presented himself before her and told her that Lord Kåñëa had come.

Text 8 

tataù prasannä çré-bhaiñmé
     tad-aìghryoù praëipatya sa
präha tvad-vaàçato vipra
     na yäsyämi vaco mama

     tataù—then; prasannä—happy; çré-bhaiñmé—Çré Rukmiëé; tad-aìghryoù—at his feet; pranipatya—falling; sa—she; präha—said; tvad-vaàçataù—from your family; vipra—O brähmaëa; na—not; yäsyämi—I will go; vacaù—words; mama—of me.

     Very pleased, Çré Rukmiëé fell at the brähmaëa's feet and said, "O brähmaëa, I will never leave your family. That is my promise."

     Note: Çré Rukmiëé is Çrématé Lakñmé-devé, the goddess of fortune. Here she promises that the brähmaëa's family will never be in poverty.

Text 9 

çrutvägatau räma-kåñëau
     viväha-prekñaëotsukau
bhéñmako nirgato netuà
     brähmaëais tat-prabhäva-vit

     çrutvä—hearing; ägatau—arrived; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; viväha-prekñaëotsukau—eager to see the wedding; bhéñmakaù—Bhismaka; nirgataù—left; netum—to bring; brähmaëaiù—with brähmaëas; tat-prabhäva-vit—aware of His power.

     Hearing that Kåñëa and Balaräma, eager to see the wedding, had come, King Bhéñmaka, aware of Their great power, went with many brähmaëas to greet Them.

Texts 10 and 11 

bhåçaà maìgala-pätreñu
     gandhäkñata-yuteñu ca
vaso-ratna-cayaà dhåtvä
     géta-väditra-maìgalaiù

koöiço madhu-parkänäà
     kumbha-vyuhän vidhäya ca
püjayitvätha vidhi-vad
     räma-kåñëau pareçvarau

     bhåçam—greatly; maìgala-pätreñu—with auspicious pots; gandhäkñata-yuteñu—with sweet fragrances; ca—and; vasaù—garments; ratna—jewels; cayam—multitude; dhåtvä—taking; géta-väditra-maìgalaiù—with auspicious singing and instrumental music; koöiçaù—millions; madhu-parkänäm—madhu-parka; kumbha-vyuhän—pots; vidhäya—placing; ca—and; püjayitvä—worshiping; atha—then; vidhi-vat—properly; räma-kåñëau—Kåñëa and Balaräma; pareçvarau—the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead.

     Offering many millions of maìgala-pätras, sweet fragrances, garments, jewels, and pots of madhu-parka, and accompanied by sweet singing and instrumental music, King Bhéñmaka properly worshiped Çré Kåñëa and Balaräma, the two Supreme Personalities of Godhead.

Text 12 

aho cäsmai na datteyaà
     iti khinna-manäù param
änandena vane sthäpya
     natvä sva-gåham äyayau

     ahaù—Oh; ca—and; asmai—to Him; na—not; dattä—given; iyam—her; iti—thus; khinna-manäù—unhappy at heart; param—greatly; änandena—with bliss; vane—in the forest; sthäpya—placing; natvä—bowing; sva-gåham—to his home; äyayau—returned.

     Unhappy at heart, he thought, "Alas, I did not offer her to Him!" Cheerfully giving Kåñëa and Balaräma a place to stay in the garden, He bowed down before Them and then returned to his home.

Text 13 

çrutvägataà çré-vasudeva-nandanaà
     trailokya-lävaëya-nidhià pareçvaram
ägatya neträïjalibhiù puraukasaù
     päpuù paraà tan-mukha-paìkajämåtam

     çrutvä—hearing; ägatam—come; çré-vasudeva-nandanam—Vasudeva's son; trailokya-lävaëya-nidhim—the most handsome in the three worlds; pareçvaram—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ägatya—arriving; netra—of their eyes; aïjalibhiù—with folded hands; puraukasaù—the people of the city; päpuù—drank; param—greatly; tan-mukha-paìkajämåtam—the nectar of His lotus face.

     Hearing that Vasudeva's son Çré Kåñëa, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the most handsome person in the three worlds, had arrived, with the cupped hands of their eyes the people of Kuëòina City again and again drank the nectar of His lotus face.

Text 14 

asyaiva bhäryä bhavituà hi rukmiëé
     yogyästi nänye 'tyavadan puraukasaù
dattvä sva-puëyäni viväha-hetave
     çré-kåñëa-lävaëya-kalä-nibandhakäù

     asya—of Him; evaindeed; bhäryä—the wife; bhavitum—to be; hi—indeed; rukmiëé—Rukmiëé; yogyä—suitable; asti—is; na—not; anye—others; atyavadan—said; puraukasaù—the people of the city; dattvä—giving; sva-puëyäni—own pious credits; viväha-hetave—for the purpose of the wedding; çré-kåñëa—of Çré Kåñëa; lävaëya-kalä-nibandhakäù—entralled by Çré Kåñëa's handsomeness.

     Enthralled by Çré Kåñëa's handsomeness, the people of Kuëòina City said, "Rukmiëé should marry Kåñëa. No one be He should marry her." The people of Kuëòika City donated the pious karmas of their previous births so that Kåñëa could marry Rukmiëé.

Text 15 

kadäpi säkñäc chvaçurasya mandiraà
     samägataà caivam aho vayaà janäù
drakñyäma ärät kåta-kåtyatäà tadä
     vrajema loke bahu-jévitena kim

     kadäpi—sometime; säkñäc—directly; çvaçurasya—of the bride's father; mandiram—the palace; samägatam—come; ca—and; evam—thus; ahaù—Oh; vayam—we; janaù—people; drakñyäma—will see; ärät—from afar; kåta-kåtyatäm—the perfection fo life; tadä—then; vrajema—we will attain; loke—in this world; bahu-jévitena—with many lives; kim—what is the use?

     "We will see Lord Kåñëa when He goes to the palace of the bride's father. Then our lives will become perfect. Why should we bother to spend many lives accumulating pious deeds?"

Text 16 

vadatsu lokeñu ca bhéñma-kanyakä-
     dri-kanyakä-püjana-hetave nåpa
antaù-purät sarva-sakhé-samanvitä
     viniryayau kåñëa-gåhéta-mänasä

     vadatsu—were speaking; lokeñu—as the people; ca—and; bhéñma-kanyakä—King Bhismaka's daughter; adri-kanyakä—goddess Pärvaté; püjana—of worship; hetave—for the purpose; nåpa+O king; antaù-purät—from the inner rooms of the palace; sarva-sakhé-samanvitä—surrounded by all her friends; viniryayau—went; kåñëa—by Lorde Kåñëa; gåhéta—taken; mänasä—her heart.

     O king, as the people were speaking these words, princess Rukmiëé, her heart now captured by Lord Kåñëa, left the palace with her friends to attend the worship of goddess Pärvaté.

Text 17 

bheré-mådaìgair bahu-dundubhi-svanaiù
     su-gäyakair vandi-janaiç ca mägadhaiù
väräìganä-nåtya-manojïa-bhävair
     jayety abhün maìgala-çabda uccakaiù

     bheré-mådaìgaiù—with bheris and mrdangas; bahu-dundubhi-svanaiù—with the sounds of many dundubhis; su-gäyakaiù—with expert singers; vandi-janaiù—with rciting poets; ca—and; mägadhaiù—with magadhas; väräìganä—of dancing girls; nåtya—dancing; manojïa-bhävairwith beauty; jaya—Victory!; iti—thus; abhütwas; maìgala-çabda—auspicious sounds; uccakaiù—loud.

     As the bheré, mådaìga, and dundubhi drums sounded, the singers sang, the vandés and mägadhas recited poetry, and the dancing girls gracefully danced, there were auspicious loud calls of "Victory!"

Text 18 

koöéndu-bimba-dyutim ädadhänäà
     bälärka-täöäìka-dharäà çriyaà täm
sitätapatra-vyajanaiù sphuradbhiù
     su-cämaraiù pärçva-gaëaù siñeve

     koöéndu-bimba-dyutim—the splendor of ten million moons; ädadhänäm—taking; bälärka—the rising sun; täöäìka—earings; dharäm—wearing; çriyam—the goddess of fortune; täm—Her; sitätapatra-vyajanaiù—with fans and white parasols; sphuradbhiù—splendid; su-cämaraiù—with camaras; pärçva-gaëaù—the associates; siñeve—served.

     Holding a white parasol and waving fans and cämaras, many girls served Çré Rukmiëé, the goddess of fortune, who was splendid as ten million moons and who wore earrings splendid as the rising sun.

Text 19 

koçäd viniñkåñya çitäsi-lakñaà
     padätayo véra-janä itas tataù
tathäçva-gä vä rathino gajä-sthitäù
     samudyatästrä jugupur vidürataù

     koçät—from the armory; viniñkåñya—yaking; çitäsi-lakñam—a hundred thousand sharp swords; padätayaù—footsoldiers; véra-janä—warriors; itas tataù—here and there; tathä—so; açva—with horses; gäù—going; vä—or; rathinaù—riding chariots; gajä-sthitäù—riding elephants; samudyata—raised; asträù—weapons; jugupuù—protected; vidürataù—from afar.

     Taking a hundred thousand sharpened swords from the armory, footsoldiers stood here and there. Riding on horses, chariots, and elephants, other soldiers stood as guards with upraised weapons.

Text 20 

devi-maöhaà präpya su-catvare sthitä
     çäntä çucir dhauta-karäìghri-paìkajaù
gatvä samépaà yata-väk kåtäïjalir
     bheje bhavänéà bhava-bhéti-häriëém

     devi—of goddess Pärvaté; maöham—the temple; präpya—attaining; su-catvare—in the courtyard; sthitä—staying; çäntä—peaceful; çuciù—pure; dhauta-karäìghri-paìkajaù—her lotus hands and feet carefully washed; gatvä—going; samépam—near; yata-väk—silent; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; bheje—worshiped; bhaväném—the goddess; bhava-bhéti-häriëém—who removes fear of repeated birth and death.

     Coming to goddess Pärvaté's temple, peaceful and pure-hearted Rukmiëé washed her lotus hands and feet and, observing a vow of silence, entered the courtyard. Approaching the deity of the goddess, who removes the fear of repeated birth and death, Rukmiëé worshiped her with folded hands.

Text 21 

durge sva-saàsthäna-yute çive çubhe
     nämämi tubhyaà satataà bhaväni te
bhüyät patir me bhagavän pareçvaraù
     çré-kåñëacandraù prakåteù paraù svayam

     durge—O Durgä; sva-saàsthäna-yute—beuaitful; çive—O wife of Lord Çiva; çubhe—O auspicious one; nämämi—I offer obeisances; tubhyam—to you; satatam—always; bhaväni—O wife of Lord Çiva; te—to you; bhüyät—may be; patiù—the husband; me—of me; bhagavän—Lord; pareçvaraù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çré-kåñëacandraù—Çré Kåñëa; prakåteù—the material world; paraù—beyond; svayam—personally.

     She said: O Durgä, O wife of Lord Çiva, O beautiful and glorious one, I offer my respectful obeissances to you again and again. I pray that Çré Kåñëacandra, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is above the world of matter, will become my husband.

Text 22 

evaà çubhe mä vada kåñëa-näma
     caidyaà samuddiçya varaà gåhäëa
itthaà vadantéñu sakhéñu bhaiñmé
     bhüyo bhaväné-bhavane jagäda

     evam—thus; çubhe—O beautiful one; mä—don't; vada—say; kåñëa-näma—the name Kåñëa; caidyam—Sisupala; samuddiçya—in relation to; varam—husband; gåhäëa—please take; ittham—thus; vadantéñu—speaking; sakhéñu—among her friends; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; bhüyaù—greatly; bhaväné-bhavane—in the temple of Pärvaté; jagäda—spoke.

     When her friends said, "O beautiful one, don't say the word Kåñëa. You should pray that Çiçupäla will become your husband," Rukmiëé spoke in the following words in the temple of goddess Pärvaté:

Texts 23 and 24 

ajänatéyaà tava cämba bälä
     tathä vadantéñu sakhéñu bhaiñmé
gandhäkñatair dhüpa-vibhüñaëädyaiù
     sraì-mälya-dépävalé-bhoga-vastraiù

apüpa-tämbüla-phalekñubhiç ca
     bheje bhavänéà parayä ca bhaktyä
natvätha täà vä bahu-bhüñaëädyaiù
     sampüjya saubhägyavatér nanäma

     ajänaté—ignorant; iyam—thus; tava—of you; ca—and; amba—O mother Durgä; bälä—a little girl; tathä—so; vadantéñu—speaking; sakhéñu—friends; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; gandha—sweet fragrances; akñataiù—with grains; dhüpa-vibhüñaëädyaiù—with incense, ornaments, and other things; sraì-mälya—with garlands; dépävalé—lamps; bhoga-vastraiù—and delicious foods; apüpa—cakes; tämbüla—betelnuts; phala—fruits; ikñubhiù—with sugarcane; ca—and; bheje—worshiped; bhaväném—goddess Durgä; parayä—with great; ca—and; bhaktyä—devotion; natvä—bowing down; atha—then; täm—to her; vä—or; bahu-bhüñaëädyaiù—with many ornaments and other gifts; sampüjya—worshiping; saubhägyavatéù—fortunate; nanäma—bowed down.

     "O Mother Pärvaté, my friends that say this are only little girls. They do not understand the truth about you." Then with great devotion Rukmiëé worshiped goddess Pärvaté by offering her sweet fragrances, unbroken grains, incense, ornaments, garlands, necklaces, lamps, delicious foods, garments, cakes, betelnuts, fruits, sugarcane, and many other gifts. Then Rukmiëé bowed down before the fortunate brähmaëa women and worshiped them with many ornaments and other gifts.

Text 25 

sarväù striyas täù pradadur varäëi
     su-maìgaläçir-vacanäni tasyai
rüpaà sadä te çatarüpayä samaà
     çélaà sadä çailasutä-samaà prabhau

     sarväù—to all; striyaù—the women; taù—to them; pradaduù—gave; varäëi—gifts; su-maìgala—very auspicious; äçiù—blessings; vacanäni—words; tasyai—to her; rüpam—beauty; sadä—always; te—of you; çatarüpayä—to Satarupa; samam—equal; çélam—character; sadä—always; çailasutä-samam—equal to Pärvaté; prabhau—manifested.

     All the brähmaëa women reciprocated by giving gifts to Rukmiëé. They also blessed her by saying, "May you be beautiful like Çatarüpä. May you be virtuous like goddess Pärvaté.

Text 26 

suçruñäëäà bhartur arundhaté-samaà
     kñamä hi bhüyäj janakätmajä-samä
saubhägyam evaà tava dakñiëä-samaà     su-vaibhävaà bhéñma-sut/e çaci-samam 
sarasvaté te ca sarasvaté-samä 
     bhaktiù patau syäc ca satäà harau yathä

     suçruñäëäm—of the faithful; bhartuù—of the husband; arundhaté-samam—like Atundhati; kñamä—tolerant; hi—indeed; bhüyäj—may be; janakätmajä-samä—like Sétä; saubhägyam—good fortune; evam—thus; tava—of you; dakñiëä-samam—like Daksina; su-vaibhävam—glory; bhéñma-sut/e—O Rukmiëé; çaci-samam—like Saci; sarasvaté—learning; te—of you; ca—and; sarasvaté-samä—like Sarasvaté; bhaktiù—devotion; patau—to husband; syäc—may be; ca—and; satäm—of the saintly devotees; harau—for Lord Hari; yathä—as.

     "May you have a faithful husband as Arudhnati has. May you be forgiving like Sétä. May you be fortunate like Dakñiëä. May you be glorious like Çacé. May you be learned like Sarasvaté. May you be devoted to your husband as the saintly devotees are devoted to Lord Hari."
.pa

Chapter Six
Çré Rukmiëé-haraëe Yadu-vijaya
The Yädavas' Victory When Çré Rukmiëé is Kidnapped

Text 1

itthaà vipra-vadhünäà sad-
     äçérbhir abhinanditä
devéà punar vipra-vadhüù
     praëanäma muhur muhuù

     ittham—thus; vipra-vadhünäm—of the brähmaëa women; sad-äçérbhiù—wil blessings; abhinanditä—blessed; devém—to the goddess; punaù—again; vipra-vadhüù—the brähmaëa women; praëanäma—bowed down; muhuù—again; muhuù—and again.

     Blessed in this way by the brähmaëa women, Rukmiëé again and again bowed down before them and before goddess Pärvaté.

Text 2 

tyaktvä muni-vrataà bhaiñmé
     girijä-gåhatas tataù
sahalébhiù sakhébhiç ca
     niçcakräma çanaiù çanaiù

     tyaktvä—abandoning; muni-vratam—the vow of silence; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; girijä-gåhataù—from the temple of Pärvaté; tataù—then; sahalébhiù—with her friends; sakhébhiç—friends; ca—and; niçcakräma—went; çanaiù çanaiù—gradually.

     Now abandoning her vow of silence, in the company of her friends Rukmiëé left Pärvaté's temple, walking with exaggerated slowness.

Text 3 

koöi-candra-pratékäçäà
     bhaiñméà kamala-locanäm
akasmäd dadåçur véräù
     su-nidhià nirdhanä yathä

     koöi—millions; candra—of moons; pratékäçäm—splendor; bhaiñmém—Rukmiëé; kamala-locanäm—lotus-eyed; akasmät—suddenly; dadåçuù—saw; véräù—soldiers; su-nidhim—a great treasure; nirdhanä—overty-stricken beggars; yathä—as.

     As poverty-stricken beggars stare at a priceless treasure, so the host of soldiers stared at lotus-eyed Rukmiëé, who was glorious as millions of moons.

Text 4 

äçvärühaç ca rathino
     gajinaç ca padätayaù
samägatä rakñiëas te
     mumuhur vékñya rukmiëém

     äçvärühaù—riding on horses; ca—and; rathinaù—riding on chariots; gajinaù—riding on elephants; ca—and; padätayaù—footsoldiers; samägatä—arrived; rakñiëaù—guards; te—they; mumuhuù—became bewildered; vékñya—staring; rukmiëém—at Rukmiëé.

     Riding on horses, chariots, and elephants, and some walking on foot, many guards came, stared at Rukmiëé, and became bewildered with desire.

Text 5 

tad-apaìga-smitais tékñëair
     bäëaiù käma-dhanuç-cyutaiù
ujjhitästrä nipetuù käv
     arditäù sainikäs tadä

     tad-apaìga-smitaiù—with smiling glances; tékñëaiù—sharp; bäëaiù—with arrows; käma-dhanuç-cyutaiù—shot from Käma's bow; ujjhita—dropped; asträù—weapons; nipetuù—fell; kau—to the ground; arditäù—overcome; sainikäù—soldiers; tadä—then.

     Wounded by the sharp Käma's arrows of her smiling eyes, the soldiers dropped their weapons and fell to the gound.

Texts 6-8 

rathena väyu-vegena
     ghaëöä-maïjéra-nädinä
naiùçreya-sambhavair açvair
     yutenäti-patäkinä

çéghraà sva-sainya-saìghaööät
     tat-sainyaà samvidärayät
väyur yathä padma-vanaà
     harir däruka-särathiù

stré-kadambakam etyäçu
     paçyatäà dviñatäà prabhuù
samäropya rathaà bhaiñméà
     tärkñya-putraù sudhäm iva

     rathena—by a chariot; väyu-vegena—fast as the wind; ghaëöä-maïjéra-nädinä—with the tinkling of bells and ornaments; naiùçreya-sambhavaiù—with the best; açvaiù—horses; yutena—with; ati-patäkinä—with a glorious flag; çéghram—quickly; sva-sainya-saìghaööät—from His own army; tat-sainyam—that army; samvidärayät—cut; väyuù—the wind; yathä—like; padma-vanam—a forestb of lotuses; hariù—Kåñëa; däruka—Däruka; särathiù—His charioteer; stré-kadambakam—the women; etya—approaching; äçu—quickly; paçyatäm—looking; dviñatäm—the enemies; prabhuù—the Lord; samäropya—placing; ratham—on the chariot; bhaiñmém—Rukmiëé; tärkñya-putraù—Garuòa; sudhäm—nectar; iva—like.

     Riding on a chariot fast as the wind, a chariot decorated with a glorious flag and tinkling bells and ornaments, pulled by the best of horses, and driven by Däruka, Lord Kåñëa left His army, cut apart the opposing army, and raced to the cluster of women as a wind enters a lotus forest. As His enemies looked on, He placed Rukmiëé on His chariot as Garuòa would gather up a flood of nectar.

Text 9 

devänäà paçyatäà räjan
     räja-kanyäà jahära ha
divyaà çastrottamaà çärìgaà
     dhanuñ öaìkärayan muhuù

     devänäm—as the demigods; paçyatäm—looked on; räjan—O king; räja-kanyäm—the princess; jahära—kidnapped; ha—indeed; divyam—splendid; çastrottamam—the best of weapons; çärìgam—the Särìga; dhanuù—bow; öaìkärayan—twanging; muhuù—again and again.

     O king, again and again Lord Kåñëa twanged His Çärìga bow, the best of weapons, and, as the demigods looked on, kidnapped beautiful Princess Rukmiëé.

Text 10 

tato vegena mahatä
     sva-sainyaà cägate harau
deva-dundubhayo nedur
     yadu-dundubhayas tadä

     tataù—then; vegena—with speed; mahatä—great; sva-sainyam—to His own army; ca—and; ägate—arrived; harau—Kåñëa; deva-dundubhayaù—the drums of the demigods; neduù—sounded; yadu-dundubhayaù—the drums of the Yädavas; tadä—then.

     When Kåñëa quickly returned to His own army, the demigods and the Yädavas sounded drums of victory.

Text 11 

siddhäç ca siddha-kanyäç ca
     çré-kåñëasya rathopari
harñitä vavåñur deväù
     puñpair nandana-sambhavaiù

     siddhäù—the siddhas; ca—and; siddha-kanyäç—the siddhas' daughters; ca—and; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; rathopari—on the chariot; harñitä—happy; vavåñuù—showered; deväù—the demigods; puñpaiù—flowers; nandana-sambhavaiù—from the Nandana gardens.

     Filled with happiness, the demigods, siddhas, and the siddhas' young daughters showered on Lord Kåñëa's chariot flowers from the Nandana gardens.

Text 12 

tato yayau jayärävaiù
     çanai räma-yuto hariù
çågäla-saìgha-madhyäc ca
     kesaré bhäga-håd yathä

     tataù—then; yayau—went; jayärävaiù—with calls pf "Victory!"; çanai—slowly; räma-yutaù—with Balaräma; hariù—Kåñëa; çågäla—of jackals; saìgha—of a pack; madhyät—from the middle; ca—and; kesaré—a lion; bhäga-håt—taking the prize; yathä—as.

     As a lion takes a prize from a pack of jackals, so Lord Kåñëa took Rukmiëé. As Kåñëa, Balaräma by His side, slowly proceeded, a great cry of "Victory!" arose.

Text 13 

tadä kolähale jäte
     rukmiëé-haraëe sati
babhüva rakñakänäà ca
     çasträçastri parasparam

     tadä—then; kolähale—a great uproar; jäte—manifested; rukmiëé-haraëe—in the kidnappin gof Rukmiëé; sati—being so; babhüva—was; rakñakänäm—of the guards; ca-—and; çasträçastri—weapon against weapon; parasparam—each other.

     When Rukmiëé was kidnapped there was a great uproar, many soldiers fighting each other, weapon pitted against weapon.

Text 14 

jaräsandha-vaçäù sarve
     mänino nåpa-sattamäù
na sehire sväbhibhavaà
     paraà jätaà yaçaù-kñayam

     jaräsandha-vaçäù—the vassals of Jarasandha; sarve—all; mäninaù—proud; nåpa-sattamäù—great kings; na—not; sehire—tolerated; sväbhibhavam—their own defeat; param—great; jätam—manifested; yaçaù-kñayam—the loss of their fame.

     The arrogant kings, all of them vassals of Jaräsandha, could not tolerate their ignominious defeat in this way.

Text 15 

aho dhig asmän sva-yaço
     håtaà gopaiç ca dhanvinäm
çågälair iva siàhänäà
     ataù kià syät paräjayaù

     ahaù—ah; dhig—fie; asmän—on them; sva-yaçaù—their honor; håtam—removed; gopaiç—by gopas; ca—and; dhanvinäm—bowmen; çågälaiù—by jackals; iva—like; siàhänäm—of lions; ataù—then; kim—what?; syät—is; paräjayaù—defeat.

     "As jackals defeating a host of lions, these cowherd men have robbed the honor of us noble bowmen!"

Text 16 

evam uktvä krodha-parä
     jagåhuù çastra-saàhatim
visåjya kréòaëäkñädén
     daàçitäù sainya-samyutäù

     evam—thus; uktvä—speaking; krodha-parä—angry; jagåhuù—took; çastra-saàhatim—a host of wepaons; visåjya—abandoning; kréòaëäkñädén—games of dice and other diversions; daàçitäù—bitten; sainya-samyutäù—with their armies.

     Speaking these words as they threw down their dice games and other diversions, the angry kings, their pride bitten, assembled their armies and took up a host of weapons.

Texts 17-19 

akñauhiëé-dvayenäpi
     pauëòrakaù krodha-püritaù
akñauhiëé-trayeëäpi
     mahä-véro vidürathaù

akñauhiëé-païca-yuto
     dantavakro 'ti-däruëaù
akñauhiëé-trayeëäçu
     çälvo räja-pureçvaraù

akñauhiëébhir daçabhir
     jaräsandho mahä-balaù
äyayau sammukhe yoddhuà
     yädavänäà mahätmanäm

     akñauhiëé-dvayena—with two Akñauhiëés; api—also; pauëòrakaù—Paundraka; krodha-püritaù—filled with anger; akñauhiëé-trayeëa—with three Akñauhiëés; api—also; mahä-véraù—heroic; vidürathaù—Viduratha; akñauhiëé-païca-yutaù—with fiveAkñauhiëés; dantavakraù—Dantavakjra; ati-däruëaù—ferocious; akñauhiëé-trayeëa—with three Akñauhiëés; äçu—quickly; çälvaù—Salva; räja-pureçvaraù—the king of the kings of the kings; akñauhiëébhiù—with Akñauhiëés; daçabhiù—ten; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; mahä-balaù—very powerful; äyayau—came; sammukhe—in the presence; yoddhum—to fight; yädavänäm—of the Yädavas; mahätmanäm—noble-hearted.

     Then Pauëòraka, filled with anger and leading two Akñauhiëés, heroic Vidüratha with three Akñauhiëés, ferocious Dantavakra with five Akñauhiëés, the great king Çälva with three Akñauhiëés, and very powerful Jaräsandha with ten Akñauhiëés, all yearning for a fight, came before the noble-hearted Yädavas. 

Text 20 

anye 'pi caidya-pakñéyä
     yoddhuà çré-kåñëa-sammukhe
dhanuñ öaìkärayantas te
     samäjagmuù sahasraçaù

     anye—others; api—also; caidya-pakñéyä—the allies of Sisupala; yoddhum—to fight; çré-kåñëa-sammukhe—in the presence of Çré Kåñëa; dhanuù—bows; öaìkärayantaù—twanging; te—they; samäjagmuù—came; sahasraçaù—by the thousands.

     Thousands of others, the allies of Çisupäla, also came, twanging their bows, to fight with Kåñëa.

Text 21 

pralayäbdhi-samaà sainyaà
     samälokya yaduttamäù
tartum äjagmur ärät te
     kåñëa-kaivarta-potakäù

     pralaya—of devastation; abdhi—the ocean; samam—like; sainyam—army; samälokya—seeing; yaduttamaù—the best of the Yädavas; tartum—to cross; äjagmuù—came; ärät—near; te—they; kåñëa-kaivarta-potakäù—they who have Kåñëa as their captain.

     Seeing this army like a great ocean of devastation, the Yädavas, led by Kåñëa, approached it in order to cross beyond it.

Text 22 

babhüva tumulaà yuddhaà
     adbhutaà roma-harñaëam
sainyayoç ca sva-purayor
     deva-dänavayor yathä

     babhüva—was; tumulam—tumult; yuddham—battle; adbhutam—wonderful; roma-harñaëam—making the hairs stand erect; sainyayoù—of the two armies; ca—and; sva-purayoù—of their cities; deva-dänavayoù—of the demigods and the demons; yathä—as.

     As the demigods and the demons fight, so the two armies fought an amazing battle that made one's hairs stand erect.

Text 23 

rathino rathibhis tatra
     pattibhiù saha pattayaù
gajä gajair yuyudhire
     turagäç ca turaìgamaiù

     rathinaù—chariot warriors; rathibhiù—with chariot warriors; tatra—there; pattibhiù—footsoldiers; saha—with; pattayaù—footsoldiers; gajä—elephants; gajaiù—with elephants; yuyudhire—fought; turagäç—cavalry; ca—and; turaìgamaiù—with cavalry.

     Chariot warriors fought with chariot warriors, footsoldiers with footsoldiers, elephants with elephants, and cavalry with cavalry.

Text 24 

asträndhakäre saïjäte
     rukmiëéà bhaya-vihvalam
vilokya bhagavän devo
     mä bhaiñöety abhayaà dadau

     astra—of weapons; andhakäre—in the blinding darkness; saïjäte—manifested; rukmiëém—to Rukmiëé; bhaya-vihvalam—filled with fear; vilokya—seeing; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; devaù—the Lord; mä—don't; bhaiñöa—fear; iti—-thus; abhayam—fearlessness; dadau—gave.

     Seeing that Rukmiëé was frightened by the blinding darkness created by the many weapons, Lord Kåñëa said, "Don't be afraid", and took away all her fears.

Text 25 

baladevänujo véro
     gado dhunvan mahad-dhanuù
viveça çatru-saìghaööaà
     vanaà vahnir iva prabhuù

     baladevänujaù—the younger brother of  Balaräma; véraù—hero; gadaù—Gada; dhunvan—shaking; mahad-dhanuù—a great bow; viveça—entered; çatru—of the enemies; saìghaööam—the host; vanam—a forest; vahniù—a fire; iva—like; prabhuù—powerful.

     Shaking his bow, Balaräma's heroic younger brother Gada entered among the enemies as a fire enters a forest.

Text 26 

gada-bäëa-vibhinnäìgä
     rathi-niçchinna-kaïcukäù
hatäçvä hata-sütäç ca
     nipetur bhümi-maëòale

     gada—of Gada; bäëa—by the arrows; vibhinna—broken; aìgäù—limbs; rathi—of the cariot warriors; niçchinna—broken; kaïcukäù—armor; hata—killed; açväù—horses; hata—killed; sütäù—charioteer; ca—and; nipetuù—fell; bhümi-maëòale—to the circle of the earth.

     Their armor and limbs pierced by Gada's arrows, and their charioteers and horses killed, many chariot warriors fell to the ground.

Text 27 

padätayaç chinna-padä
     gadä-bäëägata-vyathäù
nipetur bhü-tale räjan
     våkñä väta-hatä iva

     padätayaù—footsoldiers; chinna-padä—their feet broken; gadä-bäëägata-vyathäù—wounded by Gada's arrows; nipetuù—fell; bhü-tale—to the ground; räjan—O king; våkñä—trees; väta-hatä—pushed down by a wind; iva—like.

     Struck by Gada's arrows, many footsoldiers fell to the ground like trees struck by a great wind.

Text 28 

açvärüòhäù ke 'pi véräù
     gada-bäëair vidäritäù
petü raëäìgane säçvä
     båhaté-phalavän nåpa

     açvärüòhäù—cavalry; ke 'pi—some; véräù—heroic; gada-bäëaiù—by Gada's arrows; vidäritäù—struck; petü—fell; raëäìgane—on the battlefield; säçvä—with their horses; båhaté-phalavan—like brhati fruits; nåpa—O king.

     Struck by Gada's arrows, many cavalrymen fell to the battleground like båhaté fruits.

Text 29 

gada-bäëair bhinna-kumbhä
     madhye madhye vidäritäù
virejuù patitä bhümau
     küñmäëòa-sakalä iva

     gada-bäëaiù—by Gada's arrows; bhinna—broken; kumbhäù—elephants' heads; madhye—in the midst; madhye—in the midst; vidäritäù—severed; virejuù—were manifested; patitä—fallen; bhümau—to the ground; küñmäëòa-sakalä—great gourds; iva—like.

     Severed by Gada's arrows, many elephant heads fell to the ground like great gourds.

Text 30 

tataù paläyitaà sainyaà
     dåñövä çälvo mahä-balaù
gadaà tatäòa gadayä
     gadä-yuddha-viçäradaù

     tataù-then; paläyitam—fleeing; sainyam—the army; dåñövä—seeing; çälvaù—Salva; mahä-balaù—powerful; gadam—Gada; tatäòa—hit; gadayä—with a club; gadä-yuddha-viçäradaù—expert at club fighting.

     Noticing that his army had fled, powerful Çälva, who was expert at fighting with clubs, with a club attacked Gada. 

Text 31 

gadä-viddho gato dhanvé
     gadä-yuddha-prabhäva-vit
dhanur-yuddhaà tu santyajya
     tat-kälän manasä tvaram

     gadä—by the club; viddhaù—struck; gataù—gone; dhanvé—bowman; gadä—of club; yuddha—fighting; prabhäva—power; vit——knowing; dhanuù—with bow; yuddham—fighting; tu—indeed; santyajya—abandoning; tat-kälät—from that time; manasä—with thinking; tvaram—at once.

     Struck by the club, and aware of Çälva skill in club-fighting, Gada quickly put down His bow.

Text 32 

paräà vyathäà gato yuddhe
     patito 'pi samutthitaù
tadägrajena yä dattä
     täà gadäà tu gado 'grahét

     paräàgreat; vyathäm—agitation; gataù—attained; yuddhe—in the fight; patitaù—fallen; api—although; samutthitaù—risen; tadä—then; agrajena—by his elder brother; yä—which; dattä—was given; täm—that; gadäm—club; tu—indeed; gadaù—Gada; agrahét—grasped.

     Fallen to the ground, agitated Gada stood up and took a club that was a gift from his elder brother Balaräma.

Text 33 

lakña-bhära-mayé gurvé
     dåòhä kaumodaké yathä
tayä gado 'hanac chälvaà
     vajreëendro yathä girim

     lakña-bhära-mayé—a hundred thousand bharas; gurvé—heavy; dåòhä—firm; kaumodaké—Kaumodaki; yathä—as; tayä—by that; gadaù—Gada; ahanat—struck; çälvam—Salva; vajreëa—with a thunderbolt; indraù—Indra; yathä—as; girim—a mountain.

     With that club, heavy as a hundred thousand bhäras and strong as Kåñëa's club Kaumodaké, Gada struck Çälva as with his thunderbolt Indra strikes a mountain.

Texts 34-36 

gadä-prahära-mathito
     çälve nipatite bhuvi
pauëòrako 'tha jaräsandho
     dantavakro vidürathaù

catvara äyayus tatra
     gadopari ruñänvitäù
pauëòrako 'pi mahä-véro
     gadasya ratha-gaà dhvajam

viccheda daçabhir bäëaiù
     ku-väkyair mitratäm iva
dantavakras tu gadayä
     gadasyäpi rathaà çubham 
cürëayäm äsa räjendra 
     daëòeneva sa-måd-ghaöam

     gadä—of the club; prahära—by the blow; mathitaù—agitated; çälve—Salva; nipatite—fallen; bhuvi—to the ground; pauëòrakaù—Paundraka; atha—then; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; dantavakraù—Dantavakra; vidürathaù—Viduratha; catvara—four; äyayuù—came; tatra—there; gadopari—arouind Gada; ruñänvitäù—angry; pauëòrakaù—Paundraka; api—even; mahä-véraù—the great warrior; gadasya—of Gada; ratha-gam—on the chariot; dhvajam—the flag; viccheda—cut; daçabhiù—with ten; bäëaiù—arrows; ku-väkyaiù—with harsh words; mitratäm—friendship; iva—like; dantavakraù—Dantavakra; tu—indeed; gadayä—with a club; gadasya—of Gada; api—also; ratham—the chariot; çubham—beautiful; cürëayäm äsa—broke to pieces; räjendra—O king of kings; daëòena—with a stick; iva—like; sa-måd-ghaöam—a clay pot.

     Struck by the club, Çälva fell to the ground. Then Pauëòraka, Jaräsandha, Dantavakra, and Vidüratha angrily surrounded Gada. With ten arrows the great warrior Pauëòraka cut down Gada's flag, as with harsh words one cuts down a friendship. Then, with his club Dantavakra broke Gada's chariot into pieces as with a great stick one breaks a clay pot.

Text 37 

tathäsväàç ca jaräsandhaù
     särathià ca vidürathaù
pätayäm äsa bhü-påñöhe
     çitair bäëair videha-räö

     tathä—so; asvän—the horses; ca—and; jaräsandhaù—Jarasandha; särathim—the charioteer; ca—and; vidürathaù—Viduratha; pätayäm äsa—threw down; bhü-påñöhe—to the ground; çitaiù—with sharp; bäëaiù—arrows; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, with sharp arrows Jaräsandha made the horses fall to the ground and Vidüratha made the charioteer fall.

Text 38 

tato musalam ädäya
     baladevas tvaran balé
vikaräle mukhe bhéme
     dantavakram atäòayat

     tataù—then; musalam—a club; ädäya—taking; baladevaù—Lord Balaräma; tvaran—hurrying; bali—powerful; vikaräle—terrible; mukhe—mouth; bhéme—ferocious; dantavakram—Dantavakra; atäòayat—struck.

     Then, picking up His own club, Lord Balaräma hurried there and struck Dantavakra in his gruesome mouth.

Text 39 

tato musala-ghäöena
     dantavakrasya yudhyataù
mukhe cakre 'pi yo dantaù
     sa tu bhümau papäta ha

     tataù—then; musala—of the club; ghäöena—by the blow; dantavakrasya—of Dantavakra; yudhyataù—fighting; mukhe—in the mouth; cakre—did; api—also; yaù—who; dantaù—teeth; sa—that; tu—indeed; bhümau—to the ground; papäta—fell; ha—indeed.

     With that blow from Lord Balaräma's club, a tooth suddenly fell from the warrior Dantavakra's mouth.

Texts 40 and 41

tadä hasati daityärau
     rukmiëé-sahite harau
pauëòrakaà ca jaräsandhaà
     tathä duñöaà vidüratham

jaghäna musalenäçu
     baladevo ruñänvitaù
trayo 'pi patitä yuddhe
     murchitäù kñatajäplutäù

     tadä—then; hasati—as He laughed; daityärau—the enemy of the demons; rukmiëé-sahite—with Rukmiëé; harau—Kåñëa; pauëòrakam—Paundraka; ca—and; jaräsandham—Jarasandha; tathä—then; duñöam—wicked; vidüratham—Viduratha; jaghäna—struck; musalena—with His club; äçu—at once; baladevaù—Lord Balaräma; ruñänvitaù—angry; trayaù—the three; api—also; patitä—fallen; yuddhe—in the fight; murchitäù—fainted; kñataja—with blood; äplutäù—drowned.

     Then, as Rukmiëé and the demons' enemy Kåñëa laughed, with His club angry Balaräma struck Pauëòraka, Jaräsandha, and Vidüratha, making them fall unconscious, bathed in their own blood.

Text 42 

senäà samägatäà sarväà
     samäkåñya halena vai
musalenähanat kruddho
     baladevo mahä-balaù

     senäm—the army; samägatäm—come; sarväm—all; samäkåñya—dragging; halena—with His plow; vai—indeed; musalena—with His club; ahanat—struck; kruddhaù—angry; baladevaù—Balaräma; mahä-balaù—very powerful.

     When the demons' army came, angry Lord Balaräma dragged it with His plow and pounded it with His club.

Text 43 

daça-yojana-paryantaà
     rathebhäçva-padätayaù
peñitäç cürëitä bhümau
     çayänä dharaëéà gatäù

     daça-yojana-paryantam—for eighty miles; rathebhäçva-padätayaù—footsoldier, cavalry, and chariot warriors; peñitäù—broken to pieces; cürëitä—crushed; bhümau—on the ground; çayänä—lying; dharaëém—to the ground; gatäù—gone.

     For eighty miles the ground was littered with the broken and crushed remains of footsoldiers, cavalry, and chariot warriors.

Text 44 

jaräsandhädayaù sarve
     måtyu-çeñä nåpäù pare
paläyitäç caidyam etya
     procur nañöotsavaà bhåçam

     jaräsandhädayaù—beginning with Jarasandha; sarve—all; måtyu-çeñä—still alive; nåpäù—kings; pare—others; paläyitäç—fleeing; caidyam—to Sisupala; etya—going; procuù—said; nañöa—destroyed; utsavam—the festival; bhåçam—greatly.

     Jaräsandha and the other kings that had somehow escaped death fled the battle, ran to Çiçupäla, whose wedding festival was now completely in ruins, and said to him:

Text 45 

bho bhoù puruña-çärdüla
     daurmanasyam idaà tyaja
kim ekena vivähena
     bhavitä te çataà bhuvi

     bhaù—O; bhoù—O; puruña-çärdüla—tiger among men; daurmanasyam—despondentcy; idam—this; tyaja—abandon; kim—what is the need?; ekena—with one; vivähena—marriage; bhavitä—will be; te—of you; çatam—a hundred; bhuvi—on this earth.

     O tiger among men, don't be unhappy. How important is this one marriage? You will marry a hundred times in this world.

Text 46 

adyaiva dvärakäà gatvä
     baddhvä rämaà sa-mädhavam
ayädavéà kariñyämaù
     påthvéà sägara-mekhaläm

     adya—now; eva—certainly; dvärakäm—to Dvärakä; gatvä—having gone; baddhvä—having bound; rämam—Balaräma; sa-mädhavam—with Kåñëa; ayädavém—without any Yädavas; kariñyämaù—I will make; påthvém—the earth; sägara—the ocean; mekhaläm—a belt.

     We will go to Dvärakä, imprison Kåñëa and Balaräma, and make this earth, which wears its oceans like a belt, into a place where not a single Yädava lives upon it.

Text 47 

evaà sambodhito mitrais
     caidyo 'gäc candrikä-puram
yayuù svaà svaà puraà sarve
     hata-çeñä nåpäs tataù

     evam—thus; sambodhitaù—informed; mitraiù—by friends; caidyaù—Sisupala; agät—went; candrikä-puram—to Candrika-pura; yayuù—went; svaà svam—to their own; puram—cities; sarve—all; hata-çeñä—who had not been killed; nåpäù—the kings; tataù—then.

     After hearing these words, Çiçupäla returned to Candrikä-pura, and each of the kings that escaped death returned to his own city.
.pa

Chapter Seven
Çré Rukmiëé-viväha
The Marriage of Çré Rukmiëé

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

rukmiëyä haraëaà çrutvä
     miträëäà ca paräbhavam
pratijïäm akarod rukmé
     çåëvataà sarva-bhubhujäm

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; rukmiëyä—of Rukmiëé; haraëam—the kidnapping; çrutvä—hearing; miträëäm—of friends; ca—and; paräbhavam—the defeat; pratijïäm—a vow; akarot—did; rukmé—Rukmi; çåëvatäm—hearing; sarva-bhubhujäm—of all the kings.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing that Rukmiëé was kidnapped and his friends were all defeated, Rukmé, as all the kings listened, spoke the following vow:

Text 2 

ahatvä samare kåñëaà
     apratyüha ca rukmiëém
kuëòinaà na pravekñyämi
     satyam etad bravémi vaù

     ahatvä—not having killed; samare—in battle; kåñëam—Kåñëa; apratyüha—not bringing; ca—and; rukmiëém—Rukmiëé; kuëòinam—to Kundina; na—not; pravekñyämi—I will enter; satyam—the truth; etat—this; bravémi—I speak; vaù—to you.

     If I do not kill Kåñëa and return with Rukmiëé, then I will never again enter the city of Kuëòina. I speak to you the truth.

Text 3 

ity uktvä kavacaà divyaà
     ghanam arbuda-nirmitam
çiras-träëaà sindhujaà ca
     sa dadhära mahodbhaöaù

     ity—thusd; uktvä—speaking; kavacam—armor; divyam—splendid; ghanam—thick; arbuda-nirmitam—made on Mount Arbuda; çiras-träëam—helmet; sindhujam—made by the ocean's shore; ca—and; sa—he; dadhära—took; mahodbhaöaù—the great warrior.

     After speaking these words, the great warrior Rukmé dressed himself in thick armor made on Mount Arbuda and a great helmet made by the ocean's shore.

Text 4 

sauvérasya dhanuù çäli-
     läöajaà ceñudhi-dvayam
ädäya mleccha-deçasya
     khaògaà carma ca kauöajam

     sauvérasya—of Sauvira-deça; dhanuù—a bow; çäliläöajam—made in Salilata-desa; ceñudhi-dvayam—two quivers; ädäya—taking; mleccha-deçasya—of Mleccha-desa; khaògam—a sword; carma—shield; ca—and; kauöajam—made in Kauta.

     Then he took a bow made in the country of Sauvéra, two quivers made in the country of Çäliläöa, a bow made in the country of the mlecchas, a shield made in the country of Kauöa, . . .

Text 5 

peöharasya mahä-çaktià
     gurjaräöa-bhaväà gadäm
parighaà baìga-jaà dhåtvä
     hasta-träëaà ca kauìkanam

     peöharasya—of Pethara; mahä-çaktim—a great sakti; gurjaräöa-bhaväm—made in Gujarat; gadäm—a club; parigham—a parigha; baìga-jam—made in Bengal; dhåtvä—taking; hasta-träëam—gloves; ca—and; kauìkanam—made in Konkana.

 . . . a great çakti weapon made in the country of Peöhara, a club made in the country of Gujarat, a parigha weapon made in the country of Bengal, and gloves made in the country of Koìkana.

Text 6 

baddha-godhäìguli-träëaù
     kiréöé ratna-kuëòalaù
rukmäìgadas tadä rukmé
     yuddhaà kartuà mano dadhe

     baddha-godhäìguli-träëaù—wearing finger-protectors; kiréöé—wearing a helmet; ratna-kuëòalaù—wearing jewel earings; rukmäìgadaù—wearing gold armlets; tadä—then; rukmé—Ruikmi; yuddham—a fight; kartum—to do; manaù—his mind; dadhe—fixed.

     Wearing finger protectors, a helmet, jewel earrings, and golden armlets, Rukmé fixed his heart on a fight.

Text 7 

jaitraà rathaà samäruhya
     caïcaläçva-niyojitam
påñöhato 'nvagamat kåñëaà
     karñann akñauhiëé-dvayam

     jaitram—victory; ratham—chariot; samäruhya—mounting; caïcala—restless; açva—with horses; niyojitam—yoked; påñöhataù—from behind; anvagamat—followed; kåñëam—Kåñëa; karñann—taking; akñauhiëé-dvayam—two aksauhinis.

     Mounting his victory chariot yoked with restless horses, and taking with him two akñaukiëé armies, Rukmé pursued Kåñëa.

Text 8 

punaù samägataà dåñövä
     senäà rämo mahä-balaù
tayä yuyodha samare
     yadu-senä-samanvitaù

     punaù—again; samägatam—come; dåñövä—seeing; senäm—the army; rämaù—Balaräma; mahä-balaù—very powerful; tayä—with it; yuyodha—fought; samare—in thebattle; yadu-senä-samanvitaù—with the Yädavas' army.

     Seeing that another army had come, powerful Lord Balaräma led the Yädavas' army in the fight.

Text 9 

tiñöha tiñöheti deveçaà
     visåjan paruñaà vacaù
sampräpnoti rathaà rukmé
     dhanuñ öaìkärayan muhuù

     tiñöha—stop; tiñöha—stop; iti—thus; deveçam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; visåjan—creating; paruñam—harsh; vacaù—words; sampräpnoti—attains; ratham—the chariot; rukmé—Rukmi; dhanuñ—his bow; öaìkärayan—twanging; muhuù—again and again.

     Harshly calling out, "Stop! Stop!", and repeatedly twanging his bow, Rukmé caught up with Lord Kåñëa's chariot.

Text 10 

tvaraà muïca svasäraà me
     yadi jévitum icchasi
na cet tväà sa-balaà sadyo
     nayämi yama-sädanam

     tvaram—at once; muïca—release; svasäram—sister; me—my; yadi—if; jévitum—to live; icchasi—You wish; na—not; cet—if; tväm—You; sa-balam—with Balaräma; sadyaù—at once; nayämi—I will take; yama—of Yamaräja; sädanam—to the house.

     Rukmé said: If You wish to live, then release my sister at once. If You don't release her, I will carry You and Balaräma into the house of death.

Text 11 

yayäti-çäpa-sambhrañöo
     gopälocchiñöa-bhug bhavän
jaräsandha-bhayäd bhéto
     yavanägrät paläyitaù

     yayäti—of King Yayati; çäpa—by the curse; sambhrañöaù—ruined; gopäla—of cowherd people; ucchiñöa—the remnants; bhuk—eating; bhavän—You; jaräsandha-bhayät—out of fear of Jarasandha; bhétaù—frightened; yavana—of a yavana; agrät—from the presence; paläyitaù—fled.

     Cursed by King Yayäti, You were forced to eat the remnants of food left by cowherd people. You were terrified of Jaräsandha. You fled from the king of the Yavanas.

Text 12 

ity uktveñudhitaù kåñya
     bäëaà cäpe nidhäya ca
niyamya karëa-paryantaà
     nijaghäna harer hådi

     ity—thus; uktvä—speaking; iñudhitaù—from His quiver; kåñya—drawing; bäëam—an arrow; cäpe—on His bow; nidhäya—placing; ca—and; niyamya—drawing; karëa-paryantam—to His ear; nijaghäna—hit; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; hådi—in the chest.

     After speaking thse words, Rukmé pulled an arrow from his quiver, placed it in his bow, drew it to his ear, and shot Lord Kåñëa in the chest.

Text 13 

santoòito 'pi bhagavän
     dhanur-jyäà tasya nädiném
ciccheda säyakenäçu
     garuòaù pannagéà yathä

     santoòitaù—hit; api—even though; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; dhanur-jyäm—the bowstring; tasya—of him; nädiném—sounding; ciccheda—cut; säyakena—with an arrow; äçu—at once; garuòaù—Garuòa; pannagém—a snake; yathä—as.

     Although wounded by the arrow, Lord Kåñëa at once shot an arrow that cut Rukmé's twanging bowstring as Garuòa cuts a great snake.

Text 14 

nidhäya çéghraà kodaëòaà
     çiïjinéà svarëa-bhüñitäm
rukmé tu daçabhir bäëaiù
     saïjaghäna harià raëe

     nidhäya—placing; çéghram—quickly; kodaëòam—a bow; çiïjiném—bowstring; svarëa—with gold; bhüñitäm—decorated; rukmé—Rukmi; tu—indeed; daçabhiù—with ten; bäëaiù—arrows; saïjaghäna—hit; harim—Lord Kåñëa; raëe—in the battle.

     Quickly taking up a bow with a golden bowstring, Rukmé shot ten arrows at Lord Kåñëa. 

Text 15 

harir ekena bäneëa
     çiïjiné-sahitaà dhanuù
ciccheda rukmiëaù sadyo
     jïäneneväguëämayam

     hariù—Lord Kåñëa; ekena—with a single; bäneëa—arrow; çiïjiné-sahitam—with the bowstring; dhanuù—the bow; ciccheda—cut; rukmiëaù—of Rukmi; sadyaù—at once; jïänena—with knowledge; iva—like; aguëämayam—what has no virtue.

     Then with a single arrow Lord Kåñëa cut Rukmé's bow and bowstring in two as with knowledge one cuts the darkness of repeated birth and death.

Text 16 

kåñëo 'moghena bäëena
     madhyatas taà dvidhäkarot
rukméà punaù çatair bäëaiù
     santatäòa mådhe hariù

     kåñëaù—Lord Kåñëa; amoghena—infallible; bäëena—with an arrow; madhyataù—in the middle; tam—that; dvidhä—in two; akarot—made; rukmém—to Rukmé; punaù—again; çataiù—with a hundred; bäëaiù—arrows; santatäòa—hit; mådhe—in the fight; hariù—Kåñëa.

     With a single arrow Lord Kåñëa cut the middle of Rukmé's bow in two parts, and then shot at him a hundred arrows. 

Text 17 

chinna-dhanvätha vaidarbho
     mahä-çaktià sphurat-prabham
praharad dharaye çaktià
     vijïänäya yathä muniù

     chinna—broken; dhanvä—bow; atha—then; vaidarbhaù—Rukmi; mahä-çaktim—a great sakti weapon; sphurat-prabham—glittering; praharat—threw; dharaye—at Lord Kåñëa; çaktim—power; vijïänäya—for knowledge; yathä—as; muniù—a sage.

     His bow broken, Rukmé hurled a glittering çakti weapon at Lord Kåñëa as a sage uses the power of his austerities to attain transcendental knowledge.

Text 18 

tatäòa gadayä taà vai
     gadädhäré gadägrajaù
dvidhäbhütä mahä-çakté
     rukmeù sütaà jaghäna ha

     tatäòa—struck; gadayä—with His club; tam—that; vai—indeed; gadädhäré—holding a club; gadägrajaù—the elder brother of Gada; dvidhäbhütä—cut in two; mahä-çaktéthe two sakti weapons; rukmeù—of Rukmi; sütam—the charioteer; jaghäna—hit; ha—indeed.

     Lord Kåñëa, the elder brother of Gada, hit the çakti weapon with His club and broke it in two. The two splinters of that weapon ricocheted and hit Rukmé's charioteer.

Text 19 

kaumodaké gadä gurvé
     patanté vega-dhäriëé
tad-rathaà cürëayäm äsa
     säçvaà çailaà yathä paviù

     kaumodaké—the Kaumodaki; gadä—club; gurvé—heavy; patanté—falling; vega-dhäriëé—quickly; tad-ratham—on his chariot; cürëayäm äsa—broke into pieces; säçvam—ith the horses; çailam—a mountain; yathä—as; paviù—a thunderbolt.

     Then Lord Kåñëa hurled His great and heavy Kaumodaké club, which broke Rukmé's chariot into pieces as a thunderbolt breaks a mountain.

Text 20 

praharad dharaye so 'pi
     gadäà sväà bhéñmakätmajaù
cakreëa cürëayäm äsa
     bhagavän api täà punaù

     praharat—threw; haraye—at Lord Kåñëa; so 'pi—he; gadäm—a club; svam—own; bhéñmakätmajaù—Bhismaka's son; cakreëa—with His cakra; cürëayäm äsa—broke into pieces; bhagavän—the Lord; api—also; tam—that; punaù—again.

     When Rukmé threw a club at Him, Lord Kåñëa used His cakra to break into pieces. 

Text 21 

parighaà baìga-jaà nétvä
     rukmé rukmäìgado balé
jaghäna çré-harià skandhe
     jagarja ghanavan mådhe

     parigham—a parigha weapon; baìga-jam—made in Bengal; nétvä—taking; rukmé—Rukmi; rukmäìgadaù—wearing golden armlets; balé—powerful; jaghäna—hit; çré-harim—Lord Kåñëa; skandhe—on the shoulder; jagarja—roared; ghanavan—like thunder; mådhe—in the battle.

     Taking up his parigha weapon made in Bengal, powerful Rukmé, decorated with golden armlets, struck Lord Kåñëa on the shoulder and roared like a thundercloud.

Text 22 

santäòito 'pi bhagavän
     mälähata iva dvipaù
tenaiva parighenäpi
     taà jaghäna raëäìgane

     santäòitaù—hit; api—although; bhagavän—the Lord; mälä—by a flower garland; hata—hit; iva—like; dvipaù—an elephant; tena—by that; eva—indeed; parighena—arogha; api—also; tam—him; jaghäna—hit; raëäìgane—in the battlefield.

     Lord Kåñëa felt that blow as an elephant feels being hit with a flower garland. Then Lord Kåñëa picked up that parigha and hit Rukmé with it.

Text 23 

parighäbhihato rukmé
     kiïcid-vyäkula-mänasaù
bhartsayan mädhavaà hy äjau
     jagräha khaòga-carmaëé

     parigha—by the parigha; abhihataù—hit; rukmé—Rukmi; kiïcid-vyäkula-mänasaù—agitated at heart; bhartsayan—rebuking; mädhavam—Kåñëa; hy—indeed; äjau—in the fight; jagräha—grasped; khaòga—his sword; carmaëé—and shield.

     Hit by the parigha, Rukmé became agitated at heart. Hurling insults at Lord Kåñëa, he took up his sword and shield.

Text 24 

tat-khaògaà carmaëä chittvä
     sva-khaògaà praharad dhariù
khaògägreëa çiras-träëaà
     kaïcukaà cicchide mahat

     tat-khaògam—his sword; carmaëä—with the shield; chittvä—cutting; sva-khaògam—His own sword; praharat—hit; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; khaògägreëa—with the edge of His sword; çiras-träëam—the helmet; kaïcukam—and armor; cicchide—cut; mahat—great.

     Weilding His own sword, Lord Kåñëa separated Rukmé from his sword and shield. With His sword's sharp point He separated Rukmé from his helmet and armor.

Texts 25 and 26 

hasta-träëo 'pi yugapad
     ete chinné-kåte mådhe
khaòga-muñöi-karaà dåñövä
     rukmiëaà samupasthitam

gåhétvä bhuja-daëòäbhyäà
     pätayitvä mahé-tale
tasyopari hariù sthitvä
     yathä siàho mågopari 
çita-dhäraà nandakäkhyaà 
     khaògaà jagräha roñataù

     hasta-träëaù—the gloves; api—also; yugapat—in a single moment; ete—they; chinné-kåte—cut; mådhe—in the battle; khaòga—sword; muñöi-karam—in his fist; dåñövä—seeing; rukmiëam—Rukmé; samupasthitam—standing; gåhétvä—takling; bhuja-daëòäbhyäm—with both arms; pätayitvä—throwing; mahé-tale—to the ground; tasyopari—on top of him; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; sthitvä—situated; yathä—as; siàhaù—a lion; måga—a dear; upari—on; çita-dhäram—sharp; nandakäkhyam—named Nandaka; khaògam—sword; jagräha—grabbed; roñataù—angrily.

     Seeing Rukmé standing, without sword or gloves, before Him, Lord Kåñëa grabbed him with both arms, threw him to the ground, and pounced on him as a lion pounces on a deer. Then the Lord angrily drew His sharp sword named Nandaka.

Text 27 

dåñövä bhrätå-vadhodyuktaà
     rukmiëé bhaya-vihvalä
patitvä pädayor bhärtur
     uväca karuëaà saté

     dåñövä—seeing; bhrätå—of her brother; vadha—the death; udyuktam—engaged; rukmiëé—Rukmiëé; bhaya-vihvalä—trembling with fear; patitvä—falling; pädayoù—at the feet; bhärtuù—of her husband; uväca—spoke; karuëam—piteously; saté—chaste.

     Seeing that her brother was on the verge of death, saintly terrified saintly Rukmiëé fell at her husband's feet and spoke very piteous words.

Text 28 

çré-rukmiëy uväca 

ananta deveça jagan-niväsa
     yogeçvaräcintya jagat-pate tvam
hantuà na yogyaù karuëä-samudra
     mad-bhrätaraà çäla-bhujaà mahä-bhuja

     çré-rukmiëé uväca—Çré Rukmiëé said; ananta—limitless; deveça—O master of the demigpds; jagan-niväsa—O abode of the4 universes; yogeçvara—O master of yoga; acintya—O inconcievable one; jagat-pate—O master of the universes; tvam—You; hantum—to kill; na—not; yogyaù—is right; karuëä—of mercy; samudra—O ocean; mad-bhrätaram—my brother; çäla-bhujam—who has arms like sala trees; mahä-bhuja—O mighty-armed one.

     Çré Rukmiëé said: O limitless one, O master of the demigods, O abode of the universes, O master of yoga, O inconcievable one, O master of the worlds, O mighty-armed one, O ocean of mercy, it is not right for You to kill my brother, whose arms are like great çäla trees.

Text 29 

çré-närada uväca 

pariträsair vilapatéà
     duùkha-çuñyan-mukhéà priyäm
ruddha-kaëöhéà satéà vékñya
     nyavartata hariù svayaà

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; pariträsaiù—with fears; vilapatém—lamenting; duùkha—with sufferings; çuñyat—dried up; mukhém—mouth; priyäm—beloved; ruddha-kaëöhém—whose throat was stopped;   satém—chaste; vékñya—seeing; nyavartata—stopped; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—Himself.

     Çré Närada said: Seeing that saintly Rukmiëé was frightened and weeping, her mouth dry with suffering, Lord Kåñëa stopped Himself.

Text 30 

baddhvä taà kaöi-bandhena
     khaògena çita-dhäriëä
vapanaà smaçru-keçänäà
     cakärärdha-mukhe hariù

     baddhvä—tying; tam—him; kaöi-bandhena—with abelt; khaògena—with His sword; çita-dhäriëä—sharp; vapanam—shaving; smaçru—beard; keçänäm—and hair; cakära—did; ardha—half; mukhe—his face; hariù—Lord Kåñëa.

     With a sash tying him up, with His sharp sword Lord Kåñëa shaved the hair and beard of half of Rukmé's face.

Text 31 

akñauhiëé-dvayaà jitvä
     rämaù präptaù sa-sainikaù
baddhaà virüpiëaà dénaà
     rukmiëaà tu dadarça ha

     akñauhiëé-dvayam—the two aksauhinis; jitvä—defeating; rämaù—Balaräma; präptaù—attained; sa-sainikaù—with His army; baddham—bound; virüpiëam—made ugly; dénam—wretched; rukmiëam—Rukmé; tu—indeed; dadarça—saw; ha—certainly.

     After defeating the two akñauhiëés, Lord Balaräma and His army returned. Then Balaräma saw poor Rukmé tied up and made very funny-looking.

Text 32 

vimucya baddhaà sa-dayaù
     präha nirbhartsayan harim
asädhv idaà tvayä kåñëa
     kåtaà loka-jugupsitam

     vimucya—freeing; baddham—the bonds; sa-dayaù—compassionate; präha—said; nirbhartsayan—rebuking; harim—Kåñëa; asädhu—not right; idam—this; tvayä—by You; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; kåtam—done; loka—in the world; jugupsitam—horrible.

     Untying him, compassionate Balaräma rebuked Kåñëa, saying, "Kåñëa, how horrible is this thing You did! It is not right.

Text 33 

häsyaà vaiçäli-bhadräëäà
     na hi caitädåçaà bhavet
yasyäù sahodare mukhye
     virüpe ca tvayä kåte

     häsyam—the object of laughter; vaiçäli-bhadräëäm——of the people; na—not; hi—indeed; ca—and; etädåçam—like this; bhavet—should be; yasyäù—of whom; sahodare—the brother; mukhye—in the face; virüpe—funny-looking; ca—and; tvayä—by You; kåte—done.

     "You should not have made Rukmiëé's brother's face so funny-looking that everyone will laugh at him."

Text 34 

kià vadiñyati säpi tväà
     bhrätur vairüpya-cintayä
mä çokaà kuru kalyäëi
     svasthä bhava çuci-smite

     kim—what?; vadiñyati—will say; sä api—she; tväm—to You; bhrätuù—of the brother; vairüpya-cintayä—with anxiety over being made so ugly; mä—don't; çokam—lament; kuru—do; kalyäëi—O beautiful one; svasthä—happy; bhava—be; çuci-smite—O girl with the beautiful smile.

     "What will Rukmiëé say to You?" Then Lord Balaräma said to Rukmiëé, "O beautiful one, don't be unhappy that your brother has been made so ugly-looking. O girl with the beautiful smile, please be happy.

Text 35 

ärya-putri mahä-buddhe
     mä çokaà kuru durmanäù
sarvaà käla-kåtaà manye
     priyam apriyam eva vä

     ärya-putri—O noble girl; mahä-buddhe—O intelligent one; mä—don't; çokam—lament; kuru—do; durmanäù—unhappy; sarvam—all; käla-kåtam—done by time; manye—I think; priyam—pleasant; apriyam—and unpleasant; eva—indeed; vä—or.

     "O noble girl, O intelligent one, don't be unhappy. I think it is time that brings everything, whether pleasant or unpleasant.

Text 36 

väyor ghanävalir iva
     vaçe yasyäkhilaà jagat
taà kälam éçvaraà viddhi
     viñëuà kalayatäà prabhum

     väyoù—of the wind; ghanävaliù—the clouds; iva—like; vaçe—under the control; yasya—of which; akhilam—all; jagat—the universe; tam—that; kälam—time; éçvaram—the controller; viddhi—please know; viñëum—Lord Viñëu; kalayatäm—of controller; prabhum—the master.

     "As clouds are under the control of the wind, so this entire universe is under the control of time. Please know that time is really Lord Viñëu, the supreme controller, the master of all masters.

Text 37 

ahaà mameti bhävo 'yaà
     jagato bandha-käraëam
täbhyäà virahito bhävo
     mokña eva na saàçayaù

     aham—I; mama—mine; iti—thus; bhävaù—the concept; ayam—this; jagataù—of the world; bandha-käraëam—the source of bondage; täbhyäm—by them; virahitaù—devoid; bhävaù—the state; mokña—liberation; eva—indeed; na—not; saàçayaù—doubt.

     "The thoughts, `It is I' and `It is mine' bind one to the material world. When one becomes free from these material thoughts of pride and possessiveness he attains liberation. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 38 

sukha-duùkha-prado nänyaù
     puruñasyätma-vibhramaù
mitrodäséna-ripavaù
     saàsära-tamasä kåtäù

     sukha—happiness; duùkha—and unhappiness; pradaù—giving; na—not; anyaù—another; puruñasya—of a person; ätma-vibhramaù—bewilderment; mitra—freind; udäséna—neutral; ripavaù—and enemy; saàsära-tamasä—by the darkness of material existence; kåtäù—done.

     "Lord Viñëu alone is the giver of happiness and distress. No one else gives them. The thought that someone is a friend, someone else is a neutral party, and someone else is an enemy is an illusion created by the material nature."

Text 39 

evaà rämeëa devena
     bodhito bhéñmakätmajaù
vaimanasyaà parityajya
     rukmiëé ca yayau mudam

     evam—thus; rämeëa—by Lord Balaräma; devena—by the Lord; bodhitaù—informed; bhéñmakätmajaù—Rukmi, the son of Buismaka; vaimanasyam—unhappiness; parityajya—abandoning; rukmiëé—Rukmiëé; ca—and; yayau—attained; mudam—happiness.

     Educated by Lord Balaräma's words, Rukmé and Rukmiëé discarded their unhappiness and became happy.

Text 40 

rukmé tu täbhyäm utsåñöo
     vitathätma-manorathaù
smaran virüpa-käraëaà
     tapase sa mano dadhät

     rukmé—Rukmi; tu—indeed; täbhyäm—by Them; utsåñöaù—placed; vitatha—frustrated; ätma-manorathaù—desires; smaran—remembering; virüpa-käraëam—the cause of his becoming ugly; tapase—for austerities; sa—he; manaù—his mind; dadhät—fixed.

     In this way Rukmé's desires were thwarted by Kåñëa and Balaräma. Remembering how he had been made so ugly, Rukmé fixed his mind on performing austerities.

Text 41 

värito mantri-mukhyaiç ca
     kuëòinaà na gataù punaù
cakre bhojakaöaà näma
     niväsäya puraà param

     väritaù—stopped; mantri-mukhyaiù—by his advisors; ca—; kuëòinam—to Kundina; na—not; gataù—went; punaù—again; cakre—did; bhojakaöam—Bhojakata; näma—named; niväsäya—for residence; puram—city; param—great.

     Forbidden by his advisors, he did not return to Kuëòina. Instead he went to the city of Bhojakaöa, and there he lived.

Text 42 

rukmiëyä saha govindaù
     sa-rämo yadubhir våtaù
dvärakäà prayayau räjan
     nädayan jaya-dundubhén

     rukmiëyä—Rukmiëé; saha—with; govindaù—Kåñëa; sa-rämaù—with Balaräma; yadubhiù—by the Yädavas; våtaù—accompanied; dvärakäm—to Dvärakä; prayayau—went; räjan—O king; nädayan—sounding; jaya-dundubhén—the drums of victory.

     O king, accompanied by Rukmiëé, Balaräma, and the Yädavas, Lord Kåñëa returned to Dvärakä, where the drums of victory sounded.

Text 43 

jäte mahotsave puryäà
     rukmiëéà ruciränanäm
upayeme vidhänena
     märgaçérñe hariù svayam

     jäte—born; mahotsave—a great festival; puryäm—in the city; rukmiëém—Rukmiëé; ruciränanäm—beautiful-faced; upayeme—married; vidhänena—properly; märgaçérñe—in the month of Margasirsa; hariù—Kåñëa; svayam—personally.

     In the month of Märgasérña (November-December) there was a great festival in Dvärakä City as Lord Kåñëa married beautiful-faced Rukmiëé.

Text 44 

harer vivähe sati rukmié-pateù
     çré-rukmiëé bhüñita-rukma-mandirä
purandarasyäpi yathämaravaté
     dvärävaté puëyavaté tathä babhau

     hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; vivähe—the marriage; sati—being so; rukmié-pateù—of the husband of Rukmiëé; çré-rukmiëé—Çré Rukmiëé; bhüñita—decorated; rukma—of gold; mandirä—palace; purandarasya—of King Indra; api—even; yathä—as; amarävaté—Amaravati; dvärävaté—Dvärakä; puëyavaté—sacred; tathä—so; babhau—was splendidly manifested.

     On the day of Lord Kåñëa's marriage to Rukmiëé, the sacred city of Dvärakä, which is decoraqted with many golden palaces, was glorious like King Indra's city of Amarävaté.

Text 45 

bhaiñmé-vivähasya kathäà viciträà
     çåëoti yaù çrävayate ca bhaktyä
ihaiva bhakto vibhavena yuktaù
     sa eva muktià pratiyäti muktaù

     bhaiñmé-vivähasya—of the marriage of Rukmiëé; katham—the story; vicitram—wonderful; çåëoti—hears; yaù—one who; çrävayate—tells; ca—and; bhaktyä—with devotion; iha—here; eva—indeed; bhaktaù—a devotee; vibhavena—with glory; yuktaù—endowed; sa—he; eva—indeed; muktim—liberation; pratiyäti—attains; muktaù—liberated.

     A person who with devotion hears or tells this story of Çrématé Rukmiëé's marriage becomes a great devotee in this world. He becomes wealthy and glorious and in the end he attains liberation.

Chapter Eight
Sarva-mahiñy-udvahaù
The Marriages of All the Queens

Text 1

anyäsäà kåñëa-patnénäà
     maìgalaà çåëu maithila
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     äyur-vardhanam uttamam

     anyäsäm—of the other; kåñëa-patnénäm—wives of Lord Kåñëa; maìgalam—auspicious; çåëu—please hear; maithila—O king of Mithila; sarva—all; päpa—sins; haram—removing; puëyam—sacred; äyur-vardhanam—increasing the span of life; uttamam—transcendental.

     O king of Mithilä, please hear the auspicious story of Lord Kåñëa's other queens, a sacred story that removes all sins and increases the span of one's life.

Text 2 

saträjitäya süryeëa
     dattaù säkñät syamantakaù
ugrasenäya sa maëiù
     çré-kåñëenäbhiyäcitaù

     saträjitäya—to Satrajit; süryeëa—by the sun-god; dattaù—given; säkñät—directly; syamantakaù—the Syamantaka jewel; ugrasenäya—for Ugrasena; sa—that; maëiù—jewel; çré-kåñëena—by Lord Kåñëa; abhiyäcitaù—requested.

     When the sun-god gave the Syamantaka jewel to Saträjit, Lord Kåñëa asked that the jewel be given to King Ugrasena.

Text 3 

saträjitas taà na dadau
     dravya-lobhena maithila
dine dine svarëa-bhärän
     añöau yaù såjati svataù

     saträjitaù—Satrajit; tam—that; na—not; dadau—gave; dravya-lobhena—greedy to attain possessions; maithila—O king of Mithilä; dine—day; dine—after day; svarëa-bhärän—bharas of gold; añöau—eight; yaù—which; såjati—creates; svataù—of its own accord.

     O king of Mithilä, out of greed King Saträjit did not give away the jewel, which daily created eight bhäras of gold.

Text 4 

atha prasenas tad-bhrätä
     maëià kaëöhe nidhäya saù
saindhavaà hayam äruhya
     mågayäà vyacarad vane

     atha—then; prasenaù—Prasena; tad-bhrätä—his brother; maëim—the jewel; kaëöhe—on his neck; nidhäya—placing; saù—he; saindhavam—a sindhu; hayam—hore; äruhya—mounting; mågayäm—hunting; vyacarat—did; vane—in the forest.

     Then, placing the jewel on his neck, Saträjit's brother Prasena mounted a sindhu horse and went hunting in the forest.

Text 5 

siàhena märitaù so 'pi
     siàho jämbavatä hataù
gåhétvä taà maëià sadyo
     jämbavän sva-guhäà gataù

     siàhena—by a lion; märitaù—killed; saù—he; api—also; siàhaù—the lion; jämbavatä—by Jämbavän; hataù—killed; gåhétvä—taking; tam—it; maëim—the jewel; sadyaù—at once; jämbavän—Jämbavän; sva-guhäm—to his cave; gataù—went.

     A lion killed Prasena. Then Jämbavän killed the lion and took the jewel to his cave.

Text 6 

kåñëena nihato bhrätä
     maëigrévo vanaà gataù
näyätaù sva-sabhä-madhye
     iti saträjito 'bravét

     kåñëena—by Lord Kåñëa; nihataù—killed; bhrätä—the brother; maëigrévaù—wearing the jewel on his neck; vanam—to the forest; gataù—gone; na—not; äyätaù—returned; sva-sabhä-madhye—in the assembly; iti—thus; saträjitaù—Satrajit; abravét—said.

     Saträjit said: When my brother, wearing the jewel around his neck, went to the forest, Kåñëa killed him. That is why my brother has not returned to his people.

Text 7 

bhagavän duryaço-lipto
     nägarais tu vanaà gataù
prasenam açvaà siàhaà ca
     hataà prekñya mahä-mate

     bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; duryaçaù—with infamy; liptaù—anointed; nägaraiù—with people of the city; tu—indeed; vanam—to the forest; gataù—went; prasenam—Prasena; açvam—the horse; siàham—the lion; ca—and; hatam—killed; prekñya—seeing; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one.

     O noble-hearted one, Lord Kåñëa, His good reputation tainted by the rumor, went with some people of the city to the forest. There He saw Prasena, the horse, and the lion, all of them dead.

Text 8 

rkña-räja-bilaà gatvä
     maëià hartuà svayaà hariù
yuddhaà kåtväñöa-viàçähaà
     ajayad rkña-näyakam

     rkña—of the rksas; räja—of the king; bilam—to the cave; gatvä—going; maëim—the jewel; hartum—to take; svayam—personally; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; yuddham—fight; kåtvä—doing; añöa-viàça—twenty-eight; aham—days; ajayat—defeated; rkña-näyakam—the king of the rksas.

     Entering Jämbavän's cave to recover the jewel, for 28 days Lord Kåñëa fought with Jämbavän, the king of the åkñas.

Text 9 

tena dattä jämbavaté
     haraye kanyakä çubhä
maëinä saha räjendra
     dvärakäm äyayau hariù

     tena—by him; dattä—givebn; jämbavaté—Jämbavaté; haraye—to Lord Kåñëa; kanyakä—daughter; çubhä—beautiful; maëinä—the jewel; saha—with; räjendra—O king of kings; dvärakäm—to Dvärakä; äyayau—went; hariù—Lord Kåñëa.

     O king of kings, Jämbavän gave the jewel and his beautiful daughter, Jämbavaté, to Lord Kåñëa. Then the Lord returned to Dvärakä.

Texts 10 and 11 

saträjitäya pradadau
     maëià nirläïchanaù prabhuù
vréòito 'väì-mukho bhéto
     räjä saträjito maëim

gåhétväpi punas tasmai
     çré-kåñëäya mahätmane
satyabhämäà sutäà prädäc
     chänty-arthaà maithileçvara

     saträjitäya—to satrajit; pradadau—gave; maëim—the jewel; nirläïchanaù—free from infamy; prabhuù—the Lord; vréòitaù—embarrassed; aväk—without words; mukhaù—in his mouth; bhétaù—frightened; räjä—King; saträjitaù—Satrajit; maëim—the jewel; gåhétvä—taking; api—also; punaù—again; tasmai—to Him; çré-kåñëäya—Çré Kåñëa; mahätmane—noble-hearted; satyabhämäm—Satyabhämä; sutäm—his daughter; prädät—gave; chänty-artham—to appease the Lord; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä.

     His good reputation restored, Lord Kåñëa gave the Jewel to Saträjit. Embarrassed, frightened, and speechless, Saträjit gave his daughter, Satyabhämä, in marriage to Lord Kåñëa to pacify Him.

Text 12 

päëòavänäà sahäyärthaà
     indraprasthaà gato hariù
tatraiva varñikän mäsän
     nyavätséd bandhu-vatsalaù

     päëòavänäm—pf the Pandavas; sahäyärtham—forhelp; indraprastham—to hastinapura; gataù—went; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; tatra—there; eva—indeed; varñikän—of the monsoon; mäsän—the months; nyavätsét—resided; bandhu-vatsalaù—who loves His relatives.

     Then Lord Kåñëa, who dearly loves His relatives, went to Hastinäpura and stayed there for the months of the monsoon to help the Päëòavas.

Text 13 

ekadä ratham äruhya
     harir gäëòévinä saha
su-nire yamunä-tére
     mågayärthé viniryayau

     ekadä—one day; ratham—a chariot; äruhya—mounting; hariù—Kåñëa; gäëòévinä—with Arjuna; saha—with; su-nire—beautiful waters; yamunä-tére—on the Yamunä's shore; mågayärthé—wishing to hunt; viniryayau—went.

     One day Kåñëa and Arjuna went hunting on the shore of the beautiful Yamunä.

Text 14 

tapaç caranté kälindé
     çré-kåñëaà varam icchati
darçitä päëòavenäpi
     täà gåhétvä jagäma ha

     tapaù—austerities; caranté—performing; kälindé—Kälindé; çré-kåñëam—to Çré Kåñëa; varam—as her husband; icchati—desring; darçitä—showed; päëòavena—by Arjuna; api—even; täm—her; gåhétvä—taking; jagäma—went; ha—indeed.

     There Arjuna found Kälindé, who had been performing austerities to attain Lord Kåñëa as her husband. Arjuna showed her to Lord Kåñëa, and He accepted her and took her with Him.

Text 15 

dvärakäm etya kälindéà
     sürya-kanyäà manoharäm
upayeme vidhänena
     vitanvan maìgalaà param

     dvärakäm—to Dvärakä; etya—going; kälindém—Kälindé; sürya-kanyäm—the daughter of the sun-god; manoharäm—beautiful; upayeme—married; vidhänena—according to the proper rituals; vitanvan—giving; maìgalam—auspiciousness; param—great.

     Returning to Dvärakä, Lord Kåñëa married beautiful Kälindé, the sun-god's daughter, in a proper and auspicious ritual.

Text 16 

ävantya-räja-tanujäà
     mitravindäà manoharäm
svayamvare täà jahära
     bhagavän rukmiëéà yathä

     ävantya-räja-tanujäm—the daughter of the king of Avanti-pura; mitravindäm—Mitravindä; manoharäm—beautiful; svayamvare—in the svayamvara; täm—her; jahära—took; bhagavän—the Lord; rukmiëém—Rukmiëé; yathä—as.

     Then, as He had kidnapped Rukmiëé, Lord Kåñëa kidnapped beautiful Mitravindä, the princess of Avantya-deça, at the time of her svayamvara.

Text 17 

nagnajit-kanyakäà satyäà
     damitvä sapta go-våñän
paçyatäà sarva-lokänäà
     upayeme hariù svayam

     nagnajit-kanyakäm—the daughter of King Nagnajit; satyäm—Stayä; damitvä—subduing; sapta—seven; go-våñän—bulls; paçyatäm—looking on; sarva-lokänäm—as all the people; upayeme—married; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; svayam—personally.

     Then, after subduing seven bulls as all the people watched, Lord Kåñëa married Satyä, the daughter of KIng Nagnajit.

Text 18 

kaikeya-räja-tanujäà
     bhadräà tu bhagavän hariù
kälindém iva täà çaçvad
     upayeme vidhänataù

     kaikeya-räja-tanujäm—the daughter of the kin g of Kaikeya; bhadräm—Bhadrä; tu—indeed; bhagavän—Lord; hariù—Kåñëa; kälindém—Kälindé; iva—like; täm—her; çaçvat—eternally; upayeme—married; vidhänataù—according to the proper rituals.

     Then, as He had married Kälindé, Lord Kåñëa married Bhadrä, the princess of Kaikeya, in a proper ritual.

Text 19 

båhatsena-sutäà räjal
     lakñmaëäà lakñaëair yutäm
chittvä matsyam arén jitvä
     jagräha bhagavän hariù

     båhatsena—of Båhatsena; sutäm—the daughter; räjan—O king; lakñmaëäm—Lakñmaëä; lakñaëaiù—with virtues; yutäm—endowed; chittvä—cutting; matsyam—a fish; arén—enemies; jitvä—defeating; jagräha—took; bhagavän—Lord; hariù—Kåñëa.

     O king, after piercing a fish and defeating many rivals, Lord Kåñëa took virtuous Lakñmaëä, the daughter of King Båhatsena.

Text 20 

tathä ñoòaça-sähasraà
     çataà ca nåpa-kanyakäù
bhaumaà hatvä tan-nirodhäd
     ähåtäç cäru-darçanäù

     tathä—then; ñoòaça-sähasraà çatam—16,100; ca—and; nåpa-kanyakäù—princesses; bhaumam—Bhaumäsura; hatvä—killing; tan-nirodhät—from his prison; ähåtäç—taken; cäru-darçanäù—very beautiful.

     Then Lord Kåñëa killed the demon Bhaumäsura and released from his prison 16,100 beautiful princesses.

Text 21 

täsäà muhürta ekasmin
     nänägäreñu yoñitäm
sa-vidhià jagåhe päëén
     nänä-rüpaù sva-mäyayä

     täsäm—of them; muhürte—in a moment; ekasmin—single; nänägäreñu—in many differed rooms; yoñitäm—of the women; sa-vidhim—according to the proper rituals; jagåhe—accepted; päëén—the hand; nänä-rüpaù—in many forms; sva-mäyayä—by His mystic potency.

     By the arrangement of His yogamäyä potency expanding into many forms, Lord Kåñëa accepted the hands of all these girls in many different rooms in a single moment.

Text 22 

ekaikaças täù kåñëasya
     puträn daça daçäbaläù
ajénanann anavamän
      pituù sarvätma-sampadä

     ekaikaçaù—one by one; täù—them; kåñëasya—of Lord Kåñëa; puträn—sons; daça—ten; daça—and ten; abaläù—women; ajénanan—gave birth; anavamän—exalted; pituù—of their father; sarvätma-sampadä—with all the virtues.

     Each wife gave birth to ten exalted sons, each son having all his father's virtues.

Text 23 

rukmiëyäà bhéñma-kanyäyäà
     pradyumnaù prathamo 'bhavat
kämadevävatäro 'yaà
     pitåvat-sarva-lakñaëaù

     rukmiëyäm—in Rukmiëé; bhéñma-kanyäyäm—the daughter of Bhjismaka; pradyumnaù—Pradyumna; prathamaù—the first; abhavat—was; kämadeva-avatäraù—an incarnation of Kämadeva; ayam—who; pitå—his father; vat—like; sarva—all; lakñaëaù—the qualities.

     From Rukmiëé was born the first son, Pradyumna, who had all the transcendental qualities of His father, and who was an incarnation of Kämadeva.

Text 24 

çambaro nirdayas tokaà
     håtväbdhau taà samäkñipat
matsyodare gato so 'pi
     na mamära hareù sutaù

     çambaraù—Sambara; nirdayaù—merciless; tokam—the child; håtvä—kidnapping; abdhau—in the ocean; tam—him; samäkñipat—threw; matsya—of a fish; udare—in the belly; gataù—entered; saù—he; api—even; na—not; mamära—died; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; sutaù—the son.

     Then merciless Çambara kidnapped the infant Pradyumna and threw him in the ocean. Lord Kåñëa's son Pradyumna entered the belly of a great fish and did not die.

Text 25 

matsyodarän nirgato 'sau
     bhäryayä paripälitaù
jïätvä çatru-kåtäà värtäà
     sa kaåñëé rüòha-yauvanaù

     matsya—of the fish; udarät—from the belly; nirgataù—gone; asau—he; bhäryayä—by his wife; paripälitaù—protected; jïätvä—understanding; çatru—by his enemy; kåtäm—done; värtäm—information; sa—he; kaåñëé—the son of Lord Kåñëa; rüòha-yauvanaù—in full youth.

     Taken from the fish's belly, and carefully protected by his wife, Pradyumna suddenly grew to become a young man. Then he understood what his enemy had done.

Text 26 

hatvä taà çambaraà çatruà
     bhäryayä varayä yutaù
dvärakäm äyayau räjaàs
     citraà karma ca tasya tat

     hatvä—killing; tam—him; çambaram—Sambara; çatrum—his enemy; bhäryayä—with his wife; varayä—beautiful; yutaù—with; dvärakäm—to Dvärakä; äyayau—went; räjan—O king; citram—wonder; karma—deed; ca—and; tasya—of him; tat—that.

     O king, after killing his enemy Çambara, Pradyumna went with his beautiful wife to Dvärakä. His deeds are certainly very wonderful.

Text 27 

sa rukmiëo duhitaraà
     håtvä bhojakaöät purät
svayamvara-sthaläd räjann
     upayeme mahä-rathaù

     sa—he; rukmiëaù—of Rukmé; duhitaram—the daughter; håtvä—kidnapping; bhojakaöät—from Bhojakata; purät—city; svayamvara-sthalät—from the place of the svayamvara; räjann—O king; upayeme—married; mahä-rathaù—the great chariot-fighter.

     The great chariot-fighter Pradyumna also kidnapped Rukmé's daughter from the place of her svayamvara in Bhojakaöa City and married her.

Text 28 

tasmät suto 'niruddho 'bhün
     nägäyuta-balänvitaù
sura-jyeñöhävatäro 'yaà
     çäradendévara-prabhaù

     tasmät—from him; sutaù—the son; aniruddhaù—Aniruddha; abhüt—was; nägäyuta-balänvitaù—as strong as ten thousand elephants; sura—of the demigods; jyeñöha—the best; avatäraù—the incarnation; ayam—he; çäradendévara-prabhaù—glorious as a blue lotus growing in the autumn.

     From Pradyumna was born a son, Aniruddha, who was strong as ten thousand elephants and glorious as a blue autumn lotus. He was an incarnation of the first of the demigods.

Text 29 

catur-vyühävatärasya
     paripürëatamasya hi
evaà vicitraà caritaà
     vivähänäà su-maìgalam

     catur-vyühävatärasya—of the incarnation of the four expansions of the catur-vyüha; paripürëatamasya—perfect; hi—indeed; evam—thus; vicitram—wonder; caritam—stroy; vivähänäm—of the marriages; su-maìgalam—very auspicious.

     This is the wonderful and auspicious story of the marriages of Lord Kåñëa, the origin of the catur-vyüha expansions of the Lord.

Text 30 

sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     äyur-vardhanam uttamam
mayä te kathitaà räjan
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; äyur-vardhanam—increasing the span of life; uttamam—transcendental; mayä—by me; te—indeed; kathitam—spoken; räjan—O king; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—do you wish.

     O king, now I have spoken to you this sacred story, which removes all sins and increases one's span of life. What more do you wish to hear?

Chapter Nine
Çré Dvärakägamana-käraëa
The Arrival of Çré Dvärakä 

Text 1

çré-bahuläçva uväca 

triçu lokeçu vikhyätä
     dhanyä vai dvärakä-puré
paripürëatamaù säkçäc
     chré-kåçëo yatra väsa-kåt

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; triçu—in the three; lokeçu—worlds; vikhyatä—famous; dhanyä—glorious; vai—indeed; dvärakä-puré—the city of Dvärakä; paripürëatamaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkçäc—directly; çré-kåçëaù—Çré Kåçëa; yatra—where; väsa-kåt—resides.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: Glorious Dvärakä City is famous in the three worlds. Çré Kåçëa, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, resides there.

Text 2 

çré-kåçëasyäëga-sambhütä
     puré dväravaté çrutä
kasmäd ihägatä brahman
     kasmin käle vada prabho

     çré-kåçëasya—of Lord Kåçëa; aëga—from the body; sambhütä—born; puré—the city; dväravaté—Dvärakä; çrutä—heard; kasmät—how?; iha—here; ägatä—come; brahman—O brähmaëa; kasmin—in what?; käle—time; vada—please tell; prabhaù—O master.

     I have heard that Dvärakä City was manifested from Lord Kåçëa's transcendental body. How and when did it come to this earth? O master, please tell.

Text 3 

çré-närada uväca 

sädhu sädhu tvayä påçöaà
     dvärakägama-käraëam
yac chrutvä çuddhatäà yäti
     loka-ghäty api pätaké

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; sädhu—well done; sädhu—well don; tvayä—by you; påçöam—asked; dvärakä—of Dvärakä; ägama—arrival; käraëam—the reason; yat—which; çhrutvä—hearing; çuddhatäm—purity; yäti—attains; loka-ghäty—a murderer; api—even; pätaké—a sinner.

     Çré Närada said: Excellent. You have asked an excellent question. By hearing the reason for Dvärakä's arrival on this earth, even a great sinner, or even a murderer becomes pure at heart.

Text 4 

çaryätir näma räjäbhüc
     cakravarté manoù sutaù
cakära räjyaà dharmeëa
     varçänäm ayutaà bhuvi

     çaryätiù—Saryati; näma—named; räjä—a king; abhüt—was; cakravarté—the ruler; manoù—of Manu; sutaù—the son; cakära—did; räjyam—kingdom; dharmeëa—according to religious principles; varçänäm—of years; ayutam—ten thousand; bhuvi—on the earth.

     There was a king named Çaryäti who for ten thousand years ruled the earth according to religious principles.

Text 5 

uttänabarhir änarto
     bhüriçeëa iti trayaù
çaryäter abhavan puträù
     sarva-dharma-bhåtäà varäù

     uttänabarhiù—Uttanabarhi; änartaù—Anarta; bhüriçeëa—Bhurisena; iti—thus; trayaù—three; çaryäteù—of Saryati; abhavan—were; puträù—sons; sarva-dharma-bhåtäm—of the followers of religion; varäù—the best.

     Çaryäti had three very pious sons sons: Uttänabarhi, Anarta, and Bhüriçeëa.

Text 6 

uttänabarhiçe purväà
     bhüriçeëäya dakçiëäm
paçcimäà ca diçaà sarväà
     änartäya dadau nåpaù

     uttänabarhiçe—to Uttanabarhi; purväm—the east; bhüriçeëäya—to Bhurisena; dakçiëäm—the south; paçcimäm—the west; ca—and; diçam—direction; sarväm—all; änartäya—to Anarta; dadau—gave; nåpaù—the king.

     To Uttänabarhi King Çaryäti gave the eastern part of his kingdom, to Bhüriçeëa he gave the southern part, and to Anarta he gave the western part.

Text 7 

mameyaà hi mahé kåtsnä
     mayä dharmeëa pälitä
balärjitä baliçöhena
     yüyaà taà pälayiçyatha

     mama—of me; iyam—this; hi—indeed; mahé—earth; kåtsnä—entire; mayä—by me; dharmeëa—according to religious principles; pälitä—protected; bala—by my strength; arjitä—earned;  baliçöhena—most powerful; yüyam—you; tam—this; pälayiçyatha—will protect.

     King Çaryäti said to them: This entire earth is mine. I rule and protect it according to religious principles. I am most powerful. I have conquered this earth by my own power. In the future you three will also rule and protect this earth.

Text 8 

pitur vacaù samäkarëya
     änarto madhyamaù sutaù
jïäné jïänamayaà väkyaà
     uväca prahasann iva

     pituù—of the father; vacaù—the words; samäkarëya—hearing; änartaù—Anarta; madhyamaù—the middle; sutaù—son; jïäné—wise; jïänamayam—wise; väkyam—words; uväca—spoke; prahasann—laughing; iva—as if.

     Hearing his father's words, the middle son, Anarta, who was very wise, laughed and spoke words of great wisdom.

Text 9 

çré-änarta uväca 

taveyaà na mahé kåtsnä
     na tvayä pälitä kvacit
na tvad-balärjitä räjan
     baliçöho bhagavän vibhuù

     çré-änarta uväca—Çré Anarta said; tava—of you; iyam—this; na—not; mahé—earth; kåtsnä—entire; na—not; tvayä—by you; pälitä—protected; kvacit—in any way; na—not; tvad-balärjitä—won by your strength; räjan—O king; baliçöhaù—most powerful; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vibhuù—all-powerful.

     Çré Anarta said: You do not own this earth. Nor do you rule and protect it. Nor did you conquer it with your own power. Only the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the all-powerful ruler of this earth.

Text 10 

mahé çré-kåçëadevasya
     tenaiva paripälitä
tat-tejasä jitä kåtsnä
     baliçöho na hareù samaù

     mahé—the earth; çré-kåçëadevasya—of Lord Kåçëa; tena—by Him; eva—indeed; paripälitä—protected; tat-tejasä—by His power; jitä—conquered; kåtsnä—entire; baliçöhaù—most powerful; na—not; hareù—to Lord Kåçëa; samaù—equal.

     The earth is Lord Kåçëa's property. He rules and protects it. He conquered it with His great power. No one is powerful like Lord Kåçëa.

Text 11 

sa eva viçvaà sva-kåtaà
     såjaty atti ca päti ca
sa eva brahma paramaà
     kälaù kalayatäà prabhuù

     sa—He; eva—indeed; viçvam—the universe; sva-kåtam—made by Him; såjaty—creates; atti—destroys; ca—and; päti—maintains; ca—and; sa—He; eva—indeed; brahma—Brahman; paramam—Supreme; kälaù—time; kalayatäm—of controllers; prabhuù—the master.

     He creates, maintains, and destroys this universe. He is the Supreme Brahman. He is time, the master of all that subdue.

Text 12 

yo 'ntaù praviçya bhütäni
     bhütair apy akhiläçrayaù
sa viçväkhyo 'dhiyajïo 'sau
     paripürëatamaù svayam

     yaù—who; antaù—within; praviçya—entering; bhütäni—elements and living entities; bhütaiù—by teh elements and living entities; apy—also; akhila—of all; äçrayaù—the shelter; sa—He; viçva—the universe; äkhyaù—named; adhiyajïaù—tne object of sacrifices; asau—He; paripürëatamaù—the most perfect; svayam—Himself.

     He has entered within all living entities and all elements. He is the shelter and resting place of all living entities and all elements. He is the entire universe. He is the object of all sacrifices. He is the most perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead. 

Text 13 

yad-bhayäd vati väto 'yaà
     süryas tapati yad-bhayät
yad-bhayäd varçate devo
     måtyuç carati yad-bhayät

     yad-bhayät—out of fear of whom; vati—blows; vätaù—the wind; ayam—he; süryaù—the sun; tapati—shines; yad-bhayät—out of fear of whom; yad-bhayät—out of fear of him; varçate—rains; devaù—Indra; måtyuù—death; carati—moves; yad-bhayät—out of fear of whom.

     Out of fear of Him the wind blows. Out of fear of Him the sun shines. Out of fear of Him Indra gives rain. Out of fear of Him death moves on the earth.

Text 14 

paripürëatamaà säkçäc
     chré-kåçëaà parameçvaram
bhaja sarvätmanä räjann
     ahaëkära-vivarjitaù

     paripürëatamam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkçät—Himself; çré-kåçëam—Çré Kåçëa; parameçvaram—the Supreme controller; bhaja—please worship; sarvätmanä—with all your heart; räjann—O king; ahaëkära-vivarjitaù—free from false ego.

     O king, please become free from pride and false ego and with all your heart worship Çré Kåçëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 15 

çré-närada uväca 

jïänaà präpto 'pi çaryätir
     äkçiptaù putra-väk-çaraiù
änartaà sva-sutaà präha
     ruçä prasphuritädharaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; jïänam—knowledge; präptaù—attained; api—although; çaryätiù—Saryati; äkçiptaù—wounded; putra-väk-çaraiù—by the arrows of his son's words; änartam—to Anarta; sva-sutam—his own son; präha—said; ruçä—angrily; prasphurita—trembling; adharaù—his lips.

     Wounded by the arrows of his son's words, and his lips trembling in anger even though what he was confronted with was the truth, Çaryäti spoke to his son Anarta.

Text 16 

çaryätir uväca 

düraà gaccha asad-buddhe
     guruvad bhäçase katham
yävad bhütaà tu me räjyaà
     tävat tvaà me mahéà vasa

     çaryätiù uväca—Saryati said; düram—far away; gaccha—go; asad-buddhe—O fool; guruvat—like a guru; bhäçase—you speak; katham—why?; yävat—as; bhütam—manifested; tu—indeed; me—of me; räjyam—the kingdom; tävat—that; tvam—you; me—not; mahém—earth; vasa—should reside.

     Çaryäti said: Fool, get out! Why do you talk as if you were my teacher? You may not live any place in my kingdom.

Text 17 

yas tvayärädhitaù kåçëaù
     so 'pi sarva-sahäya-kåt
na navénäà kià mahéà te
     bhagavän eva däsyati

     yaù—who; tvayä—by you; ärädhitaù—worshiped; kåçëaù—Kåçëa; saù—He; api—even; sarva-sahäya-kåt—giving you all assistance; na—not; navénäm—new; kim—whether; mahém—earth; te—to you; bhagavän—the Lord; eva—indeed; däsyati—will give.

     Take help from this Kåçëa you worship. Will He not give you some new land not now a part of the earth? 

Text 18 

çré-närada uväca 

ity uktas tu tadänärto
     räjänaà präha mänadaù
yatra te ca mahé-räjyaà
     tatra väso na me bhavet

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ity—thus; uktaù—spoken; tu—undeed; tadä—then; änartaù—Anarta; räjänam—to the king; präha—said; mänadaù—respectful; yatra—where; te—of you; ca—and; mahé-räjyam—the kingdom of the earth; tatra—there; väsaù—residence; na—not; me—of me; bhavet—will be.

     Çré Närada said: Addressed in this way, respectful Anarta said to the king, “I will not live anywhere in your kingdom, which extends to all the countries of the earth."

Text 19 

piträ niùsärito räjïäpy
     änarto 'bdhi-taöaà gataù
veläm etya tapas tepe
     varçänäm ayutaà jale

     piträ—by teh father; niùsäritaù—expelled; räjïä—by the king; api—also; änartaù—Anarta; abdhi—of the ocean; taöam—to the shore; gataù—went; veläm—on the coast; etya—going; tapaù—austerities; tepe—performed; varçänäm—of years; ayutam—ten thousand; jale—in the water.

     Banished by his father, Anarta went to the seacoast and entered the ocean, where he performed austerities for ten thousand years.

Text 20 

prema-lakçaëayä bhaktyä
     santuçöo bhagavän hariù
tasmai svaà darçanaà dattvä
     varaà brühéty uväca ha

     prema-lakçaëayä—characterized by love; bhaktyä—with devotion; santuçöaù—pleased; bhagavän—the Lord; hariù—Kåçëa; tasmai—to him; svam—His own; darçanam—sight; dattvä—giving; varam—boon; brühi—speak; iti—thus; uväca—said; ha—indeed.

     Pleased by his loving devotion, Lord Kåçëa appeared before him and said, “Ask for a boon."

Text 21 

kåtäïjali-puöo bhütvä-
     narta utthäya çéghrataù
nanäma kåçëa-pädäbjaà
     romäïcé prema-vihvalaù

     kåtäïjali-puöaù—with folded hands; bhütvä—becoming; anarta—Anarta; utthäya—rising; çéghrataù—at once; nanäma—bowed; kåçëa-pädäbjam—to Lord Kåçëa's lotus feet; romäïcé—his hairs erect; prema-vihvalaù—overcome with love. 

     Overcome with love, and the hairs of his body erect with joy, Anarta quickly stood up and with folded hands bowed before Lord Kåçëa's lotus feet.

Text 22 

çré-änarta uväca 

namas te väsudeväya
     namaù saëkarçaëäya ca
pradyumnäyäniruddhäya
     sätvatäà pataye namaù

     çré-änarta uväca—Çré Anarta said; namaù—obeisances; te—to You; väsudeväya—Lord Väsudeva; namaù—obeisances; saëkarçaëäya—to Lord ;Saëkarçaë ca—and; pradyumnäya—to Lord Pradyumna; aniruddhäya—to Lord Aniruddha; sätvatäm—of the devotees; pataye—to the master; namaù—obeisances.

     Çré Anarta said; I offer my respectful obeisances to You, who are Lord Väsudeva. I offer my respectful obeisances to You, who are Lord Saëkarçaëa, Lord Pradyumna, and Lord Aniruddha. I offer my respectful obeisances to You, who are the master of the devotees.

Text 23 

piträ niçkäsito deva
     tväm ahaà çaraëaà gataù
dehi mahyaà bhümim anyäà
     yatra väso hi me bhavet

     piträ—by my father; niçkäsitaù—banished; deva—O Lord; tväm—to You; aham—I; çaraëam—take shelter; gataù—gone; dehi—please give; mahyam—to me; bhümim—a place; anyäm—another; yatra—where; väsaù—residence; hi—indeed; me—of me; bhavet—may be.

     I, who was banished by my father, now take shelter of You. O Lord, please give me a country where I may reside, a country outside my father's kingdom of the earth.

Text 24 

dhruvo 'pi yat-prasädena
     yayau sarvottamaà padam
tasmai namo bhagavate
     praëata-kleça-häriëe

     dhruvaù—Dhruva; api—also; yat-prasädena—by whose mercy; yayau—attained; sarvottamam—the best of all; padam—abode; tasmai—to Him; namaù—obeisances; bhagavate—to the Supreme Lord; praëata—of the surrendered souls; kleça—sthe sufferings; häriëe—the remover.

     I offer my respectful obeisances to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who removes the sufferings of the surrendered souls and who mercifully gave to Dhruva Mahäräja the best of all abodes.

Text 25 

çré-närada uväca 

änartam änataà dénaà
     bhagavän déna-vatsalaù
prasannaù çré-mukhenäha
     megha-gambhérayä girä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; änartam—to Anarta; änatam—bowing down; dénam—poor; bhagavän—the Lord; déna-vatsalaù—kind to the downtrodden; prasannaù—please; çré-mukhena—with His glorious mouth; äha—spoke; megha-gambhérayä—deep as thunder; girä—with words.

     Çré Närada said: Then the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is kind to the downtrodden and who was pleased at heart, with His glorious mouth spoke words deep like thunder to poor Anarta, who was bowing down before Him.

Text 26 

çré-bhagavän uväca 

anyä na mediné loke
     kià kartavyaà mayä nåpa
sva-vacas tad åtaà kartuà
     tvad-bhaktyä paritoçitaù

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; anyä—another; na—not; mediné—earth; loke—in the world; kim—what?; kartavyam—should be done; mayä—by Me; nåpa—O king; sva-vacaù—own words; tat—that; åtam—truthful; kartum—to make; tvad-bhaktyä—by your devotion; paritoçitaù—satisfied.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: I am pleased by Your devotion, but I I do not have another earth in this universe to give you. O king, what should I do to grant the boon you ask? 

Text 27 

tasmäd vai svasya lokasya
     vaikuëöhasya parantapa
bhü-khaëòaà yojana-çataà
     dadämi vimalaà çubham

     tasmät—therefore; vai—indeed; svasya—own; lokasya—planet; vaikuëöhasya—Vaikuëöha; parantapa—O mighty one; bhü-khaëòam—on the earth; yojana-çatam—eight hundred miles; dadämi—I give; vimalam—pure; çubham—glorious.

     Therefore, O mighty one, I will place on this earth an eight-hundred mile portion of my pure and glorious Vaikuëöha world.

Texts 28 and 29 

çré-närada uväca 

ity uktvänärta-nåpatià
     bhagavän bhakta-vatsalaù
vaikuëöhäc ca samutpatya
     bhü-khaëòaà çata-yojanam

cakraà sudarçanaà dhåtvä
     samudre bhéma-nädini
dadhära bhagavän devas
     tasyopari videha-räö

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ity—thus; uktvänärta-nåpatim—speaking; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhakta—to the devotees; vatsalaù—affectionate; vaikuëöhät—from Vaikuëöha; ca—and; samutpatya—picking up; bhü-khaëòam—place; çata-yojanam—eight hundred miles; cakram—cakra; sudarçanam—Sudarçana; dhåtvä—taking; samudre—in the ocean; bhéma-nädini—filled with terrible sounds; dadhära—held; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; devaù—the Lord; tasya—it; upari—above; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Videha, after speaking these words, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who loves His devotees, took His Sudarçana-cakra, lifted up an eight-hundred mile portion of Vaikuëöha, and placed it in the ocean filled with fearful sounds. 

Text 30 

änarto lakça-varçäntaà
     tatra räjyaà cakära ha
putra-pautra-samäyukto
     räjan vaikuëöha-sampadam

     änartaù—Anarta; lakça-varçäntam—after ten thousand years; tatra—there; räjyam—kingdom; cakära—did; ha—indeed; putra—sons; pautra—and grandsons; samäyuktaù—endowed; räjan—O king; vaikuëöha-sampadam—the opulence of Vaikuëöha.

     O king, in this way, after ten thousand years Anarta attained a kingdom with all the opulences of Vaikuëöha and a dynasty with many noble sons and grandsons.

Text 31 

idaà çrutvätha çaryätiù
     pitä vai vismito 'bhavat
änarto näma deço 'bhüd
     änartasya prasädataù

     idam—this; çrutvä—hearing; atha—then; çaryätiù—Saryati; pitä—the father; vai—indeed; vismitaù—astonished; abhavat—became; änartaù—Anarta; näma—named; deçaù—the country; abhüt—became; änartasya—of Anarta; prasädataù—by the mercy.

     By the Lord's mercy that country was named Anarta after him. When he heard all this, Anarta's father, Çaryäti, became astonished. 

Text 32 

revatas tasya putro 'bhüc
     chré-çailasya gireù sutam
samutpatya sva-hastäbhyäà
     änarteçu nyapätayat

     revataù—Revata; tasya—of him; putraù—the son; abhüt—was; çré-çailasya gireù—of Mount Çaila; sutam—the son; samutpatya—lifting; sva-hastäbhyäm—with his own hands; änarteçu—in the country of Anarta; nyapätayat—placed.

     Anarta's son was named Revata. Revata lifted the mountain that was Mount Çaila's son and placed it in the country of Anarta.

Text 33 

so 'bhüd revata-nämnäpi
     raivato näma parvataù
kuçasthaléà vinirmäya
     räjyaà kåtvätha revataù

     saù—it; abhüt—became; revata-nämnä—by the name Revata; api—also; raivataù—Raivata; näma—named; parvataù—mountain; kuçasthalém—Kuçasthalé; vinirmäya—creating; räjyam—kingdom; kåtvä—making; atha—then; revataù—Revata.

     That mountain was named Raivata after him. Building a great capitol city named Kuçasthalé, Revata ruled the kingdom of Anarta.

Text 34 

samädäya svakäà kanyäà
     brahmalokaà jagäma ha
baladeva-vivähe 'pi
     tat-kathä kathitä mayä 
tasmäd dväravatéà puëyäà 
     mokça-dväraà viduù suräù

     samädäya—taking; svakäm—his own; kanyäm—daughter; brahmalokam—to Brahmaloka; jagäma—went; ha—indeed; baladeva—to Lord Balaräma; vivähe—in the marriage; api—also; tat-kathä—that story; kathitä—spoken; mayä—by me; tasmät—from that; dväravatém—to Dvärakä; puëyäm—sacred; mokça-dväram—the gateway to liberation; viduù—know; suräù—the demigods.

     Revata took his daughter to Brahmaloka. That I have alredy described in the story of her marriage to Lord Balaräma. The demigods know that the sacred city of Dvärakä is the gateway to liberation.
.pa

Chapter Ten
Gomaty-upäkhyäne cakra-tértha-mähätmya
In the Description of the Gomaté River, the Glories of Cakra-tértha

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

itthaà mayä te kathitaà
     dvärakägama-käraëam
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     kià bhüyaù çrotum icchasi

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ittham—thus; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—said; dvärakägama-käraëam—the cause of the arrival of Dvärakä; sarva-päpa-haram—removing all sins; puëyam—sacred; kim—what?; bhüyaù—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—you wish.

     Çré Närada said: Thus I have told to you the story of how Dvärakä came to the earth, a sacred story that remnoves all sins. What more do you wish to hear?

Text 2 

çré-bahuläçva uväca 

sarva-tértha-mayé bhümir
     dvärakä nagaré çubhä
tatra mukhyäni térthäni
     vada mäà muni-sattama

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; sarva-tértha-mayé—consisting of all holy places; bhümiù—the land; dvärakä—Dvärakä; nagaré—city; çubhä—beautiful; tatra—there; mukhyäni—most important; térthäni—holy places; vada—please tell; mäm—to me; muni-sattama—O best of sages.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: All holy places are manifested in beautiful Dvärakä City. O best of sages, please describe to me the most important of the holy places there.

Text 3 

çré-närada uväca 

ä-prabhäsät térthamayé
     maryädé-kåtya yajïiyä
bhümir mokça-pradä räjan
     dvärakä yojanaiù çatam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ä-prabhäsät—from Prabhäsa; térthamayé—consisting of the holy places; maryädé-kåtya—up to the boundary; yajïiyä—for performing yajna; bhümiù—place; mokça-pradä—giving liberation; räjan—O king; dvärakä—Dvärakä; yojanaiù—yojanas; çatam—a hundred.

     Çré Närada said: Extending all the way to Prabhäsa-tértha, the sacred land of Dvärakä is eight hundred miles in size.

Text 4 

dvärakäà nagaréà dåçövä
     naro naåäyaëo bhavet
dvärakäyäà måtaù ko 'pi
     gardabho 'pi catur-bhujaù

     dvärakäà nagarém—Dvärakä City; dåçövä—seeing; naraù—Nara; naåäyaëaù—and Näräyaëa; bhavet—may be; dvärakäyäm—in Dvärakä; måtaù—dead; ko api—someone; gardabhaù—donkey; api—even; catur-bhujaù—a four-armed resident of Vaikuëöha.

     Anyone who sees Dvärakä City attains opulences like Lord Näräyaëa. Even a donkey that dies in Dvärakä becomes a four-armed resident of Vaikuëöha. 

Text 5 

paçyan çåëvan kathäà tasyä
     dväraketi vadan kvacit
dåçövä dadyät tåëaà måtyuà
     gato yäti paräà gatim

     paçyan—seeing; çåëvan—hearing; kathäm—talk; tasya—of it; dvärakä—Dvärakä; iti—thus; vadan—saying; kvacit—somehow; dåçövä—seeing; dadyät—placing; tåëam—a blade of grass; måtyum—death; gataù—gone; yäti—attains; paräm—the supreme; gatim—destination.

     A person who sees Dvärakä, hears about it, or speaks the word “Dvärakä", thinks everything else to be like a piece of straw. When he dies he attains the supreme destination.

Text 6 

ekadä revataà bhaktaà
     premänanda-samäkulam
prekçya svaà darçanaà dattvä
     harir açru-mukho 'bhavat

     ekadä—one day; revatam—to Revata; bhaktam—the devotee; prema—of love; änanda-samäkulam—filled with transcendental bliss; prekçya—seeing; svam—own; darçanam—sight; dattvä—giving; hariù—Kåçëa; açru-mukhaù—His face filled with tears; abhavat—was.

     One day Lord Kåçëa appeared before King Revata. Seeing that His devotee Revata was filled with the bliss of spiritual love, Lord Kåçëa shed tears that glided down His face.

Text 7 

tan-netra-bindu-sambhütä
     gomaté sa mahä-nadé
yasya darçana-mätreëa
     brahma-hatyä pramucyate

     tan-netra-bindu-sambhütä—manifested from a teardrop; gomaté—Gomaté; sa—it; mahä-nadé—the great river; yasya—of which; darçana—seeing; mätreëa—simply by; brahma-hatyä—the sin of killing a brähmaëa;  pramucyate—is freed.

     From one of the Lord's teardrops the great Gomaté river was created. Simply by seeing this river one becomes freed from the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

Text 8 

gomaté-térajaà puëyaà
     rajo yo dhärayen naraù
çata-janma-kåtät päpän
     mucyate nätra saàçayaù

     gomaté-térajam—manifested on the shore of the Gomaté; puëyam—sacred; rajaù—dust; yaù—who; dhärayen—holds; naraù—a person; çata-janma—a hundred births; kåtät—done; päpän—from sins; mucyate—is freed; na—not; atra—here; saàçayaù—doubt.

     A person who touches the sacred dust on the Gomaté's shore becomes free from the sins committed in a hundred births. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 9 

snäna-käle gomatéti
     vadaty api naraù kvacit
gomatyäà snäna-jaà puëyam
     labhate vai na saàçayaù

     snäna-käle—at the time of bathing; gomaté—Gomaté; iti—thus; vadaty—says; api—even; naraù—a person; kvacit—somehow; gomatyäm—in the Gomaté; snäna-jam—from bathing; puëyam—the piety; labhate—attains; vai—indeed; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     A person who, as he bathes, says the word “Gomaté" attains the pious result of bathing in the Gomaté. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 10 

makara-sthe ravau mäghe
     prayäge snänam äcaret
çatäçvamedhajaà puëyaà
     sampräpnoti videha-räö

     makara-sthe—in Capricorn; ravau—when the sun; mäghe—in the month of Magha (January-February); prayäge—at Prayäga; snänam—bath; äcaret—does; çatäçvamedhajam—a hundred asvamedha-yajnas; puëyam—the piety; sampräpnoti—attains; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     O king of Videha, a person who bathes at Prayäga in the month of Mägha (January-February) when the sun is in Capricorn attains the pious result of performing a hundred açvamedha-yajïas.

Text 11 

tat-sahasra-guëaà puëyaà
     gomatyäà makare ravau
gomatyäç caiva mähätmyaà
     vaktuà nälaà catur-mukhaù

     tat-sahasra-guëam—multiplied a thousand times; puëyam—piety; gomatyäm—in the Gomaté; makare—in Capricorn; ravau—when the sun; gomatyäù—of the Gomaté; ca—and; eva—indeed; mähätmyam—the glory; vaktum—to speak; na—not; alam—is able; catur-mukhaù—Brahmä with his four mouths.

     A person who bathes in the Gomaté at that time, when the sun is in Capricorn, attains a pious result a thousand times greater than that attained at Prayäga. Even the demigod Brahmä is not able to properly describe all the glories of the sacred Gomaté river.

Text 12 

gomatyäà cakra-tértheçu
     päçäëa-nicayaç ca ye
te sarve cakratäà yänti
     püjanéyäù prayatnataù

     gomatyäm—in the Gomaté; cakra-tértheçu—at Cakra-tértha; päçäëa-nicayaù—many stones; ca—and; ye—which; te—they; sarve—all; cakratäm—the state of being the Lord's cakra; yänti—attain; püjanéyäù—worshipable; prayatnataù—with earnestness.

     By the Gomaté is a sacred place named Cakra-tértha. All the stones there are incarnations of thr Lord's Sudarçana-cakra. They should be worshiped with great care.

Text 13 

cakra-cihne cakra-térthe
     dvädaçyäà snänam äcaret
cakrapäëi-padaà yäti
     päpänäà bhäjano 'pi hi

     cakra-cihne—the marek of the cakra; cakra-térthe—at Cakra-tértha; dvädaçyäm—on Dvädaçé; snänam—bath; äcaret—does; cakrapäëi-padam—the able of Lord Kåçëa, who holds thw cakra in His hand; yäti—attains; päpänäm—of sins; bhäjanaù—a reservoir; api—even; hi—indeed.

     A person, even though he is a great reservoir of sins, who on the dvädaçé day bathes at Cakra-tértha, which bears the mark of the Lord's cakra, attains the abode of Lord Kåçëa, who holds the cakra in His hand.

Text 14 

koöi-janma-kåtaiù päpaiù
     patito yo 'pi pätaké
cakra-térthasya sopänaà
     etya muktià samäruhet

     koöi-janma-kåtaiù—performed in millions of births; päpaiù—by sins; patitaù—fallen; yaù—who; api—even; pätaké—a sinner; cakra-térthasya—of cakra-térth; sopänam—the steps; etya—attaining; muktim—liberation; samäruhet—attains.

      Degraded person who has sinned in many millions of births attains liberation if he comes to the steps of Cakra-tértha.

Text 15 

çré-bahuläçva uväca 

gomatyäà hi mahä-nadyäà
     cakra-térthaà çubhärthadam
kathaà jätaà bahu-mataà
     tan me brühi mahä-mate

     çré-bahuläçva uväca—Çré Bahuläçva said; gomatyäm—at Gomaté; hi—indeed; mahä-nadyäm—the great river; cakra-tértham—Cakra-tértha; çubhärthadam—giving a great benefit; katham—how?; jätam—born; bahu-matam—considered great; tan—that; me—to me; brühi—please tell; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one.

     Çré Bahuläçva said: O noble-hearted one, please tell me how Cakra-tértha by the great Gomaté river became so glorious and beneficial.

Text 16 

çré-närada uväca 

atraivodäharantémaà
     itihäsaà purätanaà
yasya darçana-mätreëa
     päpa-häniù parä bhavet

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; atra—here; eva—indeed; udäharanti—say; imam—this; itihäsam—story; purätanam—ancient; yasya—of which; darçana-mätreëa—simnply by seeing; päpa-häniù—by release from sins; parä—great; bhavet—is.

     Çré Närada said: The sages tell an ancient story of how by simply seeing Cakra-tértha one becomes free of all sins.

Text 17 

alakeço räja-räjo
     nidhéço dharma-bhåt prabhuù
vaiçëavaà yajïam ärebhe
     kailäsottara-bhümiçu

     alakeçaù—Alakeça; räja-räjaù—king of kings; nidhéçaù—rich; dharma-bhåt—pious; prabhuù—master; vaiçëavam—for Lord Viçëu; yajïam—a yajna; ärebhe—began; kailäsottara-bhümiçu—on top of Mount Kailäsa.

     There once was a great, pious, and wealthy king named Alakeça, who performed a Viçëu-yajïa on the summit of Mount Kailäsa.

Texts 18 and 19 

tasya yajïe svayaà viçëur
     ägato vai sva-dhämataù
brahmä çivo jambhabhedé
     varuëo yadasäà patiù

väyur yamo raviù somaù
     kçitiù sarva-janeçvaré
gandharväpsarasaù siddhäù
     sarve tatra samäyayuù

     tasya—of him; yajïe—at the yajna; svayam—personally; viçëuù—Lord Viçëu; ägataù—came; vai—indeed; sva-dhämataù—from His own abode; brahmä—Brahmä; çivaù—Çiva; jambhabhedé—Indra; varuëaù—Varuëa; yadasäm—of the waters; patiù—thbe master; väyuù—Vayu; yamaù—Yama; raviù—Surya; somaù—Candra; kçitiù—Ksiti; sarva-janeçvaré—the queen of all people; gandharväpsarasaù—the Gandharvas and Apsaras; siddhäù—the Siddhas; sarve—all; tatra—there; samäyayuù—came.

     Traveling from His own abode, Lord Viçëu personally came to his yajïa, and Brahmä, Çiva, Indra, Varuëa king of the waters, Väyu, Yama, Sürya, Candra, Kçiti the earth goddess who rules all people, and all the Gandharvas, Apsaräs, and Siddhas also came.

Text 20 

devarçayaù samäjagmus
     tathä brahmarçayo nåpa
dhanädhyakço 'bhavat tasya
     putras te nalaküvaraù

     devarçayaù—the divine sages; samäjagmuù—came; tathä—so; brahmarçayaù—the Brahmana safes; nåpa—O king; dhanädhyakçaù—Kuvera; abhavat—was; tasya—of him; putraù—the son; tu—indeed; nalaküvaraù—Nalakuvara.

     O king, the devarçis and Brahmarçis also came. Kuvera and his son Nalaküvara were also there.

Text 21 

rakçäyäà vérabhadro 'bhüt
     seväyäà ca gajänanaù
tathä marud-gaëäù sarve
     pariveçaëa-käriëaù

     rakçäyäm—in protection; vérabhadraù—Vérabhadra; abhüt—was there; seväyäm—in service; ca—and; gajänanaù—Gaëeça; tathä—so; marud-gaëäù—the Maruts; sarve—all; pariveçaëa-käriëaù—serving meals.

     Vérabhadra was there as a guard. Gaëeça was there to render service. All the Maruts were there to serve meals.

Texts 22 and 23 

bähuleyaù sabhä-püjäà
     akarod dharma-tat-paraù
ghaëöänädaù pärçvamauliù
     kuverasya tu mantriëau

sarva-çastra-vidäà çreçöhau
     dänädhyakçau babhüvatuù
evaà hi vidhi-vad yajïo
     babhüva paramotsavaù

     bähuleyaù—kärttikeya; sabhä—of the assembly; püjäm—worship; akarot—did; dharma-tat-paraù—pious; ghaëöänädaù—Ghantanada; pärçvamauliù—Parsvamauli; kuverasya—of Kuvera; tu—indeed; mantriëau—the two ministers; sarva-çastra-vidäm—of they who know all the scriptures; çreçöhau—the best; dänädhyakçau—generous; babhüvatuù—were; evam—thus; hi—indeed; vidhi-vat—properly; yajïaù—the yajna; babhüva—was; paramotsavaù—a great festival.

     Kärttikeya worshiped the assembly. Kuvera's two ministers, Ghaëöänäda and Pärçvamauli, who were very generous and most learned in the scriptures, were also there. In this way the yajïa, carefully performed according to the rules and regulations, was a great and festive success.

Text 24 

adhvarävabhåta-snäto
     räja-räjo mahä-manäù
paraà bhägaà ca devebhyo
     viprebhyo dakçiëäm adät

     adhvarävabhåta-snätaù—having taken the sacrifical bath; räja-räjaù—the great king; mahä-manäù—noble-hearted; param—great; bhägam—portion; ca—and; devebhyaù—to the demigods; viprebhyaù—to the brähmaëas; dakçiëäm—daksina; adät—gave.

     Having performed the avabhåta bath, the noble-hearted king gave sacrifical offerings to the demigods and dakçiëä to the brähmaëas.

Text 25 

evaà pürëe 'dhvare mukhye
     tuçöe devarçi-sattame
äjagämätha durväsä
     daëòé chatré jaöädharaù

     evam—thus; pürëe—completed; adhvare—the yajna; mukhye—primary; tuçöe—pleased; devarçi-sattame—the best of sages and demigods; äjagäma—came; atha—then; durväsä—Durväsä; daëòé—holding a stick; chatré—holding a parasol; jaöädharaù—his hair matted.

     When the yajïa was thus completed and the sages and demigods were all pleased, Durväsä Muni, holding a stick and a parasol, suddenly arrived.

Text 26 

krodhé kåçaù pädukäëghrir
     dérgha-smaçruù kåçodaraù
darbhäsana-samit-pätra-
     måga-carma-dharaù paraù

     krodhé—angry; kåçaù—emaciated; pädukäëghriù—wearing sandals on his feet; dérgha-smaçruù—with a long beard; kåçodaraù—a slender waist; darbhäsana—a seat of kuça grass; samit-pätra—with a kamandalu; måga-carma-dharaù—wearing a deerskin; paraù—great.

     His beard was long. He carried a kamaëòalu and a kuça-grass seat. He wore sandals and a deerskin garment. He was very thin and emaciated, and he was very angry.

Text 27 

tam ägataà samägamya
     püjayitvä vidhänataù
bhaya-bhétaù parikramya
     kuveraù praëanäma ha

     tam—to him; ägatam—come; samägamya—approaching; püjayitvä—worshiping; vidhänataù—properly; bhaya-bhétaù—frightened; parikramya—circumambulating; kuveraù—Kuvera; praëanäma—bowed down; ha—indeed.

     Frightened, Kuvera approached him, worshiped him, circumambulated him, and bowed down before him.

Text 28 

adya me sa-phalaà janma
     sa-phalaà mandiraà ca me
adya me sa-phalo yajïo
     brahmaàs tvayy ägate sati

     adya—today; me—me; sa-phalam—fruitful; janma—birth; sa-phalam—fruitful; mandiram—home; ca—and; me—my; adya—today; me—my; sa-phalaù—fruitful; yajïaù—the yajna; brahmaàù—O brähmaëa; tvayi—now that you; ägate—have come; sati—being so.

     Kuvera said: O brähmaëa, now that you have come here, my life is a success, my home is a success, and this yajïa is a success.

Text 29 

itthaà santoçitas tena
     durväsä bhagavän muniù
devaà manuçya-dharmäëäà
     präha prahasitänanaù

     ittham—thus; santoçitaù—pleased; tena—by that; durväsä—Durväsä; bhagavän—Lord; muniù—the sage; devam—to the Lord; manuçya-dharmäëam—of human religious principles; präha—said; prahasitänanaù—smiling.

     Pleased by all this, the great sage Durväsä spoke about the religious duties of human beings.

Text 30 

tvaà räja-räjo dharmätmä
     däné vipra-paräyaëaù
kåtas te vaiçëavo yajïo
     viçëu-santoça-käraëaù

     tvam—you; räja-räjaù—a great king; dharmätmä—pious; däné—generous; vipra-paräyaëaù—devotedf to the brähmaëas; kåtaù—done; te—of you; vaiçëavaù—to Lord Viçëu; yajïaù—a yajna; viçëu-santoça-käraëaù—pleasing to Lord Viçëu.

     He said: You are a great king. You are pious, generous, and devoted to the brähmaëas. Your yajïa has pleased Lord Viçëu.

Text 31 

na yäcito mayä tvaà vai
     kväpi vaiçravaëa prabho
adyaiva yacanaà kurve
     jïätvä tvaà däni-sattamam

     na—not; yäcitaù—asked; mayä—by me; tvam—you; vai—indeed; kväpi—somewhere; vaiçravaëa—O Kuvera; prabhaù—O lord; adya—today; eva—indeed; yacanam—request; kurve—I do; jïätvä—knowing; tvam—you; däni-sattamam—the most generous.

     O Lord Kuvera, in the past I have never asked any favors of you, but today, aware that you are very generous by nature, I have a request to ask of you.

Text 32 

mad-yäcïäà sa-phalé-kuryäs
     tubhyaà däsyämi sad-varam
na cet tvaà bhasmasät kurve
     çäpenäti-bhayena vai

     mat—my; yäcnäm—request; sa-phalé-kuryäù—please make fruitful; tubhyam—to you; däsyämi—I will give; sad-varam—a boon; na—not; cet—if; tvam—you; bhasmasät—burned to ashes; kurve—I will make; çäpena—with a curse; ati-bhayena—fightening; vai—indeed.

     Please grant my request. If you do, I will give you a boon. If you do not, I will burn you to ashes with a frightening curse. 

Text 33 

vartante tvad-gåhe sarve
     trailokya-nidhayo navä
tan me prayaccha bhadraà te
     tad-arthaà gatavän aham

     vartante—are; tvad-gåhe—in your home; sarve—all; trailokya-nidhayaù—the wealth of the three worlds; navä—nine; tan—that; me—to me; prayaccha—please give; bhadram—auspiciousness; te—to you; tad-artham—for that purpose; gatavän—come; aham—I.

     In your home you keep the nine treasures that are the most precious in the three worlds. Please give them to me. May your life be auspicious. For that purpose I have come.

Text 34 

çré-närada uväca 

etac chrutvä räja-räjo
     däna-çéla udära-dhéù
om iti pratigåhëéçva
     präha taà guhyakeçvaraù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; etat—this; çrutvä—hearing; räja-räjaù—that great king; däna-çéla—devoted to giving charity; udära—-dhéù—generous at heart; om—yes; iti—thus; pratigåhëéçva—please take; präha—said; tam—to him; guhyakeçvaraù—Kuvera.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing these words, generous and charitable Kuvera said, “Yes. I agree. Please take them.

Text 35 

evaà nidhén pradäsyantaà
     dänädhyakçau nidhéçvaram
ghaëöänädaù pärçvamaulir
     ücatur lobha-mohitau

     evam—thus; nidhén—the treasures; pradäsyantam—about to give; dänädhyakçau—generous; nidhéçvaram—to Kuvera; ghaëöänäda—Ghantanada; pärçvamauliù—and Parsvamauli; ücatuù—said; lobha-mohitau—bewildered by greed.

     As Kuvera was about to give the nine treasures, his two ministers, Ghaëöänäda and Pärçvamauli, who were bewildered with greed, spoke.

Text 36 

dväv ücatuù 

eko 'yaà brähmaëo lobhé
     nidhibhiù kià kariçyati
lakçaà divyaà dehi cäsmai
     våttià rakça tathottaräm

     dvau—the two; ücatuù—said; ekaù—one; ayam—this; brähmaëaù—brähmaëa; lobhé—greedy; nidhibhiù—with treasures; kim—what is the need?; kariçyati—will do; lakçam—a hundred thousand; divyam—splendid; dehi—give; ca—and; asmai—to him; våttim—wealth; rakça—protect; tathä—then; uttaram—great.

     The two ministers said: What will this greedy brähmaëa do with those great treasures? Give him a hundred thousand other things and keep the nine great treasures for yourself. 

Text 37 

çré-närada uväca 

paruçaà tad-vacaù çrutvä
     durväsäù krodha-vigrahaù
bhrü-bhaëga-kuöilé-bhüte
     rakta-netre cakära ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; paruçam—harsh; tad-vacaù—their words; çrutvä—hearing; durväsäù—Durväsä; krodha-vigrahaù—filled with anger; bhrü-bhaëga-kuöilé-bhüte—knitting his eyebrows; rakta-netre—his eyes red; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     Çré Närada said: When he heard these harsh words Durväsä became filled with anger. His eyes were red and his eyebrows knitted with anger.

Text 38 

sthaléva sarva-brahmäëòaà
     cacäla nimiça-dvayam
praëataà dhanadaà vékçya
     täbhyäà çäpaà dadau muniù

     sthalé—a place; iva—as if; sarva-brahmäëòam—the entire universe; cacäla—went; nimiça-dvayam—for two brief moments; praëatam—bowing down; dhanadam—Kuvera; vékçya—seeing; täbhyäm—to them; çäpam—a curse; dadau—gave; muniù—the sage.

     For the time of two eyeblinks the entire universe shook. Seeing Kuvera humbly bowing down before him, Durväsä Muni proceeded to curse the two ministers.

Text 39 

çré-munir uväca 

ghaëöänäda mahä-duçöa
     päpa-buddhe 'ti-lubdhaka
grähavat tvaà dhana-grähé
     gräho bhava mahä-khala

     çré-munir uväca-the sage said; ghaëöänäda—O Ghantanada; mahä-duçöa—wicked; päpa-buddhe—sinful; ati-lubdhaka—very greedy; grähavat—like a crocodile; tvam—you; dhana-grähé—grasping for wealth; grähaù—a crocodile; bhava—become; mahä-khala—O wretch.

     Çré Durväsä said: Sinful, wicked, greedy Ghaëöänäda, you clutch at wealth as crocodile would clutch. I curse you: Become a crocodile! 

Text 40 

pärçvamaule päpa-buddhe
     dhana-lobha-madänvitaù
gajavat preraëaà kurvaàs
     tvaà gajo bhava durmate

     pärçvamaule—Pärçvamauli; päpa-buddhe—sinful; dhana-lobha-madänvitaù—greedy; gajavat—like an elephant; preraëam—pushing; kurvaàù—doing; tvam—you; gajaù—an elephant; bhava—become; durmate—O wretch.

     Sinful, wicked, greedy Pärçvamauli, you are pushy like an elephant. I curse you: Become an elephant!

Text 41 

çré-närada uväca 

täbhyäà çäpaà munir dattvä
     nidhià nitvä kuverataù
varaà dadau punas tasmai
     durväsä durlabhaà param

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; täbhyäm—to them; çäpam—curse; muniù—the sage; dattvä—giving; nidhim—wealth; nitvä—taking; kuverataù—from Kuvera; varam—boon; dadau—gave; punaù—again; tasmai—to him; durväsä—Durväsä; durlabham—rare; param—great.

     Çré Närada said: After thus cursing the two ministers, Durväsä Muni took the nine treasures from Kuvera and then offered him a great and rare boon.

Text 42 

asmäd dänäc ca dvi-guëä
     bhavantu nidhayo nava
ity uktvä sa-nidhiù prägäd
     aho tejéyasäà balam

     asmät—from bim; dänät—from the wealth; ca—and; dvi-guëä—doubled; bhavantu—may be; nidhayaù—treasures; nava—nine; ity—thus; uktvä—saying; sa-nidhiù—the treasure; pragät—went; ahaù—Oh; tejéyasäm—power; balam—power.

     Durväsä Muni said, “Because you have offered them to me, I give you the boon that your nine treasures will now become twice as valuable as they were." As soon as these words were spoken the nine treasures became twice as valuable.

Chäpter Eleven
Çré Cakra-térthotpattau gaja-gräha-mokça
In the Creation of Cakra-tértha, the Liberation of the Elephant and the Crocodile

Text 1

kuvera-mantriëau dénau
     vipra-çäpa-vimohitau
tatra säkçät svayaà viçëuù
     präha tau çaraëaà gatau

     kuvera-mantriëau—the two ministers of Kuvera; dénau—poor; vipra-çäpa-vimohitau—bewildered by the brähmaëa's curse; tatra—there; säkçät—directly; svayam—personally; viçëuù—to Lord Viò\ëu; präha—said; tau—they; çaraëam—shelter; gatau—gone.

     Bewildered by the brähmaëa's curse, Kuvera's two unhappy ministers took shelter of Lord Viçëu.

Text 2 

çré-bhagavän uväca 

mad-arcä-samyute yajïe
     bhavantau duùkha-samyutau
brähmaëänäà vaco 'haà vai
     düré-kartuà na ca kçamaù

      çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; mad-arcä-samyute—engaged in My worship; yajïe—in the yajna; bhavantau—you both; duùkha-samyutau—unhappy; brähmaëänäm—of the brähmaëas; vacaù—the words; aham—I; vai—indeed; düré-kartum—to throw far away; na—not; ca—and; kçamaù—am able.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: You two worshiped Me in the yajïa, but now you are unhappy. I have no power to negate the words of the brähmaëas.

Text 3 

bhavetaà gräha-mätaëgau
     yuddhaà hi yuvayor yadä
tadä vai mat-prasädena
     prakåtià sväà gamiçyathaù

     bhavetam—you will become; gräha—a crocodile; mätaëgau—and an elephant; yuddham—a fight; hi—indeed; yuvayoù—between you both; yadä—when; tadä—then; vai—indeed; mat-prasädena—by My mercy; prakåtim—nature; sväm—own; gamiçyathaù—you will attain.

     You will indeed become a crocodile and an elephant. You will fight, and by My mercy you will regain your original natures.

Text 4 

çré-närada uväca 

ity uktau hariëä tau dvau
     räja-räjasya mantriëau
babhüvatur gräha-gajau
     jäti-smaraëa-samyutau

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; ity—thus; uktau—addressed; hariëä—by Lord Kåçëa; tau—they; dvau—both; räja-räjasya—of King Kuvera; mantriëau—the ministers; babhüvatuù—became; gräha—a crocodile; gajau—and an elephant; jäti-smaraëa-samyutau—remembering their previous birth.

     Çré Närada said: After Lord Viçëu had spoken these words, Kuvera's two ministers became a crocodile and an elephant. Nevertheless, in their new station they could remember who they had been before.

Text 5 

ghaëöänädo 'bhavad gräho
     gomatyäà ca çataà samäù
vikarälo mahä-bhémaù
     çaçvad-raudra-vapur-dharaù

     ghaëöänädaù—Ghantanada; abhavat—became; grähaù—a crocodile; gomatyäm—in the Gomaté; ca—and; çatam—for a hundred; samäù—years; vikarälaù—fearsome; mahä-bhémaù—ferocious; çaçvad-raudra—always angry; vapuù—form; dharaù—manifesting.

     For one hundred years Ghaëöänäda was a fearsome, feroicous, always angry crocodile in the Gomaté river.

Text 6 

pärçvamaulir gajendro 'bhüd
     raivatasya girer vane
catur-dantaù kajjaläbhaù
     påçöha-procco dhanuù-çatam

     pärçvamauliù—Pärçvamauli; gajendraù—the king of elephants; abhüt——was; raivatasya—Rauivata; gireù—Mount; vane—in the forest; catur-dantaù—with four tusks; kajjaläbhaù—splendid as black kajjala; påçöha-proccaù— dhanuù-çatam—a hundred dhanus tall.

     Pärçvamauli became a regal elephant in the forest by Mount Raivata. He was a hundred dhanus tall.

Texts 7-9 

vaïjulaiù kuravaiù kundair
     badarair vetra-veëubhiù
rambhä-bhür javaöair yukte
     kovidäräsanärjunaiù

mandära-päöaläçoka-
     cuta-campaka-candanaiù
panasodambaräçvattha-
     kharjurair béja-pürakair

priyälämrätakämraiç ca
     kramukaiù parimaëòite
raivatasya vane dérghe
     vicacära mahä-gajaù

     vaïjulaiù—with vanjulas; kuravaiù—kuravas; kundaiù—kundas; badaraiù—badaras; vetra-veëubhiù—vetra-venus; rambhä-bhüù—rambhas; javaöaiù—javatas; yukte—endowed; kovidäräsanärjunaiù—kovidaras, asanas, and arjunas; mandära—mandaras; päöala—patalas; açoka—asokas; cuta—cutas; campaka—campakas; candanaiù—candanas; panasa—panasas; udambara—udambaras; açvattha—asvatthas;  kharjuraiù—kharjuras; béja-pürakaiù—bija-purakas; priyälämrätakämraiù—priyalas, amratakas, and amras; ca—and; kramukaiù—kramukas; parimaëòite—decorated; raivatasya—of Raivata; vane—in the forest; dérghe—great; vicacära—walked; mahä-gajaù—the great elephant.

     That great elephant wandered in Mount Raivata's forest, which was decorated with many vaïjulas, kuravas, kundas, badaras, vetra-veëus, rambhäs, javaöas, kovidäras, äsanas, arjunas, mandäras, päöalas, açokas, cutas, campakas, candanas, panasas, udambaras, açvatthas, kharjuras, béja-pürakas, priyälas, amrätakas, amras kramukas, and other trees and plants.

Text 10 

ekadä mädhave mäsi
     gajendro giri-gahvarät
snätuà taà gomatéà gaëgäà
     äyayau sa-gaëo nadan

     ekadä—one day; mädhave—of Madhava; mäsi—in the month; gajendraù—that regal elephant; giri-gahvarät—from the mountain; snätum—to bathe; tam—that; gomatéà gaëgäm—Gomaté river; äyayau—went; sa-gaëaù—with its followers; nadan—trumpeting.

     One day in the month of Mädhava (April-May), that regal elephant left Mount Raivata and went, trumpeting and followed by its associates, to the Gomaté river to bathe.

Text 11 

ciraà samavagähyäpsu
     çuëòä-daëòair itas tataù
kareëa kalabhän sarvän
     snäpayäm äsa näga-räö

     ciram—for along time; samavagähya—immersed; äpsu—in the water; çuëòä-daëòaiù—with many trunks; itaù—here; tataù—and there; kareëa—with a trunk; kalabhän—children; sarvän—all; snäpayäm äsa—bathed; näga-räö—the regal elephant.

     O king of Videha, bathing his children with water from his trunk, the regal elephant stayed in the water for a long time.

Text 12 

mahän gräho 'pi tatra-stho
     baléyän daiva-noditaù
agrahéc caraëe nägaà
     krodha-pürita-vigrahaù

     mahän—a great; grähaù—crocodile; api—also; tatra-sthaù—staying there; baléyän—powerful; daiva-noditaù—sent by fate; agrahét—grabbed; caraëe—on the foot; nägam—the elephant; krodha-pürita-vigrahaù—filled with anger.

     Sent by fate, a powerful and angry crocodile grabbed the elephant's foot.

Text 13 

tenaiva tad-gåhe néto
     gajendro bala-darpitaù
tam äkåçya bahiù präptaà
     punas tena vikarçitaù

     tena—by him; eva—indeed; tad-gåhe—to his home; nétaù—taken; gajendraù—the elephant king; bala-darpitaù—proud of his strength; tam—him; äkåçya—dragging; bahiù—out; präptam—attained; punaù—again; tena—by him; vikarçitaù—dragged.

     The crocodile dragged the elephant to its crocodile home in the water. Proud of his strength, the elephant then dragged the crocodile onto the land. Then the crocodile dragged the elphant again into the water.

Text 14 

kareëavaç ca kalabhäs
     taà tärayitum akçamäù
evaà tayor yudhyatoç ca
     karçator hi bahir mithaù

     kareëavaù—the female elephants; ca—and; kalabhäù—the children; tam—him; tärayitum—to rescue; akçamäù—unable; evam—thus; tayoù—of them both; yudhyatoù—fighting; ca—and; karçatoù—dragging; hi—indeed; bahiù—out; mithaù—each other.

     The female elephants and their children had no power to rescue the regal elephant. Dragging each other in and out of the water, the elephant and the crocodile fought.

Text 15 

païcäçat-païca-varçäëi
     vyatéyuù paçyatäà satäm
evaà kaçmalam äpanno
     gajo jäti-smaro mahän

     païcäçat-païca-varçäëi—55 years; vyatéyuù—passed; paçyatäm—looking on; satäm—the devotees; evam—thus; kaçmalam—weakness; äpannaù—attained; gajaù—the elephant; jäti-smaraù—remembering his past birth; mahän—great.

     As many saintly persons watched, the crocodile and the elephant fought for fifty-five years. Finally the elephant, now exhausted, remembered his previous birth.

Text 16 

prema-lakçaëayä bhaktyä
     hari-päda-kåtäçrayaù
sasmära çré-harià devaà
     måtyu-päça-vaçaà gataù

     prema-lakçaëayä—characterized by love; bhaktyä—with devotion; hari-päda-kåtäçrayaù—takign shelter of Lord Hari's lotus feet; sasmära—remembered; çré-harim—Lord Hari; devam—the Lord; måtyu-päça-vaçam—subdued by the ropes of death; gataù—attained.

     Finding himself almost caught in the noose of death, the elephant remembered his previous birth and took shelter of the feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 17 

çré-gajendra uväca 

çré-kåçëa kåçëa-sakha kåçëa-vapur-dadhäna
     kåçëäya te praëatir astu sureça viçëo
pürëa prabho parama-pävana puëya-kérte
     mäà pähi pähi parameçvara päpa-päçät

     çré-gajendra uväca—the regal elephant said; çré-kåçëa—O Çré Kåçëa; kåçëa-sakha—O friend of Arjuna; kåçëa-vapur-dadhäna—who has a dark form; kåçëäya—to Kåçëa; te—to You; praëatiù—obeisances; astu—are; sureça—O master of the demigods; viçëaù—O Viçëu; pürëa—O perfect; prabhaù—Lord; parama-pävana—O great purifier; puëya-kérte—O glorious one; mäm—me; pähi—save; pähi—save; parameçvara—O Supreme Personality of Godhead; päpa—of sin; päçät—from the noose.

     The regal elephant said: O Çré Kåçëa, O friend of Arjuna, O dark Lord, I offer my respectful obeisances to You. O master of the demigods, O Viçëu, O perfect Lord, O supreme purifier, O glorious one, O Supreme Personality of Godhead, please, please save Me! Save me from the noose of my past sins!

Text 18 

çré-närada uväca 

evaà präha gåhétäëgaà
     smarantaà ca harià hariù
jïätväruhya khagaà vegäd
     adhavad déna-vatsalaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; präha—said; gåhéta—grabbed; aëgam—limb; smarantam—remembering; ca—and; harim—Lord Hari; hariù—Lord Hari; jïätvä—understanding; äruhya—raising; khagam—His sword; vegät—quickly; adhavat—ran; déna—to the poor; vatsalaù—affectionate.

     Çré Närada said: Aware that the elephant caught in the crocodile's grip was remembering Him, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is kind to the distressed, picked up His sword and flew to that place.

Text 19 

svayaà khagät samuttérya
     dhävaàç cakraà samäkçipat
cakre präpte pürvam eva
     grähasyäpi çiro 'dbhutam

     svayam—personally; khagät—from garuòa; samuttérya—descending; dhävan—running; cakram—cakra; samäkçipat—threw; cakre—the cakre; präpte—attained; pürvam—before; eva—indeed; grähasya—of the crocodile; api—also; çiraù—the head; adbhutam—wonderful.

     Descending from Garuòa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead threw His cakra and wonderfully severed the crocodile's head.

Text 20 

dainyaà präpte dhanam iva
     dehäd bhinnaà babhüva ha
paçcät prapatitaà cakraà
     gomatyäà ca hrade nadat 
päçäëa-nicayän sarväàs 
     cakräkäräàç cakära ha

     dainyam—humbleness; präpte—attained; dhanam—wealth; iva—like; dehät—from the body; bhinnam—broken; babhüva—was; ha—indeed; paçcät—from behind; prapatitam—fallen; cakram—the cakra; gomatyäm—into the Gomaté river; ca—and; hrade—in a lake; nadät—from the sound; päçäëa-nicayän—many stones; sarvän—all; cakräkärän—the forms of the cakra; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     As a person may suddenly lose all his wealth, that spirit soul was suddenly pushed out of a crocodile's body. After killing the crocodile, the Lord's cakra continued until in finally landed in a lake, turning all the stones there into incarnations of the cakra.

Text 21 

tan-nemi-saëgharça-bhavaà
     cakra-térthaà çubhävaham
tac-cakra-darçanäd räjan
     brahma-hatyä pramucyate

     tan-nemi-saëgharça-bhavam—by the contact of the cakra; cakra-tértham—Cakra-tértha; çubhävaham—auspicous; tat-cakra-darçanät—by the sight of the Sudarçana-cakra; räjan—O king; brahma-hatyä—the sin of killing a brähmaëa; pramucyate—is freed.

     In this way, by the touch of the Lord's Sudarçana-cakra, the auspicious holy place Cakra-tértha was created. Simply be seeing Cakra-tértha, a person becomes free of the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

Text 22 

grähaç chinna-çirä bhütvä
     pürva-rüpaà dadhära ha
çré-kåçëänugrahäd dhasté
     divya-rüpo babhüva saù

     grähaù—the crocodile; chinna—severed; çirä—head; bhütvä—becoming; pürva-rüpam—his previous form; dadhära—manifested; ha—indeed; çré-kåçëa—of Çré Kåçëa; anugrahät—by the mercy; hasté—the elephant; divya-rüpaù—a demigod form; babhüva—became; saù—he.

     His head severed, the crocodile attained his original form of a demigod. By the mercy of Lord Kåçëa, the elephant also attained the form of a demigod.

Text 23 

parikramya harià natvä
     stutvä devaà kåtäïjaliù
kuvera-mantriëau tau dvau
     jagmatuù sva-padaà punaù

     parikramya—circumambulating; harim—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; natvä—bowing; stutvä—offering prayers; devam—to the Lord; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; kuvera-mantriëau—tne ministers of Kuvera; tau—the; dvau—both; jagmatuù—went; sva-padam—to their own abode; punaù—again.

     After circumambulating the Lord, bowing down before Him, and offering prayers with folded hands, Kuvera's two ministers returned to their own abode.

Text 24 

deveçu puçpaà varçatsu
     jaya-dhvani-nadatsu ca
jagäma bhagavän säkçät
     svaà dhäma prakåteù param

     deveçu—as the demigods; puçpam—flowers; varçatsu—showered; jaya-dhvani-nadatsu—calling out “Victory!"; ca—and; jagäma—went; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkçät—Himself; svam—to His own; dhäma—abode; prakåteù—the world of matter; param—beyond.

     As the demigods showered flowers and called out “Victory!", the Supreme Personality of Godhead returned to His own abode beyond the world of matter.

Text 25 

cakra-tértha-kathäm enäà
     yaù çåëoti narottamaù
cakra-tértha-snäna-phalaà
     sampräpnoti na saàçayaù

     cakra-tértha—of Cakra-tértha; kathäm—story; enäm—this; yaù—one who; çåëoti—hears; narottamaù—the best of men; cakra-tértha—of Cakra-tértha; snäna—bathing; phalam—the result; sampräpnoti—attains; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     One who hears this story of Cakra-tértha becomes the best of men. He attains the same result attained by bathing at Cakra-tértha. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 26 

gaja-gräha-kathäà puëyäà
     yaù çåëoti samähitaù
duù-svapnaà naçyate tasya
     su-svapnaà bhavati dhruvam
çré-kåçëasya prasädena 
     yäti viçëoù paraà padam  

     gaja—of the elephant; gräha—and the crocodile; kathäm—story; puëyäm—sacred; yaù—one who; çåëoti—hears; samähitaù—attentive; duù-svapnam—nightmares; naçyate—destroyed; tasya—of him; su-svapnam—pleasant dreams; bhavati—are; dhruvam—indeed; çré-kåçëasya—of Çré Kåçëa; prasädena—by the mercy; yäti—attains; viçëoù—of Lord Viçëu; param—the supreme; padam—abode.

     A person who attentively hears this story of the elephant and the crocodile becomes free of bad dreams. All his dreams will be pleasant. By Lord Kåçëa's mercy he will attain the transcendental abode of Lord Viçëu.

Chäpter Twelve
Çaëkhoddhära-mähätmya
The Glories of Çaëkhoddhära-tértha

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

çaëkhoddhäre tértha-mukhye
     svarëa-dänaà dadäti yaù
sa gacched vaiçëavaà lokaà
     sarvopadrava-varjitam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; çaëkhoddhäre—Çaëkhoddhära; tértha-mukhye—the sacred place; svarëa-dänam—gift of gold; dadäti—goves; yaù—who; sa—he; gacchet—attains; vaiçëavam—of Lord Viçëu; lokam—the world; sarvopadrava-varjitam—without any trouble.

     Çré Närada said: A person who at sacred Çaëkhoddhära-tértha gives charity of gold attains the realm of Lord Viçëu without encountering any obstacles on his path. 
Text 2 

çré-kåçëa-bhaktaù çäntätmä
     trito näma mahä-muniù
tértha-yätåa-prasaëgena
     präpta änarta-bhümiçu

     çré-kåçëa-bhaktaù—a devotee of Lord Kåçëa; çäntätmä—peaceful at heart; tritaù—Trita; näma—named; mahä-muniù—a great sage; tértha-yätåa-prasaëgena—by going on pilgrimage; präpta—attained; änarta-bhümiçu—the land of Anarta.

     A great sage named Trita, who was peaceful at heart and a devotee of Lord Kåçëa, went on a pilgrimage to the land of Anarta.

Text 3 

dåçövä çubhaà saraù snätvä
     hareù püjäà cakära ha
tat-püjäyäà mahä-çaëkhaà\
     sundarair lakçaëair våtaà        

     dåçövä—seeing; çubham—the beautiful; saraù—lake; snätvä—bathing; hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; püjäm—the worship; cakära—did; ha—indeed; tat-püjäyäm—in that worship; mahä-çaëkhaà—a great conchshell; sundaraiù—with beautiful; lakçaëaiù—qualities; våtam—endowed.       

     Seeing a beautiful lake there, Trita bathed and then worshiped Lord Kåçëa. In his worship he used a great and very beautiful conchshell.

Text 4 

corayäm äsa kakçiväàs
     tasya çiçyo 'ti-lobhataù
püjä-çaëkhaà gataà vékçya
     kruddhaù präha trito muniù

     corayäm äsa—stole; kakçivän—Kakçivän; tasya—his; çiçyaù—disciple; ati-lobhataù—out of greed; püjä-çaëkham—the conchshell used in the worship; gatam—gone; vékçya—seeing; kruddhaù—angry; präha—said; tritaù—Trita; muniù—the sage.

     Impelled by greed, the sage's disciple Kakçivän stole the conchshell. Seeing that the conchshell was missing, Trita Muni became angry and said:

Text 5 

yena nétas tu me çaëkhaù
     sa çaëkho bhavatu dhruvam
tadaiva çaëkha-rüpo 'bhüt
     kakçivän chäpa-péòitaù

     yena—by whom; nétaù—taken; tu—indeed; me—my; çaëkhaù—conchshell; sa—he; çaëkhaù—a conch; bhavatu—may become; dhruvam—indeed; tadä—then; eva—indeed; çaëkha-rüpaù—the form of a conch; abhüt—became; kakçivän—Kaksivan; çäpa-péòitaù—troubled by the curse.

     “Whoever has stolen my conchshell will become a conch." Cursed in this way, Kakçivän at once became a conch.

Text 6 

tat-pädayor nipatitaù
     pähi mäm ity uväca ha
çéghraà çäntas tritaù präha
     durmate kià kåtaà tvayä 
steya-doçäd bhuëkçva päpaà 
     mad-vaco no måçä bhavet

     tat—of him; pädayoù—at the feet; nipatitaù—fallen; pähi—save; mäm—me; ity—thsu; uväca—said; ha—indeed; çéghram—quickly; çäntaù—pacified; tritaù—Trita; präha—said; durmate—fool; kim—what?; kåtam—done; tvayä—by you; steya-doçät—by the sin of theft; bhuëkçva—experience; päpam—the sin; mad-vacaù—my word; naù—not; måçä—false; bhavet—will be.

     Kakçivän fell at Trita's feet and begged, “Save me!" Trita was at once pacified. Still, he said, “Fool, what have you done? Because you have stolen, now you must suffer the sinful reaction. My words will not go in vain."

Text 7 

bhaja çré-kåçëa-pädäbjaà
     sa te mokçaà kariçyati
ity uktvätha gate räjaàs
     trite deve mahä-munau

     bhaja—worship; çré-kåçëa-pädäbjam—Çré Kåçëa's lotus feet; sa—He; te—to you; mokçam—liberation; kariçyati—will do; ity—thus; uktvä—speaking; atha—then; gate—gone; räjan—O king; trite—Trita; deve—divine; mahä-munau—great sage.

     O king, saying, “Worship Çré Kåçëa's lotus feet, and He will release you from this and give you liberation," the great sage Trita left.

Text 8 

sarovare nipatitaù
     kakçivän chaëkha-rüpa-dhåk
pravadan kåçëa kåçëeti
     çata-varçaà sthito 'bhavat

     sarovare—into the lake; nipatitaù—fell; kakçivän—Kaksivan; chaëkha-rüpa-dhåk—in the form of a conch; pravadan—saying; kåçëa—Kåçëa; kåçëa—Kåçëa; iti—thus; çata-varçam—for a hundred years; sthitaù—situated; abhavat—was.

     Kakçivän, now in the form of a conch, fell into the lake. For a hundred years he stayed there, all the time chanting “Kåçëa! Kåçëa!"

Text 9 

paripürëatamaù säkçäd
     bhagavän bhakta-vatsalaù
ägatya sarasas-téraà
     ma bhaiçöety abhayaà dadau

     paripürëatamaù—the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkçät—directly; bhagavän—the Lord; bhakta-vatsalaù—who loves His devotees; ägatya—coming; sarasas-téram—to the shore of the lake; ma—don't; bhaiçöa—be afraid; iti—thus; abhayam—fearlessness; dadau—gave.

     The perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, who dearly loves His devotees, came to that lake and, saying, “Don't be afraid, reassured Kakçivän.

Text 10 

taà megha-näda-gambhéraà
     giraà çrutvä jalecaraù
cukroça pähi pähéti
     deva-deva jagat-pate

     tam—this; megha-näda-gambhéram—deep as thunder; giram—statement; çrutvä—hearing; jalecaraù—the conch; cukroça—called out; pähi—save; pähi—save; iti—thus; deva-deva—O Lord of lords; jagat-pate—O master of the universes.

     Hearing the Lord's words deep as thunder, the conch Kakçivän called out, “Lord of lords! Master of the universes! Save me! Save me!"

Text 11 

bhujagendra-bhoga-rucä
     bhujena bhagavän prabhuù
çaëkhaà bhaktaà gajam iva
     projjahära dayä-paraù

     bhujagendra-bhoga-rucä—splendid as a serpent's coil; bhujena—with an arm; bhagavän—the Lord; prabhuù—the Lord; çaëkham—to the conch; bhaktam—devotee; gajam—elephant; iva—like; projjahära—lifted; dayä-paraù—merciful.

     Extending an arm splendid like a great serpent's coil, the merciful Supreme Personality of Godhead lifted the devotee conch, who was as large as a great elephant.

Text 12 

tadaiva divya-rüpo 'bhüc
     chaëkha-rüpaà vihäya saù
kåtäïjalir harià natvä
     stutià cakre tadä ca saù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; divya-rüpaù—the form of a demigod; abhüt——became; chaëkha-rüpam—the form of the conch; vihäya—abandoning; saù—he; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; harim—to Lord Kåçëa; natvä—bowing; stutim—prayers; cakre—did; tadä—then; ca—and; saù—he.

     His conch form gone, Kakçivän, now in the splendid form of a demigod, bowed down before the Lord and with folded hands spoke many prayers.

Text 13 

çré-kakçivän uväca 

väsudeva namas te 'stu
     govinda puruçottama
déna-vatsala déneça
     dvärakeça pareçvara

     çré-kakçivän uväca—Çré Kakçivän said; väsudeva—O son of Vasudeva; namaù—obeisances; te—to You; astu—may be; govinda—O Govinda; puruçottama—O Supreme Person; déna-vatsala—O Lord affectionate to the downtrodden; déneça—O master of the distressed; dvärakeça—O master of Dvärakä; pareçvara—O Supreme Lord.

     Çré Kakçivän said: O Väsudeva, O Govinda, O Supreme Person, O Supreme Controller, O king of Dvärakä, O master of the poor and downtrodden, O Lord who loves the poor and downtrodden, I offer my respectful obeisances to You.

Text 14 

dhruve dhruva-padaà dätre
     prahlädasyärti-häriëe
gajasyoddhäriëe tubhyaà
     baler bali-vide namaù

     dhruve—to Dhruva; dhruva-padam—the eternal realm; dätre—giving; prahlädasyärti-häriëe—removing Prahläda's sufferings; gajasyoddhäriëe—delivering the elephant; tubhyäm—ro You; baleù—of Bali; bali-vide—accepting the offering; namaù—obeisances.

     To You, who gave an eternal kingdom to Dhruva, removed Prahläda's sufferings, delivered a regal elephant, and accepted Bali's offering, I offer my respectful obeisances.

Text 15 

draupadé-cira-santäna-
     käriëe haraye namaù
garägni-vana-väsebhyaù
     päëòavänäà sahäyine

     draupadé—to Draupadé; céra-santäna—limitless cloth; käriëe—making; haraye—to Lord Kåçëa; namaù—obeisances; gara—from poison; agni—fire; vana—in the forest; väsebhyaù—and residence; päëòavänäm—the Päëòavas; sahäyine—helping.

     To You, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who made Draupadé's garment endless and rescued the Päëòavas from poison, fire, and exile in the forest, I offer my respectful obeisances.

Text 16 

yädava-träëa-kärtre ca
     çakräd abhéra-rakçiëe
guru-mätå-dvijänäà ca
     putra-dätre namo namaù

     yädava-träëa-kärtre—protecting the Yädavas; ca—and; çakrät—from Indra; abhéra-rakçiëe—protecting the gopas; guru—to His guru; mätå—mother; dvijänäm—and the brähmaëa; ca—and; putra—sons; dätre—giving; namaù—obeisances; namaù—obeisances.

     To You, who protected the Yädavas, protected the gopas from King Indra, and returned to Your mother, guru, and a brähmaëa the sons they had lost, I offer my respectful obeisances.

Text 17 

jaräsandha-nirodhärta-
     nåpänäà mokça-käriëe
någasyoddhäriëe säkçät-
     sudämne dainya-häriëe

     jaräsandha—of Jarasandha; nirodha—in the prison; ärta—suffering; nåpänäm—of the kings; mokça-käriëe—giving liberation; någasya—of King Någa; uddhäriëe—the deliverer; säkçät—directly; sudämne—to Sudämä; dainya—the poverty; häriëe—removing.

     To You, who rescued the kings suffering in Jaräsandha's prison, delivered King Någa, and ended Sudämä's poverty, I offer my respectful obeisances. 

Text 18 

väsudeväya kåçëäya
     namaù saëkarçaëäya ca
pradyumnäyäniruddhäya
     catur-vyühäya te namaù

     väsudeväya—to Lord Väsudeva; kåçëäya—to Lord Kåçëa; namaù—obeisances; saëkarçaëäya—to Lord Saëkarçaëa; ca—and; pradyumnäya—to Lord Pradyumna; aniruddhäya—to Lord Aniruddha; catur-vyühäya—to the catur-vyüha; te—to You; namaù—obeisances.

     To You, who are the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåçëa, I offer my respectful obeisances. To You, who are the Catur-vyüha: Lord Väsudeva, Lord Saëkarçaëa, Lord Pradyumna, and Lord Aniruddha, I offer my respectful obeisances.

Text 19 

tvam eva mätä ca pitä tvam eva
     tvam eva bandhuç ca sakhä tvam eva
tvam eva vidyä draviëaà tvam eva
     tvam eva sarvaà mama deva-deva

     tvam—You; eva—indeed; mätä—mother; ca—and; pitä—father; tvam—You; eva—indeed; tvam—You; eva—indeed; bandhuù—relative; ca—and; sakhä—friend; tvam—You; eva—indeed; tvam—You; eva—indeed; vidyä—knowledge; draviëam—wealth; tvam—You; eva—indeed; tvam—You; eva—indeed; sarvam—everything; mama—for me; deva-deva—O Lord of lords.

     You are my mother. You are my father, You are my relative. You are my friend. You are my wisdom. You are my wealth. O Lord of Lord, You are my all.

Texts 20 and 21 

çré-närada uväca 

evaà stutvä harià räjan
     kakçivän prema-püritaù
vimäna-varam ästhäya
     yädavänäà ca paçyatäm

vibhräjayan daça diçaù
     çata-sürya-sama-prabhaù
jagäma vaiçëavaà lokaà
     sarvopadrava-varjitam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; stutvä—praying; harim—to Lord Kåçëa; räjan—O king; kakçivän—Kakçivän; prema—with love; püritaù—filled; vimäna-varam—a transcendental airplane; ästhäya—boarding; yädavänäm—as the Yädavas; ca—and; paçyatäm—looked on; vibhräjayan—illuminating; daça—the ten; diçaù—directions; çata-sürya-sama-prabhaù—splendid like a hundred suns; jagäma—went; vaiçëavam—of Lord Viçëu; lokam—to the planet; sarvopadrava-varjitam—without any impediments.

     Çré Närada said: O king, after offering these prayers, Kakçivän, now filled with love, entered a spiritual airplane and, as the Yädavas looked on, without any trouble flew to the world of Lord Viçëu, filling the ten directions with light as he went.

Text 22 

çaëkhoddhäraù kåto yasmin
     hariëä maithileçvara
tasmät térthaà mahä-puëyaà
     çaëkhoddhära-prathaà gatam

     çaëkha—the conch; uddhäraù—deliverance; kåtaù—done; yasmin—where; hariëä—by Lord Kåçëa; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä; tasmät—from that; tértham—holy plave; mahä-puëyam—very sacred; çaëkhoddhära-pratham—named Çaëkhoddhära; gatam—gone.

     O king of Mithilä, this very sacred place, where Lord Kåçëa delivered a conch, is known as Çaëkhoddhära-tértha.

Text 23 

çaëkhoddhära-kathäm etäà
     yaù çåëoti narottamaù
çaëkhoddhära-snäna-phalaà
     labhate vai na saàçayaù

     çaëkhoddhära—of Çaëkhoddhära-tértha; kathäm—story; etäm—this; yaù—one who; çåëoti—hears; narottamaù—the best of men; çaëkhoddhära-snäna-phalam—the result of bathing in çaëkhoddhära-tértha; labhate—attains; vai—indeed; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     A person who hears this story of Çaëkhoddhära-tértha becomes the best of human beings. He attains the result of bathing in Çaëkhoddhära-tértha. Of this there is no doubt.

Chapter Thirteen
Çré Prabhäsa-sarasvaté-bodha-pippala-gomaté-sindhu-saëga-mähätmya
The Glories of Prabhäsa-tértha, the Sarasvaté River, Bodha-pippala, and the Place Where the Gomaté River Meets the Ocean

Text 1

çré-närada uväca

prabhäsasyäpi mähätmyaà
     çåëu räjan mahä-mate
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     tejasäà vardhanaà param

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; prabhäsasya—of Prabhäsa; api—also; mähätmyam—the glory; çåëu—please hear; räjan—O king; mahä-mate—noble-hearted; sarva-päpa—all sins; haram—removing; puëyam—sacred; tejasäm—power; vardhanam—increase; param—great.

     Çré Närada said: O noble-hearted king, please hear the story of Prabhäsa-tértha, a story that removes all sins and grants gret power.

Texts 2 and 3 

godävaryäà gurau siàhe
     hara-kçetre ca kumbhage
ravigrahe kurukçetre
     käçyäà candragrahe tathä

yat puëyaà labhate räjan
     snänato dänato naraù
tasmäc chata-guëaà puëyaà
     prabhäse ca dine dine

     godävaryäm—in the Godävaré; gurau—when Jupiter; siàhe—in Leo; hara-kçetre—at Haridwar; ca—and; kumbhage—in Aquarius; ravigrahe—eclipse of the sun; kurukçetre—at Kurukçetra; käçyäm—in Väräëasé; candragrahe—eclipse of the moon; tathä—so; yat—which; puëyam—piety; labhate—attains; räjan—O king; snänataù—by bathing; dänataù—by giving charity; naraù—a person; tasmät—than that; çata—a hundred times; guëam—multiplied; puëyam—piety; prabhäse—at Prabhäsa; ca—and; dine—day; dine—after day.

     By bathing and giving charity at Prabhäsa-tértha one attains a pious result a hundred times greater than the result attained by bathing and giving charity at the Godävaré river when Jupiter is in Leo, at Haridwar when Jupiter is in Aquarius, at Kurukçetra during a solar eclipse, or at Väräëasé during a lunar eclipse.

Text 4 

yatra snätvä dakça-çäpäd
     gåhéto yakçmaëoòuräö
vimuktaù kilbiçät sadyo
     bheje bhüyaù kalodayam

     yatra—where; snätvä—bathing; dakça-çäpät—from Daksa's curse; gåhétaù—taken; yakçmaëa—stricken with consumption; uòuräö—the moon; vimuktaù—free; kilbiçät—from sin; sadyaù—at once; bheje—attained; bhüyaù—again; kalä—of the phases; udayam—the rising.

     By bathing at Prabhäsa-tértha, the moon-god became free of the disease he obtained by Dakça's curse, although he did show his phases again afterward.

Text 5 

mahä-puëyatamä räjan
     yatra pratyak sarasvaté
tasyäà snätvä naraù päpé
     säkçäd brahmamayo bhavet

     mahä-puëyatamä—most sacred; räjan—O king; yatra—where; pratyak—west; sarasvaté—Sarasvaté; tasyäm—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; päpé—sinful; säkçät—directly; brahmamayaù—spiritual; bhavet—becomes.

     O king, in that place the Sarasvaté river flows in a western course. A sinner who bathes in the Sarasvaté there attains a spiritual body.

Text 6 

tat-tére vartate räjan
     nämnä vai bodha-pippalam
kåçëena yatroddhaväya
     dattaà bhägavataà çubham

     tat-tére—on that shore; vartate—is; räjan—O king; nämnä—by name; vai—indeed; bodha-pippalam—Bodha-pippala; kåçëena—by Lord Kåçëa; yatra—where; uddhaväya—to Uddhava; dattam—given; bhägavatam—the Çrémad-Bhägavatam; çubham—beautiful;

     On the shore of the Sarasvaté is a place named Bodha-pippala, where Lord Kåçëa gave the beautiful Çrémad-Bhägavatam to Uddhava.

Texts 7 and 8 

taà natväbhyarcya vidhivat
     spåçövä çré-bodha-pippalam
çåëoti yo bhägavataà
     puräëaà brahma-saàhitam

çlokärdhaà çloka-pädaà vä
     mauné niyata-mänasaù
tasya päëau bhaved räjan
     vaiçëavaà paramaà padam

     tam—to that; natvä—bowing; abhyarcya—worshiping; vidhivat—properly; spåçövä—touching; çré-bodha-pippalam—Bodha-pippala; çåëoti—hears; yaù—one who; bhägavatam—Çrémad-Bhägavatam; puräëam—Puräëa; brahma-saàhitam—scripture; çlokärdham—half a stanza; çloka-pädam—a single line of a stanza; vä—or; mauné—silent; niyata-mänasaù—controlling his mind; tasya—of him; päëau—in the hand; bhavet—is; räjan—O king; vaiçëavam—of Lord Viçëu; paramam—supreme; padam—abode.

     A person who is silent, controls his mind, visits, properly worships, and touches sacred Bodha-pippala, and hears the sacred Çrémad-Bhägavatam Puräëa, or even only half a stanza of it, or even only a single line of a stanza, in Bodha-pippala, finds the supreme abode of Lord Viçëu is placed in his hand.

Text 9 

prauçöha-padyäà pürëimäyäà
     hema-siàha-samanvitam
dadäti yo bhägavataà
     sa yäti paramäà gatim

     prauçöha-padyäm—in the month of Bhädra (August-September); pürëimäyäm—on the full moon day; hema-siàha-samanvitam—with a golden throne; dadäti—gives; yaù—who; bhägavatam—Çrémad-Bhägavatam; sa—he; yäti—attains; paramäm—the supreme; gatim—abode.

     A person who on the full-moon day of the month of Bhädra (August-September) gives a gift of Çrémad-Bhägavatam resting on a golden throne attains the supreme destination.

Text 10 

puräëaà na çrutaà yais tu
     çrémad-bhägavataà kvacit
teçäà våthä janma gataà
     naräëäà bhümi-väsinäm

     puräëam—Puräëa; na—not; çrutam—heard; yaiù—by whom; tu—indeed; çrémad-bhägavatam—Çrémad-Bhägavatam; kvacit—somewhere; teçäm—of them; våthä—useless; janma—birth; gatam—gone; naräëäm—of people; bhümi-väsinäm—living on the earth.

     In this world they who have never heard Çrémad-Bhägavatam have wasted their lives.

Text 11 

yair na çrutaà bhägavataà puräëaà
     närädhito yaiù puruçaù puräëaù
hütaà mukhe naiva dharämaräëäà
     teçäà våthä janma gataà naräëäm

     yaiù—by whom; na—not; çrutam—heard; bhägavatam—Çrémad-Bhägavatam; puräëam—Puräëa; na—not; ärädhitaù—worshiped; yaiù—by whom; puruçaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; puräëaù—ancient; hütam—offered; mukhe—in the mouth; na—not; eva—indeed; dharämaräëäm—of the brähmaëas; teçäm—of them; våtha—wasted; janma—birth; gatam—gone; naräëäm—of people.

     They who have not heard Çrémad-Bhägavatam, worshiped the ancient Supreme Personality of Godhead, or fed the brähmaëas, have wasted their lives.

Text 12 

dväravatyäà tértha-räjaà
     gomaté-sindhu-maëgalam
yatra snätvä naro yäti
     vaikuëöhaà vimalaà padam

     dväravatyäm—at Dvärakä; tértha-räjam—the king of holy places; gomaté-sindhu-maëgalam—the auspicious meeting of the Gomaté river and the ocean; yatra—where; snätvä—having bathed; naraù—a person; yäti—goes; vaikuëöham—to Vaikuëöha; vimalam—pure; padam—abode.

     A person who bathes in Dvärakä at the auspicious place where the Gomaté flows into the ocean, a place that is the king of holy places, attains the sacred supreme abode of Vaikuëöha.

Text 13 

çatäçvamedhajaà puëyaà
     gaëgä-sägara-saëgame
tat-sahasra-guëaà proktaà
     gomaté-sindhu-saëgame

     çata—a hundred; açvamedha—asvamedha-yajnas; jam—born; puëyam—piety; gaëgä-sägara-saëgame—at the pklace where the Gaëgä flows into the ocean; tat-sahasra—a thousand times; guëam—multiplied; proktam—said; gomaté-sindhu-saëgame—thbe place where the Gomaté flows into the ocean.

     The pious result obtained by bathing at the place where the Gomaté flows into the ocean is a thousand times greater than the pious result obtained at the place where the Gaëgä flows into the ocean.

Text 14 

atraivodäharantémaà
     itihäsaà purätanam
yasya çravaëa-mätreëa
     päpa-täpät pramucyate

     atra—here; eva—indeed; udäharanti—they say; imam—this; itihäsam—history; purätanam—ancient; yasya—of which; çravaëa—by hearing; mätreëa—simply; päpa-täpät—from the sufferings of sins; pramucyate—released.

     The wise tell an ancient story about this holy place. Simply by hearing it one becomes free from the sufferings brought by many sins.

Text 15 

äséd gajähvaye vaiçyo
     räja-märga-patiù paraù
mahä-gaurava-samyukto
     nidhéço dhanado yathä

     äsét—there was; gajähvaye—at Hastinäpura; vaiçyaù—a vaiçya; räja-märga-patiù—a chief merchant; paraù—great; mahä-gaurava-samyuktaù—very respectful; nidhéçaù—the controller of great wealth; dhanadaù—generous; yathä—as.

     In Hastinäpura there was a great, generous, respectful, and very wealthy merchant.

Text 16 

veçyä-prasaëga-nirato
     véta-goçöhé-viçäradaù
dyüta-kréòaëakäsakto
     lobha-moha-madänvitaù

     veçyä-prasaëga-nirataù—attached to prostitutes; véta-goçöhé-viçäradaù—expert at speaking words of love; dyüta-kréòaëakäsaktaù—attached to gambling; lobha—greed; moha—bewilderment; mada—passion; anvitaù—with.

     He greedy, passionate, bewildered, fond of visiting prostitutes, expert at speaking amorous flattery, and addicted to gambling.

Text 17 

måçä-vädé mahä-duçöaù
     ku-karma-nirataù sadä
brähmaëebhyo na pitåbhyo
     na devebhyo dhanaà dadau

     måçä-vädé—a lier; mahä-duçöaù—very wicked; ku-karma-nirataù—acting badly; sadä—always; brähmaëebhyaù—to the brähmaëas; na—not; pitåbhyaù—to the pitäs; na—not; devebhyaù—to the demigods; dhanam—wealth; dadau—gave.

     He was a lier and a rogue. He always acted badly. He never gave charity to the brähmaëas, pitäs, or demigods.

Text 18 

hareù kathäà prekçya düräd
     düraà vai niryayau tvaram
pitroù seväpi na kåtä
     na putrebhyo dhanaà dadau

     hareù-of Lord Hari; kathäm—the topics; prekçya—seeing; dürät—from afar; düram—far away; vai—indeed; niryayau—went; tvaram—at once; pitroù—of his parents; sevä—service; api—and; na—not; kåtä—done; na—not; putrebhyaù—to his sons; dhanam—wealth; dadau—gave.

     When from afar he was aware of discussions about the Supreme Personality of Godhead, he quickly ran far away. He did not serve his parents. He gave no money to his children.

Text 19 

tyaktvä bhäryäà sa bhinno 'bhüd
     dhanäòhyo durmatiù khalaù
veçyä-prasaëgät tasyäpi
     dhanärdhaà prakçayaà gatam

     tyaktvä—rejecting; bhäryäm—his wife; sa—he; bhinnaù—broken; abhüt—became; dhanäòhyaù—wealthy; durmatiù—evil-minded; khalaù—rogue; veçyä-prasaëgät—from attachment to prostitutes; tasya—of him; api——also; dhana—of his wealth; ardham—half; prakçayam—destroyed; gatam—gone.

     This wicked, evil-hearted, and very wealthy person left his wife. By again and again visiting prostitutes he lost half his wealth.

Text 20 

ardhaà tu taskarair nétaà
     kiïcit påthvyäà gataà svataù
puëyena vardhate lakçméù
     päpena kçiyate dhruvam

     ardham—half; tu—indeed; taskaraiù—by thieves; nétam—taken; kiïcit—something; påthvyäm—on the earth; gatam—gone; svataù—oen; puëyena—by piety; vardhate—increases; lakçméù—opulence; päpena—by sin; kçiyate—is destroyed; dhruvam—certainly.

     The half that remained was stolen by thieves. By performing pious deeds one becomes wealthy, and by performing sins one loses all his wealth.

Text 21 

evaà hi nirdhano jäto
     veçyä-sakto mahä-khalaù
tasmin gajähvaye ramye
     caurya-karma cakära ha

     evam—thus; hi—indeed; nirdhanaù—without wealth; jätaù—born; veçyä-saktaù—attachment to prostitutes; mahä-khalaù—great rogue; tasmin—in that; gajähvaye—in Hastinäpura; ramye—beautiful; caurya-karma—theft; cakära—did; ha—indeed.

     In this way he became penniless. Because he was addicted to visiting prostitutes, that rogue became a thief in the beautiful city of Hastinäpura.

Text 22 

caurya-karma prakurvantaà
     baddhvä taà dämibhir nåpaù
deçän niùsärayäm äsa
     çantanur nåpatéçvaraù

     caurya-karma—theft; prakurvantam—doing; baddhvä—becoming bound; tam—that; dämibhiù—with ropes; nåpaù—the king; deçät—from the country; niùsärayäm äsa—exiled; çantanuù—Çantanu; nåpatéçvaraù—the great king.

     When he was caught stealing, the great king Çantanu had him bound with ropes and exiled from the country.

Text 23 

vane 'pi nivasan so 'pi
     jéva-hiàsäà cakära ha
samä dvädaça-sähasraà
     na vavarça yadä ghanaù

     vane—in the forest; api—even; nivasan—residing; saù—he; api—also; jéva-hiàsäm—violence to others; cakära—did; ha—indeed; samä—years; dvädaça-sähasram—twelve thousand; na—not; vavarça——rained; yadä—when; ghanaù—the cloud.

     Living in the forest, he became a hunter. Then there was a great drought and for twelve thousand years there was no rain.

Text 24 

paçcimäà tu diçaà prägäd
     vaiçyo durbhikça-péòitaù
vane vai märitaù so 'pi
     siàhena tala-ghätataù

     paçcimäm—the west; tu—indeed; diçam—direction; prägät—went; vaiçyaù—the vaisya; durbhikça-péòitaù—oppressed by the lack of food; vane—in the forest; vai—indeed; märitaù—killed; saù—indeed; api—also; siàhena—by a lion; tala-ghätataù—by the claws.

     Oppressed by the lack of food, he went to the west. In a forest there a lion clawed him to death.

Text 25 

tadaiva yamadütäs taà
     baddhvä päçair adho-mukham
kaçäghätais täòayanto
     ninyur märgaà yamasya ca

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; yamadütäù—the Yamadutas; tam—him; baddhvä—bound; päçaiù—with ropes; adho-mukham—his face down; kaçäghätaiù—with wipping; täòayantaù—stricking; ninyuù—led; märgam—on the path; yamasya—to Yamaräja; ca—and.

     Then the Yamaütas came, bound him with ropes, and, whipping him as they went, marched him, his face bowed, on the path to Yamaräja. 

Text 26 

atha kaçcin mahän gådhro
     mäàsaà tasya bhujasya ca
gåhétvä khaà gataù sadyaù
     khadaàç caïcu-puöena tam

     atha—-then; kaçcin—a certain; mahän—great; gådhraù—vulture; mäàsam—the flesh; tasya—of his; bhujasya—arm; ca—and; gåhétvä—grabbing; kham—to the sky; gataù—went; sadyaù—at once; khadan—eating; caïcu-puöena—with its beak; tam—that.

     With its beak a great vulture suddenly bit off a part of his arm and flew into the sky, devouring it as it went.

Text 27 

nirämiçäù khagäç cänye
     sämiçaà jagmur äturäù
evaà kolähale jäte
     çaëkha-cihnädibhiù kåte

     nirämiçäù—without any meat; khagäù—birds; ca—and; anye——other; sämiçam—with meat; jagmuù—went; äturäù—distressed; evam—thus; kolähale—a tumult; jäte—was manifested; çaëkha-cihnädibhiù—beginning with scratching; kåte—done.

     The hungry vultures that had no meat pursued the vulture that had some. They attacked, scratching with their claws, and there was a great commotion.

Text 28 

na jahau mukhato mäàsaà
     paçcimäçäà jagäma ha
tat-samenäpi gådhreëa
     tékçna-tuëòena täòität

     na—not; jahau—abandoned; mukhataù—from its mouth; mäàsam—the meat; paçcimäçäm—to the west; jagäma—went; ha—indeed; tat-samena—its equal; api—even; gådhreëa—by a vulture; tékçna-tuëòena—with its sharp beak; täòität—from the attack.

     Not letting the meat drop from its beak, the vulture flew to the west. Then another vulture, its equal in strength, attacked with its sharp beak.

Texts 29-31 

tan-mukhät prapatan mäàsaà
     gomaté-sindhu-saëgame
tértha-plute tasya mäàse
     vaiçyo 'yaà pätaké\ mahän

teçäà päçän svayaà chittvä
     bhütvä devaç catur-bhujaù
paçyatäà yamadütänäà
     vimänam adhiruhya saù

viräjayan diçaù sarväù
     paraà dhäma harer yayau

     tan-mukhät—from its mouth; prapatan—fell; mäàsam—meat; gomaté-sindhu-saëgame—into the place where the Gomaté flows into the ocean; tértha—of the holy place; plute—into the water; tasya—of him; mäàse—the flesh; vaiçyaù—the vaisya; ayam—he; pätaké\—sinner; mahän—great; teçäm—of them; päçän—the ropes; svayam—himself; chittvä—cutting; bhütvä—becoming; devaù—a divine person; catur-bhujaù—with four arms; paçyatäm—looking on; yamadütänäm—as the yamadütas; vimänam—an airplane; adhiruhya—climbing; saù—he; viräjayan—illuminating; diçaù—the directions; sarväù—all; param—the suprem; dhäma—abode; hareù—of Lord Hari; yayau—went. 

     Then the meat dropped from the first vulture's mouth and fell into the water at the place where the Gomaté flows into the ocean. Because of this, the sinful merchant became at once purified. He himself cut the ropes binding him and, as the Yamadütas looked on, he became an effulgent four-armed resident of the spirituasl world. Entering a spiritual airplane, and illuminating all the directions as he went, he traveled to the spiritual abode of the Personality of Godhead.

Text 32 

gomaté-sindhu-saëgasya
     mähätmyaà çåëute naraù
sarva-päpa-vinirmukto
     viçëulokaà prayäti saù

     gomaté—of the Gomaté; sindhu—and the ocean; saëgasya—of the meeting; mähätmyam—the glory; çåëute—hears; naraù—a pewrson; sarva-päpa—all sins; vinirmuktaù—freed; viçëulokam—to the world of Lord Viçëu; prayäti—goes; saù—he.

     A person who hears this story describing the glories of the holy place where the Gomaté flows into the ocean becomes free of all sins and goes to the realm of Lord Viçëu.

Chapter Fourteen
Çré Ratnäkara-raivata-käcala-mähätmya
The Glories of Ratnäkara, Raivata, and Käcala

Text 1

çré-närada uväca

dväravatyäù samudrasya
     mähätmyaà çåëu mänada
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     tat-snäna-phala-daà småtam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; dväravatyäù—of d; samudrasya—of the ocean; mähätmyam—the glory; çåëu—please hear; mänada—O respectful one; sarva-päpa—all sins; haram—removing; puëyam—sacred; tat-snäna-phala-dam—the result of bathing there; småtam—considered.

     Çré Närada said: O respectful one, please hear the glories of the ocean by Dvärakä City. Hearing the narration of these glories removes all sins and brings one the same result one obtains by bathing at that sacred place.

Texts 2 and 3 

mädhavyäà pürëimäsyäà yo
     vraté snätvä nadé-patim
natvä sampüjya vidhivad
     ratna-dänaà karoti yaù

tasya dehe trayo devä
     nivasanti mahé-pate
yasya darçana-mätreëa
     naro yäti kåtärthatäm

     mädhavyäm—in the month og Mädhava; pürëimäsyäm—on the full-moon day; yaù—who; vraté—following vows; snätvä—bathing; nadé-patim—the king of rivers; natvä—bowing down; sampüjya—worshiping; vidhivat—properly; ratna-dänam—gift of jewels; karoti—does; yaù—who; tasya—of him; dehe—in the body; trayaù—three; deva—demigods; nivasanti—reside; mahé-pate—O master of the earth; yasya—of whom; darçana—seeing; mätreëa—simply by; naraù—a person; yäti—attains; kåtärthatäm—the goal of life.

     A religious person who in the month of Mädhava (April-May) bathes in the ocean by Dvärakä, bows down before it, properly worships it, and then gives jewels in charity to the brähmaëas, finds that the three great demigods reside in his body. Simply by seeing him one attains the goal of life.

Text 4 

tad-deha-sparçanät sadyo
     brahma-hatyä pramucyate
yatra yatra gataù so 'pi
     tatra tatra sa bhüù çubhä

     tad-deha—of his body; sparçanät—by the touch; sadyaù—at once; brahma-hatyä—the sin of killing a brähmaëa; pramucyate—is freed; yatra yatra—wherever; gataù—gone; so 'pi—he; tatra tatra—there; sa—he; bhüù—the earth; çubhä—auspicious.

     Simply by tyouching his body one becomes free of the sin of killing a brähmaëa. Any place he visits becomes sacred and auspicious.

Text 5 

dåçövä taà ca måtaù päpé
     jagad-vadha-karo 'pi hi
chinatti päpa-paöalaà
     paraà mokçaà prayäti hi

     dåçövä—seeing; tam—him; ca—and; måtaù—dead; päpé—sinner; jagad-vadha-karaù—who has murdered the entire world; api—even; hi—indeed; chinatti—breaks; päpa-paöalam—a host of sins; param—supreme; mokçam—liberation; prayäti—attains; hi—indeed.

     By seeing him even a sinner who by killing everyone in the world has become like a walking corpse becomes free of sin and attains liberation.

Text 6 

raivatasyätha çailasya
     mähätmyaà çåëu mänada
sarva-päpa-haraà puëyaà
     mukti-bhukti-pradäyakam

     raivatasya—of Raivata; atha—then; çailasya—the mountain; mähätmyam—the glory; çåëu—please hear; mänada—O respectful one; sarva-päpa—all sins; haram—removing; puëyam—sacred; mukti-bhukti-pradäyakam—giving happiness and liberation.

     O respectful one, please hear the story of Mount Raivata's glories, a sacred story that removes all sins, brings happiness in this life, and awards liberation at the end. 

Text 7 

gautamasya suto dhémän
     medhävé näma vaiçëavaù
vindhyäcale tapas tepe
     varçänäm ayutaà çatam

     gautamasya—of Gautama Muni; sutaù—son; dhémän—intelligent; medhävé—Madhävé; näma—named; vaiçëavaù— adevotee of Lord Viçëu; vindhyäcale—in the Vindyä mountains; tapaù—austerities; tepe—performed; varçänäm—years; ayutam—ten thousand; çatam—a hundred.

     There was a Vaiçëava named Medhävé, who was very intelligent and was the son of Gautama Muni. For one million years he performed austerities in the Vindyä mountains.

Text 8 

taà draçöum ägataù säkçäd
     apäntaratamo muniù
noccacäläsanät so 'pi
     medhävé tapasotkaöaù

     tam—him; draçöum—to see; ägataù—came; säkçät—directly; apäntaratamo muniù—Apäntaratama Muni; na—not; uccacäla—rose; äsanät—from the seat; so 'pi—he; medhävé—Medhävé; tapasä—on austerities; utkaöaù—intent.

     One day Apäntaratama Muni came to see him. Rapt in performing austerities, Medhävé did not rise from his seat to greet him.

Text 9 

apäntaratamas taà vai
     çaçäpa krodha-püritaù
satäm abhakta päpätman
     sva-tapo-bala-garvitaù

     apäntaratamaù—Apäntaratama; tam—him; vai—indeed; çaçäpa—cursed; krodha-püritaù—filled with anger; satäm—to the saintly devotees; abhakta—not devoted; päpätman—O sinner; sva-tapo-bala-garvitaù—proud of the power of your austerities.

     Filled with anger, Apäntaratama Muni cursed him, “Sinner, you have no devotion and respect for saintly persons. You are very proud of the power of your austerities.

Text 10 

çailavat te sthitiç cätra
     tvaà çailo bhava durmate
ity uktvätha gate säkçäd
     apäntaratame munau

     çailavat—like a mountain; te—of you; sthitiù—stationary standing; ca—and; atra—here; tvam—you; çailaù—a mountain; bhava—become; durmate—O fool; ity—thus; uktvä—speaking; atha—then; gate—gone; säkçät—directly; apäntaratame—Apäntaratama; munau—Muni.

     “You simply sit motionless like a mountain. Fool, become a mountain, then!" After speaking these words, Apäntaratama Muni left.

Text 11 

medhävé çailatäà präptaù
     çré-çailasya suto 'bhavat
jäti-smaro mahä-buddhir
     viçëu-bhakteù prabhävataù

     medhävé—Medhävé; çailatäm—the state of being a mountain; präptaù—attained; çré-çailasya—of Çré Çaila; sutaù—the son; abhavat—became; jäti-smaraù—remembering his previous birth; mahä-buddhiù—very intelligent; viçëu-bhakteù—of devotion to Lord Viçëu; prabhävataù—by the power.

     Because of this Medhävé became a mountain. Born as the son of Mount Çré Çaila, he could, because of the power of his devotion to Lord Viçëu, remember his previous birth. 

Text 12 

ekadä man-mukhäc chrutvä
     mähätmyaà dvärakä-puraù
proväca so 'pi räjänaà
     raivataà gaccha sa-tvaram

     ekadä—one day; man-mukhät—from my mouth; çrutvä—hearing; mähätmyam—the glory; dvärakä-puraù—of DvärakäCity; proväca—said; saù—he; api—also; räjänaà raivatam—to King Raivata; gaccha—go; sa-tvaram—quickly.

     One day he heard from my mouth the glories of Dvärakä City. Then he said to me, “Please go to King Raivata at once.

Texts 13-16

vada mat-prarthanäm uktäà
     tvaà mahä-déna-vatsalaù
so 'yaà mahä-balo räjä
     prasanno yadi vä bhavet

tena nétasya me väso
     bhaviçyati hareù puri
iti çrutvä mayä viçëu-
     bhaktänäà çänti-käriëä

raivatäyäçu kathitaà
     tathoktaà paramaà vacaù
sa prasannaù präha räjann
     atra ko 'pi na parvataù

tat-sthäpanaà kariçyämi
     samutpatya bhujäbalät
samunnéya dvärakäyäà
     pratijïäm akarod imäm

     vada—please tell; mat-prarthanäm—my request; uktäm—said; tvam—you; mahä-déna-vatsalaù—kind to the wretched; saù—he; ayam—he; mahä-balaù—very powerful; räjä—king; prasannaù—pleased; yadi—if; vä—or; bhavet—may be; tena—by him; nétasya—brought; me—of me; väsaù—the residence; bhaviçyati—will be; hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; puri—in the city; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; mayä—by me; viçëu-bhaktänäm—of the Vaiçëavas; çänti-käriëä—pacifying; raivatäya—to King Raivata; äçu—at once; kathitam—spoken; tathoktam—as said; paramam—great; vacaù—words; sa—he; prasannaù—pleased; präha—said; räjann—O king; atra—here; ko 'pi—any; na—not; parvataù—mountain; tat-sthäpanam—placing it; kariçyämi—I will do; samutpatya—lifting; bhujäbalät—by the power of my arms; samunnéya—bringing; dvärakäyäm—to Dvärakä; pratijïäm—promise; akarot—did; imäm—that.

     “Please tell him my request. You are very kind to the fallen. Tell him, `If the powerful king is pleased with me, then he will give me a home in Lord Kåçëa's city.' "
     Hearing this, I, who always wish to please the Vaiçëavas, went to King Raivata and repeated these words. Pleased, the king promised, “There is not a single mountain in this place. With the strength of my arms I will personally pick up that mountain and bring it here to Dvärakä."

Text 17 

etasmiàs tac corayituà
     prayäte nåpa-sattame
tat-pürväsmäd ahaà präptaù
     çré-çailasya pure nåpa

     etasmin—in this; tat—that; corayitum—to kidnap; prayäte—come; nåpa-sattame—the great king; tat-pürväsmät—before him; aham—I; präptaù—came; çré-çailasya—of Çré Çaila; pure—in th city; nåpa—O king.

     As King Raivata set out to kidnap that mountain, I raced ahead and quickly entered the city of Mount Çaila.

Text 18 

kali-priyeëäpi mayä
     çré-çailäya mahätmane
kathitaù sarva-våttanto
     nåpa-caurya-samanvitaù

     kali-priyeëa—fond of a quarrel; api—even; mayä—by me; çré-çailäya—to Mount Saila; mahätmane—the noble-hearted; kathitaù—said; sarva-våttantaù—all that had happened; nåpa-caurya-samanvitaù—the king about to kidnap his son.

     Fond of a quarrel, I approached noble-hearted Mount Çaila and told him how King Raivata was about to kidnap his son.

Texts 19 and 20 

çré-çailaù putra-mohena
     nirbhartsyeti kva yäsi hi
sumeruà giri-räjaà ca
     himavantaà nageçvaram

çré-çailaù präha dharmätmä
     putra-sneha-samäkulaù
eko daivena datto 'yaà
     na puträ bahavaç ca me

     çré-çailaù—Mount Çaila; putra-mohena—bewildered with love for his son; nirbhartsya—rebuking; iti—thus; kva—where; yäsi—will you go; hi—indeed; sumerum—to Mount Sumeru; giri-räjam—the king of mountains; ca—and; himavantam—to the Himalayas; nageçvaram—the king of mountains; çré-çailaù—Mount Çaila; präha—said; dharmätmä—pious; putra-sneha-samäkulaù—overcome with love; ekaù—one; daivena—by fate; dattaù—given; ayam—he; na—not; puträù—sons; bahavaù—many; ca—and; me—of me.

     Overcome with love for his son, Mount Çaila rebuked him, “Where will you go?" Then Mount Çaila went to regal Mount Sumeru and regal Mount Himälaya and, overcome with love for his son, said to them, “Destiny has given me only one son. I do not have many sons.

Text 21 

taà hartum ägate räjïi
     raivate vai mahä-bale
videçaà yäti putro me
     tena räjïä mahätmanä

     tam—him; hartum—to kidnap; ägate—come; räjïi—when the king has; raivate—Raivata; vai—indeed; mahä-bale—very powerful; videçam—to another country; yäti—goes; putraù—son; me—my; tena—by that; räjïä—by the king; mahätmanä—noble-hearted.

     “When powerful and noble-hearted King Raivata comes he will take my son to a another country far away.

Text 22 

putra-snehäbhibhüto 'haà
     yuvayoù çaraëaà gataù
jitvä taà raivataà çéghraà
     putraà mäà dätum arhatha

     putra—for the son; sneha—by love; abhibhütaù—overcome; aham—I; yuvayoù—of you both; çaraëam—shelter; gataù—gone; jitvä—having defeated; tam—him; raivatam—Raivata; çéghram—at once; putram—son; mäm—me; dätum—to give; arhatha—are worthy.

     “I am overcome with love for my son. I take shelter of you both. Please defeat King Raivata and give me my son."

Text 23 

jäteç ca käraëät tau dvau
     sumeruç ca himäcalaù
çaila-lakçaiù parivåtau
     yoddhum äjagmatur drutam

     jäteù—birth; ca—and; käraëät—by the cause; tau—they; dvau—both; sumeruù—Sumeru; ca—and; himäcalaù—Himalaya; çaila—of mountains; lakçaiù—with a hundred thousand; parivåtau—accompanied; yoddhum—to fight; äjagmatuù—came; drutam—at once.

     Because they were his kinsmen, Mount Sumeru and Mount Himälaya, bringing with them a hundred thousand mountains, came at once to engage in the fight.

Text 24 

tato bhujäbhyäm utpatya
     hanumän iva taà girim
ürdhvaà kåtvä baläd räjä
     yadä gantuà mano dadhe

     tataù—then; bhujäbhyäm—arm against arm; utpatya—lifting; hanumän—Hanumän; iva—like; tam—that; girim—mountain; ürdhvam—up; kåtvä—making; balät—by power; räjä—the king; yadä—when; gantum—to go; manaù—mind; dadhe—placed.

     As Hanumän lifted a great mountain before, King Raivata lifted that mountain with his own arms. Then the king decided to leave.

Text 25 

tadaiva cägatän vékçya
     girén chasträstra-dhäriëaù
aööa-häsaà cakäroccais
     taòit-pätam ivätmanaù

     tadä—then; eva—indeed; ca—and; ägatän—come; vékçya—seeing; girén—the many mountains; chasträstra-dhäriëaù—with weapikns in their hands; aööa-häsam—loud laughter; cakara—did; taòit-pätam—a thunderbolt; iva—like; ätmanah—of the self.

     When the king saw that many weapon-bearing mountains had suddenly come before him, He laughed with a laugh like thunder. 

Text 26 

nanäda tena brahmäëòaà
     sapta-lokair bilaiù saha
tadaiva teçäà çasträëi
     hastebhyo nyapatan svataù

     nanäda—echoed; tena—by that; brahmäëòam—the universe; sapta-lokaiù—with seven planetary systems; bilaiù—with outer-space; saha—eith; tadä—then; eva—indeed; teçäm—of them; çasträëi—the weapons; hastebhyaù—from the hands; nyapatan—fell; svataù—spontaneously.

     That laugh echoed through the entire universe, filling the seven planetary systems and the emptinesses of outer space. At once the weapons fell from the mountains' hands.

Text 27 

niùçasträs te yadä çailäù
     kurvantaù pradhvanià muhuù
gacchantaà sa-girià jaghnur
     muçöibhir jänubhiù pathi

     niùçasträù—weaponless; te—they; yadä—when; çailäù—the mountains; kurvantaù—doing; pradhvanim—sound; muhuù—again and again; gacchantam—going; sa-girim—with the mountain; jaghnuù—hit; muçöibhiù—with fists; jänubhiù—with knees; pathi—on the path.

     Now weaponless, the mountains screamed and wailed again and again. As King Raivata was taking the young mountain, the mountains hit them again and again with their fists and knees.

Text 28 

yathä purä hanumantaà
     anuyätä mahä-balam
tais täòito 'pi na jahau
     girià räja karägrataù

     yathä—as; purä—before; hanumantam—to Hanumän; anuyätä—following; mahä-balam—very powerful; taiù—by them; täòitaù—hit; api—even; na—not; jahau—abandoned; girim—the mountain; räja—the king; karägrataù—from his hand.

     As before they had followed powerful Hanumän, the mountains followed King Raivata and attacked him again and again. Still, the king never let the young mountain fall from his hand.

Texts 29 and 30 

man-mukhäc chré-hariù çrutvä
     çailodyogaà nåpopari
sadyo bhakta-sahäyärthaà
     bhagavän bhakta-vatsalaù

ägatyäkäça-märge 'pi
     dättvä tejaù svakaà param
mä bhaiçöety abhayaà dättvä
     tvaram äntaradhéyata

     mat—my; mukhät—from the mouth; çré-hariù—Çré Kåçëa; çrutvä—hearing; çaila—of the mountain; udyogam—effort; nåpopari—on the king; sadyaù—at once; bhakta-sahäyärtham—to help a devotee; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhakta-vatsalaù—who loves His devotees; ägatya—coming; äkäça-märge—in the sky; api—also; dättvä—placing; tejaù—power; svakam—own; param—great; ma—don't; bhaiçöa—fear; iti—thus; abhayam—fearlessness; dättvä—giving; tvaram—at once; äntaradhéyata—disappeared.

     From my mouth hearing how King Raivata was struggling on the young mountain's behalf, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who loves His devotees, came at once to help. Appearing in the sky, He gave His own transcendental power to King Raivata, reassured him by saying, “Don't be afraid." and then suddenly disappeared.

Text 31 

gate harau bhagavati
     bhagavat-tejasänvitaù
eka-haste girià dhåtvä
     muçöinä vajra-ghätinä

sumeruà santatäòäçu
     vajréva balavattaraù
tasya muçöi-prahäreëa
     merur vihvalatäà gataù

     gate harau bhagavati—when Lord Hari had gone; bhagavat-tejasänvitaù—now possessing the Lord's potency; eka-haste—with one hand; girim—the mountain; dhåtvä—holding; muçöinä—with a fist; vajra-ghätinä—like a thunderbolt; sumerum—Sumeru; santatäòa—struck; äçu—at once; vajré—a thunderbolt; iva—like; balavattaraù—very powerful; tasya—of him; muçöi-prahäreëa—with a punch; meruù—Meru; vihvalatäm—agitation; gataù—attained.

     After the Supreme Lord had disappeared, King Raivata, now strong as a thunderbolt for he possessed the Lord's own strength, shifted the young mountain to a single hand and with the other punched Mount Sumeru with a punch like a thunderbolt, a punch that overwhelmed Mount Sumeru.

Text 33 

himavantaà bahu-vegät
     pätayitvä mahé-tale
mamarda padbhyäà cänyäàç ca
     vindhyädén raëa-durmadaù

     himavantam—Mount Himälaya; bahu-vegät—with great force; pätayitvä—throwing; mahé-tale—to the ground; mamarda—crushed; padbhyäm—with both feet; ca—and; anyän—the others; ca—and; vindhyädén—headed by the Vindhyä mountains; raëa—in the battle; durmadaù—wild with passion.

     Wildly passionate in the fight, King Raivata violently threw Mount Himälaya to the ground. With his feet he crushed Mount Vindhyä and the other mountains.

Text 34 

vindhyädayaç ca te sarve
     päda-ghätena märditäù
bhaya-bhétä raëaà tyaktvä
     dudruvus te diço daça

     vindhyädayaù—headed by Mount Vindhyä; ca—andc; te—they; sarve—all; päda-ghätena—by the kicks; märditäù—crushed; bhaya-bhétä—terrified; raëam—the battlefield; tyaktvä—fled; dudruvuù—ran; te—they; diçaù—the directions; daça—ten.

     Wounded by King Raivata's ferocious kicking, Mount Vindhyä and all the other terrified mountains fled in the ten directions.

Text 35 

evaà jitvä çaila-saëghaà
     taà çailaà çaila-sannibhaù
raivato 'pi jayäravair
     änarteçu nyapätayat

     evam—thus; jitvä—defeating; çaila-saëgham—the many mountains; tam—that; çailam—mountain; çaila-sannibhaù—like a mountain himself; raivataù—King Raivata; api—aslo; jaya—victory; äravaiù—with sounds; änarteçu—in the land of Anarta; nyapätayat—placed.

     Defeating the host of mountains in this way, King Raivata, who was like a mountain himself, amid many shouts of “Victory!", placed the young mountain in the land of Anarta.

Text 36 

so 'bhüd raivata-nämäpi
     räjan raivatako 'calaù
hari-bhaktaù çaila-mukhyo
     dväravatyäà viräjate

     saù—he; abhüt—became; raivata-nämä—named Raivata; api—also; räjan—O king; raivatakaù—Raivata; acalaù—mountain; hari-bhaktaù—a devotee of Lord Hari; çaila-mukhyaù—the best of mountains; dväravatyäm—in Dvärakä; viräjate—is splendidly manifested.

     The mountain was named Mount Raivata after King Raivata. A great devotee and the best of mountains, Mount Raivata was splendidly manifested in Dvärakä.

Text 37 

tasya darçana-mätreëa
     brahma-hatyä pramucyate
sparçanäc chata-yajïänäà
     phalam äpnoti mänavaù

     tasya—of it; darçana-mätreëa—simply by seeing; brahma-hatyä—the sin of killing a brähmaëa; pramucyate—is freed; sparçanät—by the touch; çata-yajïänäm—of a hundred yajnas; phalam—the result; äpnoti—attains; mänavaù—a human being.

     Simply by seeing Mount Raivata one becomes free from the sin of killing a brähmaëa. Simply by touching Mount Raivata one attains the result of having performed a hundred yajïas.

Text 38 

yäträà kåtvä ca yasyäpi
     parikramya natänanaù
bhojanaà brähmaëe dättvä
     yäti viçëoù paraà padam

     yäträm—a pilgrimage; kåtvä—doing; ca—and; yasya—of which; api—also; parikramya—circumambulating; natänanaù—with bowed head; bhojanam—food; brähmaëe—to a brähmaëa; dättvä—giving; yäti—attains; viçëoù—of Lord Viçëu; param—the transcendental; padam—abode.

     A person who goes on a pilgrimage to Mount Raivata, with bowed head circumambulates Mount Raivata, and then feeds a brähmaëa, goes to Lord Viçëu's transcendental abode.

Chapter Fifteen
Kapiöaìka-någa-küpa-gopé-bhümi-mähätmya
The Glories of Någa-küpa and Gopé-bhümi

Text 1 

tasmin girau yajïa-térthaà
     raivatena kåtaà purä
yatra kåtvä yajïam ekaà
     koöi-yajïa-phalaà labhet

     tasmin—in this; girau—mountain; yajïa-
tértham—Yajna-tértha; raivatena—by King Raivata; kåtam—made; purä—before; yatra—where; kåtvä—having made; yajïam—yajna; ekam—one; koöi-yajïa-phalam—the result of ten million yajnas; labhet—attains.

     On this mountain King Raivata built a yajïa-tértha. By performing a yajïa at this place one attains the result of performing ten million yajïas.

Text 2 

kapiöaìkaà näma térthaà
     kapi-päta-samudbhavam
girau raivatake räjan
     sarva-päpa-praëäçanam

     kapiöaìkam—Kapiöaìka; näma—named; tértham—tirtha; kapi—of a monkey; päta—from the jumping; samudbhavam—manifested; girau—on the mountain; raivatake—Raivata; räjan—O king; sarva-päpa-praëäçanam—destroying all sins.

     O king, this holy place, which destroys all sins, was named Kapiöaìka because it was created by the jumping of a gorilla (kapi). 

Text 3 

bhaumäsura-sakho duñöo
     dviviòo näma vänaraù
märito yatra rämeëa
     muñöinä vajra-pätinä

     bhaumäsura-sakhaù—a freind of Bhaumasura; duñöaù—a demon; dviviòaù—Dvivida; näma—named; vänaraù—a gorilla; märitaù—killed; yatra—where; rämeëa—by Balaräma; muñöinä—with a fist; vajra-pätinä—a thunderbolt.

     With His thunderbolt fist, Lord Balaräma killed Bhaumäsura's friend, the demon gorilla Dviviòa, in this place.

Text 4 

sadyo muktià gataù so 'pi
     satäà helanavän api
tatra snätuà sadä devä
     ägacchanti nareçvara

     sadyaù—at once; muktim—liberation; gataù—attained; so 'pi—he; satäm—to the devotees; helanavän—an offender; api—even; tatra—there; snätum—to bathe; sadä—again and again; deväù—the demigods; ägacchanti—come; nareçvara—O great king.

     Even though he had offended many siantly persons, that gorilla attained liberation at that place. O great king, the demigods regularly come to bathe there.

Text 5 

kalaviìkasya yäträyäà
     koöi-go-däna-jaà phalam
etasya dvi-guëaà puëyaà
     daëòakäkhye vane çubhe

     kalaviìkasya—of Kalaviìka-tértha; yäträyäm—in apilgrimage; koöi-go-däna-jam—born from giving ten million cows in charity; phalam—the result; etasya—of that; dvi-guëam—double; puëyam—piety; daëòakäkhye—in Daëòaka Forest; vane—in the forest; çubhe—sacred.

     By going on pilgrimage to Kalaviìka-tértha and giving ten million cows in charity one attains a great pious result. This pious result is doubled when the pilgrimage and charity are performed in sacred Daëòakäraëya.

Text 6 

tasmäc catur-guëaà puëyaà
     saindhaväkhye mahä-vane
jambu-märge païca-guëaà
     puëyaà präpnoti mänavaù

     tasmät—from that; catur-guëam—four times as great; puëyam—pious result; saindhaväkhye—named Saindhava; mahä-vane—in the great forest; jambu-märge—at jambu-märga; païca-guëam—five times as great; puëyam—piety; präpnoti—attains; mänavaù—a human.

     A person attains a pious result is four times as great at Saindhaväraëya and five times greater than that at Jambu-märga.

Text 7 

tasmäd daça-guëaà puëyaà
     puñkaräkhye vane småtaà
tasmäd daça-guëaà puëyaà
     utpalävärta-yätrayä

     tasmät—from that; daça-guëam—ten times; puëyam—piety; puñkaräkhye—named Puñkara; vane—in the forest; småtam—considered; tasmät—from that; daça-guëam—ten times; puëyam—piety; utpalävärta-yätrayä—by a pilgrimage to Utpalävarta.

     That pious result is ten times greater than that at Puñkaräraëya and ten times greater again at Utpalävärta.

Text 8 

tasmäc ca naimiñäraëye
     puëyaà daça-guëaà småtam
tasmäc chata-guëaà puëyaà
     kapiöaìke videha-räö

     tasmät—than that; ca—and; naimiñäraëye—at Naimiñäraëya; puëyam—piety; daça-guëam—ten times; småtam—considered; tasmät—than that; çata-guëam—a hundred times; puëyam—piety; kapiöaìke—at Kapiöaìka; videha-räö—O king of Videha.

     That pious result is ten times greater again at Naimiñäraëya and hundred times greater than that at Utpalävärta.

Text 9 

någa-küpaà dvärakäyäà
     térthänäà tértham uttamam
yasya darçana-mätreëa
     vipra-vadhyät pramucyate

     någa-küpam—Någa-küpa; dvärakäyäm—at Dvärakä; térthänäm—of holy placed; tértham—holy place; uttamam—best; yasya—of which; darçana-mätreëa—simply by seeing; vipra-vadhyät—from the sin of killing a brähmaëa; pramucyate—is freed.

     Någa-küpa at Dvärakä is the best of holy places. Simply by seeing it one becomes free of the sin of killing a brähmaëa. 

Text 10 

ajïänäd brähmaëasyäpi
     gäà dadau brähmaëäya saù
tena päpena küpe vai
     kåkaläsa-vapur-dharaù
     ajïänät—from ignorance; brähmaëasya—of a brähmaëa; api—also; gäm—a cow; dadau—gave; brähmaëäya—to a brähmaëa; saù—he; tena—by that; päpena—sin; küpe—in a well; vai—indeed; kåkaläsa—of a lizard; vapuù—the form; dharaù—manifesting.

     Unaware of what he was doing, King Någa gave in charity to a brähmaëa a cow that belonged to another brähmaëa. For this sin he became a lizard in a well.

Text 11 

någo 'pi däninäà çreñöhaù
     patito 'tha catur-yugam
çré-kåñëena tad-uddhäraù
     kåto vai paçyatäà satäm

     någaù—Någa; api—also; däninäm—of philanthropists; çreñöhaù—the best; patitaù—fallen; atha—then; catur-yugam—for four yugas; çré-kåñëena—by Lord Kåñëa; tad-uddhäraù—deliverance; kåtaù—done; vai—indeed; paçyatäm—looking on; satäm—the saintly devotees.

     In this way King Någa, who had been the best of charitable men, fell into a wretched condition for four yugas. Finally, as the saintly devotees looked on, he was delivered by Lord Kåñëa.

Texts 12-14 

tad-dinän någa-küpaà tu
     térthé-bhütaà mahé-pate
kärtike pürëimäyäà tu
     tasmin snänaà samäcaret

koöi-janma-kåtät päpän
     mucyate nätra saàçayaù
ekaà yaträpi go-dänaà
     karoti vidhivan naraù

koöi-go-däna-jaà puëyaà
     labhate vai na saàçayaù
gopé-bhümeç ca mähätmyaà
     çåëu päpa-haraà param

     tad-dinät—from that day; någa-küpam—Någa's well; tu—indeed; térthé-bhütam—become a holy place; mahé-pate—on the earth; kärtike—in the month of Kärtika; pürëimäyäm—on the full moon day; tu—indeed; tasmin—there; snänam—bath; samäcaret—does; koöi-janma-kåtät—performed in ten million births; päpän—from the sins; mucyate—released; na—not; atra—here; saàçayaù—doubt; ekam—one; yatra—where; api—also; go-dänam—giving a cow in charity; karoti—does; vidhivan—properly; naraù—a person; koöi-gaù—ten million cows; däna—from the charity; jam—produced; puëyam—piety; labhate—attains; vai—indeed; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; gopé-bhümeù—of Gopé-bhümi; ca—and; mähätmyam—the glories; çåëu—please hear; päpa-haram—removing sins; param—great.

     From that day Någa-küpa (Någa's Well) has been one of the great pilgrimage places on this earth. A person who on the full moon day of the month of Kärttika (October-November) bathes at Någa-küpa becomes free of the sins performed in ten million births. Of this there is no doubt. A person who at Någa-küpa gives in charity a single cow attains the pious result of giving ten million cows. Of that there is no doubt. Now please hear the glories of Gopé-bhümi. Hearing its glories removes all sins.

Text 15 

yasya çravaëa-mätreëa
     karma-bandhät pramucyate
gopénäà yatra väso 'bhüt
     tena gopé-bhuvaù småtaù

     yasya—of which; çravaëa-mätreëa—simply by hearing; karma-bandhät—from the bonds of karma; pramucyate—is released; gopénäm—of the gopés; yatra—where; väsaù—residence; abhütdid; tena—by that; gopé-bhuvaù—the land of the gopés; småtaù—is considered.

     Simply by hearing about Gopé-bhümi, which is so named because the gopés resided there, one become free from the bondage of karma. 

Text 16 

gopy-aìgaräga-sambhütaà
     gopé-candänäm uttamam
gopé-candana-liptäìgo
     gaìgä-snäna-phalaà labhet

     gopy—of the gopés; aìgaräga—from the cosmetics; sambhütam—manifested; gopé-candänäm—gopé-candana; uttamam—supreme; gopé-candana—of gopé-candana; lipta—anointed; aìgaù—limbs; gaìgä-snäna-phalam—the result of bathing in the Gaìgä; labhet—one attains.

     In Gopé-bhümi gopé-candana was manifested from the gopés' cosmetics. A person who marks his limbs with gopé-candana tilaka attains the result of bathing in the Gaìgä.   

Text 17 

mahä-nadénäà snänasya
     puëyaà tasya dine dinegopé-candana-müdräbhir
     müdrito yaù sadä bhavet

     mahä-nadénäm—of great sacred rivers; snänasya—of bathing; puëyam—the pious result; tasya—of that; dine—day; dine—after day; gopé-candana—of gopé-candana; müdräbhiù—by marking; müdritaù—marked; yaù—who; sadä—always; bhavet—is.

     A person who daily wears gopé-candana tilaka attains the pious result of daily bathing in all sacred rivers.

Text 18 

açvamedha-sahasräëi
     räjasüya-çatäni ca
sarväëi tértha-dänäni
     vratäni ca tathaiva ca kåtäni tena nityaà vai      sa kåtärtho na saàçayaù

     açvamedha-sahasräëi—a thousand asvamedha-yajnas; räjasüya-çatäni—a hundred rajasuya-yajnas; ca—and; sarväëi—all; tértha—holy places; dänäni—giving charity; vratäni—following vows; ca—and; tathä—so; eva—indeed; ca—and; kåtäni—done; tena—by him; nityam—daily; vai—indeed; sa—he; kåtärthaù—attains the goal of life; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     A person who daily wears gopé-candana tilaka attains the result of performing a thousand açvamedha-yajïas and a hundred räjasüya-yajïas. He attains the reusult of giving charity and following vows at all holy places. He attains the goal of life. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 19 

gaìgä-måd-dvi-guëaà puëyaà
     citraküöa-rajaù småtam
tasmäd daça-guëaà puëyaà
     rajaù païcavaté-bhavam

     gaìgä—of the Gaìgä; måt—the mud; dvi-guëam—twice; puëyam—piety; citraküöa-rajaù—the dust of Citraküöa; småtam—considered; tasmät—than that; daça-guëam—ten times; puëyam—piety; rajaù—the dust; païcavaté-bhavam—of Païcavaté.

     Twice as sacred as the mud of the Gaìgä is the dust of Citraküöa. Ten times more sacred than that is the dust of Païcavaté-tértha.

Text 20 
tasmäc chata-guëaà puëyaà
     gopé-candanakaà rajaù
gopé-candanakaà viddhi
     våndävana-rajaù-samam

     tasmät—than that; çata-guëam—a hundred times; puëyam—sacred; gopé-candanakam—gopé-candana; rajaù—dust; gopé-candanakam—gopé-candana; viddhi—please know; våndävana-rajaù-samam—equal to the dust of Våndävana.

     A hundred times more sacred is the dust of gopé-candana. Please know that gopé-candana is equal to the dust of Våndävana.

Text 21 

gopé-candana-liptäìgaà
     yadi päpa-çatair yutam
taà netuà na yamaù çakto
     yama-dütäù kutaù punaù

     gopé-candana-liptäìgam—limbs marked with gopé-candana; yadi—if; päpa-çataiù—with a hundred sins; yutam—endowed; tam—him; netum—ot lead; na—not; yamaù—Yamaräja; çaktaù—is able; yama-dütäù—the messengers of Yamaräja; kutaù—how?; punaù—again.

     Even if in the past he has committed hundreds of sins, if a person wears gopé-candana tilaka, then Yamaräja cannot take him away. How, then, can Yamaräja's messengers touch him?

Text 22 

nityaà karoti yaù päpé
     gopé-candana-dhäraëam
sa prayäti harer dhäma
     golokaà prakåteù param

     nityam—regularly; karoti—does; yaù—who; päpé—a sinner; gopé-candana-dhäraëam—wearing gopé-candana; sa—he; prayäti—goes; hareù—of Lord Hari; dhäma—to the abod3; golokam—Goloka; prakåteù—the material world; param—above.

     A sinner who daily wears gopé-candana tilaka goes to Lord Kåñëa supreme abode, Goloka, which is beyond the world of matter.

Text 23 

sindhu-deçasya räjäbhüd
     dérghabähur iti çrutaù
anyäya-varté duñöätmä
     veçyä-saìga-rataù sadä
     sindhu-deçasya—of Sindhu-deça; räjä—a king; abhüt—was; dérghabähuù—Dérghabähur; iti—thus; çrutaù—heard; anyäya—evil; varté—doing; duñöätmä—wicked; veçyä-saìga-rataù—attached to prostitutes; sadä—always.

     In Sindhu-deça there was a king named Dérghabähu. He was cruel and sinful and he was addicted to visiting prostitutes. 

Text 24 

tena vai bhärate varñe
     brahma-hatyä-çataà kåtam
daça garbhavaté-hatyäù
     kåtäs tena durätmanä

     tena—by him; vai—indeed; bhärate varñe—in Bharat-varña; brahma-hatyä-çatam—killing a hundred brähmaëas; kåtam—done; daça—ten; garbhavaté-hatyäù—killing pregnant women; kåtäù—done; tena—by him; durätmanä—wicked.

     While he was on the earth this cruel sinner murdered a hundred brähmaëas and ten pregnant women.

Text 25 

mågayäyäà tu bäëaughaiù
     kapilä-go-vadhaù kåtaù
saindhavaà hayam äruhya
     mågayärthé gato 'bhavat

     mågayäyäm—in hunting; tu—indeed; bäëaughaiù—with many arrows; kapilä-go-vadhaù—killing a brown cow; kåtaù—done; saindhavam—a sindhu; hayam—horse; äruhya—mounting; mågayärthé—wishing to hunt; gataù—went; abhavat—did.

     One day he mounted a sindhu horse and went hunting. With a flood of arrows he accidentally killed with a brown cow in that hunt.

Text 26 

ekadä räjya-lobhena
     mantré kruddho mahä-khalam
jaghänäraëya-deçe taà
     tékñna-dhäreëa cäsinä

     ekadä—one day; räjya—for a kingdom; lobhena—with greed; mantré—minister; kruddhaù—angry; mahä-khalam—wicked; jaghäna—killed; äraëya-deçe—in the forest; tam—him; tékñna-dhäreëa—with a sharp; ca—and; asinä—sword.

     One day, greedy to get his kingdom, with a sharp sword his angry minister killed him in the forest.

Text 27 

bhü-tale patitaà måtyu-
     gataà vékñya yamänugäù
baddhvä yama-puréà ninyur
     harñayantaù parasparam

     bhü-tale—to the ground; patitam—fallen; måtyu-gatam—dead; vékñya—seeing; yamänugäù—the yamadütas; baddhvä—binding; yama-purém—to the city of yama; ninyuù—led; harñayantaù—joking; parasparam—among themselves.

     Seeing him fallen to the ground and dead, the Yamadütas came, bound him, and, joking as they went, took him to the city of Yamaräja.

Text 28 

sammukhe 'vasthitaà vékñya
     päpinaà yama-räò balé
citraguptaà präha türëaà
     kä yogyä yänatäsya vai

     sammukhe—in the presence; avasthitam—situated; vékñya—seeing; päpinam—sinner; yama-räò—yamaräja; balé—powerful; citraguptam—to Citragupta; präha—said; türëam—quickly; kä—what?; yogyä—is proper; yänatä—punishment; asya—of him; vai—certainly.

     Seeing this sinner brought before him, powerful Yamaräja said to his scribe Citragupta, "What is the proper punishment for him?"

Text 29 

çré-citragupta uväca 
catur-açéti-lakñeñu
     narakeñu nipatyatäm
niùsandehaà mahä-räja
     yävac candra-diväkarau

     çré-citragupta uväca—Çré Citragupta said; catur-açéti-lakñeñu—eight million four hundred thousand; narakeñu—into hells; nipatyatäm—should fall; niùsandeham—without doubt; mahä-räja—O great king; yävat—as longas; candra—the moon; diväkarau—and the sun.

     Çré Citragupta said: O great king, he should be thrown into eight million four hundred thousand hells for as long as the sun and the moon shine in the sky.

Text 30 

anena bhärate varñe
     kñaëaà na su-kåtaà kåtam
daça-garbhavaté-ghätaù
     kapilä-go-vadhaù kåtaù

     anena—by him; bhärate varñe—on the earth; kñaëam—for a moment; na—not; su-kåtam—pious deed; kåtam—done; daça—ten; garbhavaté—pregnant women; ghätaù—killed; kapilä-go-vadhaù—the killing of a brown cow; kåtaù—done.

     On the earth he did not perform a single pious deed. He killed ten pregnant women. He killed a brown cow.

Text 31 

tathä vana-mågänäà ca
     kåtvä hatyäù sahasraçaù
tasmäd ayaà mahä-päpé
     devatä-dvija-nindakaù

     tathä—so; vana-mågänäm—of animals in the forest; ca—and; kåtvä—doing; hatyäù—killing; sahasraçaù—thousands; tasmät—from that; ayam—he; mahä-päpé—a great sinner; devatä—the demigods; dvija—andf the brähmaëas; nindakaù—offending.

     He killed thousands of deer in the forest. He offended the demigods and the brähmaëas. He is a great sinner.

Texts 32 and 33 

çré-närada uväca 
tadä yamäjïayä dütä
     nitvä taà päpa-rüpiëam
sahasra-yojanäyäme
     tapta-taile mahä-khale

sphurad aty-ucchalat-phene
     kumbhépäke nyapätayan
pralayägni-samo vahniù
     sadyaù çétalatäà gataù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tadä—then; yama—of Yamaräja; äjïayä—by the order; dütä—his messengers; nitvä—taking; tam—him; päpa-rüpiëam—sinner; sahasra-yojanäyäme—eight thousand miles across; tapta—boiling; taile—oil; mahä-khale—very terrible; sphurat—manifested; aty-ucchalat-phene—bubbling; kumbhépäke—in Kumbhipaka; nyapätayan—thrown; pralaya—of cosmic devastation; agni—the fire; samaù—equal; vahniù—fire; sadyaù—at once; çétalatäm—coldness; gataù—attained.

     Çré Närada said: Then, by Yamaräja's order, the Yamadütas took that sinner and threw him into a terrible, eight-thousand mile wide cauldron of bubbling boiling oil in the hell of Kumbhépäka. The moment that sinner came to it, the boiling oil, which was as hot as the great fires at the time of cosmic devastation, suddenly became cool.

Text 34 

vaideha tan-nipatanät
     prahläda-kñepaëäd yathä
tadaiva citram äcakhyur
     yama-dütä mahätmane

     vaideha—O king of Videha; tan-nipatanät—by his falling; prahläda-kñepaëät—the throwing of Prahläda; yathä—as; tadä—then; eva—indeed; citram—a wonder; äcakhyuù—told; yama-dütä—the Yamadütas; mahätmane—to Yamaräja.

     O king of Videha, as Prahläda was unhurt in the same situation, that sinner was not hurt by the boiling oil. Then the Yamadütas described that great wonder to noble-hearted Yamaräja.

Text 35 

anena su-kåtaà bhümau
     kñaëavan na kåtaà kvacit
citraguptena satataà
     dharma-räjo vyacintayat

     anena—by him; su-kåtam—a pious deed; bhümau—on the earth; kñaëavan—for a moment; na—not; kåtam—done; kvacit—ever; citraguptena—by Citragupta; satatam—again and again; dharma-räjaù—Yamaräja; vyacintayat—considered.

     Yamaräja and Citragupta carefully reviewed the sinner's case and concluded that while he was on the earth the sinner had not for a moment performed even a single pious deed.

Text 36 

sabhäyäm ägataà vyäsaà
     sampüjya vidhivan nåpa
natvä papraccha dharmätmä
     dharma-räjo mahä-matiù

     sabhäyäm—to the assembly; ägatam—come; vyäsam—Vyäsa; sampüjya—worshiping; vidhivan—properly; nåpa—O king; natvä—bowing; papraccha—asked; dharmätmä—saintly; dharma-räjaù—Yamaräja; mahä-matiù—noble-hearted.

     Then Vyäsadeva arrived in that assembly. Bowing down before Him, and carefully worshiping Him, saintly and noble-hearted Yamaräja asked Vyäsadeva the following question.

Text 37 

çré-yama uväca 
anena päpinä pürvaà
     na kåtaà su-kåtaà kvacit
sphurad-agny-ucchalat-phene
     kumbhépäke mahä-khale

asya kñepanato vahniù
     sadyaù çétalatäà gataù
iti sandehataç cetaù
     khidyate me na saàçayaù

     çré-yama uväca—Çré Yamaräja said; anena—by this; päpinä—sinner; pürvam—before; na—not; kåtam—done; su-kåtam—pious deed; kvacit—ever; sphurad-agny-ucchalat-phene—bubbling with fire; kumbhépäke—in the burning Kumbhépäka; mahä-khale—terrible; asya—of him; kñepanataù—by the throwing; vahniù—the fire; sadyaù—at once; çétalatäm—coolness; gataù—attained; iti—thus; sandehataù—by doubt; cetaù—mind; khidyate—is tormented; me—of me; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     Çré Yamaräja said: When a certain sinner, who had never performed even a single pious deed, was thrown into the terrible boiling oil of Kumbhépäka, the oil suddenly became cool. Because of this my mind is now tortured with doubts.

Text 39 

çré-vyäsa uväca 
sükñmä gatir mahä-räja
     viditä päpa-puëyayoù
tathä brahma-gatiù präjïaiù
     sarva-çästra-vidäà varaiù

     çré-vyäsa uväca—Çré Vyäsadeva said; sükñmä—suble; gatiù—movement; mahä-räja—O great king; viditä—understood; päpa—of sin; puëyayoù—and piety; tathä—so; brahma-gatiù—spiritual activities; präjïaiù—by the wise; sarva-çästra—all scriptures; vidäm—of they who know; varaiù—by the best.

     Çré Vyäsadeva said: O great king, the intelligent sages, who have studied all the scriptures, know that the ways of piety, sin, and spiritual progress are very subtle and difficult to understand.

Text 40 

daiva-yogäd asya puëyaà
     präptaà vai svayam arthavat
yena puëyena çuddho 'sau
     tac chånu tvaà mahä-mate

     daiva-yogät—by fate; asya—of him; puëyam—piety; präptam—attained; vai—indeed; svayam—personally; arthavat—as money; yena—by whom; puëyena—by piety; çuddhaù—pure; asau—he; tat—that; çånu—please hear; tvam—you; mahä-mate—O noble one.

     Somehow or other, by destiny, this sinner did perform a pious deed, and by that deed he became purified. O noble-hearted one, please hear the story of this.

Text 41 

kasyäpi hastato yatra
     patitä dvärakä-mådaù
tatraiväyaà måtaù päpé
     çuddho 'bhüt tat-prabhävataù

     kasyäpi—of someone; hastataù—from the hand; yatra—where; patitä—fallen; dvärakä-mådaù—the mud of Dvärakä; tatra—there; eva—indeed; ayam-he; måtaù—died; päpé—sinner; çuddhaù—purified; abhüt—became; tat-prabhävataù—by its power.

     That sinner died in a place where from someone's hand some gopé-candana from Dvärakä had accidentally fallen. Dying in gopé-candana, that sinner became purified.

Text 42 

gopé-candana-liptäìgo
     naro näräyaëo bhavet
etasya darçanät sadyo
     brahma-hatyä pramucyate

     gopé-candana-liptäìgaù—his body marked with gopé-vandrana; naraù—a person; näräyaëaù—like Lord Näräyaëa; bhavet—becames; etasya—of him; darçanät—by the sight; sadyaù—at once; brahma-hatyä—the sin of killing a brähmaëa; pramucyate—is released.

     A person who wears gopé-candana tilaka attains a spiritual form like that of Lord Näräyaëa. Simply by seeing him one becomes free of the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

Texts 43 and 44 

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä dharma-räjas
     tam änéya viçeñataù
vimäne käma-ge sthäpya
     vaikuëöhaà prakåteù param

preñayäm äsa sahasä
     gopé-candana-kérti-vit
evaà te kathitaà räjan
     gopé-candanakaà yaçaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearong; dharma-räjaù—Yamaräja; tam—him; änéya—bringing; viçeñataù—specifically; vimäne—on an airplane; käma-ge—moving by desire; sthäpya—placing; vaikuëöham—in Vaikuëöha; prakåteù—the world of matter; param—above; preñayäm äsa—sent; sahasä—at once; gopé-candana-kérti-vit—aware of the glories of gopé-candana; evam—thus; te—to you; kathitam—told; räjan—O king; gopé-candanakam—gopé-candana; yaçaù—the glories.

     Çré Närada said: Hearing this, Yamaräja, who understands the glories of gopé-candana, took the sinner, placed him a an airplane that goes anywhere one wishes, and sent him to Vaikuëöha, which is above the worlds of matter. O king, thus I have described to you the glories of gopé-candana.

Text 45 

gopé-candana-mähätmyaà
     yaù çåëoti narottamaù
sa yäti paramaà dhäma
     çré-kåñëasya mahätmanaù

     gopé-candana-mähätmyam—the glories of gopé-candana; yaù—one who; çåëoti—hears; narottamaù—the best of men; sa—he; yäti—attains; paramam—the supreme; dhäma—abode; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     One who hears this account of gopé-candana's glories becomes exalted. He goes to the supreme abode of Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Chapter Sixteen
Çré Rädhä-rüpa-darçana
Seeing Çré Rädhä's Form

Text 1

siddhäçramasya mähätmyaà
     çåëu räjan mahä-mate
yasya smaraëa-mätreëa
     sarva-päpaiù pramucyate

     siddhäçramasya—of Siddhäçrama mähätmyam—glories; çåëu—please hear; räjan—O king; mahä-mate—noble-hearted; yasya—of which; smaraëa—hearing; mätreëa—simply by; sarva-päpaiù—all sins; pramucyate—freed.

     O noble-hearted king, please hear the glories of Siddhäçrama. Simply by hearing its glories one becomes free of all sins. 

Text 2 

yat-sparçanäd dhareù säkñän
     na viyogo bhavet kvacit
taà ca siddhäçramaà näma
     vadantéha purä-vidaù

     yat-sparçanät—by touching it; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; säkñän—directly; na—not; viyogaù—separated; bhavet—becomes; kvacit—sometime; tam—it; ca—and; siddhäçramam—Siddhäçrama; näma—named; vadanti—say; iha——here; purä-vidaù—they who know the truth of ancient times.

     One who touches the land of Siddhäçrama will never be separated from Lord Kåñëa. They who know the truth of ancient times say this place is named Siddhäçrama.

Text 3 

darçanäd yasya sälokyaà
     sämépyaà sparçanät tathä
särüpyaà snänato yäti
     säyujyaà tan-niväsataù

     darçanät—by the sight; yasya—of which; sälokyam—salokya; sämépyam—samipya; sparçanät—by the touch; tathä—so; särüpyam—sarupya; snänataù—by bathing; yäti—attains; säyujyam—sayujya; tan-niväsataù—by residing.

     By seeing Siddhäçrama one attains sälokya liberation. By touching it one attains sämépya liberation. By bathing there one attains särüpya liberation. By residing there one attains säyujya liberation.

Text 4 

tat-térthasyäpi mähätmyaà
     çrutvä candränanä-mukhät
rädhä snätuà manaç cakre
     kåñëa-vékñepa-vihvalä

     tat-térthasya—of this pilgrimage place; api—also; mähätmyam—the glory; çrutvä—hearing; candränanä-mukhät—from Candränanä's mouth; rädhä—Rädhä; snätum—to bathe; manaù—mind; cakre—placed; kåñëa-vékñepa—with separation from Lord Kåñëa; vihvalä—overwhelmed.

     When Çré Rädhä, who was broken-hearted in separation from Lord Kåñëa, heard from Candränanä's mouth the glories of Siddhäçrama, She decided bathe in that holy place.

Text 5 

çré-siddhäçrama-yäträyäà
     sürya-parvaëi mädhave
rädhä gantuà manaç cakre
     utthäya kadalé-vanät

     çré-siddhäçrama-yäträyäm—onm a pilgrimage to Siddhäçrama; sürya-parvaëi—on the sürya-parva day; mädhave—in the moth of Mädhava; rädhä—Rädhä; gantum—to go; manaù—mind; cakre—placing; utthäya—rising; kadalé-vanät—from Kadalévana.

     Leaving the forest of Kadalévana on the sürya-parva day in the month of Mädhava (April-May), Çré Rädhä decided to go on a pilgrimage to Siddhäçrama.

Texts 6 and 7 

gopénäà çata-yüthena
     sarva-gopa-gaëaiù saha
çata-varñe vyatéte tu
     çrédämnaù çäpa-käraëät

çré-rädhä sibikärüòhä
     chatra-cämara-véjitä
änarteñu mahä-térthaà
     yayau siddhäçramaà saté

     gopénäm—of gopés; çata-yüthena—with a hundred groups; sarva-gopa-gaëaiù—with all the gopas; saha—with; çata-varñe—a hundred years; vyatéte—passed; tu—indeed; çrédämnaù—of Çrédämä; çäpa-käraëät—from the curse; çré-rädhä—Çré Rädhä; sibikärüòhä—on a palanquin; chatra—parasol; cämara—camaras; véjitä—fanned; änarteñu—in Anarta-deça; mahä-tértham—top the great holy place; yayau—went; siddhäçramam—to Siddhäçrama; saté—saintly.

     Now that the hundred years of Çrédämä's curse had passed, saintly Çré Rädhä, riding on a palanquin, a parasol held over Her, fanned by many cämaras, and accompanied by a hundred groups of gopés and all the gopas, went to holy Siddhäçrama in the country of Anarta.

Text 8 

tatraiva bhagavän säkñäd
     yädavaiù parimaëòitaù
stréëäà ñoòaça-sähasrair
     yäträrthaà cäyayau nåpa

     tatra—there; eva—indeed; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; yädavaiù—with the Yädavas; parimaëòitaù—decorated; stréëäm—of the wives; ñoòaça-sähasraiù—with sixteen thousand; yäträrtham—to go on pilgrimage; ca—and; äyayau—went; nåpa—O king.

     O king, accompanied by His sixteen-thousand queens and all His relatives in the Yädava dynasty, Lord Kåñëa also went on a pilgrimage to Siddhäçrama.

Text 9 

baliñöhä ye ca gopäläù
     koöiçaù çastra-päëayaù
siddhäçramaà tu jugupuù
     sarvato rädhikäjïayä

     baliñöhä—strong; ye—who; ca—and; gopäläù—gopas; koöiçaù—millions; çastra-päëayaù—weapons in hand; siddhäçramam—Siddhäçrama; tu—indeed; jugupuù—protected; sarvataù—everywhere; rädhikä—of Çré Rädhä; äjïayä—by the order.

     By Çré Rädhä 's order many millions of strong gopas, weapons in  hand, protected the pilgrimage-party in Siddhäçrama. 

Text 10 

çata-yüthäs tathä gopyo
     vetra-hastä mahä-baläù
siddhäçrame tu vidhivat
     snäntéà rädhäà siñevire

     çata-yüthäù—a hundred groups; tathä—so; gopyaù—gopés; vetra-hastä—sticks in hand; mahä-baläù—very strong; siddhäçrame—in Siddhäçrama; tu—indeed; vidhivat—properly; snäntém—bathing; rädhäm—Rädhä; siñevire—served.

     Sticks in hand, a hundred groups of very strong gopés protected and served Çré Rädhä as She bathed at Siddhäçrama. 

Text 11 

dvärakä-väsinäà teñäà
     sthitänäà snänam icchatäm
çastra-vetrais täòitänäà
     viviçur bhagavat-striyaù

     dvärakä-väsinäm—as the men of Dvärakä; teñäm—they; sthitänäm—situated; snänam—bathing; icchatäm—desiring; çastra—weapons; vetraiù—sticks; täòitänäm—beaten; viviçuù—entered; bhagavat-striyaù—the wives of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     As the men of Dvärakä, wishing to bathe there, were being beaten with sticks, Lord Kåñëa's queens entered that place.

Text 12 

keyaà snätéti papracchur
     yasyä vaibhavam adbhutam
yad-gauravät trasantéha
     sarve yädava-puìgaväù

     kä—who?; iyam—She; snäté—bathing; iti—thus; papracchuù—asked; yasyä—pf whom; vaibhavam—the power; adbhutam—wonderful; yad-gauravät—out of respect for whom; trasanti—fear; iha—here; sarve—all; yädava-puìgaväù—the best of the Yädavas.

     The queens asked: Who is the girl bathing here? Her power is wonderful. The best of the Yädava warriors are terrified of Her.

Text 13 

aho kasya priyäà ceyaà
     kä näma kutra väsiné
tvaà sarva-jïo hi bhagavän
     vada no devaké-suta

     ahaù—Oh; kasya—of whom?; priyäm—the beloved; ca—and; iyam—She; kä—Who?; näma—name; kutra—where?; väsiné—resides; tvam—You; sarva-jïaù—all-knowing; hi—indeed; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vada—please tell; naù—us; devaké—of Devaké; suta—O son.

     Who is Her beloved? What is Her name? Where does She live? O Lord, You know everything. O son of Devaké, please tell us.

Text 14 

çré-bhagavän uväca 
våñabhänu-sutä säkñäd
     rädheyaà kérti-nandiné
vrajeçvaré mad-dayitä
     gopikädhéçvaré varä

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; våñabhänu—of King Våñabhänu; sutä—the daughter; säkñät—directly; rädhä—Rädhä; iyam—She; kérti—of Kérti; nandiné—the daughter; vrajeçvaré—the queen of Vraja; mad-dayitä—My beloved; gopikädhéçvaré—the queen of the gopés; varä—exalted.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: She is named Rädhä. She is the daughter of Kérti and Våñabhänu. She is the queen of Vraja and the queen of the gopés. She is very exalted. I am Her beloved.

Text 15 

snätuà siddhäçramaà präptä
     vrajäd gopé-gaëaiù saha
yad-gauravät trasanty ete
     tasyä vaibhavam adbhutam

     snätum—to bathe; siddhäçramam—Siddhäçrama; präptä—attained; vrajät—from Vraja; gopé-gaëaiù—with many gopés; saha—with; yad-gauravät—in awe of whom; trasanti—are frightened; ete—they; tasyä—of Her; vaibhavam—the power; adbhutam—wonderful.

     Accompanied by many gopés, from Vraja She has come to bathe at Siddhäçrama. The great Yädava warriors are terrified of Her. That is Her wonderful power.

Text 16 

çré-kåñëasya vacaù çrutvä
     satyabhämätha bhäminé
çanaiù präha sapatnénäà
     rüpa-yauvana-garvitä

     çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; vacaù—the words; çrutvä—hearing; Satyabhämä-Satyabhämä; atha—then; bhäminé—beautiful; çanaiù—slowly; präha—said; sapatnénäm—of her co-wives; rüpa-yauvana-garvitä—proud of her youthful beauty.

     After hearing Lord Kåñëa's words, beautiful Satyabhämä, who proudly thought herself the queen whose youthful beauty was the greatest, slowly said:

Text 17 

kià nu rädhä rüpavaté
     nähaà rüpavaté kim u
bahubhir yäcitä pürvaà
     rüpaudärya-guëärcitä

     kim—why?; nu—indeed; rädhä—Rädhä; rüpavaté—beautiful; na—not; aham—I; rüpavaté—beautiful; kim—whether?; u—indeed; bahubhiù—by many; yäcitä—begged; pürvam—before; rüpa—beauty; audärya—and greatness; guëa—virtues; arcitä—worshiped.

     Why is Rädhä so beautiful? Am I not beautiful? Beauty and virtue worship me. Many begged for my hand.

Text 18 

mad-rüpa-käraëät sakhyaù
     çatadhanvä måto 'bhavat
akrüraù kåtavarmä ca
     purä tau dvau paläyitau

     mad-rüpa-käraëät—because of my beauty; sakhyaù—O freinds; çatadhanvä—Satadhanva; måtaù—died; abhavat—became; akrüraù—Akrüra; kåtavarmä—Kåtavarmä; ca—and; purä—before; tau—they; dvau—both; paläyitau—fled.

     Because of my beauty Akrüra and Kåtavarmä fled and Çatadhanvä died.

Texts 19 and 20 

dine dine svarëa-bhärän
     añöäu sa såjati svataù
durbhikña-märy-ariñöäni
     sarvädhi-vyädhayo 'çubhäù

na santi mäyinas tatra
     yaträste 'bhyarcito maëiù
mat-piträ paribarhe 'pi
     dattaù säkñät syamantakaù

     dine dine—day after day; svarëa-bhärän—bharas of gold; añöäu—eight; sa—it; såjati—creates; svataù—itselkf; durbhikña—famines; märy—plague; ariñöäni—calamities; sarva—all; ädhi—sufferings; vyädhayaù—diseases; açubhäù—inauspicious; na—not; santi—are; mäyinaù—theives; tatra—there; yatra—where; äste—is; abhyarcitaù—worshiped; maëiù—jewel; mat-piträ—by my father; paribarhe—as a wedding present; api—even; dattaù—given; säkñät—directly; syamantakaù—Syamantaka.

     On the day of my marriage as a wedding present my father gave the Syamantaka jewel. That jewel produces eight bhäras of gold every day. In the country where that jewel is worshiped there are no famines, plagues, calamities, diseases, thieves, or anything inauspicious.

Text 21 

tena jätaà mad-gåhe 'pi
     sarvaà vaibhavam adbhutam
premëä pareëa çré-kåñëa-
     garuòopari-gäminé

     tena—by that; jätam—born; mad-gåhe—in my home; api—also; sarvam—all; vaibhavam—power; adbhutam—wonderful; premëä—with love; pareëa—great; çré-kåñëa—Çré Kåñëa; garuòa—Garuòa; upari—one; gäminé—going.

     Because of that jewel there is great power in my home. Because of that jewel Lord Kåñëa loves me and took me riding on Garuòa.

Text 22 

bhaumäsura-mahä-yuddhaà
     duñöaà prägjyotiñaà puram
mamäpi kåpayä yüyaà
     tat-puräc ca samägatäù

     bhaumäsura-mahä-yuddham—a great battle with Bhaumäsura; duñöam—horrible; prägjyotiñam—Pragjyosia; puram—city; mama—of me; api—also; kåpayä—with mercy; yüyam—you; tat-purät—from that city; ca—and; samägatäù—come.

     Because of me Lord Kåñëa attacked Prägjyotiña City and fought with Bhaumäsura. It is by my mercy that you all came from Bhaumäsura's City.

Text 23 

präptäù çré-kåñëa-patnétvaà
     sarvä eva na saàçayaù
mad-gauraväc ca çakrasya
     chatraà dattam anena vai

     präptäù—attained; çré-kåñëa-patnétvam—teh status of Lord's Kåñëa's eife; sarvä—all; eva—indeed; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; mad-gauravät—by respectf for me; ca—and; çakrasya—of Indra; chatram—the parasol; dattam—given; anena—by Him; vai—indeed.

     It is by my mercy that all of you became Lord Kåñëa's wives. Of that there is no doubt. It is because of me that Lord Kåñëa returned Indra's parasol.

Texts 24 and 25 

kuëòale deva-mätre ca
     datte vai mat-priyecchayä
airävata-bhavä nägä
     bhaumäsura-samåddhayaù

mad-icchayä samänétäù
     çré-kåñëena mahätmanä
mat-käraëän mahä-vairaà
     çakre 'pi kåtavän hariù

     kuëòale—two earrings; deva-mätre—to the mother of the demigods; ca—and; datte—given; vai—indeed; mat-priya—of my beloved; icchayä—by the wish; airävata—of Airävata; bhaväù—the nature; nägä—elephants; bhaumäsura-samåddhayaù—the opulences of Bhaumasura; mat—of me; icchayä—by the desire; samänétäù—brought; çré-kåñëena—by Çré Kåñëa; mahätmanä—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; mat-käraëän—because of me; mahä-vairam—great enmity; çakre—with Indra; api—even; kåtavän—did; hariù—Kåñëa.

     Because of my wish Lord Kåñëa returned Aditi's earrings and Indra's parasol. Because of my wish Lord Kåñëa took Bhaumäsura's riches and his elephants powerful as Airävata. Becasue of me Lord Kåñëa fought with Indra.

Text 26 

mad-dväre vartate nityaà
     våkñendraù parijätakaù
pätivratyenaiva mayä
     çré-kåñëo 'yaà vaçé-kåtaù

     mad-dväre—at my doorway; vartate—is; nityam—always; våkñendraù—the king of trees; parijätakaù—Parijata; pätivratyena—by devotion ot my husband; eva—indeed; mayä—by me; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; ayam—He; vaçé-kåtaù—is conquered.

     By the doorway of my house a pärijäta, the king of trees, eternally grows. With devotion to Him I have brought Lord Kåñëa under my control.

Text 27 

sarvopaskara-samyukto
     näradäya samarpitaù
mat-samänaà na kasyästu
     gauravaà vaibhavaà tathä

     sarva—all; upaskara—paraphernalia; samyuktaù—possessing; näradäya—to Närada Muni; samarpitaù—offered; mat-samänam—equal to me; na—not; kasya—of whom?; astu—may be; gauravam—glory; vaibhavam—power; tathä—as.

     It is becasue of me that Lord gave many gifts to Närada Muni. No one is my equal. Who is glorious and powerful like me?

Texts 28 and 29 

rüpaudaryaà na kasyästu
     rädhäyäù kim u varëaëam
yad-rüpopari caidyädyä
     anena yuyudhur yudhi

he çubhru rukmiëé sä tvaà
     kathaà rüpavaté na hi
sa gopa-kanyakä sakhyo
     yüyaà vai räja-kanyakäù dhanyä manyäç ca sarvä vai      yüyaà mänavaté-varäù

     rüpa—beauty; audaryam—virtues; na—not; kasya—of whom?; astu—is; rädhäyäù—of Rädhä; kim u—whether?; varëaëam—description; yad-rüpopari—on the beauty; caidya-ädyä—headed by Çisupala; anena—with Him; yuyudhuù—fought; yudhi—in battle; he—O; çubhru—girl with the beautiful eyeborws; rukmiëé——Rukmiëé; sä—she; tvam—you; katham—why?; rüpavaté—beautiful; na—not; hi—indeed; sa—she; gopa-kanyakä—a gopé; sakhyaù—O friends; yüyam—you all; vai—indeed; räja-kanyakäù—princesses; dhanyä—fortunate; manyäù—worshipable and glorious; ca—and; sarvä—all; vai—indeed; yüyam—you; mänavaté-varäù—worthy of worship.

     No one is beautiful and virtuous like me. Who can be? Can it be said that this girl Rädhä is beautiful and virtuous like me? O Rukmiëi with the beautiful eyebrows, Çiçupäla and a host of kings fought over your beauty. Are you not beautiful? Friends, this Rädhä is only a cowherd girl. You are all princesses. You are fortunate and glorious. You are all worthy to be worshiped.

Text 30 

evaà tu satyabhämäyäà
     vadantyäà maithileçvara
bhütvä mänavaté sarvä
     rukmiëy-ädyäù striyo varäù

     evam—thus; tu—indeed; satyabhämäyäm—as Satyabhämä; vadantyäm—was speaking; maithileçvara—O king of Mithilä; bhütvä—becoming; mänavaté—proud; sarvä—all; rukmiëy-ädyäù—headed by Rukmiëé; striyaù—the wives; varäù—beautiful.

     O king of Mithilä, as Satyabhämä spoke these words, Çré Rukmiëé and the other beautiful queens became filled with pride.

Text 31 

kuça-kauçala-çélärtha-
     rüpa-yauvana-garvitäù
çré-kåñëaà mänadaà prähur
     añöä paööa-mahä-striyaù

     kuça—wild; kauçala—good fortune; çéla—virtue; artha—opulence; rüpa—beauty; yauvana—and youth; garvitäù—proud; çré-kåñëam—to Lord Kåñëa; mänadam—humble; prähuù—spoke; añöä—eight; paööa-mahä-striyaù—principal queens.

     Proud of their good fortune, virtues, wealth, and youthful beauty, the eight principal queens spoke to humble Lord Kåñëa.

Text 32 

çré-räjïya ücuù 
çrutaà tava mukhät pürvaà
     rädhä-rüpaà paraà småtam
yasyäà raktaù sadä tvaà vai
     tvayi raktä ca yä sadä

     çré-räjïya ücuù—the queens siad; çrutam—heard; tava—of You; mukhät—from the mouth; pürvam—before; rädhä—of Rädhä's; rüpam—beauty; param—great; småtam—remembered; yasyäm—for Her; raktaù—in love; sadä—always; tvam—You; vai—indeed; tvayi—with You; raktä—in love; ca—and; yä—who; sadä—always.

     The queens said: From Your own mouth we have heard of Çré Rädhä. We remember You said that You love Her eternally and She loves You eternally.

Text 33 

taà rädhäà drañöum icchämas
     tvat-priyäà vraja-väsiném
tvad-viyogena saìkhinnäà
     snätuà cätra samägatäm

     tam—Her; rädhäm—Rädhä; drañöum—to see; icchämaù—we wish; tvat-priyäm—Your beloved; vraja-väsiném—who lives in Vraja; tvat—from You; viyogena—by separation; saìkhinnäm—unhappy; snätum—to bathe; ca—and; atra—here; samägatäm—come.

     We wish to see Her, Rädhä, Your beloved, who lives in Vraja, and who, unhappy because She is separated from You, has come here to bathe.

Text 34 

çré-närada uväca 
tathästu coktvä çré-kåñëaù
     paööa-stré-pariveñöitaù
ñoòaça-stré-sahasräòhyo
     drañöuà rädhäà jagäma ha

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tathä—so; astu—be it; ca—and; uktvä—saying; çré-kåñëaù—Çré Kåñëa; paööa-stré—of the queens; pariveñöitaù—surrounded; ñoòaça-stré-sahasräòhyaù—with sixteen thousand queens; drañöum—to see; rädhäm—Rädhä; jagäma—went; ha—certainly.

     Çré Närada said: Saying, "So be it.", and taking the sixteen thousand queens with Him, Lord Kåñëa went to see Çré Rädhä.

Text 35 

çré-hema-çibire ramye
     patäkä-dhvaja-maëòite
candra-maëòala-çobhäòhye
     vitäna-tanite çubhe

     çré-hema-çibire—on a golden palanquin; ramye—beautiful; patäkä-dhvaja-maëòite—decorated with flags and designs; candra—the moon; maëòala—circle; çobha—with the beauty; äòhye—opulent; vitäna-tanite—with a parasol; çubhe—beautiful.

     Çré Rädhä's beautiful golden palanquin was decorated with flags, ornaments, a graceful awning glorious like the moon, . . . 

Text 36 

muktä-javanikä yatra
     vastrair ästaraëaà çubham
mälaté-makarandäòhyaà
     sarvato gandha-saìkulam

     muktä—of pearls; javanikä—a curtain; yatra—where; vastraiù—with colths; ästaraëam—spreading; çubham—beautiful; mälaté—-makarandäòhyam—rich with the nectar of malati flowers; sarvataù—everywhere; gandha-saìkulam—fragrant.

 . . . a curtain of pearls, many opulent cloths, and the all-pervading fragrance of mälaté flowers.

Text 37 

tena bhåìgävalé cakre
     kalaà kolähalaà param
tatra rädhä paööa-räjïé
     çré-kåñëa-håta-mänasä

     tena—by him; bhåìgävalé—many bees; cakre—did; kalam—melodious; kolähalam—tumultuous sound; param—great; tatra—there; rädhä—Rädhä; paööa-räjïé—the most important queen; çré-kåñëa-håta-mänasä—Her heart captivated by Lord Kåñëa.

     Attracted to that fragrance, many bees made a sweet-sounding commotion. Then the first queen, Çré Rädhä, Her heart captivated by Lord Kåñëa, came there.

Text 38 

haàsäbhair vyajanair divyair
     véjyamänä sakhé-janaiù
chatra-dola-dharais tatra
     vrajadbhis tam itas tataù

     haàsäbhaiù—splendid as swans; vyajanaiù—with fans; divyaiù—splendid; véjyamänä—fanning; sakhé-janaiù—by friends; chatra—parasol; dola—and palanquin;dharais tatra—carrying; vrajadbhiù—walking; tam—Her; itaù—here; tataù—and there.

     Bearing Her palanquin, holding Her parasol, and fanning Her with fans splendid and graceful as a flock of swans, the gopés carried Rädhä here and there.

Texts 39 and 40 

bälärka-kuëòala-dharä
     vidyud-däma-manoharä
koöi-candra-pratékäçä
     tanvé komala-vigrahä

aìguly-agraiù çobhanaiù svaiù
     puñpa-bhümià manoharaà
çanaiù çanaiù päda-padmaà
     dhärayanty ati-komalam

     bälärka-kuëòala-dharä—wearing earrings splendid as the rising sun; vidyud-däma-manoharä—beautiful as a garland of lightning flashes; koöi-candra-pratékäçä—glorious as millions of moons; tanvé—slender; komala-vigrahä—Her form delicate; aìguly-agraiù—with Her toes; çobhanaiù—beautiful; svaiù—own; puñpa-bhümim—on the ground of flowers; manoharam—beautiful; çanaiù çanaiù—slowly; päda-padmam—lotus feet; dhärayanti—placing; ati-komalam—very delicate.

     Then slender and delicate Rädhä, splendid as a necklace of lightning flashes, beautiful as millions of moons, and decorated with earrings glorious as the rising sun, gingerly placed first Her graceful toes, and then Her very delicate lotus feet on the ground filled with flowers.

Text 41 

durät täà rädhikäà prekñya
     kåñëa-patnyaù sahasraçaù
jagmur mürchäà mahä-räja
     tad-rüpeëäti-mohitäù

     durät—form afar; täm—Her; rädhikäm—Çré Rädhä; prekñya—seeing; kåñëa-patnyaù—Lord Kåñëa's queens; sahasraçaù—thousands; jagmuù—went; mürchäm—to fainting; mahä-räja—O great king; tad-rüpeëa—by Her beauty; ati-mohitäù—stunned.

     O great king, when they saw Çré Rädhä from far away, Lord Kåñëa's thousands of queens, overcome by the sight of Her beauty, suddenly fainted. 

Text 42 

tat-tejasä hata-rucaù
     süryät tärä-gaëä yathä
gata-rüpäbhimänäs tä
     ücuù sarväù parasparam

     tat-tejasä—by Her glory; hata-rucaù—their glory was eclipsed; süryät—from the sun; tärä-gaëä—the stars; yathä—as; gata—gone; rüpa—of the beauty; abhimänäù—pride; täù—they; ücuù—said; sarväù—all; parasparam—among themselves.

     As the sun makes the many stars seem insignificant so Çré Rädhä's beauty made the queens' beauty seem insignifant. Their pride in their own beauty now crushed, the queens said among themselves:

Text 43 

aho etädåçaà rüpaà
     tri-lokyäà na hi cädbhutam
çrutaà yathä tathä dåñöaà
     advitéyaà manoharam

     ahaù—Oh; etädåçam—like this; rüpam—beauty; tri-lokyäm—in the three worlds; na—not; hi—indeed; ca—and; adbhutam—wonderful; çrutam—heard; yathä—as; tathä—so; dåñöam—seen; advitéyam—without peer; manoharam—charming.

     Such wonderful beauty has no equal. In the three worlds the like of it has never been seen or heard of before. 

Text 44 

evaà vadantyas täà präptäù
     çré-kåñëasya puraù-saräù
gopénäà räja-putréëäà
     neträëi parirebhire

     evam—thus; vadantyaù—saying; täm—Her; präptäù—approached; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; puraù-saräù—going before; gopénäm—of the gopés; räja-putréëäm—of the princesses; neträëi—the eyes; parirebhire—embraced.

     As they were speaking these words, Lord Kåñëa's servants approached Çré Rädhä. It was then that the gopés and the queens met and their eyes embraced.
.pa

Chapter Seventeen
Siddhäçrame Çré-Rädhä-Kåñëägamane Rädhä-prema-prakäçaù
Çré Çré Rädhä and Kåñëa Meet at Siddhäçrama and the Nature of Çré Rädhä's Love Is Revealed

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
çré-kåñëam ägataà vékñya
     paööa-räjïé-samanvitam
tadä jaya-jayäravaà
     cakrur gopyo 'ti-harñitäù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; çré-kåñëam—Çré Rädhä; ägatam—come; vékñya—seeing; paööa-räjïé-samanvitam—with His most important queens; tadä—then; jaya-jayäravam—sounds of "Victory!"; cakruù—did; gopyaù—the gopés; ati-harñitäù—very happy.

     Seeing that Lord Kåñëa has come with His queens, the happy gopés called out "All glories! All glories!"

Text 2 

sahasä çré-harià rädhä
     parikramya kåtäïjaliù
padmäbhäbhyäà tu neträbhyäà
     änandäçrüëi muïcaté

     sahasä—at once; çré-harim—Lord Kåñëa; rädhä—Çré Rädhä; parikramya—circumambulating; kåtä 24jaliù—with folded hands; padma—lotuses; äbhäbhyäm—like; tu—indeed; neträbhyäm—with eyes; änandäçrüëi—tears of bliss; muïcaté—shedding.

     With folded hands Çré Rädhä circumambulated Çré Kåñëa. Then tears of bliss fell from Her lotus eyes.

Texts 3-5 

syamantaka-khacit-pädaà
     cintämaëi-khacit-taöam
padmaräga-lasan-madhyaà
     candra-maëòala-vartulam

kaustubhaiù prakhacit påñöhaà
     kumbha-maëòala-maëòitam
pärijätaka-puñpäòhyaà
     péyüña-sravi-chatra-mat

dattvä siàhäsanaà tasmai
     präha prahasitänanä
adya me saphalaà janma
     cädya me saphalaà tapaù

     syamantaka-khacit-pädam—its feet studded with syamantaka jewels; cintämaëi-khacit-taöam—its sides studded with cintämaëi jewels; padmaräga-lasan-madhyam—its middle glistening with rubies; candra-maëòala-vartulam—round as the moon; kaustubhaiù—with kaustubha jewels; prakhacit—studded; påñöham—its back; kumbha-maëòala-maëòitam—decorated with a dome; pärijätaka-puñpäòhyam—opulent with parijata flowers; péyüña-sravi—dripping nectar; chatra-mat—with a parasol; dattvä—offering; siàhäsanam—a throne; tasmai—to Him; präha—said; prahasita—smiling; änanä—face; adya—today; me—my; saphalam—success; janma—birth; ca—and; adya—today; me—of me; saphalam—success; tapaù—austerities.

     Then, offering Him a throne with feet of syamantaka jewels, sides of cintämaëi jewels, a middle glistening with rubies, a back of kaustubha jewels, opulent with many pärijäta flowers, round as the moon, and with a glorious dome and a parasol showering nectar, smiling Çré Rädhä said to Lord Kåñëa,  Now my life is a success. Now my austerities are a success.

Text 6 

adya me saphalo dharmo
     hare tvayy ägate sati
dhanyaà siddhäçrama-snänaà
     saphalé-bhütam adbhutam mayäpi na kåtä bhaktis      tava bhakta-sahäyinaù

     adya—now; me—my; saphalaù—success; dharmaù—religion; hare—O Kåñëa; tvayi—You; ägate—come; sati—being so; dhanyam—good fortune; siddhäçrama-snänam—bathing at Siddhäçrama; saphalé-bhütam—success; adbhutam—wonderful; mayä—by Me; api—also; na—not; kåtä—done; bhaktiù—devotion; tava—of You; bhakta-sahäyinaù—helped by the devotees.

     "O Kåñëa, now that You have come My practice of religion is a success and My bathing at Siddhäçrama is a wonderful success. Actually I have no devotion to You, who are served by Your real devotees.

Text 7 

bahavaç ca sahäyä me
     tvayä deva kåtä bhuvi
kaàso 'pi loka-vijayé
     yena bhéto babhüva ha

     bahavaù—many; ca—and; sahäyä—helpers; me—of me; tvayä—by You; deva—O Lord; kåtä—done; bhuvi—on the earth; kaàsaù—Kaàsa; api—even; loka-vijayé—who conquered the worlds; yena—by whom; bhétaù—afraid; babhüva—became; ha—indeed.

     "O Lord, You gave Me many friends in this world. You brought fear ot Kaàsa, who had conquered all the worlds.

Text 8 

sa märito mad-vacanäc
     chaìkhacüòas tayä hare
mat-premëäpi tvayä deva
     vaibhavaà darçitaà vraje

     sa—he; märitaù—killed; mad-vacanät—by My words; çaìkhacüòaù—Çaìkhacüòa; tvayä—by You; hare—O Kåñëa; mat—for Me; premëä—with love; api—also; tvayä——by You; deva—O Lord; vaibhavam—power; darçitam—shown; vraje—in Vraja.

     "O Kåñëa, on My request You killed Çaìkhacüòa. O Lord, out of love for Me You revealed Your power and glory in Vraja.

Text 9 

çakrasya mäna-bhaìgo 'pi
     kåto deva tvayä balät
mat-käraëäd vrajaà rakñan
     dhåtvä govardhanäcalam

     çakrasya—of Indra; mäna-bhaìgaù—breaking the pride; api—even; kåtaù—done; deva—O Lord; tvayä—by You; balät—forcibly; mat-käraëät—on My account; vrajam—Vraja; rakñan—protecting; dhåtvä—holding; govardhanäcalam—Govardhana Hill.

     "O Lord, for My sake You broke Indra's pride and lifted Govardhana Hill.

Text 10 

yathecchäliìgito räse
     gopébhis tvaà vaçé-kåtaù
idaà te caritaà deva
     nara-loka-viòambanam

     yathä—according; icchä—to desire; äliìgitaù—embraced; räse—in the rasa dance; gopébhiù—by the gopés; tvam—You; vaçé-kåtaù—conquered; idam—this; te—of You; caritam—actions; deva—O Lord; nara-loka—of human beings; viòambanam—an imitation.

     "In the räsa dance You embraced the gopés to Your heart's content. Your were conquered by the gopés. O Lord, these pastimes of Yours imitate the actions of human beings.

Text 11 

evaà vadanté sa rädhä
     tvaraà candränanäjïayä
sädareëa hareù patnér
     vékñya tä gauravaà dadau

     evam—thus; vadanté—speaking; sa—She; rädhä—r; tvaram—at once; candränanä—of Canränanä; äjïayä—by the order; sädareëa—with respect; hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; patnéù—the wives; vékñya—seeing; tä—to them; gauravam—respect; dadau—gave.

     As Çré Rädhä was speaking these words, Candränanä informed Her of the queens' presence. Respectfully glancing at the queens, Çré Rädhä offered them all respect.

Texts 12 and 13 

bhaiñméà jämbavatéà bhämäà
     satyäà bhadräà ca lakñmänäm
kalindéà mitravindäà ca
     militvä ta parasparam

ñoòaça-stré-sahasraà ca
     rohiëé-mukham eva ca
premänandamayé dorbhyäà
     parirebhe mudänvitä
         bhaiñmém—Rukmiëé; jämbavatém—Jämbavaté; bhämäm—Satyabhämä; satyäm—Satyä; bhadräm—Bhadrä; ca—and; lakñmänäm—Lakñmaëä; kalindém—Kälindé; mitravindäm—Mitravindä; ca—and; militvä—meeting; ta—them; parasparam—each other; ñoòaça-stré-sahasram—sixteen thousand queens; ca—and; rohiëé-mukham—headed by Rohiëé; eva—indeed; ca—and; premänandamayé—filled with the bliss of love; dorbhyäm—witharms; parirebhe—embraced; mudänvitä—joyful.

     Meeting Rukmiëé, Jämbavaté, Satyabhämä, Satyä, Bhadrä, Lakñmaëä, Kälindé, Mitravindä, sixteen thousand other queens, headed by Rohiëé, Çré Rädhä, filled with love and joy, embraced them in Her arms.

Text 14 

çré-rädhoväca 
candro yathaiko bahavaç cakoräù
     süryo yathaiko bahavo dåçaù syuù
çré-kåñëacandro bhagaväàs tathaiko
     bhaktä bhaginyo bahavo vayaà ca

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; candraù—moon; yathä—as; ekaù—one; bahavaù—many; cakoräù—cakora birds; süryaù—sun; yathä—as; ekaù—one; bahavaù—many; dåçaù—eyes; syuù—are; çré-kåñëacandraù—Çré Kåñëacandra; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tathä—se; ekaù—one; bhaktäù—devotees; bhaginyaù—O sisters; bahavaù—many; vayam—we; ca—and.

     Çré Rädhä said: As there is but one moon but the cakora birds are many, and as there is but one sun but the eyes are many, so there is but one Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëacandra, but we devotees, O My sisters, are many.

Texts 15 and 16 

padma-prabhävaà madhupo yathä hi
     ratna-prabhävaà kila tat-parékñit
vidyä-prabhävaà ca yathä hi vidvän
     kavya-prabhävaà ca yathä kavéndraù

yathä sahasreñu janeñu satsu
     rasa-prabhävaà rasikas tathä hi
jänäti tattvena narendra-putryaù
     kåñëa-prabhävaà bhuvi kåñëa-bhaktaù

     padma-prabhävam—the glory of the lotus; madhupaù—a bee; yathä—as; hi—indeed; ratna-prabhävam—the glory of jewels; kila—indeed; tat-parékñit—someone searching for jewels; vidyä-prabhävam—the glory of knowledge; ca—and; yathä—as; hi—indeed; vidvän—a scholar; kavya-prabhävam—the glory of poetry; ca—and; yathä—as; kavéndraù—the king of poets; yathä—as; sahasreñu—among tousands; janeñu—of people; satsu—saintly; rasa-prabhävam—the glory of nectar mellows; rasikaù—they who are expert at relishing nectar; tathä—so; hi—indeed; jänäti—knows; tattvena—in truth; narendra-putryaù—O queens; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; prabhävam—the glory; bhuvi—in this world; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; bhaktaù—a devotee.

     O queens, as a bumblebee understands the glory of lotus flowers, as a jeweler understands the glory of jewels, as a scholar understands the glory of knowledge, as a poet understands the glory of poetry, and as a person expert at tasting nectar understands the glory of the nectar held by thousands of saintly devotees, so only a devotee of Kåñëa can understand the glory of Kåñëa in truth.

Text 17 

çré-närada uväca 
rädhä-väkyaà tadä çrutvä
     rukmiëé bhéñma-nandiné
sapatné-sahitä präha
     rädhäà kamala-locanäm

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; rädhä-väkyam—Çré Rädhä's words; tadä—then; çrutvä—hearing; rukmiëé—Rukmiëé; bhéñma-nandiné—the daughter of Bhéñmaka; sapatné-sahitä—with her co-wives; präha—said; rädhäm—to Rädhä; kamala-locanäm—lotus-eyed.

     Çré Närada said: After hearing Çré Rädhä's words, Bhéñmaka's daughter Rukmiëé, who stood in the company of her co-wives, spoke to lotus-eyed Çré Rädhä.

Text 18 

çré-rukmiëy uväca 
dhanyäsi rädhe våñabhänu-putri
     tvad-bhakti-bhävena vaçé-kåto 'yam
vadaty alaà yasya kathäà tri-loké
     sa eva värtäà vadati tvadéyäm

     çré-rukmiëé uväca—Çré Rukmiëé said; dhanyä—fortunate; asi—You are; rädhe—O Rädhä; våñabhänu-putri—O daughter of King Våñabhänu; tvat—of You; bhakti-bhävena—by the love and devotion; vaçé-kåtaù—conquered; ayam—He; vadati—indeed; alam—greatly; yasya—of whom; kathäm—the talk; tri-loké—the three worlds; sa—that; eva—indeed; värtäm—talk; vadati—says; tvadéyäm—about You.

     Çré Rukmiëé said: O Rädhä, O daughter of King Våñabhänu, You are fortunate. Kåñëa is conquered by Your love. He is under Your control. The three worlds glorify Kåñëa, but Kåñëa glorifies You.

Text 19 

çrutaà yathä te hari-bhäva-lakñaëaà
     tathä hi dåñöaà na hi citram eva hi
gacchäçu cäsmac-chibiräëi yatra hi
     tvaà netum aträgatavatya ädåtäù

     çrutam—heard; yathä—as; te—of You; hari-bhäva-lakñaëam—characterized by love for Lord Kåñëa; tathä—so; hi—indeed; dåñöam—seen; na—not; hi—indeed; citram—wonder; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; gaccha—please go; äçu—at once; ca—and; asmat—our; çibiräëi—palanquins; yatra—where; hi—indeed; tvam—You; netum—to take; atra—here; ägatavatyä—come; ädåtäù—honored.

     We have already heard of Your great love for Lord Kåñëa, so we are not surprised now that we may see it directly. Please come to our palanquins. We have come here to honor You and take You with us.

Text 20 

çré-närada uväca 
evam uktvä bhéñma-sutä
     rädhäà kérti-sutäà tadä
samänéya sva-çibire
     sädareëa mahätmanä

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; uktvä—speaking; bhéñma-sutä—the daughter of King Bhéñmaka; rädhäm—to Rädhä; kérti—of Kérti; sutäm—the daughter of Kérti; tadä—then; samänéya—taking; sva-çibire—on Her own palanquin; sädareëa—respectfully; mahätmanä—noble-hearted.

     Çré Närada said: After speaking these words, to her own palanquin noble-hearted Queen Rukmiëé respectfully brought Çré Rädhä.

Texts 21 and 22 

çibire sarvato-bhadre
     padma-kiïjalka-väsite
haime çiréña-mådule
     paryaìke sopabarhaëe

sukhaà niväsayäm äsa
     väsaù sräì-maëòanädibhiù
sampüjya vidhivad rätrau
     sapatné-sahitä saté

     çibire—on the palanquin; sarvato-bhadre—named sarvato-bhadra; padma—lotus; kiïjalka—whorls; väsite—scented; haime—golden; çiréña—with sirisa flowers; mådule—soft; paryaìke—on the seat; sa-upabarhaëe—with cushions; sukham—comfortably; niväsayäm äsa—seated; väsaù—fragrance; sräì-maëòanädibhiù—with flower decorations and other ornaments; sampüjya—worshiping; vidhivat—properly; rätrau—at night; sapatné-sahitä—with her co-wives; saté—saintly.

     Then Rukmiëé made Çré Rädhä comfortable on the golden palanquin named Sarvatobhadra, which was fragrant with lotus whorls, flower garlands, and flower-decorations, and which had very soft cushions decorated with soft çiréña flowers. That night Rukmiëé, accompanied by her co-wives, worshiped Çré Rädhä.

Text 23 

gopénäà çata-yüthaà ca
     sampüjya ca påthak påthak
värtäläpän bahu-vidhän
     kåtvä kåñëa-priyäs tataù sväpayitvätha täà jagmuù      svaà svaà vai çibiraà mudä

     gopénäm—of the gopés; çata-yütham—the hundred groups; ca—and; sampüjya—worshiping; ca—and; påthak—one; påthak—by one; värtäläpän—conversations; bahu-vidhän—many kinds; kåtvä—doing; kåñëa-priyäù—Lord Kåñëa's dear queens; tataù—then; sväpayitvä—putting to sleep; atha-then; täm—to her; jagmuù—went; svam—own; svam—own; vai—indeed; çibiram—palanquin; mudä—happily.

     Then Rukmiëé and her co-wives worshiped the hundred groups of gopés one by one. After talking of many things, Lord Kåñëa's queens saw that each gopé comfortably went to sleep. Then the queens happily returned to their own palanquins.

Text 24 

kåñëa-pärçvaà gatä bhaiñmé
     dåñövä jägrad upasthitam
kathäà na çeñe bho svaminn
     iti kåñëam uväca ha

     kåñëa-pärçvam—to Lord Kåñëa';s side; gatä—went; bhaiñmé—Rukmiëé; dåñövä—seeing; jägrat—awake; upasthitam—situated; katham—why?; na—not; çeñe—You rest; bhaù—O; svaminn—master; iti—thus; kåñëam—to Lord Kåñëa; uväca—said; ha—indeed.

     Seeing that Lord Kåñëa was still awake, Rukmiëi went to His side and said, "Master, who do You not sleep?"

Text 25 

çré-bhagavän uväca 
pratyudgama-prasravaëair
     äçväsena vrajeçvaré
arcitä hi tvayä çubhruù
     prasannä säbhavat param

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; pratyudgama-prasravaëair äçväsena—by greeting; vrajeçvaré—Çré Rädhä; arcitä—worshiped; hi—indeed; tvayä—by you; çubhru—O girl with the beautiful eyebrows; prasannä—pleased; sä—She; abhavat—was; param—very.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O girl with the beautiful eyebrows, Rädhä was very pleased by the respectful welcome you gave Her.

Text 26 

sä ca nityaà hi pibati
     çayanädau payaù çubham
payaù-pänaà tu na kåtaà
     adya subhru tayä kila

     sä—She; ca—and; nityam—always; hi—indeed; pibati—drinks; çayanädau—before She takes rest; payaù—milk; çubham—pleasant; payaù-pänam—drinking milk; tu—but; na—not; kåtam—done; adya—now; subhru—O girl with the beautiful eyebrows; tayä—by you; kila—indeed.

     She always drinks milk before She takes rest. Still, O girl with the beautiful eyebrows, you did not arrange that She have milk to drink.

Text 27 

tena nidrä nayanayor
     na jätasya mahä-mate
tasmän mamäpi prasväpo
     na jäto bhéñma-kanyake

     tena—because of that; nidrä—sleep; nayanayoù—of the eyes; na—not; jätasya—come; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one; tasmän—therefore; mama—of me; api—also; prasväpaù—sleep; na—not; jätaù—come; bhéñma-kanyake—O daughter of King Bhéñmaka.

     For that reason, O noble-hearted girl, sleep has not come to Her eyes. O daughter of King Bhéñmaka, because She cannot sleep, I cannot sleep. 

Text 28 

çré-närada uväca 
iti çrutvä paraà bhaiñmé
     sapatnébhiù samanvitä
nitvä dugdhaà tat-samépaà
     prayayau paramädarät

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; param—then; bhaiñmé—Rukminé; sapatnébhiù—with her co-wives; samanvitä—with; nitvä—taking; dugdham—milk; tat-samépam—to Her; prayayau—went; paramädarät—with great respect.

     Çré Närada said: After hearing these words, Rukmiëé, accompanied by her co-wives, brought a cup of milk to Çré Rädhä. 

Text 29 

uñëaà dugdhaà sitä-yuktaà
     kacole haimane kåtam
apäyayat paraà prétyä
     rädhäà bhéñmaka-nandiné

     uñëam—hot; dugdham—milk; sitä-yuktam—with sugar; kacole—in a cup; haimane—golden; kåtam—done; apäyayat—gave to drink; param—greatly; prétyä—with love; rädhäm—to Rädhä; bhéñmaka-nandiné—Rukmiëé.

     Then Rukmiëé affectionately gave to Çré Rädhä a golden cup filled with hot milk sweetened with sugar.

Text 30 

evam abhyarcya vidhivad
     dattvä tämbüla-véöikäm
satyabhämädibhiù çaçvat
     sapatnébhiù samanvitä

     evam—thus; abhyarcya—worshiping; vidhivat—properly; dattvä—giving; tämbüla-véöikäm—betelnuts; satyabhämädibhiù—headed by Satyabhämä; çaçvat—always; sapatnébhiù—with co-wives; samanvitä—with.

     Then, accompanied by Satyabhämä and the other queens, Rukmiëé respectfully offered Rädhä some betelnuts.

Text 31 

ägatya kåñëa-sämépyaà
     vadanté sva-kåtaà çubhä
bheje çré-rukmiëé säkñäc
     chré-kåñëa-pada-paìkajam

     ägatya—approaching; kåñëa-sämépyam—Çré Kåñëa; vadanté—speaking; sva-kåtam—what she had done; çubhä—beautiful gilr; bheje—worshiped; çré-rukmiëé—Çré Rukmiëé; säkñäc—again and again; çré-kåñëa-pada-paìkajam—Çré Kåñëa's lotus feet.

     Approaching Lord Kåñëa, beautiful Çré Rukmiëé told what she had done. Then she worshiped the Lord's lotus feet.

Text 32 

samlälayanti satataà
     komalaiù kara-pallavaiù
kåñëa-päda-tale chälän
     vékñya sä vismitäbhavat

     samlälayanti—massaging; satatam—again and again; komalaiù—with soft; kara-pallavaiù—flower-bud hands; kåñëa-päda-tale—Lord Kåñëa's feet; chälän—blisters; vékñya—seeing; sä—she; vismitä—astonished; abhavat—became.

     As she massaged them with her soft flower-bud hands, Rukmiëé suddenly noticed many blisters on the soles of Lord Kåñëa's feet. She was very surprised.

Text 33 

ucchälakäù kathaà jätäs
     tava päda-tale prabho
adyaiva bhütä bhagavän
     na vedmy atra hi käraëam

     ucchälakäù—blisters; katham—how; jätäù—created; tava—of You; päda-tale—on the soles of the feet; prabhaù—O Lord; adya—now; eva—indeed; bhütä—manifested; bhagavan—O Lord; na—not; vedmi—I know; atra—here; hi—indeed; käraëam—the cause.

     Çré Rukmiëé said: Master, how have these blisters come on the soles of Your feet? I cannot understand the reason.

Text 34 

ñoòaça-stré-sahasräëäà
     çåëvanténäà hariù svayam
rädhä-bhakti-prakäçärthaà
     prasannaù präha rukmiëém

     ñoòaça-stré-sahasräëäm—as the sixteen thousand queens; çåëvanténäm—listened; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; svayam—personally; rädhä—of Çré Rädhä; bhakti—of the love; prakäça—revelation; artham—for the purpose; prasannaù—pleased; präha—said; rukmiëém—to Rukmiëé.

     As the sixteen thousand queens listened, cheerful Lord Kåñëa, wishing to show them the depth of Çré Rädhä's love, spoke to Rukmiëé.

Text 35 

çré-bhagavän uväca 
çré-rädhikäyä hådayäravinde
     pädäravindaà hi viräjate me
ahar-niçaà praçraya-päça-baddhaà
     lavaà lavärdhaà na calaty atéva

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; çré-rädhikäyä—of Çré Rädhä; hådayäravinde—in the lotus flower of the heart; pädäravindam—the lotus feet; hi—indeed; viräjate—are splendidly manifested; me—of Me; ahar-niçam—day and night; praçraya-päça-baddham—bound by the ropes of love and devotion; lavam—for a moment; lavärdham—or half a moment; na—not; calati—leaves; atéva—at all.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Day and night My lotus feet stay in Çré Rädhä's lotus heart. Bound by ropes of love and devotion, they cannot leave for a moment or even half a moment.

Text 36 

adyoñëa-dugdha-pratipänato 'ìghräv
     ucchälakäs te mama procchalanti
mandoñëäm evaà hi na dattam asyai
     yuñmäbhir uñëaà tu payaù pradattam

     adya—now; uñëa—hot; dugdha—milk; pratipänataù—because of drinking; aìghrau—My feet; ucchälakäù—boils; te—they; mama—of Me; procchalanti—manifest; mandoñëäm—warm; evam—thus; hi—not; na—indeed; dattam—given; asyai—to Her; yuñmäbhiù—by you all; uñëam—too hot; tu—but; payaù—milk; pradattam—given.

     When Çré Rädhä drank that very hot milk, My lotus feet in Her heart became burned and that is why they are now covered with blisters. You did not offer Her warm milk. You offered Her milk that was far too hot. 

Text 37 

çré-närada uväca 
çré-kåñëasya vacaù çrutvä
     rukmiëyädyä striyo varäù
premëä padaà vimåjyätha
     visismuù sarvato nåpa

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; çré-kåñëasya—of Çré Kåñëa; vacaù—the words; çrutvä—hearing; rukmiëyädyä—headed by Rukmiëé; striyaù—women; varaù—beautiful; premëä—with love; padam—feet; vimåjya—massaging; atha—then; visismuù—astonished; sarvataù—completely; nåpa—O king.

     Çré Närada said: When they heard His words, Çré Rukmiëé and the other beautiful queens that had been massaging Lord Kåñëa's feet became filled with wonder.

Text 38 

çré-rädhäyäù parä pröir
     mädhave madhusüdane
tat-samänä na caikaiñä
     advitéyä mahé-tale

     çré-rädhäyäù—of Çré Rädhä; parä—suprem; pröiù—love; mädhave—fopr Lord Kåñëa; madhusüdane—the killer of the Madhu demon; tat-samänä—equal to Her; na—not; ca—and; ekä—anyone; eñä—She; advitéyä—without equal; mahé-tale—in the world.

     Çré Rädhä's love for Lord Kåñëa has no rival and no equal in this world. It is the greatest love.
.pa

Chapter Eighteen
Siddhäçrama-mähätmye Räsotsavaù
In the Course of Describing the Glories of Siddhäçrama, a Description of the Räsa-dance Festival

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 
çré-rädhäyäù paräà prétià
     jïatvä gopé-gaëasya ca
ücur harià räja-putryas
     tad-räsa-prekñaëotsukäù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; çré-rädhäyäù—of Çré Rädhä; paräm—the great; prétim—love; j 24atvä—understanding; gopé-gaëasya—of the gopés; ca—and; ücuù—said; harim—to Lord Kåñëa; räja-putryaù—the queens; tad-räsa—the räsa dance; prekñaëa—to see; utsukäù—eager.

     Çré Närada said: Now understanding the great love Rädhä and the gopés bear for Lord Kåñëa, the queens, eager to see the räsa dance, spoke to Lord Kåñëa. 

Text 2 

paööa-räjïya ücuù 
dhanyä gopyas tu te bhaktäù
     prema-lakñaëa-samyutäù
yaù präptä räsa-raìge vai
     täsäà kià varëyate tapaù

     paööa-räjïyaù—the most important queens; ücuù—said; dhanyä—fortunate; gopyaù—the gopés; tu—indeed; te—of You; bhaktäù—the devotees; prema-lakñaëa-samyutäù—filled with love; yaù—who; präptä—attained; räsa-raìge—in the rasa dance arena; vai—indeed; täsäm—of them; kim—what?; varëyate—can be described; tapaù—austerities.

     The queens said: The gopés are most fortunate. They love You dearly. They enjoyed with You the räsa dance. How can words describe the great austerities they must have performed?

Text 3 

våndävane kåto räso
     vidhinä yena mädhava
tad-vidhià drañöum icchämo
     yadi tvaà manyase prabho

     våndävane—in Våndävana; kåtaù—done; räsaù—the rasa dance; vidhinä—by the method; yena—by which; mädhava—O Kåñëa; tad-vidhim—that method; drañöum—to see; icchämaù—we desire; yadi—if; tvam—You; manyase—think; prabhaù—O Lord.

     O Kåñëa, O master, if You think it is right, we wish to see the räsa dance You performed in Våndävana.

Text 4 

tvaà cätraiva tathä rädhä
     gopyaù sarvä vrajäìganäù
vayaà cätraiva deveça
     räso yogyo bhaved iha

     tvam—You; ca—and; atra—here; eva—indeed; tathä—so; rädhä—Rädhä; gopyaù—th4 gopés; sarvä—all; vrajäìganäù—the girls of Vraja; vayam—we; ca—and; atra—here; eva—indeed; deveça—O Lord of lords; räsaù—the rasa dance; yogyaù—proper; bhavet—is; iha—here.

     You are here. So is Rädhä. So are the gopés of Vraja. So are we. O Lord of lords, it is right that there be a räsa dance.

Text 5 

pürëaà kuru jagannätha
     asmäkaà tu manoratham
kåto manoratho 'nyo na
     räsa-kréòäà vinä hare

     pürëam—fulfilled; kuru—please make; jagannätha—O master of the universes; asmäkam—our; tu—indeed; manoratham—desire; kåtaù—done; manorathaù—desire; anyaù—another; na—not; räsa-kréòäm—the rasa dance pastimes; vinä—except for; hare—O Kåñëa.

     O master of the universes, pleaae fulfill our desire. O Kåñëa, we have no desire other than this.

Text 6 

iti täsäà vacaù çrutvä
     bhagavän prahasann iva
präha täù prema-samyukto
     gérbhiù sammohayann iva

     iti—thus; täsäm—of them; vacaù—the words; çrutvä—hearing; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; prahasann—smiling; iva—as if; präha—said; täù—to them; prema-samyuktaù—affectionate; gérbhiù—with words; sammohayann—charming; iva—as if.

     When He heard these words, Lord Kåñëa smiled. Filled with love for them, He charmed them with the following words.

Text 7 

çré-bhagavän uväca 
räçeçvaryäs tu rädhäyä
     manaç ced rantum aìganäù
tadä räso bhaved atra
     bhavatébhis påcchyatäm

     çré-bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; räçeçvaryäù—of the queen of the rasac dance; tu—indeed; rädhäyä—of Rädhä; manaù—the heart; cet—if; rantum—to enjoy; aìganäù—O beautiful girls; tadä—then; räsaù—the rasa dance; bhavet—may be; atra—here; bhavatébhiù—with you; påcchyatäm—may be asked.

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O beautiful girls, if Çré Rädhä, the queen of the räsa dance, wishes, only then may there be a räsa dance. Please ask Her.

Text 8 

iti çrutvä vacas tasya
     rukmiëy-ädyä nåpätmajäù
rädhäm etya paraà premëä
     prähuù prahasitänanäù

     iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—the words; tasya—of Him; rukmiëy-ädyä—headed by Rukmiëé; nåpätmajäù—the queens; rädhäm—Rädhä; etya—approaching; param—then; premëä—with love; prähuù—spoke; prahasitänanäù—smiling.

     After hearing these words, Çré Rukmiëé and the queens approached Çré Rädhä and, smiling with love, spoke.

Text 9 

çré-räjïya ücuù 
rambhoru candra-vadane vraja-sundaréçe
     räçeçvari priyatame sakhi çéla-rüpe
rädhe su-kérti-kula-kérti-kare çubhäìge
     tväà prañöum ägatavatéù sakalä vayaà smaù

     çré-räjïya ücuù—the queens said; rambhoru—O girl with the beautiful thighs; candra-vadane—O girl whose face is glorious as the moon; vraja—of Vraja; sundaré—of the beautiful girls; éçe—O queen; räçeçvari—O queen of the rasa dance; priyatame—O most dear one; sakhi—O friend; çéla-rüpe—O virtuous and beautiful one; rädhe—O Rädhä; su-kérti—fame; kula—family; kérti—fame; kare—doing; çubhäìge—O girl with beautiful limbs; tväm—You; prañöum—to ask; ägatavatéù—have come; sakalä—all; vayam—we; smaù—have.

     The queens said: O moon-faced Rädhä, O girl with the beautiful thighs, O queen of the beautiful girls of Vraja, O queen of the räsa dance, O virtuous and beautiful one, O friend, O girl with expands the glorious fame of Your family, O girl with graceful limbs, we have all come here to ask something of You.

Text 10 

räçeçvaro 'pi kila cätra rasa-pradäyé
     räçeçvaré tvam api gopa-varäìganäç ca
evaà vayaà sma iti sarva-vidhau rasärthe
     räsaà kuru priyatame ca tathä priyaà naù

     räçeçvaraù—the king of the rasa dance; api—even; kila—indeed; ca—and; atra—here; rasa-pradäyé—giving nectar; räçeçvaré—ther queen of the rasa dance; tvam—You; api—also; gopa-varäìganäù—the beautiful gopés; ca—and; evam—thus; vayam—we; sma—are; iti—tthus; sarva-vidhau—in all respects; rasärthe—for the sweetness; räsam—the rasa dance; kuru—please do; priyatame—O most dear one; ca—and; tathä—so; priyam—dear; naù—to us.

     Charming Kåñëa, the king of the räsa dance, is here. So are You, the queen of the räsa dance. So are the beautiful gopés. So are we. O most dear one, please arrange that there be a räsa dance here. That will please us.

Text 11 

çré-rädhoväca 
räçeçvarasya paramasya satäà kåpälo
     rantuà mano yadi bhavet tu tadätra räsaù
suçrüñayä paramayä parayä ca bhaktyä
     sampüjya taà kila vaçé-kuruta priyeñöäù

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; räçeçvarasya—of the king of the rasa dance; paramasya—great; satäm—to the devotees; kåpälaù—kind; rantum—to enjoy; manaù—the heart; yadi—if; bhavet—is; tu—indeed; tadä—then; atra—here; räsaù—a rasa dance; suçrüñayä—devotion; paramayä—with great; parayä—with great; ca—and; bhaktyä—love; sampüjya—worshiping; tam—Him; kila—indeed; vaçé-kuruta—conquer; priyeñöäù—most dear.

     Çré Rädhä said: If Lord Kåñëa, the king of the räsa dance, who is kind to His devotees, wishes, then there will be a räsa dance here. Go to Him. Worship and serve Him with love and devotion. That will bring Him under Your control.

Text 12 

çré-närada uväca 
rädhäyä vacanaà çrutvä
     çré-kåñëoktaà tathävadan
tathästu coktvä sä rädhä
     prasannäbhün mahä-manäù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; rädhäyä—of Çré Rädhä; vacanam—the words; çrutvä—hearing; çré-kåñëoktam—the words of Kåñëa; tathä—then; avadan—said; tathä—so; astu—be it; ca—and; uktvä—saying; sä—She; rädhä—Rädhä; prasannä—pleased; abhüt—became; mahä-manäù—noble-hearted.

     Çré Närada said: When they heard Çré Rädhä's words, the queens repeated to Her what Lord Kåñëa had told them. Hearing that, Noble-hearted Rädhä became pleased and said, "So be it."

Text 13 

mädhave pürëimäyäà tu
     puëye siddhäçrame çubhe
pradoña-käle candräbhe
     räsärambho babhüva ha

     mädhave—in the mont of Mädhava; pürëimäyäm—on the full moon; tu—indeed; puëye—in sacred; siddhäçrame—Siddhäçrama; çubhe—beautiful; pradoña-käle—in the evening; candräbhe—splendid with moonlight; räsärambhaù—the rasa dnace; babhüva—was; ha—indeed.

     In this way, in the splendid full-moon night of the month of Mädhava (April-May) there was a räsa dance in beautiful and sacred Siddhäçrama.

Text 14 

räçeçvarasya räsärthe
     räçeçvaryä samänvitaù
raräja räse rasiko
     yathä ratyä ratéçvaraù

     räçeçvarasya—of the king of the rasa dance; räsärthe—for the sake of the rasa dance; räçeçvaryä—the queen of the rasa dance; samänvitaù—with; raräja—was splendidly mnaifest; räse—in the rasa dance; rasikaù—expert at tasting nectar; yathä—as; ratyä—with Rati; ratéçvaraù—Kämadeva.

     To begin the räsa dance, Kåñëa, the king of the räsa dance, who is expert at enjoying nectar pastimes, stood with Rädhä, the queen of the räsa dance by His side. They were very glorious. they were like Kämadeva and Rati.

Text 15 

yävatér gopikäù sarvä
     yävaté räja-kanyakäù
tävad rüpa-dharo reje
     ekaù kåñëo dvayor dvayoù

     yävatéù—as many; gopikäù—gs; sarvä—all; yävaté—as many; räja-kanyakäù—queens; tävat—so many; rüpa—forms; dharaù—manifesting; reje—was splendidly manifested; ekaù—one; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; dvayoù dvayoù—between each two.

     Then Lord Kåñëa expanded Himself into as many forms as there were gopés and queens. A single Kåñëa stood between each two of them.

Text 16 

täla-veëu-mådaìgänäà
     kala-kaëöhaiù sakhé-janaiù
valgu-nüpura-käïcénäà
     miçra-çabdo mahän abhüt

     täla—karatalas; veëu—flute; mådaìgänäm—and mrdangas; kala-kaëöhaiù—with sweet voices; sakhé-janaiù—by the friends; valgu—graceful; nüpura—anklets; käïcénäm—and belts; miçra—mixing; çabdaù—the sound; mahän—great; abhüt—was.

     The karatälas, flute, and måaìgas joined with the sweet voices of the girls and the tinkling sounds of their belts and anklets, to create a tumultuous sound.

Texts 17 and 18 

koöi-kandarpa-lävaëyaù
     sragvé kuëòala-maëòitaù
pétämbara-dharo räjan
     kiréöa-kaöakäìgadaù

räçeçvaryä samaà gäyan
     räse räçeçvaraù svayam
çré-gaëaiù sahito räjaàs
     candras tärä-gaëair yathä

     koöi—millions; kandarpa—of Kämadevas; lävaëyaù—mor ehandsome; sragvé—wearing a flower garland; kuëòala-maëòitaù—decorated with earrings; pétämbara-dharaù—wearing yellow garments; räjan—O king; kiréöa—a crown; kaöaka—golden bracelets; aìgadaù—and armlets; räçeçvaryä—the wueen of the rasa dance; samam—with; gäyan—singing; räse—in the rasa dance; räçeçvaraù—the king of the rasa dance; svayam—Hismelf; çré-gaëaiù—with the goddess of fortune; sahitaù—with; räjan—O king; candraù—the moon; tärä-gaëaiù—with the many stars; yathä—as.

     Wearing yellow garments, decorated with crown, earrings, armlets, and golden bracelets, and more handsome than many millions of Kämadevas, Lord Kåñëa, the king of the räsa dance sang songs with Çré Rädhä, the queen of the räsa dance, and with the gopés and queens, who were all goddesses of fortune. O king, He was like the moon surrounded by many stars.

Text 19 

evaà sarvä niçä räjan
     kñaëavad räsa-maëòale
vyatétäbhün mahä-räja
     mahänandamayé çubhä

     evam—thus; sarvä—the entire; niçä—night; räjan—O king; kñaëavat—like a moment; räsa-maëòale—in the rasa dance circle; vyatétä abhüt—passed; mahä-räja—O great king; mahänandamayé—blissful; çubhä—beautiful.

     O king, in this way the very blissful and beautiful night passed like a single moment in the circle of the räsa dance.

Text 20 

çré-räsa-maëòalaà dåñövä
     rukmiëy-ädyäù striyo varäù
jagmus täù paramänandaà
     sarväù pürëa-manorathäù

     çré-räsa-maëòalam—the circle of the rasa dance; dåñövä—seeing; rukmiëy-ädyäù—headed by Rukmiëé; striyaù—the queens; varäù—beautiful; jagmuù—went; täù—they; paramänandam—transcendental bliss; sarväù—all; pürëa-manorathäù—their desires fulfilled.

     Gazing at the circle of the räsa dance, Çré Rukmiëé and all the beautiful queens became filled with bliss. All their desires were fulfilled.

Text 21 

paripürëatamaà säkñäc
     chré-kåñëaà puruñottamam
räsänte rukmiëé-mukhyaù
     prähuù prema-paräyaëäù

     paripürëatamam—the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; çré-kåñëam—Çré Kåñëa; puruñottamam—the Supreme Person; räsänte—at the end of the rasa dance; rukmiëé-mukhyaù—the queens headed by Rukmiëé; prähuù—said; prema-paräyaëäù—filled with love.

     When the räsa dance ended Çré Rukmiëé and the queens, filled with feelings of love, spoke to Çré Rädhä, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 22 

çré-räjïya ücuù 
dåñövä tvad-rüpa-mädhuryaà
     räsa-raìge manohare
gataà mano naù svänandaà
     brahmänandaà yathä muniù

     çré-räjïya ücuù—the queens said; dåñövä—seeing; tvad-rüpa-mädhuryam—the sweetness of Your handsomeness; räsa-raìge—in the arena of thw rasa dance; manohare—beautiful; gatam—gone; manaù—heart; naù—of us; svänandam—to bliss; brahmänandam—spiritual bliss; yathä—as; muniù—a great sage.

     The queens said: As we gaze at Your handsome sweetness in this beautiful räsa dance, our hearts have become filled with bliss. We have become lake sages filled with the happiness of spiritual life.

Text 23 

etädrço 'pi räso 'nyo
     na bhüto na bhaviñyati
çata-yüthas tu gopénäà
     atra mädhava vartate

     etädrçaù—like this; api—even; räsaù—rasa dance; anyaù—another; na—not; bhütaù—was; na—not; bhaviñyati—will be; çata-yüthaù—a hundred groups; tu—indeed; gopénäm—of gopés; atra—here; mädhava—O Kåñëa; vartate—are.

     There never was, nor will there ever be, another räsa dance like this. O Kåñëa, a hundred groups of gopés are here!

Text 24 

patnyaù ñoòaça-sähasraà
     sakhébhiù sahitä vayam
sakhé-koöi-yutäç cätra
     håñöa-paööa-mahä-striyaù våndävane 'pi naitädåg      bhüto vä mädhaveçvara

     patnyaù—the queens; ñoòaça-sähasram—sixteen thousand; sakhébhiù—the gopés; sahitä—with; vayam—we; sakhé-koöi-yutäù—many millions of gopés; ca—and; atra—here; håñöa—jubilant; paööa-mahä-striyaù—the noble queens; våndävane—in Våndävana; api—even; na—not; etädåk—like this; bhütaù—was; vä—or; mädhava—O Kåñëa; éçvara—O Lord.

     We sixteen thousand queens are here with many millions of gopés. O Kåñëa, O master, even in Våndävana there was never a räsa dance like this.

Text 25 

çré-närada uväca 
evaà kåtäbhimänänäà
     räjïénäà prahasan hariù
prähedaà påcchatäà rädhäà
     bhavatébhiù parasparam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; evam—thus; kåta—become; abhimänänäm—proud; räjïénäm—the queens; prahasan—smiling; hariù—Kåñëa; präha—said; idam—this; påcchatäm—ask; rädhäm—Rädhä; bhavatébhiù—by you' parasparam—among yourselves.

     Çré Närada said: In this way the queens became proud. Smiling, Lord Kåñëa said to them, "Ask Rädhä what She thinks."

Text 26 

satyabhämädikäù sarväù
     påcchanti täà manoharäm
kiïcid dhasanté manasi
     präha rädhä paraà vacaù

     satyabhämädikäù—headed by Satyabhämä; sarväù—all; påcchanti—asked; täm—Her; manoharäm—beautiful; kiïcit—a little; hasanté—laughing; manasi—in Her heart; präha—said; rädhä—Rädhä; param—then; vacaù—words.

     Satyabhämä and the other queens asked beautiful Rädhä. Gently laughing in Her heart, Çré Rädhä spoke.

Text 27 

çré-rädhoväca 
nanu räsaù paraà cätra
     bahu-stré-gaëa-saìkulaù
pürva-räsa-samo na syäd
     yas tu våndävane 'bhavat

     çré-rädhä uväca—Çré Rädhä said; nanu—indeed; räsaù—rasa dance; param—then; ca—and; atra—here; bahu-stré-gaëa-saìkulaù—with very many girls; pürva-räsa-samaù—equal to the previous rasa dance; na—not; syät—is; yaù—which; tu—indeed; våndävane—in Våndävana; abhavat—was.

     Çré Rädhä said: Many girls came to this räsa dance. Still, it is not the equal of the räsa dance in Våndävana.

Text 28 

kva cätra våndäraëyaà hi
     divya-druma-latäkulam
prema-bhäränata-lataà
     madhu-matta-madhuvratam

     kva—where?; ca—and; atra—here; våndäraëyam—Våndävana forest; hi—indeed; divya-druma-latäkulam—filled with splendid trees and vines; prema—of love; bhära—with great; änata—bowing down; latam—the vines; madhu—with honey; matta—intoxicated; madhuvratam—bees.

     In this place where is Våndävana forest, filled with splendid trees, flowering vines bowing down in ecstatic love, and bees intoxicated by drinking honey?

Text 29 

puñpa-vyuhän vahanté yä
     yathoñëiì-mudritä çubhä
haàsa-padma-samäkérëä
     kva cätra yamunä nadé

     puñpa-vyuhän—many flowers; vahanté—carrying; yä—which; yathä—as; uñëik—a line in the uñëik meter; mudritä—marked; çubhä—beautiful; haàsa—swans; padma—and lotus flowers; samäkérëä—filled; kva—where?; ca—and; atra—here; yamunä—the Yamunä; nadé—river.

     In this place where is the beautiful Yamunä river, carrying many flowers as it flows like a line of poetry, and filled with swans and lotus flowers?

Text 30 

mädhavyas tu latäù kvätra
     puñpa-bhära-natäù paräù
kva pakñiëaù prema-parä
     gäyanti madhura-svanam

     mädhavyaù—Mädhavé; tu—indeed; latäù—vines; kva—where?; atra—here; puñpa-bhära-natäù—bowed down with many flowers; paräù—great; kva—where?; pakñiëaù—birds; prema-parä—filled with love; gäyanti—sing; madhura-svana—with sweet voices.

     In this place where are the mädhavé vines bowing with many flowers? Where are the birds lovingly singing with sweet voices?

Text 31 

loläli-puïjäù kuïjäù kva
     nikuïjä divya-mandiräù
kva väyuù çétalo mando
     väti padma-rajo haran

     lola—restless; äli-puïjäù—bees; ku 24jäù—forest groves; kva—where?; niku 24jä—forest groves; divya-mandiräù—splendid palaces; kva—where?; väyuù—breze; çétalaù—cooling; mandaù—gentle; väti—blows; padma-rajaù—lotus pollen; haran—carrying;

     In this place where are the forest groves filled with splendid palaces and restless bumblebees? Where is the cooling gentle breeze carrying pollen from the lotus flowers?

Text 32 

çåìgair manoharair uccair
     girir govardhano 'calaù
sarvatra phala-puñpäòhyo
     darébhiù kva karéva saù

     çåìgaiù—with peaks; manoharaiù—beautiful; uccaiù—tall; giriù—mountain; govardhanaù—Govardhana; acalaù—mountain; sarvatra—everywhere; phala-puñpäòhyaù—rich with many fruits and flowers; darébhiù—with caves; kva—where?; karé—a great elephant; iva—like; saù—it.

     In this place where is Mount Govardhana, rich with fruits, flowers, and caves everywhere, and standing with its beautiful tall peaks like a great elephant?

Texts 33 and 34 

kälindé-puline ramye
     väyunänvita-saikate
vaàsé-vetra-dharo malla-
     paribarha-viräjitaù

kva cätra kåñëa-çåìgäro
     vana-mälä-vibhüñitaù
çyämänäm alakänäà ca
     vakräëäà gandha-dhariëäm

     kälindé-puline—on the shore of the Yamunä; ramye—beautiful; väyunä—a breeze; anvita—with; saikate—on the beach; vaàsé—flute; vetra—and stick; dharaù—holding; malla-paribarha-viräjitaù—splendid with a peacock feather; kva—where?; ca—and; atra—here; kåñëa—of Lord Kåñëa; çåìgäraù—the decoration; vana-mälä-vibhüñitaù—decorated with a forest garland; çyämänäm—black; alakänäm—of locks of hair; ca—and; vakräëäm—curly; gandha-dhariëäm—fragrant.

     Where are Kåñëa's decorations: His flute, stick, peacock feather, forest-flower garland, and His fragrant, curly black hair, as He sits in the gentle breeze by the Yamunä's beautiful sandy shore? 

Text 35 

calitaà halitaà kvätra
     kuëòaläbhyäà parasparam
çré-mukhe kåñëacandrasya
     gaëòa-sthala-manohare

     calitam halitam—swinging; kva—where?; atra—here; kuëòaläbhyäm—with earrings; parasparam—each other; çré-mukhe—on His splendid face; kåñëacandrasya—of Lord Kåñëacandra; gaëòa-sthala-manohare—on the handsome cheeks.

     Where are the swinging earrings on Lord Kåñëacandra's handsome cheeks?

Text 36 

paträvalé-gandha-lobhäd
     bhramad-bhåìgävalé-yute
kva premëä darçanaà caiva
     sparçanaà harñaëaà tathä

     paträvalé—of the flower petals; gandha—fragrance; lobhät—out of greed; bhramat—wandering; bhåìgävalé—bees; yute—with; kva—where?; premëä—with love; darçanam—sight; ca—and; eva—indeed; sparçanam—touch; harñaëam—happiness; tathä—as.

     Where are the wandering bees greedy after the sweet fragrance of His flower-petal ornaments? Where are His loving glances when He appears in this way? Where is the happiness of His touch when He appears in this way?

Text 37 

kämeñu-tigma-koëaiç ca
     netraiù kväpaìga-jo rasaù
äkarñaëaà kva hastäbhyäà
     hastäd dhasta-visarjanam

     käma—of Kämadeva; iñu—arrows; tigma-koëaiù—with the sharp points; ca—and; netraiù—with eyes; kva—where; apaìga-jaù—born from the glance; rasaù—sweetness; äkarñaëam—pulling; kva—where>; hastäbhyäm—with both hands; hastät—from the hand; hasta—of the hand; visarjanam—going.

     Where are the sharp-pointed arrows of Kämadeva that fly from His eyes? Where is the sweetness of His sidelong glance? Where is His tugging with both hands? Where is His placing in the hand a gift?

Text 38 

vilénatäà nikuïjeñu
     sammukhena tu darçanam
grahaëaà kvätra céräëäà
     haraëaà veëu-vetrayoù

     vilénatäm—hiding; nikuïjeñu—in the forest groves; sammukhena—face-to-face; tu—indeed; darçanam—the sight; grahaëam—grabbing; kva—where?; atra—here; céräëäm—of the garments; haraëam—stealing; veëu-vetrayoù—of the flute and stick.

     Where is the pastime of hiding in the forest groves? Where is the pastime of suddenly meeting Him face-to-face? Where is the pastime of tugging at our saris? Where is the pastime of stealing His flute and stick?

Text 39 

kva premëä cätra bähubhyäà
     karñaëaà ca parasparam
punaù punas tad-grahaëaà
     bhuje candana-carcitam

     kva—where?; premëä—with love; ca—and; atra—here; bähubhyäm—with both arms; karñaëam—pulling; ca—and; parasparam—each other; punaù—again; punaù—and again; tad-grahaëam—grabbing; bhuje—the arms; candana-carcitam—anointed with sandal.

     Where is His affectionate tugging with both arms? Where is His again and again holding the arm anointed with sandal paste?

Text 40 

yatra yatra ca yä lélä
     tatra tatraiva çobhate
yatra våndävanaà nästi
     tatra me na manaù-sukham

     yatra yatra—wherever; ca—and; yä—which; lélä—pastimes; tatra tatra—there; eva—indeed; çobhate—is beautiful; yatra—where; våndävanam—Våndävana; na—not; asti—is; tatra—there; me—of Me; na—not; manaù-sukham—tha happiness of the heart.

     My heart cannot be happy where there is no Våndävana forest and where these pastimes are not present.

Text 41 

çré-närada uväca 
rädhä-väkyaà tataù çrutvä
     sarväù paööa-mahä-striyaù
jahur mänaà sva-räsasya
     vismitä harñitäç ca täù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; rädhä-väkyam—Çré Rädhä's words; tataù—then; çrutvä—hearing; sarväù—all; paööa-mahä-striyaù—the queens; jahuù—abandoned; mänam—their pride; sva-räsasya—of their own rasa dance; vismitä—astonished; harñitäù—overjoyed; ca—and; täù—they.

     Çré Närada said: When they heard Çré Rädhä's words, the great queens became filled with wonder and joy. They gave up all the pride they felt in their own räsa dance.

Texts 42 and 43 

evaà siddhäçrame räsaà
     kåtvä çré-rädhikeçvaraù
nétvä gopé-gaëän sarvän
     rädhayä sahito hariù

sa-bhäryo bhagavän säkñäd
     dvärakäà praviveça ha
kärayäm äsa rädhäyai
     mandiräëi paräëi ca

     evam—thus; siddhäçrame—at Siddhäçrama; räsam—the rasa dance; kåtvä—having done; çré-rädhikeçvaraù—the Lord of Rädhä; nétvä—taking; gopé-gaëän—the gopés; sarvän—all; rädhayä—Rädhä; sahitaù—with; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; sa-bhäryaù—with His wives; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; säkñät—directly; dvärakäm—Dvärakä; praviveça—entered; ha—indeed; kärayäm äsa—made; rädhäyai—for Rädhä; mandiräëi—palaces; paräëi—great; ca—and.

     After thus performing a räsa dance at Siddhäçrama, Lord Kåñëa took the gopés and queens to Dvärakä. There He built many great palaces for Çré Rädhä.

Texts 44 and 45 

niväsayitvä su-sukhaà
     sarväs taç ca vrajaukasaù
itthaà siddhäçrama-kathä
     mayä te kathitä nåpa

sarva-päpa-harä puëyä
     sarveñäà caiva mokña-dä

     niväsayitvä—giving a home; su-sukham—happily; sarväù—all; taù—they; ca—and; vrajaukasaù—the people of Vraja; ittham—thus; siddhäçrama-kathä—the story of Siddhäçrama; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitä—told; nåpa—O king; sarva-päpa-harä—removing all sins; puëyä—sacred; sarveñäm—to all; ca—and; eva—certainly; mokña-dä—giving liberation. 

     Then Lord Kåñëa gave comfortable homes in Dvärakä to all the people of Vraja. Thus I have told you the story of Siddhäçrama, a sacred story that removes all sins and give liberation to all.

Chapter Nineteen
Dvärakäyäù prathama-durge Lélä-sarovara-hari-mandira-jïäna-tértha-kåçëa-kuëòa-balabhadra-saro-gaëeça-tértha-däna-sthala-mäyä-tértha-mähätmyam
In the First Fortress of Dvärakä, the Glories of Lélä-sarovara, Hari-mandira, Jïäna-tértha, Kåçëa-kuëòa, Balabhadra-saraù, Gaëeça-tértha, Däna-sthala, and Mäyä-tértha

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

dvärävaté-maëòalaà tu
     çata-yojana-viståtam
tasya pradakçiëä sarvä
     yojanänäà catuù-çatam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; dvärävaté-maëòalam—the circle of Dvärakä; tu—indeed; çata-yojana-viståtam—eight hundred miles in size; tasya—of it; pradakçiëä—the circumferance; sarvä—all; yojanänäà catuù-çatam—3,200 miles.

     Çré Närada said: The size of Dvärakä is 800 miles. The path around it is 3,200 miles.

Text 2 

tan-madhye kåçëa-racitaà
     durgaà dvädaça-yojanam
dvitéyaà ca bahir durgaà
     navatià ca tad-uttaraih 
kroçaiù saëghaööitaà räjan 
     chré-kåçëena mahätmanä

     tan-madhye—in the middle of it; kåçëa-racitam—made by Lord Kåçëa; durgam—a fort; dvädaça-yojanam—96 miles; dvitéyam—second; ca—and; bahiù—outside; durgam—fort; navatim—90; ca—and; tad-uttaraih—more than that; kroçaiù—with krosas; saëghaööitam—created; räjan—O king; çré-kåçëena—by Çré Kåçëa; mahätmanä—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     In the center of Dvärakä is a fortress 96 miles in size. Around that Lord Kåçëa had built a second fortress of 180 miles.

Text 3 

tåtéyaà ca tathä durgaà
     dyünaiç ca dvi-çatair nåpa
kroçaiù saëghaööitaà räjan
     ratna-präsäda-samyutam

     tåtéyam—third; ca—and; tathä—so; durgam—fort; dyünaiù—splendid; ca—and; dvi-çataiù—with 200; nåpa—O king; kroçaiù—krosas; saëghaööitam—created; räjan—O king; ratna-präsäda-samyutam—with jewel palaces.

     O king, around that is a third fortress 400 miles in size and the place of with many jewel palaces.

Text 4 

teçäm antara-durgo 'pi
     çré-kåçëasya mahätmanaù
mandiräëi viciträëi
     nava lakçäëi santi hi

     teçäm—of them; antara-durgaù—inside the fort; api—also; çré-kåçëasya—of Çré Kåçëa; mahätmanaù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; mandiräëi—palaces; viciträëi—wonderful; nava lakçäëi—900,000; santi—are; hi—indeed.

     In the first fort Lord Kåçëa has 900,000 wonderful palaces.

Text 5 

tatra rädhä-mandirasya
     dväre lélä-sarovaram
sarva-térthottamaà räjan
     golokäc ca samägatam

     tatra—there; rädhä-mandirasya—of Çré Rädhä's palace; dväre—at the entrance; lélä-sarovaram—Lélä-sarovara; sarva-tértha-uttamam—the best of all holy places; räjan—O king; golokät—from Goloka; ca—and; samägatam—come.

     O king, at the entrance to Çré Rädhä's palace, is Lélä-sarovara lake, which was brought from Goloka, and which is the best of all holy places.

Texts 6-10

yasmin snätvä naraù päpé
     vraté bhütvä samähitaù
açöäbhyäà hema-dänaà ca
     dattvä natvä vidhänataù

koöi-janma-kåtaiù päpair
     mucyate nätra saàçayaù
präëänte taà naraà netuà
     golokäc ca mahä-rathaù

sahasräditya-saëkäça
     ägacchati na saàçayaù
daça-kandarpa-lävaëyo
     ratna-kuëòala-maëòitaù

sragvé pétämbaraù çyämaù
     sahasrärka-sphurad-dyutiù
sahasra-pärçadair yuktas
     cämarändola-räjitaù

jaya-dhvani-samäyukto
     veëu-dundubhi-näditaù
bhütvaivaà ratham ästhäya
     golokaà yäty asaàçayam

     yasmin—where; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; päpé—sinful; vraté—following vows; bhütvä—becoming; samähitaù—careful; açöä\bhyäm—with eight; hema-dänam—gift of gold; ca—and; dattvä—giving; natvä—bowing; vidhänataù—properly; koöi—in millions; janma—of births; kåtaiù—done; päpaiù—sins; mucyate—freed; na—not; atra—here; saàçayaù—doubt; präëänte—at the end of life; tam—that; naram—person; netum—to bring; golokät—from Goloka; ca—and; mahä-rathaù—a great chariot; sahasräditya-saëkäça—splendid as thousands pf suns; ägacchati—comes; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; daça-kandarpa—ten Kämadevas; lävaëyaù—handsome; ratna-kuëòala-maëòitaù—decorated with jewel earrings; sragvé—wearing a garland; pétämbaraù—wearing yellow garments; çyämaù—dfark; sahasrärka-sphurad-dyutiù—splendid as thousands of suns; sahasra-pärçadaiù—with thousands of associates; yuktaù—endowed; cämara—with camaras; ändola-räjitaù—fanned; jaya-dhvani-samäyuktaù—with sounds of “Victory!"; veëu-dundubhi—of flutes and drums; näditaù—with sounds; bhütvä—becoming; evam—thus; ratham—chariot; ästhäya—mounting; golokam—to Goloka; yäty—goes; asaàçayam—without doubt.

     A sinner who, properly following pious vows, bathes in that lake, gives eight gifts of gold to qualified braçhmaëas, and then bows down before the brähmaëas, becomes free of the sins performed in many millions of births. Of this there is no doubt. At the time of his death a great chariot effulgent as thousands of suns comes from Goloka for his sake. Of that there is no doubt. Then he becomes a liberated soul handsome like ten Kämadevas, dark-complexioned, splendid like thousands of suns, dressed in yellow garments, flower garlands, and jewel earrings, fanned with cämaras, honored with calls of “Victory" and the music of flutes and drums, and surrounded by thousands of friends, and then he mounts the chariot and goes to Goloka. Of this there is no doubt.

Texts 11-13 

atha térthäni cänyäni
     çåëu räjan mahä-mate
çatottaräëi tatraiva
     sahasräëi ca çoòaça

açöäbhiù sahitäny eva
     patnénäà bhavanäni ca
täni pradakçiëé-kåtya
     natvä natvä påthak påthak

jïäna-térthaà samäplutya
     spåçed yaù pärijätakam
tasya jïänaà ca vairägyaà
     bhaktir bhavati tat-kçaëam

     atha—then; térthäni—holy places; ca—and; anyäni—other; çåëu—please hear; räjan—O king; mahä-mate—noble-hearted; çatottaräëi—plus one hundred; tatra—there; eva—indeed; sahasräëi—thousand; ca—and; çoòaça—sixteen; açöäbhiù—eight; sahitäny—with; eva—indeed; patnénäm—of the queens; bhavanäni—palaces; ca—and; täni—them; pradakçiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; natvä natvä—bowing down; påthak påthak—before each one; jïäna-tértham—in Jïäna-tértha; samäplutya—bathing; spåçet—touched; yaù—one who; pärijätakam—the pärijäta tree; tasya—of him; jïänam—knowledge; ca—and; vairägyam—renunciation; bhaktiù—devotional service; bhavati—is; tat-kçaëam—from that moment.

     O noble-hearted king, please hear of the other holy places. A person who circumambulates the 16,108 palaces of Lord Kåçëa's queens, bows down before each palace, bathes in Jïäna-tértha, and then touches the pärijäta tree, at once attains transcendental knowledge, renunciation, and devotional service.

Text 14 

çré-kåçëo hådaye tasya
     vased dhåçöa-manäù sadä
samåddhi-siddhayaù sarväs
     taà bhajanti nisargatäù

     çré-kåçëaù—Lord Kåçëa; hådaye—in the heart; tasya—of him; vaset—resides; håçöa-manäù—happy at heart; sadä—always; samåddhi—wealth; siddhayaù—perfections; sarväù—all; tam—him; bhajanti—worship; nisargatäù—of their own accord.

     Lord Kåçëa is very happy to stay in his heart always. All opulences and perfections worship him of their own accord.

Text 15 

sa muktaù sa kåtärthaù syäd
     yaù paçyed dhari-mandiram
tat-samo vaiçëavo nästi
     térthaà ca tat-samaà na hi

     sa—he; muktaù—liberated; sa—he; kåtärthaù—successful; syät—is; yaù—who; paçyet—sees; hari-mandiram—Lord Kåçëa's palace; tat-samaù—equal to him; vaiçëavaù— a devotee; na—not; asti—is; tértham—a holy place; ca—and; tat-samam—equal to him; na—not; hi—is.

     A person who sees Lord Kåçëa's palace becomes liberated. His life is a success. No devotee is his equal. No holy place is his equal.

Text 16 

païca-yojana-vistérëäd
     bhagavan-mandirät tataù
dhanuù-sate kåçëa-kuëòaù
     kåçëa-tejaù-samudbhavaù

     païca-yojana-vistérëät—forty miles in size; bhagavan-mandirät—from the Lord's palace; tataù—then; dhanuù-çate—a hundred dhanus; kåçëa-kuëòaù—Kåçëa-kuëòa; kåçëa-tejaù-samudbhavaù—created by Lord Kåçëa's power.

     Lord Kåçëa's palace is forty miles in size. A hundred dhanus from it is Kåçëa-kuëòa, a lake created by Lord Kåçëa's power.

Text 17 

yaà snätvä kuçöhato muktaù
     sämbo jämbavaté-sutaù
tasya darçana-mätreëa
     sarva-päpaiù pramucyate

     yam—in which; snätvä—bathing; kuçöhataù—from leprosy; muktaù—freed; sämbaù—Sämba; jämbavaté-sutaù—the son of Jämbavaté; tasya—of him; darçana—by seeing; mätreëa—simply; sarva-päpaiù—all sins; pramucyate—freed.

     By bathing in that lake, Jämbavaté's son Sämba was cured of leprosy. Simply by seeing that lake one is freed from all sins.

Text 18 

tasmäd açöädaça-pade
     pürvasyäà diçi maithila
sarva-térthottamaà puëyaà
     balabhadra-saro mahat

     tasmät—from that; açöädaça-pade—18 steps; pürvasyäm diçi—to the east; maithila—O king of Mithilä; sarva-térthottamam—the best of all holy places; puëyam—sacred; balabhadra-saraù—Balabhadra-saraù; mahat—great.

     O king of Mithilä, eighteens steps to the east is the great lake Balabhadra-saraù, the best of all holy places.

Text 19 

påthvé-pradakçiëäà kåtvä
     baladevo mahä-balaù
yajïaà yatra vinirmäya
     revatyä viraräja ha

     påthvé—the earth; pradakçiëäm—circumambulation; kåtvä—having done; baladevaù—Lord Balaräma; mahä-balaù—very powerful; yajïam—a yajna; yatra—where; vinirmäya—performing; revatyä—with Revaté; viraräja—was splendidly manifested; ha—indeed.

     After circumambulating the entire earth, Lord Balaräma performed a yajïa at that lake. There he was very glorious with Revaté by His side.

Text 20 

tatra snätvä naraù sadyo
     mucyate sarva-pätakät
påthvé-pradakçiëäyäç ca
     phalaà tasya na durlabham

     tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; sadyaù—at once; mucyate—is liberated; sarva-pätakät—from all sins; påthvé—the earth; pradakçiëäyäù—of circumambulating; ca—and; phalam—the result; tasya—of him; na—not; durlabham—difficult to attain.

     A person who bathes in that lake becomes free of all sins. The pious result of circumambulating the earth is not difficult for him to attain.

Text 21 

bhagavan-mandiräd räjan
     sahasra-dhanur-agrataù
dakçiëasyäà mahä-térthaà
     gaëa-näthasya vartate

     bhagavan-mandirät—from Lord Kåçëa's palace; räjan—O king; sahasra-dhanur-agrataù—a thousand dhanus in front; dakçiëasyäm—in the south; mahä-tértham—a great holy places; gaëa-näthasya—of Gaëeça; vartate—is.

     O king, a thousand dhanus south of Lord Kåçëa's palace is a great holy place sacred to Gaëeça.

Text 22

anirdaçe gate räjan
     pradyumne sva-sute tadä
gaëeça-püjanaà yatra
     püjayäm äsa rukmiëé

     anirdaçe—at infant not ten days old; gate—attained; räjan—O king; pradyumne—Pradyumna; sva-sute—her son; tadä—then; ganeça—of Gaëeça; püjanam—worship; yatra—where; püjayäm äsa—worshiped; rukmiëé—Rukmiëé

     When her son Pradyumna was an infant not ten days old Rukmiëé worshiped Gaëeça at that place.

Text 23

tatra snätvä hema-dänaà
     yo dadäti nåpeçvara
putra-präptir bhavet tasya
     vaàças tasya vivardhate

     tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; hema-dänam—a gift of gold; yaù—one who; dadäti—gives; nåpeçvara—O king of kings; putra-präptiù—attainment of a son; bhavet—is; tasya—of him; vaàçaù—dynasty; tasya—of him; vivardhate—increases.

     O great king, a person who bathes there and gives gold in charity to the brähmaëas attains a good son and his dynasty expands.

Text 24

bhagavan-mandiräd räjan
     dig-vibhäge ca paçcime
dhanuçi dvi-çate cäste
     däna-térthaà paraà çubham

     bhagavan-mandirät—from Lord Kåçëa's palace; räjan—O king; dig-vibhäge—in the direction; ca—and; paçcime—west; dhanuçi—dhanus; dvi-çate—two hundred; ca—and; äste—is; däna-tértham—dana-tértha; param—great; çubham—auspicious and beautiful.

     O king, two hundred dhanus west of Lord Kåçëa's palace is auspicious and beautiful Däna-tértha.

Texts 25-27

tatra çré-kåçëacandrasya
     nityaà dänaà karoti yaù
tatra snätvä naro räjan
     dvi-phalaà käïcanaà tathä

catur-guëaà tu rajataà
     paööämbara-çataà tathä
tathä sahasra-maulyäni
     nava-ratnäni yäni ca

yo dadäti nara-çreçöhas
     tasya puëya-phalaà çåëu
açvamedha-sahasräëi
     räjasüya-çatäni ca

     tatra—there; çré-kåçëacandrasya—of Lord Kåçëacandra; nityam—regularly; dänam—chrity; karoti—gives; yaù—one who; tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; räjan—O king; dvi-phalam—double; käïcanam—gold; tathä—so; catur-guëam—four times; tu—and; rajatam—silver; paööämbara—costly garments; çatam—a hunbdred times; tathä tathä—in that way; sahasra-maulyäni—a thousand times the value; nava-ratnäni—nine jewels; yäni—which; ca—and; yaù—who; dadäti—gives; nara-çreçöhaù—the best of men; tasya—ofhim; puëya-phalam—the pious result; çåëu—please hear; açvamedha-sahasräëi—a thousand asvamedha-yajnas; räjasüya-çatäni—a hundred rajasuya-yajnas; ca—and.

     Please hear the pious result attained by giving charity there. A person who in this place regularly bathes and gives in charity to Lord Kåçëa gold, four times as much silver, a hundred costly garments, and the nine kinds of jewels valuable thousands of times over, attains the pious result of performing a thousand açvamedha-yajïas and a hundred räjasüya-yajïas.

Text 28 

däna-térthasya puëyasya
     kaläà närhati çoòaçém
badrikäçrama-yäträyäà
     yat phalaà labhate naraù

     däna-térthasya—Däna-tértha; puëyasya—sacred; kaläm—a part; na—not; arhati—is worthy; çoòaçém—sixteenth; badrikäçrama-yäträyäm—on a pilgrimage to Badarikäçrama; yat—what; phalam—result; labhate—attains; naraù—a person.

     The pious result one attains by a pilgrimage to Badarikäçrama is not equal to one sixteenth of the result of a pilgrimage to Däna-tértha.

Texts 29 and 30 

saindhaväraëya-yäträyäà
     meça-sthe ca diväkare

utpalävarta-yäträyäà
     våça-sthe bhäskare sati
snänaà dänaà lakça-guëaà
     bhavatéha na saàçayaù

     saindhaväraëya-yäträyäm—on a pilgrimage to Saindhaväraëya; meça-sthe—in Aires; ca—and; diväkare—the sun; utpalävarta-yäträyäm—on a pilgrimage to Utpala-varta; våça-sthe—in Taurus; bhäskare—the sun; sati—being; snänam—bath; dänam—charity; lakça-guëam—a hundred thousand times greater; bhavati—is; iha—here; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt.

     One who bathes and gives charity at Saindhaväraëya when the sun is in Aires attains a great pious result. One who bathes and gives charity at Utpalävarta when the sun is in Taurus attains a pious result a hundred thousand times greater. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 31 

tasmät koöi-guëaà puëyaà
     däna-térthe videha-räö
mäsam ekaà ca yat snänaà
     dänaà térthe karoti hi

     tasmät—than this; koöi-guëam—ten million times greater; puëyam—piety; däna-térthe—at Däna-tértha; videha-räö—O king of Videha; mäsam—month; ekam—one; ca—and; yat—which; snänam—bath; dänam—charity; térthe—at the holy place; karoti—gives; hi—indeed.

     O king of Videha, a person who for one month bathes and gives charity at Däna-tértha attains a pious reuslt ten million times greater than that.

Text 32 

tasya jätaà ca yat-puëyaà
     citragupto na vetti tam
tasya térthasya mähätmyaà
     vaktuà nälaà catur-mukhaù

     tasya—of him; jätam—manifested; ca—and; yat-puëyam—the piety; citraguptaù—Citragupta; na—not; vetti—knows; tam—that; tasya—of him; térthasya—of the holy place; mähätmyam—the glory; vaktum—to speak; na alam—unable; catur-mukhaù—Brahmä.

     Yamaräja's scribe, Citragupta, cannot understand how great is his pious benefit. The demigod Brahmä cannot describe the glories of Däna-tértha.

Text 33 

sarveçäà caiva dänänäà
     açva-dänaà paraà småtam
açva-dänäd gajasyäpi
     gaja-dänäd rathasya ca

     sarveçäm—of all; ca—and; eva—indeed; dänänäm—charities; açva-dänam—charity of a horse; param—best; småtam—considered; açva-dänät—than charity of a horse; gajasya—of an elephant; api—even; gaja-dänät—than charity of an elephant; rathasya—of a chariot; ca—and.

     Giving a horse in charity is great charity. Still, giving an elephant is better than giving a horse and giving a chariot is better than giving an elephant. 

Text 34 

ratha-dänät paraà räjan
     bhümi-dänaà viçiçyate
bhümi-dänäd anna-dänaà
     mahä-dänaà prakathyate

     ratha-dänät—than giving a chariot; param—better; räjan—O king; bhümi-dänam—giving land; viçiçyate—is better; bhümi-dänät—than giving land; anna-dänam—giving food; mahä-dänam—great charity; prakathyate—is said.

     O king, giving land is better than giving a chariot, and giving food is better than giving land. Giving food is said be be great charity.

Text 35 

anna-däna-samaà dänaà
     na bhütaà na bhaviçyati
devarçi-pitå-bhütänäà
     tåptir annena jäyate

     anna-däna-samam—equal to giving food; dänam—charity; na—not; bhütam—has been; na—not; bhaviçyati—will be; devarçi-pitå-bhütänäm—the demigods, sages, pitäs, and bhütas; tåptiù—satisfaction; annena—by food; jäyate—is born.

     There never has been nor will there ever be another charity as good as giving food. The demigods, sages, pitäs and bhütas are all pleased by a gift of food.

Text 36 

däna-térthe hy anna-dänaà
     yaù karoti mahä-manäù
åëa-trayaà vimucyätha
     yäti viçëoù paraà padam

     däna-térthe—at Däna-tértha; hy—indeed; anna-dänam—gift of food; yaù—who; karoti—does; mahä-manaù—noble-hearted; åëa-trayam—three kinds of debt; vimucya—becoming free; atha—then; yäti—goes; viçëoù—of Lord Viçëu; param—to the supreme; padam—abode.

     A noble-hearted person who gives charity at Däna-tértha becomes free of the three debts and goes to the transcendental abode of Lord Viçëu.

Text 37 

daçaiva mätåke pakçe
     räjendra daça paitåke
priyäyä daça pakçe tu
     puruçän uddharen naraù

     daça—tne; eva—indeed; mätåke—on his mother's; pakçe—side; räjendra—O king of kings; daça—ten; paitåke—on his father's side; priyayä—of his wife; daça—ten; pakçe—on the side; tu—indeed; puruçän—people; uddharen—delivers; naraù—a person.

     He delivers ten relatives in his father's family, ten in his mother's family, and ten in his wife's family.

Text 38 

catur-bhujä divya-rüpä
     nägaré-kåta-ketanäù
sragvinaù péta-vasträs te
     prayänti hari-mandiram

     catur-bhujä—four arms; divya-rüpä—splendid transcendental fvorms; nägaré-kåta-ketanäù—riding on Garuòa; sragvinaù—decorated with flower garlands; péta—yellow; vasträù—garments; te—they; prayänti—attain; hari-mandiram—the abode of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     They all attain splendid four-armed spiritual forms. Dressed in yellow garments, wearing garlands of flowers, and riding on Garuòa, they fly to the Supreme Lord's transcendental abode.

Text 39 

bhagavan-mandiräd räjann
     uttarasyäà disi çrutaà
kroçärdhe nåpa-çärdüla
     mäyä-térthaà manoharam

     bhagavan-mandirät—from the palace of Lord Kåçëa; räjann—O king; uttarasyäm—to the north; disi—direction; çrutam—heard; kroçärdhe—one mile; nåpa-çärdüla—O tiger among kings; mäyä-tértham—Mäyä-tértha; manoharam—beautuful.

     O tiger of kings, one mile north of Lord Kåçëa's palace is beautiful Mäyä-tértha.

Text 40 

viräjate yatra nityaà
     durgä durgati-näçiné
siàhärüòhä bhadrakälé
     caëòa-muëòa-vinäçiné

     viräjate—is splendidly maniufested; yatra—where; nityam—always; durgä—goddess Durgä; durgati—troubles; näçiné—destroying; siàha—on a lion; ärüòhä—riding; bhadrakälé—Bhadrakälé; caëòa-muëòa-vinäçiné—killing the cruel and wicked.

     Goddess Durgä, who removes all troubles and kills the cruel and wicked, always stays there.

Text 41 

syamantakaà samahärtuà
     åkça-räja-bilaà gate
putre ca devaké devéà
     püjayäm äsa sat-phalaiù

     syamantakam—the Syamantaka jewel; samahärtum—to take; åkça-räja-bilam—to the cave of the king of the åkças; gate—gone; putre—son; ca—and; devaké—Devaké; devém—Goddess Durgä; püjayäm äsa—worshiped; sat-phalaiù—with the best of fruits.

     In this place, when her son had gone to Jämbavän's cave to recover the Syamantaka jewel, Devaké worshiped Goddess Durgä and offered her the best of fruits.

Text 42 

tadäjagäma priyayä
     sa-maëir bhagavän hariù
tad-bilät tat-prasiddhaà syän
     mäyä-térthaà phala-pradam

     tadä—then; äjagäma—returned; priyayä—with His wife; sa-maëiù—with the jewel; bhagavän—Lord; hariù—Kåçëa; tad-bilät—from that cave; tat-prasiddham—that result; syän—is; mäyä-tértham—Mäyä-tértha; phala-pradam—giving the result.

     When Lord Kåçëa returned from that cave with Satyabhämä and the Syamantaka jewel, Devaké considered that was the result of her worship at Mäyä-tértha.

Text 43 

mäyä-térthe ca yaù snätvä
     mäyäà sampüjya mänavaù
sarväà manoratha-präptià
     präpnuyän nätra saàçayaù

     mäyä-térthe—at mäyä-tértha; ca—and; yaù—one who; snätvä—having bathed; mäyäm—Goddess Durgä; sampüjya—woirshiping; mänavaù—a human; sarväm—all; manoratha—of desires; präptim—attainment; präpnuyät—attains; na—not; atra—here; saàçayaù—doubt.

     A person who bathes at Mäyä-tértha and worships Goddess Durgä attains all his desires. Of this there is no doubt.

Chapter Twenty
Dvitéya-durge Indra-tértha-brahma-tértha-sürya-kuëòa-naila-lohita-säpta-samudra-mähätmya
In the Description of the Second Fort, the Glories of Indra-tértha, Brahma-tértha, Sürya-kuëòa, Nailalohita-tértha, and Sapta-sämudra-tértha

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

dvitéyasyäpi durgasya
     pürva-dväre videha-räö
indra-térthaà mahä-puëyaà
     käma-daà siddhi-däyakam

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; dvitéyasya—of the second; api—also; durgasya—fort; pürva-dväre—the eastern door; videha-räö—O king of Videha; indra-tértham—Indra-tértha; mahä-puëyam—very sacred; käma-dam—fuldilling desires; siddhi-däyakam—granting perfection.

     Çré Närada said: O king of Videha, at the eastern gate of the second fortress is sacred Indra-tértha, which grants perfection and fulfills all desires.

Text 2 

tatra snätvä naro räjann
     indralokaà prayäti hi
ihaiva candra-sädåçyaà
     vaibhavaà präpyate naraù

     tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; räjann—O king; indralokam—Indraloka; prayäti—goes; hi—indeed; iha—here; eva—indeed; candra-sädåçyam—like the moon; vaibhavam—power; präpyate—attains; naraù—a person.

     O king, a person who bathes there goes to Indraloka. There he becomes glorious like the moon.

Text 3 

tathä vai dakçiëe dväre
     sürya-kuëòo 'bhidhéyate
yadä saträjitenäpi
     püjito 'bhüt syamantakaù

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; dakçiëe—at the southern; dväre—gate; sürya-kuëòaù—Sürya-kuëòa; abhidhéyate—is called; yadä—when; saträjitena—by saträjit; api—also; püjitaù—worshiped; abhüt—was; syamantakaù—the Syamantaka.

     At the southern gate is Sürya-kuëòa, where Saträjit worshiped the Syamantaka jewel.

Text 4 

tatra snätvä padmarägaà
     yo dadäti nåpeçvara
sürya-prabha-vimänena
     süryalokaà prayäti hi

     tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; padmarägam—ruby; yaù—who; dadäti—gives; nåpeçvara—O king of kings; sürya-prabha—splendid as the sun; vimänena—with an airplane; süryalokam—to Süryaloka; prayäti—goes; hi—indeed.

     A person who bathes there and gives a ruby in charity flies to the sun planet in an airplane effulgent like the sun.

Texts 5-7 

tathä vai paçcime dväre
     brahma-térthaà viçiçyate
tatra snätvä naro räjan
     svarëa-pätre ca päyäsam

yo dadäti mahä-buddhis
     tasya puëya-phalaà çåëu
brahma-hä pitå-hä go-ghno
     mätå-häcärya-häghavän

indraloke padaà dhåtvä
     bibhrad brahmamayaà vapuù
candräbhena vimänena
     yäti brahma-padaà sa ca

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; paçcime—in the western; dväre—gate; brahma-tértham—Brahma-tértha; viçiçyate—is distinguished; tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; räjan—O king; svarëa—golden; pätre—in a cup; ca—and; päyäsam—päyasa; yaù—one who; dadäti—gives; mahä-buddhiù—very intelligent; tasya—of him; puëya-phalam—the pious result; çåëu—please hear; brahma-hä—the sin of killing a ;brähmaë pitå-hä—the sin of killing one;s father; go-ghnaù—the sin of killing a cow; mätå-hä—the sin of killing one's mother; äcärya-hä—the sin of killing one's guru; aghavän—sinful; indraloke—in Indraloka; padam—the state; dhåtvä—holding; bibhrat—hoilding; brahmamayam—like Lord Brahmä; vapuù—form; candräbhena—splendid as the moon; vimänena—with an airplane; yäti—goes; brahma-padam—to Brahmaloka; sa—he; ca—and.

     At the western gate is Brahma-tértha. Please here the pious result attained by one who bathes there and gives charity of päyasa in a golden cup. Such a person is very wise. Even if he has killed his father, his mother, his guru, a brähmaëa, or a cow, or even if he has committed many very terrible sins, he attains a form like that of Lord Brahmä and, riding in an airplane effulgent as the moon, goes to Brahmaloka.

Text 8 

tathä vai uttare dväre
     kçetraà syän nailalohitam
yatra säkçän mahä-devo
     räjate nélalohitaù

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; uttare—at the northern; dväre—gate; kçetram—the place; syän—is; nailalohitam—Nailalohita; yatra—where; säkçät—directly; mahä-devaù—Lord Çiva; räjate—is splendidly manifested; nélalohitaù—as Nélalohita.

     At the northern gate is Nailalohita-tértha, where Lord Çiva is splendidly manifested in his form of Nélalohita.

Text 9 

devatä munayaù sarve
     tathä säptarçayaù pare
vasanti yatra vaideha
     tathä sarve marud-gaëäù

     devatä—the demigods; munayaù—the sages; sarve—all; tathä—so; säptarçayaù—the seven sages; pare—others; vasanti—reside; yatra—where; vaideha—O king of Videha; tathä—so; sarve—all; marud-gaëäù—the Maruts.

     All the demigods and sages, the seven åçis, all the Maruts, and many others all reside in that place.

Text 10 

nélalohita-liëgaà tu
     yatra sampüjya yatnataù
aiçvaryam atulaà lebhe
     rävaëo loka-rävaëaù

     nélalohita-liëgam—the Deity of Lord Çiva; tu—indeed; yatra—where; sampüjya—worshiping; yatnataù—carefully; aiçvaryam—opulence; atulam—unequalled; lebhe—attains; rävaëaù—Rävaëa; loka-rävaëaù—who made the entire world cry out.

     At this place the demon Rävaëa, who made the entire world scream with grief, worshiped the liëga of Lord Çiva and attained incomparable power and opulence.

Text 11 

kailäsasyäpi yäträyäà
     yat phalaà labhate nåpa
tasmäc chata-guëaà puëyaà
     nélalohita-darçanät

     kailäsasya—of Mount Kailäsa; api—also; yäträyäm—on pilgrimage; yat—what; phalam—result; labhate—attains; nåpa—O king; tasmät—than that; çata—a hundred times; guëam—multiplied; puëyam—piety; nélalohita-darçanät—by seeing Nélalohita.

     O king, by seeing the liëga of Lord Çiva there one attains a pious result a hundred times greater than the result attained by going on pilgrimage to Mount Kailäsa.

Text 12 

nélalohita-kuëòe vai
     snäto yas tri-dinaà naraù
sa yäti çiva-lokäkhyaà
     päpäyuta-yuto 'pi hi

     nélalohita-kuëòe—in Nélalohita-kuëòe; vai—indeed; snätaù—bathing; yaù—who; tri-dinam—three days; naraù—a person; sa—he; yäti—goes; çiva-lokäkhyam—to Çivaloka; päpäyuta-yutaù—having millions of sins; api—even; hi—indeed.

     A person who visits for three days and bathes in Nélalohita-kuëòa goes to Çivaloka, even though he may have committed many millions of sins.

Text 13 

sapta-sämudrakaà näma
     térthaà yatra viräjate
tatra snätvä naraù päpi
     päpa-saëghaiù pramucyate

     sapta-sämudrakam—Sapta-sämudraka; näma—named; tértham—holy place; yatra—where; viräjate—is splendidly manifested; tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; päpi—sinful; päpa-saëghaiù—from many sins; pramucyate—is freed.

     There also is Sapta-sämudraka-tértha. A sinner who bathes there is freed from a great host of sins.

Texts 14 and 15 

saptänäà ca samudräëäà
     snäna-puëyaà labhet tvaram
viçëur viriïco giriça
     indro väyur yamo raviù

parjanyo dhanadaù somaù
     kçitir agnir apäà patiù
tat-pärçveçu sadä hy ete
     tiçöhanti manujeçvara

     saptänäm—of the seven; ca—and; samudräëäm—seas; snäna-puëyam—the pious result of bathing; labhet—attains; tvaram—at once; viçëuù—Lord Viçëu; viriïcaù—Brahmä; giriça—Çiva; indraù—Indra; väyuù—Väyu; yamaù—Yama; raviù—Sürya; parjanyaù—Indra; dhanadaù—Kuvera; somaù—Candra; kçitiù—Kçiti; agniù—Agni; apäà patiù—Varuëa; tat-pärçveçu—in its sides; sadä—always; hy—indeed; ete—they; tiçöhanti—stay; manujeçvara—O king.

     He attains the pious result of bathing in the seven oceans. O king, Lord Viçëu, Brahmä, Çiva, Indra, Väyu, Yama, Sürya, Indra, Kuvera, Candra, Kçiti, Agni, and Varuëa always stay on the shores of Sapta-sämudraka-tértha.

Text 16 

säpta-koöéni térthäni
     brahmäëòe yäni käni ca
sarväëi tatra tiçöhanti
     sapta-sämudrake nåpa

     säpta-koöéni—seventy million; térthäni—holy places; brahmäëòe—in the universe; yäni—which; käni—which?; ca—and; sarväëi—all; tatra—there; tiçöhanti—stay; sapta-sämudrake—at Sapta-sämudraka; nåpa—O king.

     O king, all the seventy million holy places of the universe are present at Sapta-sämudraka-tértha.

Text 17 

tatra snätvä naraù paçcät
     kåtvä sarva-parikramam
präpnoti dvärakäyäç ca
     yäträyäù sakalaà phalam

     tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù— aperson; paçcät—after; kåtvä—doing; sarva-parikramam—circumambulation; präpnoti—attains; dvärakäyäù—of Dvärakä; ca—and; yäträyäù—pilgirmage; sakalam—all; phalam—the result.

     A person who bathes there and circumambulates that holy place attains all the pious results of going on a pilgrimage to Dvärakä.

Text 18 

sapta-sämudrakam åte
     na yäträ phala-dä småtä
sapta-sämudrakaà térthaà
     viçëu-rüpaà viduù suräù

     sapta-sämudrakam—Sapta-sämudraka; åte—without; na—not; yäträ—a pilgrimage; phala-dä—giving e\results; småtä—considered; sapta-sämudrakaà tértham—to Sapta-sämudra-tértha; viçëu-rüpam—the form of Lord Viçëu; viduù—consider; suräù—the demigods.

     Without visiting Sapta-sämudraka-tértha, a pilgrimage to Dvärakä will not bring any results. The demigods know that Sapta-sämudraka-tértha is an incarnation of Lord Viçëu.

Chapter Twenty-one
Tåtéye Durge Piëòäraka-mähätmya
In the Description of the Third Fort, the Glories of Piëòäraka-tértha

Text 1

çré-närada uväca 

tåtéyasyäpi durgasya
     pürva-dväre mahä-balaù
rakçaty ahar-niçaà räjan
     hanumän aïjané-sutaù

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; tåtéyasya—of the third; api—also; durgasya—fort; pürva-dväre—at the eastern gate; mahä-balaù—very powerful; rakçaty—protects; ahar-niçam—day and night; räjan—O king; hanumän—hanumän; aïjané-sutaù—the son of Aïané.

     Çré Närada said: Day and night Aïané's very powerful son Hanumän guards the eastern gate ofthe third fortress.
     
Text 2 

taà prekçya bhagavad-bhaktaà
     hanumantaà mahä-balam
jäyate bhagavad-bhakto
     hanumän iva mänavaù

     tam—him; prekçya—seeing; bhagavad-bhaktam—the devotee of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hanumantam—Hanumän; mahä-balam—very powerful; jäyate—is born; bhagavad-bhaktaù—a devotee of the Lord; hanumän—Hanumän; iva—like; mänavaù—a human being.

     A person who sees the very powerful devotee Hanumän becomes a great devotee of the Lord.

Text 3 

tathä vai dakçiëä-dväre
     cakraà näma sudarçanam
rakçaty ahar-niçaà räjaï
     chré-kåçëa-gata-mänasam

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; dakçiëä-dväre—at the southern door; cakram—the disc; näma—named; sudarçanam—Sudarçana; rakçaty—guards; ahar-niçam—day and night; räjan—O king; çré-kåçëa-gata-mänasam—his heart meditating on Lord Kåçëa.

     Meditating on Lord Kåçëa in his heart, the Sudarçana-cakra, guards the southern gate day and night.

Text 4 

tasya darçana-mätreëa
     bhaved bhakto hareù paraù
bhaktasyäpi sadä rakçäà
     karoti hi sudarçanam

     tasya—of him; darçana-mätreëa—simply by seeing; bhavet—becomes; bhaktaù—a devotee of the Lord; hareù—Kåçëa; paraù—great; bhaktasya—of a devotee; api—also; sadä—always; rakçäm—protection; karoti—does; hi—indeed; sudarçanam—Sudarçana.

     Simply by seeing the Sudarçana-cakra one becomes a devotee of the Lord. The Sudarçana-cakra guards the devotees eternally.

Text 5 

tathä vai paçcimaà dväraà
     jämbavän åkça-räd balé
rakçaty ahar-niçaà räjan
     bhagavad-bhakti-samyutaù

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; paçcimam—the western; dväram—gate; jämbavän—Jambavän; åkça-rät—the king of the åkças; balé—powerful; rakçaty—guards; ahar-niçam—day and night; räjan—O king; bhagavad-bhakti-samyutaù—devoted to the Lord.

     Filled with love for the Lord, powerful Jämbavän, the king of the åkças, guards the western gate day and night.

Text 6 

taà prekçya bhagavad-bhaktaà
     jämbavantaà mahä-balam
ciraï-jévé harer bhakto
     bhavatéha ca mänavaù

     tam—him; prekçya—seeing; bhagavad-bhaktam—a devotee of the Lord; jämbavantam—jämbavän; mahä-balam—very powerful; ciraï-jévé—living eternally; hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; bhaktaù—a devotee; bhavati—becomes; iha—here; ca—and; mänavaù—a person.

     A person who sees the very powerful devotee Jämbavän becomes a devotee of the Lord eternally.
     
Text 7 

tathä vai cottare dväre
     viçvakseno mahä-balaù
rakçaty ahar-niçaà räjaï
     chré-kåçëa-hådayo mahän

     tathä—so; vai—indeed; ca—and; uttare—at the northern; dväre—gate; viçvaksenaù—Viçvaksena; mahä-balaù—very powerful; rakçaty—protects; ahar-niçam—day and night; räjan—O king; çré-kåçëa-hådayaù—who keeps Lord Kåçëa in his heart; mahän—the great soul.

     Meditating on Lord Kåçëa in his heart, powerful Viçvaksena guards the northern gate day and night.
     
Text 8 

tasya darçana-mätreëa
     naro yäti kåtärthatäm
çåëu räjan bahir durgät
     térthaà piëòärakaà småtam

     tasya—him; darçana-mätreëa—simply by seeing; naraù—a person; yäti—attains; kåtärthatäm—success; çåëu—please hear; räjan—O king; bahiù—outside; durgät—the fortress; tértham—the holy place; piëòärakam—Piëòäraka; småtam—considered.

     Simply by seeing Viçvaksena one attains the goal of life. O king, please hear of Piëòäraka-tértha, which is situated outside the third fortress.

Text 9 

piëòärakasya mähätmyaà
     çåëutäd räja-sattama
yasya smaraëa-mätreëa
     mahä-päpät pramucyate

     piëòärakasya—of Piëòäraka; mähätmyam—the glory; çåëutät—hear; räja-sattama—O best of kings; yasya—of which; smaraëa-mätreëa—simply be remembering; mahä-päpät—from the greatest sin; pramucyate—is freed.

     O best of kings, please hear the glories of Piëòäraka-tértha. Simply by hearing its glories one becomes free from the greatest sin.

Text 10 

artha-siddhyor iva dväre
     raivatädri-samudrayoù
madhye piëòäraka-kçetraà
     térthänäà tértham uttamam

     artha—the goal of life; siddhyoù—and perfection; iva—like; dväre—at the gate; raivatädri—of Mount Raivata; samudrayoù—and the ocean; madhye—between; piëòäraka-kçetram—Piëòäraka-tértha; térthänäm—of holy places; tértham—the holy place; uttamam—the best.

     As if it were standing between perfection and the goal of life, Piëòäraka-tértha, the best of holy places, stands between Mount Raivata and the ocean.

Text 11 

kratu-räjaà räjasüyaà
     yadu-räjo mahä-balaù
cakära yatra vaideha
     pairpürëatamäjïayä

     kratu-räjam—the king of yajnas; räjasüyam—Rajasuya; yadu-räjaù—the king of the Yädavas; mahä-balaù—very powerful; cakära—did; yatra—where; vaideha—O king of Videha; pairpürëatama—of the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead; äjïayä—by the order.

     By the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead's order, powerful Ugrasena, the king of the Yädavas, performed a Räjasüya-yajïa, the best of yajïas, at Piëòäraka-tértha.

Text 12 

sarväëi yatra térthäni
     samähutäni sarvataù
niväsaà cakrire räjann
     ugrasena-kratüttame

     sarväëi—all; yatra—where; térthäni—holy places; samähutäni—called; sarvataù—in all respects; niväsam—residence; cakrire—did; räjan—O king; ugrasena—of Ugrasena; kratu-uttame—at the Rajasuya-yajna.

     When they were called, all holy places came to King Ugrasena's Räjasüya-yajïa.

Text 13 

tena piëòärakaà näma
     sarva-térthasya piëòataù
tatra snätvä naraù sadyo
     räjasüya-phalaà labhet

     tena—by this; piëòärakam—Piëòäraka; näma—named; sarva-térthasya—of all holy places; piëòataù—from the convergence; tatra—there; snätvä—bathing; naraù—a person; sadyaù—at once; räjasüya-phalam—the result ofa Rajasuya-yajna; labhet—attains.

     Because all the holy places converged (piëò) at that place, it was named Piëòäraka-tértha. A person who bathes there attains the result of performing a Räjasüya-yajïa.

Text 14 

tatraiva tri-dinaà snätvä
     vraté bhütvä samähitaù
brähmaëebhyaù svarëa-dänaà
     dattvä yaù praëato bhavet

ihaiva nara-devaù syät
     sa mahätmä na saàçayaù
nityaà çåëoti satataà
     vandi-vägbhir yaçaù svayam

     tatra—there; eva—indeed; tri-dinam—for three days; snätvä—bathing; vraté—following vows; bhütvä—becoming; samähitaù—careful; brähmaëebhyaù—top the brähmaëas; svarëa-dänam—a gift of gold; dattvä—giving; yaù—one who; praëataù—bowing down; bhavet—becomes; iha—here; eva—indeed; nara-devaù—a great king; syät—becomes; sa—he; mahätmä—a great soul; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; nityam—always; çåëoti—hears; satatam—always; vandi-vägbhiù—by the poets' words; yaçaù—glories; svayam—personally.

     A person who, carefully following religious vows, stays there for three days, bathes there, gives gold in charity to the brähmaëas, and humbly bows down before them, becomes a great saintly king in this world. Again and again he hears the poets chanting his glories.
     
Text 16 

suvarëa-ratna-vasträdyaiù
     sucandra-vadanaiù paraiù
stré-saëghaiù sevito nityaà
     håçöa-puçöo mahä-balaù

     suvarëa—with gold; ratna—jewels; vastra—and costly garments; ädyaiù—beginning; sucandra-vadanaiù—with moonlike faces; paraiù—great; stré-saëghaiù—by wives; sevitaù—served; nityam—always; håçöa-puçöaù—happy; mahä-balaù—powerful.

     He is dressed in costly garments and decorated with gold and jewels. Many beautiful moon-faced wives serve him always. He is powerful and and happy.

Text 17 

aho-rätraà prataòyante
     dväri dundubhayo ghanäù
karéndräëäà ca cétkärair
     açva-hreçaiù samanvitam

     aho-rätram—day and night; prataòyante—are struck; dväri—at the door; dundubhayaù—drums; ghanäù—great; karindräëäm—of elephants; ca—and; cétkäraiù—of trumpeting; açva-hreçaiù—with neighing of horses; samanvitam—with.

     Day and night at the gateway to his palace many drums are sounded, many regal elephants trumpet, and many horses neigh.

Text 18 

viräjate räja-saëghaiù
     prekçayan präëganäjiram
ratna-präsäda-nicayaà
     dhvaja-maëòala-maëòitam

     viräjate—is splendidly manifested; räja-saëghaiù—with many kings; prekçayan—showing; präëganäjiram—the courtyard; ratna—jewel; präsäda—palaces; nicayam—multitude; dhvaja-maëòala-maëòitam—decorated with many flags.

     Surrounded by his entourage, he is splendidly manifested in his many jewel palaces decorated with flags and enveloping charming gardens and courtyards.

Text 19 

matta-kuïjara-karëäbhyäà
     täòitä bhåëga-maëòalé
alaëkaroti tad-dväraà
     maëòitaà maëòaleçvaraiù

     matta-kuïjara-karëäbhyäm—by the ears of maddened elephants; täòitä—struck; bhåëga-maëòalé—the bees; alaëkaroti—decorates; tad-dväram—his door; maëòitam—decorated; maëòaleçvaraiù—with regal attendants.

     The entrance to his palace is decorated with regal attendants and with swarms of bees struck by the ears of intoxicated elephants.

Text 20 

piëòäraka-snänam åte
     kathaà räjyaà bhaved iha
ante mokçaà kathaà yäti
     naraù päpa-yuto 'pi hi

     piëòäraka-snänam—bathing in Piëòäraka-tértha; åte—without; katham—how?; räjyam—a kingdom; bhavet—may be; iha—here; ante—at the end; mokçam—liberation; katham—how?; yäti—attains; naraù—a person; päpa-yutaù—sinful; api—even; hi—certainly.

     Without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha, how can one attain a kingdom in this world? How can even a sinner attain liberation? 

Text 21 

piëòäraka-snänam åte na çarma
     piëòäraka-snänam åte na karma
piëòäraka-snänam åte na dharma
     piëòäraka-snänam åte na varma

     piëòäraka-snänam—bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha; åte—without; na—not; çarma—happiness; piëòäraka-snänam—bathing in Piëòäraka-tértha; åte—without; na—not; karma—pious deeds; piëòäraka-snänam—bathing in Piëòäraka-tértha; åte—without; na—not; dharma—religionj; piëòäraka-snänam—btahing in Piëòäraka-tértha; åte—without; na—not; varma—protection.

     Without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha there is no happiness. Without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha there are no pious deeds. Without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha there is no religion. Without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha there is no protection.

Text 22 

piëòäraka-snänam åte viyogé
     piëòäraka-snäna-karas tu yogé
piëòäraka-snäna-karaù su-bhogé 
     piëòäraka-snäna-karo na rogé

     piëòäraka-snänam åte—without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha; viyogé—not a yogi; piëòäraka-snäna-karaù—bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha; tu—indeed; yogé—a yogi; piëòäraka-snäna-karaù—bathign at Piëòäraka-tértha; su-bhogé—happy; piëòäraka-snäna-karaù—bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha; na—not; rogé—diseased.

     Without bathing at Piëòäraka-tértha one cannot be a yogé. One who bathes at Piëòäraka-tértha becomes a yogé. One who bathes at Piëòäraka-tértha enjoys all happiness. One who bathes at Piëòäraka-tértha is never diseased.

Text 23

dväravatéà mädhava-mäsa-madhye
     pradakçiëé-kåtya namaskaroti
sarvä ihämütra ca siddhayo 'pi
     vaideha tat-päëi-tale bhavanti

     dväravatém—to Dvärakä; mädhava-mäsa-madhye—in the middle of th emonth of Mädhava; pradakçiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; namaskaroti—bows; sarvä—all; iha—in this life; amütra—and in the next; ca—and; siddhayaù—perfections; api—also; vaideha—O king of Videha; tat-päëi-tale—in the palm of his hand; bhavanti—are.

     A person who in the month of Mädhava (April-May) circumambulates Dvärakä finds that in both this life and the next all perfections rest in the palm of his hand.

Texts 24 and 25 

térthäpluto-'dhaù-çayanaù çuciç ca
     mauné vraté vä yava-bhojanena
ärabhya caitréà kila paurëamäséà
     yo mädhavém etya karoti yäträm

tat-puëya-saëkhyaà gadituà na çakyas
     catur-mukho vedamayo vidhätä
yo megha-dhäraà gaëayet kadäcit
     kälena puëyäni na kåçëa-puryäù

     tértha—in the holy place; äplutaù—bathing; adhaù—below; çayanaù—resting; çuciç—pure; ca—and; mauné—silent; vraté—following vows; vä—or; yava-bhojanena—by eating barley; ärabhya—beginning; caitrém—the month of Caitra; kila—indeed; paurëamäsém—on the fuill moon; yaù—one who; mädhavém—in the month of Mädhava; etya—going; karoti—does; yäträm—pilgrimage; tat-puëya-saëkhyam—that piety; gaditum—to speak; na—not; çakyaù—able; catur-mukhaù—Brahmä; vedamayaù—the master of the Vedas; vidhätä—the creator; yaù—who; megha-dhäram—the water of the clouds; gaëayet—may count; kadäcit—sometime; kälena—in time; puëyäni—the piety; na—not; kåçëa-puryäù—of Lord Kåçëa's city.

     A person who, following many vows, including a vow of silence and a vow of eating only barley, goes on a pilgrimage to Dvärakä and bathes and sleeps at Dvärakä on the full-moon day of the month of Caitra (March-April) or the full-moon day of the month of Mädhava (April-May) attains piety so great even the demigod Brahmä, who is the creator of the planets and the master of Vedas, cannot measure it. If one could somehow, with a great effort and after a long time, count the drops of rain that fall during the monsoon rains, still he could never measure the piety one gains by visiting Lord Kåçëa's city of Dvärakä.

Texts 26 and 27

yathä tithénäà hari-väsaraà ca
     yathä hi çeçaù phaëinäà phaëéndraù
yathä garutmän divi pakçiëäà ca
     yathä puräëeçu ca bhärataà ca

yathä hi deveçu ca deva-devaù
     çré-väsudevo yadu-deva-devaù
tathä puré kçetra-samasta-madhye
     dväravaté puëyavaté praçastä

     yathä—as; tithénäm—of days; hari-väsaram—ekädaçé; ca—and; yathä—as; hi—indeed; çeçaù—Çeça; phaëinäm—of snakes; phaëéndraù—the king of snakes; yathä—as; garutmän—Garuòa; divi—in the sky; pakçiëäm—of birds; ca—and; yathä—as; puräëeçu—in the Puräëas; ca—and; bhäratam—the Mahäbhärata; ca—and; yathä—as; hi—indeed; deveçu—among the demigods; ca—and; deva-devaù—the master of the demigods; çré-väsudevaù—Çré Väsudeva; yadu-deva-devaù—the master of the Yädavas; tathä—so; puré—the city; kçetra-samasta-madhye—among all holy places; dväravaté—Dvärakä; puëyavaté—sacred; praçastä—glorious.

     As Ekädaçé is glorious among sacred days, as Lord Çeça, the king of serpents, is glorious among serpents, as Garuòa is glorious among birds in the sky, as the Mahäbhärata is glorious among the Puräëas, and as Çré Kåçëa, the master of the demigods and the Yädavas, is glorious among all deities, so sacred Dvärakä is glorious among all sacred places.

Text 28

aho 'ti-dhanyä yadu-maëòalébhir
     viräjate bhümi-tale manoharä
vaikuëöha-lélädhikåtä kuçasthalé
     yathä taòidbhir jaladävalir divi

     ahaù—Oh; ati-dhanyä—very glorious; yadu-maëòalébhiù—with the Yädavas; viräjate—splendidly manifest; bhümi-tale—on the earth; manoharä—beautiful; vaikuëöha-lélädhikåtä—with the pastimes of Vaikuëöha; kuçasthalé—Dvärakä; yathä—as; taòidbhiù—with lightning; jaladävaliù—many clouds; divi—in the sky.

     Beautiful and glorious Dvärakä, in this world the home of the Yädavas and the pastimes of Vaikuëöha, is splendid like monsoon clouds and lightning.

Text 29

yatraiva säkçät puruçaù pareçvaro
     dhåtvä catur-vyüham alaà viräjate
yas tügrasenäya dadau nåpeçatäà
     kåçëäya tasmai haraye namo namaù

     yatra—where; eva—indeed; säkçät—directly; puruçaù—the Supreme Person; pareçvaraù—the master of all; dhåtvä—manifesting; catur-vyüham—the catur-vyüha expansions; alam—greatly; viräjate—is splendidly manifested; yaù—who; tu—indeed; ugrasenäya—to King Ugrasena; dadau—gave; nåpeçatäm—the post of emperor; kåçëäya—to Lord Kåçëa; tasmai—to Him; haraye—to Lord Hari; namo namaù—obeisances.

     I offer my respectful obeisances to Çré Kåçëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who expands as the catur-vyüha, and who gave the Yädavas' kingdom to Ugrasena. 

Text 30

yadä sva-lokaà bhagavän gamiçyati
     samplävayiçyaty atha täà tadärëavaù
vaideha divyaà hari-mandiraà vinä
     tasmin niväsaà bhagavän kariçyati

     yadä—when; sva-lokam—to His own abode; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; gamiçyati—will go; samplävayiçyaty—will cause of be flooded; atha—then; täm—that; tadä—then; arëavaù—the ocean; vaideha—O king of Videha; divyam—-tértha; hari-mandiram—Lord Kåçëa's palace; vinä—without; tasmin—there; niväsam—residence; bhagavän—theLord; kariçyati—will do.

     When Lord Kåçëa returns to His own abode, the ocean will flood Dvärakä City. O king of Videha, the Lord will not reside then in that palace on the earth.

Text 31

çåëvanti tatraiva kalau jala-dhvanià
     kåçëoktam itthaà satataà dine dine
bhaved avidyo yadi vä sa-vidyo
     yo brähmaëo vai sa tu mämaké tanuù

     çåëvanti—hear; tatra—there; eva—indeed; kalau—in the Kali-yuga; jala-dhvanim—the sound of water; kåçëoktam—spoken by Lord Kåçëa; ittham—thus; satatam—always; dine dine—day after day; bhavet—may be; avidyaù—ignorant; yadi—if; vä—or; sa-vidyaù—knowledgable; yaù—one who; brähmaëaù—a brähmaëa; vai—indeed; sa—he; tu—indeed; mämaké—My; tanuù—body.

     In the Kali-yuga if a person, either unlettered or a learned brähmaëa, hears Lord Kåçëa's voice in the sound of the Dvärakä ocean's waves, then Lord Kåçëa Himself declares, “That person represents Me."

Text 32

bhütvätha vipro 'bdhi-tatäd agädhaà
     gatvä gåhétvä pratimäà parasya
kåtvä pratiçöhäà ca vidhäya saudhaà
     kariçyate sthäpanam arka eçaù

     bhütvä—having become; atha—then; vipraù—a brähmaëa; abdhi-taöät——from the seashore; agädham—deep; gatvä—going; gåhétvä—taking; pratimäm—the Deity form; parasya—of the Supreme; kåtvä—doing; pratiçöhäm—basis; ca—and; vidhäya—placing; saudham—palace; kariçyate—making; sthäpanam—establishment; arka—the sun; eçaù—he.

     A brähmaëa who establishes a Deity form of the Lord in a great temple by the ocean at Dvärakä becomes glorious like the sun.

Text 33

çré-dvärakä-nätham iti svarüpaà
     paçyanti ye bhakta-janäù kalau yuge
gacchanti te viçëu-padaà nå-deva
     yogéçvaräëäm api durlabhaà yat

     çré-dvärakä-nätham—the Lord of Dvärakä; iti—thus; svarüpam—the form; paçyanti—see; ye—they who; bhakta-janäù—devotees; kalau yuge—in the Kali-yuga; gacchanti—go; te—they; viçëu-padam—to Lord Kåçëa's abode; nå-deva—O king; yogéçvaräëäm—by the kings of the yogés; api—even; durlabham—unattainable; yat—which.

     In Kali-yuga the devotees who gaze on the Deity of Lord Kåçëa, the master of Dvärakä, go to Lord Viçëu's transcendental abode, which even the greatest yogés cannot attain.

Text 34

idaà mayä te kathitaà nå-deva
     mähätmyam etat kila kåçëa-puryäù
çåëoti yaù çrävayate ca bhaktyä
     çré-dvärakä-väsa-phalaà labhet saù

     idam—this; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; nå-deva—O king; mähätmyam—the glory; etat—this; kila—indeed; kåçëa—of Lord Kåçëa; puryäù—of the city; çåëoti—hear; yaù—one who; çrävayate—cauases to hear; ca—and; bhaktyä—with devotion; çré-dvärakä-väsa-phalam—the result of residing in Dvärakä; labhet—attains; saù—he.

     O king, thus I have spoken to you the glories of Lord Kåçëa's Dvärakä City. A person who with devotion hears or causes others to hear these glories of Dvärakä attains the spiritual result of having lived there.

Text 35 

çré-dvärakäyä nåpa khaëòam etan
     mayä tavägre kathitaà su-puëyam
kértià kulaà bhaktim atéva muktià
     dadäti räjyaà ca sadaiva çåëvatäm

     çré-dvärakäyä—of Çré Dvärakä; nåpa—O king; khaëòam—the khaëòa; etan—this; mayä—by me; tava—of you; agre—in the presence; kathitam—spoken; su-puëyam—very sacred; kértim—glory; kulam—family; bhaktim—devotional service; atéva—great; muktim—liberation; dadäti—gives; räjyam—kingdom; ca—and; sadä—always; eva—indeed; çåëvatäm—of they who hear.

     O king, now I have spoken to you the very sacred Dvärakä-khaëòa, which gives fame, good family, devotional service, and liberation to they who regularly hear it.

Chapter Twenty-two
Çré Sudäma-vipropakhyäna-varëaëa
The Story of Çré Sudäma-vipra

Text 1

çré-kåçëasya sakhä kaçcit
     sudämä näma brähmaëaù
sa uväsa sva-puryäà tu
     satyä ca bhäryayä\våtaù

     çré-kåçëasya—of Lord Kåçëa; sakhä—the friend; kaçcit—one; sudämä—Sudämä; näma—named; brähmaëaù—a brähmaëa; sa—he; uväsa—resided; sva-puryäm—in his own city; tu—indeed; satyä—saintly; ca—and; bhäryayä ävåtaù—with his wife.

     Lord Kåçëa had a friend named Sudämä, who was a brähmaëa living with his wife in his own city.

Text 2 

virakto dhana-hénaç ca
     veda-vedäëga-päragaù
samäna-çélayä patnyä
     cakre våttim ayäcitäm

     viraktaù—renounced; dhana-hénaù—poverty-stricken; ca—and; veda-vedäëga-päragaù—traveled to the farther shore of the Vedas and Vedäëgas; samäna—equal; çélayä—disposition; patnyä—with his wife; cakre—did; våttim—mode of livelihood; ayäcitäm—without begging.

     He was poor and renounced. He had traveled to the farther shore of the Vedas and Vedäëgas. He and his saintly like-minded wife lived without begging for their livelihood.

Text 3 

sa kadäcit priyäà präha
     sédamänäà daridrataù
çré-kåçëo dvärakä-nätho
     mitraà mama pati-vrate

     saù—he; kadäcit—once; priyäm—to his wife; präha—said; sédamänäm—morose; daridrataù—because of poverty; çré-kåçëaù—Çré Kåçëa; dvärakä-näthaù—the king of Dvärakä; mitram—a friend; mama—of mine; pati-vrate—O wife devoted to your husband.

     When his wife was unhappy because of their poverty, he said to her, “O chaste and devoted one, Çré Kåçëa, the king of Dvärakä, is my friend.

Texts 4-7

mayä tenäpi paöhitä
     vidyä sändépaner gåhe
punar na dåçöaù çré-kåçëo
     bhoja-våçëy-andhakeçvaraù

trailokya-nätho bhagavän
     duùkha-hä déna-vatsalaù
iti çrutvä vacas tasya
     çuçka-vakträ pati-vratä

jérëa-vastra-dharä dénä
     patià präha bubhukçitä
yadi brahman nanu hariù
     sakhä te kamalä-patiù

bubhukçitaù katham-bhüto
     jérëa-karpaöa-dhäraëaù
dvärakäyäà janä gatvä
     dåçövä säkçäc chréyaù patià 
dhana-yuktäù samäyänti 
     tasmät tvaà gantum arhasi

     mayä—by me; tena—by Him; api—also; paöhitä—studied; vidyä—knowledge; sändépaneù—of Sändépani; gåhe—in the home; punaù—again; na—not; dåçöaù—seen; çré-kåçëaù—Çré Kåçëa; bhoja-våçëy-andhakeçvaraù—the Lord of Bhojas, Våçëis and Andhakas; trailokya-näthaù—the king of the three worlds; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; duùkha-hä—destroying suffering; déna-vatsalaù—affectionate to the poor; iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; vacaù—the words; tasya—of him; çuçka—dry; vakträ—throat; pati-vratä—devoted to her husband; jérëa-vastra-dharä—wearing ragged clothing; dénä—poor; patim—to her husbvand; präha—said; bubhukçitä—hungry; yadi—if; brahman—O brähmaëa; nanu—indeed; hariù—Lord Kåçëa; sakhä—the friend; te—of you; kamalä-patiù—the husband of the goddess of fortune; bubhukçitaù—hungry; katham-bhütaù—why?; jérëa-karpaöa-dhäraëaù—wearing ragged clothes; dvärakäyäm—in Dvärakä; janä—the people; gatvä—going; dåçövä—seeing; säkçät—directly; çréyaù patim—the goddess of fortune's husband; dhana-yuktäù—wealthy; samäyänti—return; tasmät—therefore; tvam—you; gantum—to go; arhasi—should.

     “He and I studied in Sändépani Muni's home together. When He became the king of the Bhojas, Våçëis and Andhakas, I never saw Him again. He is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of the three worlds. Affectionate to the poor and suffering, He removes all their troubles."
     When she heard these words, the brähmaëa's chaste and devoted wife, troubled by hunger, her garments ragged, and her voice now dry, said to her husband. “O brähmaëa, if Lord Kåçëa, the goddess of fortune's husband, is your friend, then why are we hungry and why do we wear ragged clothes? Everyone that goes to Dvärakä and sees Lord Kåçëa, the goddess of fortune's husband, returns wealthy. For this reason, please go to see Him."

Text 8 

çré-sudämoväca 

sarveçäà çikçako 'haà tvaà
     kasmai çikçäà pradäsyasi
viprasya viduço bhikçä
     dhanaà prakathitaà priye

     çré-sudämä uväca—Çré Sudämä said; sarveçäm—of all; çikçakaù—the teacher; aham—I; tvam—you; kasmai—to that; çikçäm—teaching; pradäsyasi—you give; viprasya—of a brähmaëa; viduçaù—learned; bhikçä—begging; dhanam—wealth; prakathitam—said; priye—O beloved.

     Çré Sudämä said: I am a brähmaëa, the teacher of all. Why do you try to teach me? O dear one, it is said that the wealth of a learned brähmaëa is obtained by accepting alms."

Text 9 

çré-priyoväca 

sakhä te çré-patir yasya
     näti-düre pravartate
tam upehi sa te duùkhaà
     däridryaà näçayiçyati

     çré-priyä uväca—the wife said; sakhä—the friend; te—of you; çré-patiù—the goddess of fortune's husband; yasya—of whom; na—not; ati-düre—very far away; pravartate—is; tam—Him; upehi—approach; sa—He; te—your; duùkham—unhappiness; däridryam—poverty; näçayiçyati—will destroy.

     His wife said: Your friend, Lord Kåçëa, the goddess of fortune's husband, lives not far from here. Please go to Him. He will remove your miserable poverty.

Text 10 

gatä avasthä mama te 
     duùkha-däridrya-bhujïatoù
dätuù kåpa-nidheù känta
     mitratäyäç ca kià phalam

     gatä—gone; avasthä—the condition; mama—of me; te —of you; duùkha-däridrya-bhujïatoù—suffering in poverty; dätuù—giving; kåpa-nidheù—an ocean of kindness; känta—O beloved; mitratäyäù—of friendship; ca—and; kim—what?; phalam—the result.

     Generous Lord Kåçëa, who is an ocean of kindness, will remove our miserable poverty. O my beloved, will this not be the result of your friendship with Him?

Text 11

çré-sudämoväca 

vidhinä likhitaà bhägyaà
     tat tathaiva bhaviçyati
yätäyätena kià bhadre
     harer dhyänaà karomy aham

     çré-sudämä uväca”Çré Sudämä said; vidhinä—by fate; likhitam—written; bhägyam—good fortune; tat—that; tathä—so; eva—indeed; bhaviçyati—will be; yätäyätena—by coming and going; kim—what?; bhadre—O beautiful one; hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; dhyänam—meditation; karomy—do; aham—I.

     Çré Sudämä said: Everyone's destiny is already written. What will be will be. O beautiful one, what is the use of running here and there to try to alter what is already destined? I will meditate of Lord Kåçëa.

Text 12

yad-dväri deçe räjäno
     deva-gandharva-kinnaräù
äjïäà vinä na yäsyanti
     dénasya mama kä kathä

     yad-dväri—at His door; deçe—in the country\; räjänaù—many kings; deva-gandharva-kinnaräù—demigods, gandharvas, and kinnaras; äjïäm—by the order; vinä—without; na—not; yäsyanti—will go; dénasya—poor; mama—of me; kä—what?; kathä—can be said.

     Many demigods, gandharvas, kinnaras, and great kings approach the entrance to His palace, but without His permission none can enter. What can be said of poor me?

Text 13

çré-priyoväca 

vinäjïäà naiva yäsyanti
     deva-gandharva-kinnaräù
äntar-yämé hariù çéghraà
     dütäis tvam ähvayiçyati

     çré-priyä uväca—his wife said; vinä—without; äjïäm—the order; na—not; eva—indeed; yäsyanti—will go; deva-gandharva-kinnaräù—demigods, gandharvas, and kinnaras; äntar-yämé—staying in everyone's heart; hariù—Lord Kåçëa; çéghram—for a long time; dütäiù—with messengers; tvam—you; ähvayiçyati—will call.

     His wife said: Without His permission the demigods, gandharvas, and kinnaras cannot enter. Still, He is the Supersoul in everyone's heart. He will send His messengers to call you to Him. 

Text 14

çré-vipra uväca 

dayälur édåçaù kåçëo
     paraà tu çåëu bhämini
vipatti-käle mitrasya
     na gacched gåham uttamam

     çré-vipra uväca—the brähmaëa said; brähman—the Supreme Brahman; dayäluù—merciful; édåçaù—like this; kåçëaù—Çré Kåçëa; param—great; tu—indeed; çåëu—hear; bhämini—O beautiful one; vipatti-käle—at the time of catastrophe; mitrasya—of a friend; na—not; gacchet—went; gåham—to the home; uttamam—great.

     The brähmaëa said: It is true. Lord Kåçëa is merciful like that. Still, O beautiful one, please listen. When a wealthy friend was in trouble once, still Lord Kåçëa did not go to visit his palace.

Text 15

kathaà tu yäcanäà kurve
     ciräd dåçövä svakaà priyam
nirlobhät tu bhavet prétir
     yäcanät tu gamiçyati

     katham—how?; tu—indeed; yäcanäm—request; kurve—I do; cirät—for a long time; dåçövä—having seen; svakam—own; priyam—dear one; nirlobhät—out of greed; tu—indeed; bhavet—may be; prétiù—love; yäcanät—from the request; tu—indeed; gamiçyati—will go.

     How can I see my old friend and then ask something from Him? My greedy request will chase away His love for me.

Text 16

çré-priyoväca 

duùkha-däridrya-haraëaà
     çré-harer darçanaà kuru
yäcanä naiva kartavyä
     sa te 'rthaà bahu däsyati 
evaà tu priyayä vipro 
     bahudhaivaà prabhäçitaù

     çré-priyä uväca—his wife said; duùkha-däridrya-haraëam—removing the unhappy poverty; çré-hareù—of Lored Kåçëa; darçanam—the sight; kuru—please do; yäcanä—request; na—not; eva—indeed; kartavyä—should be done; sa—He; te—to you; artham—wealth; bahu—great; däsyati—will give; evam—thus; tu—indeed; priyayä—by his wife; vipraù—the brähmaëa; bahudhä—in many ways; evam—thus; prabhäçitaù—was addressed.

     His wife said: Simply seeing Lord Kåçëa will remove your unhappy poverty. You need not ask Him for anything. Of His own accord He will give great wealth to you. 

     In this way she spoke many words to the brähmaëa.

Text 17

ayaà hi paramo läbhaù
     kåtvä mitrasya darçanam
upäyanaà tu kià däsye
     lajjito 'haà daridrataù

     ayam—this; hi—indeed; paramaù—the ultimate; läbhaù—attainment; kåtvä—havign done; mitrasya—of a friend; darçanam—the sight; upäyanam—a gift; tu—indeed; kim—what; däsye—I will give; lajjitaù—embarrassed; aham—I; daridrataù—from poverty.

     The brähmaëa said: Seeing my friend, Lord Kåçëa is the greatest attainment. Still, what gift will i give to Him when I see Him? I will be embarrassed by my poverty.

Text 18

ity uktvä sä gatä çéghraà
     para-gehaà tadä saté
taëòuläàç caturo muçöén
     yäcitvä sva-gåhaà yayau

     ity—thus; uktvä—speaking; sa—she; gatä—wnrt; çéghram—at once; para-geham—to another's home; tadä—then; saté—the saintly wife; taëòulän—some rice; caturaù—four; muçöén—palmsfull; yäcitvä—begging; sva-gåham—to her oen home; yayau—went.

     Then the saintly woman went to a neighbor's home, begged four palmsful of rice, and returned.

Text 19

jérëa-karpaöa-khaëòe ca
     baddhvä tän pataye dadau

     jérëa-karpaöa-khaëòe—in a ragged piece of cloth; ca—and; baddhvä—binding; tän—that; pataye—to her husband; dadau—gave.

     Then, tying the rice in a ragged piece of cloth, she gave it to her husband.

Text 20

tato gåhétvä påthukäàç ca taëòulän
     kucaila-dhäré malinaç ca durbalaù
jagäma kåçëasya puréà çanaiù çanair
     brahmaëya-devaà manasä ca saàsmaran

     tataù—then; gåhétvä—taking; påthukän—flat; ca—and; taëòulän—rice; kucaila-dhäré—wearing ragged clothes; malinaù—dirty; ca—and; durbalaù—weak; jagäma—went; kåçëasya—of Lord Kåçëa; purém—to the city; çanaiù çanaiù—very slowly; brahmaëya-devam—to the master of the brähmaëas; manasä—with his mind; ca—and; saàsmaran—remembering.

     Taking that chipped rice with him, weak, dirty, dressed in rags, and always meditating on Lord Kåçëa, the master of the brähmaëas, the brähmaëa went to Lord Kåçëa's city of Dvärakä.

Text 21

sottérya sindhum uòupena dadarça tatra
     çré-dvärakäà hari-puréà kanakair viciträm
çreëé-sabhä-vividha-durga-gåhaiù patäkaiù
     çåë\gäöakair ati-balair yadubhiç ca guptäm

     sottérya—crossing; sindhum—the ocean; uòupena—in a boat; dadarça—saw; tatra—there; çré-dvärakäm—Çré Dvärakä; hari-purém—Lord Kåçëa's city; kanakaiù—with gold; viciträm—wonderful; çreëé-sabhä-vividha-durga-gåhaiù—with many palaces, assembly-halls, and fortresses; patäkaiù—with flags; çåë\gäöakaiù—with many crossroards; ati-balaiù—very powerful; yadubhiç—by the Yädavas; ca—and; guptäm—protected.

     Crossing the ocean in a boat, the brähmaëa gazed at Lord Kåçëa Dvärakä City, which was carefully protected by the powerful Yädavas, and which was wonderful with many golden palaces, assembly-halls, fortresses, and crossroads.

Text 22

dåçövä kåçëa-puréà vipro
     janän äpåcchya çré-hareù
çré-mandiraà tu kuträste
     sarve vadata sämpratam

     dåçövä—seeing; kåçëa-purém—Lord Kåçëa's city; vipraù—the brähmaëa; janän—the people; äpåcchya—asking; çré-hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; çré-mandiram—the beautiful palace; tu—indeed; kutra—where?; äste—is; sarve—all; vadata—said; sämpratam—then.

     Gazing at Lord Kåçëa's city, the brähmaëa asked the people, “Where is Lord Kåçëa's beautiful palace?" The people replied, “All are Lord Kåçëa's palaces."

Text 23

iti çrutvä mädhavasya
     bhavanänäà ca rakçakäù
ücus te vartate kåçëaù
     sarveçu mandireçu ca

     iti—thus; çrutvä—hearing; mädhavasya—of Lord Kåçëa; bhavanänäm—of the palaces; ca—and; rakçakäù—the guards; ücuù—said; te—they; vartate—are; kåçëaù—Lord Kåçëa; sarveçu—in all; mandireçu—palaces; ca—and.

     Hearing this, the brähmaëa asked the palace guards, “In which palace is Lord Kåçëa at this moment?" the guards replied, “He is in all of them at this moment."

Text 24

ity upaçrutya sadanaà
     praviçyaikatamaà dvijaù
brahmänandaà gataù kåçëaà
     paryaëka-sthaà vilokya ca

     ity—thus; upaçrutya—hearing; sadanam—palace; praviçya—entering; ekatamam—one; dvijaù—the brähmaëa; brahmänandam—spiritual bliss; gataù—attained; kåçëam—Lord Kåçëa; paryaëka-stham—sitting on a bed; vilokya—seeing; ca—and.

     Hearing this, entering one of the palaces, and then seeing Lord Kåçëa sitting on His bed, the brähmaëa became filled with spiritual bliss.

Text 25

sakhäyam ägataà jïätvä
     sahasotthäya mädhavaù
dorbhyäà militvä cänyonyaà
     premëä hy açru-kuläkulaù

     sakhäyam—His friend; ägatam—come; jïätvä—aware; sahasä—at once; utthäya—rising; mädhavaù—Lord Kåçëa; dorbhyäm—with both arms; militvä—meeting; ca—and; anyonyam—together; premëä—with love; hy—indeed; açru-kuläkulaù—flooded with tears.

     Seeing that he had come, Lord Kåçëa at once stood up and, His eyes flooded with tears, embraced His friend with both arms.

Text 26

svarëa-pätreëa tasyäpi
     pädau prakçälya taj-jalam
gåhétvä çirasä taà tu
     paryaëka upaveçya ca

     svarëa—golden; pätreëa—-with a basin; tasya—of him; api—also; pädau—the feet; prakçälya—washing; taj-jalam—that water; gåhétvä—taking; çirasä—on the head; tam—him; tu—indeed; paryaëka—on the bed; upaveçya—placing; ca—and.

     In a golden basin the Lord washed his feet and then sprinkled the water on His own head. Then Lord had him sit on the bed.

Text 27

arcanaà kåtavän gandha-
     candanäguru-kuëkumaiù
pakvännair dhüpa-dépaiç ca
     madhu-parkair vidhänataù

     arcanam—worship; kåtavän—did; gandha—with fragrances; candana—sandal; aguru—aguru; kuëkumaiù—and kunkuma; pakva—cooked; annaiù—with grains; dhüpa—with incense; dépaiù—with lamps; ca—and; madhu-parkaiù—with madhuparka; vidhänataù—properly.

     Then the Lord worshiped him, offering him, fragrances, sandal paste, aguru, kuëkuma, incense, lamps, madhu-parka, and cooked grains.

Text 28

paçcäd ävedya tämbülaà
     gäà ca svägatam abravét
våddhaà kucailaà malinaà
     durbalaà çveta-murdhajam

     paçcät—then; ävedya—offering; tämbülam—betelnuts; gäm—to the brähmaëa; ca—and; svägatam—welcome; abravét—said; våddham—old; kucailam—dressed in rags; malinam—dirty; durbalam—weak; çveta-murdhajam—with white hair.

     After offering him betelnuts, the Lord spoke words of welcome to the weak, dirty, old, white-haired, dressed-in-rags brähmaëa.

Text 29  

mitravindä paryacarad
     vyajanena smitänvitä
çré-kåçëasya priyäù sarvä
     vismitä jahasus tadä

     mitravindä—Mitravindä; paryacarat—worshiped; vyajanena—with a fan; smitänvitä—smiling; çré-kåçëasya—of Çré Kåçëa; priyäù—the dear queens; sarvä—all; vismitä—astonished; jahasuù—smiled; tadä—then.

     Then smiling Mitravindä worshiped and fanned him. Filled with wonder, all of Lord Kåçëa's queens smiled.

Text 30 

ücuù parasparaà naryaù
     prekçya vipraà samärcitam
bhékçunä hy avadhütena
     kim anena kåtaà tapaù

     ücuù—said; parasparam—among themselves; naryaù—the women; prekçya—seeing; vipram—the brähmaëa; samärcitam—worshiped; bhékçunä—by the brähmaëa; hy—indeed; avadhütena—avadhüta; kim—what?; anena—by him; kåtam—done; tapaù—austerities.

     Seeing him worshiped in this way, the queens said among themselves, “What austerities must this brähmaëa avadhüta have performed?"

Text 31 

yena trailokya-näthena
     sat-kåtaç cägrajo yathä
etasminn antare tau dvau
     kathäyäà cakratuù kathäù 
pürvä guru-kule jätä 
     hastau gåhya parasparam

     yena—by whom; trailokya-näthena—the master of the three worlds; sat-kåtaù—honored; ca—and; agrajaù—an elder brother; yathä—as; etasminn—here; antare—within; tau—they; dvau—both; kathäyäà cakratuù kathäù—talked; pürvä—before; guru-kule—in the guru's home; jätä—born; hastau—hands; gåhya—grasping; parasparam—each other.

     Lord Kåçëa honored him as if he were an elder brother. Holding hands in the palace, the two of them talked about their days in the home of their guru.

Text 32 

çré-kåçëa uväca 

çåëu brahman prapaöhitä
     sarva-vidyä tvayä mayä
gurave dakçiëäà dattvä
     punas tvaà naiva dåçyase

     çré-kåçëa uväca—Çré Kåçëa said; çåëu—please hear; brahman—O brähmaëa; prapaöhitä—studied; sarva-vidyä—all knowledge; tvayä—by you; mayä—by me; gurave—to the guru; dakçiëäm—dakçiëä; dattvä—giving; punaù—again; tvam—you; na—not; eva—indeed; dåçyase—seen.

     Çré Kåçëa said: O brähmaëa, you and I studied all branches of knowledge. Then we offered dakçiëä to our guru. Since then we have not seen each other.

Text 33 

ahaà tu dvärakäà yäto
     jaräsandha-bhayät sakhe
kutra sthale tava vibho
     niväso vada me khalu

     aham—I; tu—indeed; dvärakäm—to Dvärakä; yätaù—went; jaräsandha-bhayät—out of fear of Jarasandha; sakhe—O friernd; kutra—where?; sthale—place; tava—of you; vibhaù—o great once; niväsaù—residence; vada—please tell; me—me; khalu—certainly.

     O friend, because I was afraid of Jaräsandha, I went to Dvärakä. O great one, where do you live? Please tell Me.

Text 34 

kadäcid indhanärthe vai
     guru-däraiù praëoditäù
vidyärthino vayaà sarve
     vanaà jagmur bhayaëkaram

     kadäcit—one time; indhanärthe—for firewood; vai—indeed; guru-däraiù—by the guru's wife; praëoditäù—sent; vidyärthinaù—students; vayam—we; sarve—all; vanam—top the forest; jagmuù—went; bhayaëkaram—fearful.

     One time, sent by our guru's wife, we students went to the fearful forest to gather firewood.

Text 35 

vipattir abhavat tatra
     väta-varça-bhayaëkaré
ravir astaà gato rätryäà
     andhakäro 'bhavan mahän

     vipattiù—calamity; abhavat—was; tatra—there; väta-varça-bhayaëkaré—a fearful hurricane; raviù—the sun; astam—on the western horizon; gataù—went; rätryäm—at night; andhakäraù—blinding darkness; abhavat—was; mahän—great.

     Then there was a ferocious and frightening hurricane. The sun set in the west, and then at night there was a great blinding darkness.

Text 36 

sarvaà jalamayaà jätaà
     sthalaà naiva tu dåçyate
vayaà parasparaà sarve
     gåhéta-kara-paëkajäù

     sarvam—all; jalamayam—made of water; jätam—was manifested; sthalam—the place; na—not; eva—indeed; tu—indeed; dåçyate—is seen; vayam—we; parasparam—each other; sarve—all; gåhéta-kara-paëkajäù—holding each other's lotus hands.

     Everything was flooded with water. Unable to see anything, all of us tightly held each other's lotus hands.

Texts 37-39 

vidyut-prakäçe paçyanto
     dékçu sarväsu babhramuù
tataù süryodaye jäte
     guruù sändépanir mahän

jale çiçyäàç ca çétärtän
     vanaà gatvä dadarça ha
jalän sarvän sthale kåtvä
     gurur açru-pariplutaù

uväca bälakä yüyaà
     asmad-äjïä-paräyaëaù
çreçöhas tu präëinäm ätmä
     tam anädåtya mat-paräù

     vidyut-prakäçe—in the lightning flash; paçyantaù—seeing; dékçu—the directions; sarväsu—all; babhramuù—wandering; tataù—then; süryodaye—at sunrise; jäte—manifested; guruù—the guru; sändépaniù—Sändépani; mahän—great; jale—in the water; çiçyän—students; ca—and; çétärtän—troubled by cold; vanam—to the forest; gatvä—went; dadarça—saw; ha—indeed; jalän—the water; sarvän—all; sthale—the place; kåtvä—doing; guruù—the guru; açru—tears; pariplutaù—flooded; uväca—said; bälakä—boys; yüyam—you; asmad-äjïä—to my order; paräyaëaù—devoted; çreçöhäù—the best; tu—indeed; präëinäm—of living entities; ätmä—himself; tam—indeed; anädåtya—ignoring; mat-paräù—for my sake.

     Seeing by the light of lightning flashes, we wandered in all directions. When the sun rose our guru, Sändépani Muni, went to the forest and saw his students trapped in a flooded place and suffering from the cold. His eyes flooded with tears, our guru said, “You boys have dedicated your lives to fulfilling my order. You are the best of all living entities. Ignorning your own benefit, you are devoted to me.

Texts 40 and 41 

tasmäd bhavadbhyaù santuçöo
     varaà däsyämi durlabham
bhavatäà cäpi sarvatra
     pürëaù santu manorathäù

veda-çästra-puräëäni
     kaëöha-sthäni bhavantu hi
tasmäd guroç ca kåpayä
     pürëo 'haà sarva-saukhyataù

     tasmät—therefore; bhavadbhyaù—with you; santuçöaù—pleased; varam—blessing; däsyämi—I will give; durlabham—rare; bhavatäm—of you; ca—and; api—also; sarvatra—in all circumstances; pürëaù—fulfilled; santu—may be; manorathäù—desires; veda-çästra—the Vedas; puräëäni—and Puräëas; kaëöha-sthäni—staying in your voices; bhavantu—may be; hi—indeed; tasmät—therefore; guroù—of the guru; ca—and; kåpayä—by the mercy; pürëaù—fulfilled; aham—I; sarva-saukhyataù—with all happiness.

     “For this reason I will give you all a rare blessing. I bless you that the Vedas and Puräëas will always stay in your voices and your desires will always be fulfilled." For this reason, by our guru's mercy, I am always filled with happiness.

Text 42 

çré-sudamoväca 

deva-deva gurus tvaà tu
     koöi-brahmäëòa-näyakaù
çré-pates tasya guruçu
     väso 'tyanta-viòambanam

     çré-sudamä uväca—Çré Sudämä said; deva-deva—O master of the demigods; guruù—the guru; tvam—You; tu—indeed; koöi—of millions; brahmäëòa—of universes; näyakaù—the master; çré-pateù—of the goddess of fortune's husband; tasya—of Him; guruçu—in the gurus; väsaù—the residenbce; atyanta—great; viòambanam—imitation.

     Çré Sudämä said: O master of the demigods, You are the guru of everyone. You are the master of millions of universes. You are the origin of Lord Näräyaëa, the husband of the goddess of fortune. You were only pretending to be an ordinary student at our guru's home.

Text 43 

tataù sudämä vipras tu
     kåçëäya paramätmane
påthukäàs taëòulän räjan
     na prayacchad aväë-mukhaù

     tataù—then; sudämä—Sudämä; vipraù—brähmaëa; tu—indeed; kåçëäya—to Lord Kåçëa; paramätmane—the Supersoul; påthukän—chipped; taëòulän—rice; räjan—O king; na—not; prayacchat—offered; aväë-mukhaù—his head down.

     Hanging his head down, Sudämä brähmaëa did not offer the chipped rice to Lord Kåçëa, the all-pervading Supersoul.

Text 44 

sarvätmä bhagaväàs tasya
     jïätvägamana-käraëam
näyaà vipras tu çré-kämo
     mukty-arthaà mäà tu sevate

     sarvätmä—the all-pervading Suoersoul; bhagaväàù—the Supreme Person; tasya—of him; jïätvä—underatanding; ägamana—of coming; käraëam—the reason; na—not; ayam—this; vipraù—brähmaëa; tu—certainly; çré-kämaù—desiring wealth; mukty-artham—desiring liberation; mäm—Me; tu—indeed; sevate—serves.

     Aware of the reason for the brähmaëa's visit, Lord Kåçëa, who is the Supersoul present in everyone's heart, thought, “This brähmaëa does not serve Me because he wants material opulence or liberation.

Text 45 

bhäryä pati-vratä duùkhäd
     dhanäçäà cäsya kurvaté
tasmäd dhanaà kathaà däsye
     adätroç ca tayor aham

     bhäryä—his wife; pati-vratä—chaste; duùkhät—out of unhappiness; dhanäçäm—the desire for wealth; ca—and; asya—of him; kurvaté—doing; tasmät—therefore; dhanam—wealth; katham—how?; däsye—I give; adätroç—not giving; ca—and; tayoù—of them; aham—I.

     “His chaste and devoted wife is distressed and she desires wealth, but how can I give wealth to them when they have not given anything to Me?"

Text 46 

iti bruvan punar jïätvä
     hetor mama sa taëòulam
pragåhya gatavän atra
     lajjayä naiva däsyati

     iti—thus; bruvan—saying; punaù—again; jïätvä—understanding; hetoù—for that reason; mama—of Me; sa—he; taëòulam—rice; pragåhya—taking; gatavän—came; atra—here; lajjayä—with embarassment; na—not; eva—indeed; däsyati—will give.

     After saying this to Himself, the Lord understood what had happened. He thought, “He came here taking a gift of rice for Me, but now he is embarrassed and he will not give it.

Text 47 

tasmät tu yäcanäà kurve
     viditvaivaà vaco 'bravét

     tasmät—therefore; tu—inded; yäcanäm—asking; kurve—I will do; viditvä—understanding; evam—thus; vacaù—words; abravét—said. 

     “Therefore I will ask him for it."  After thinking in this way, Lord Kåçëa spoke.

Text 48 

çré-kåçëa uväca 

gåhän mad-arthe bhavatä
     kim änétam upäyanaà
anv apy upähåtaà yac ca
     bhaktyä bhüri bhaviçyati

     çré-kåçëa uväca—Çré Kåçëa said; gåhat—from home; mad-arthe—for my sake; bhavatä—by you; kim—what?; änétam—brought; upäyanam—gift; anv—following; apy—also; upähåtam—brought; yac—what; ca—and; bhaktyä—with love; bhüri—great; bhaviçyati—will be.

     Çré Kåçëa said: Did you bring from your home a gift for Me? Is there a gift that with great love you will offer to Me?

Text 49 

patraà puçpaà phalaà toyaà
     yo me bhaktyä prayacchati
tad ahaà bhakty-upahåtaà
     asnä\mi prayatätmanaù

     patram—aleaf; puçpam—a flower; phalam—a fruit; toyam—water; yaù—whoever; me—unto Me; bhaktyä—with devotion; prayacchati—offers; tat—that; aham—I; bhakty-upahåtam—offered in devotion; asnä\mi—accept; prayatätmanaù—from one in pure consciousness.

     If one offers Me with love and devotion a leaf, a flower, fruit or water, I will accept it.*

Text 50 

ittham äbhäçya bhagavän
     adätuç ca dvijanmanaù
céra-khaëòät taëòuläàç ca
     jahära kim idaà svayam

     ittham—thus; äbhäçya—saying; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; adätuù—not giving; ca—and; dvijanmanaù—of the brähmana; céra-khaëòät—from the ragged cloth; taëòulän—the rice; ca—and; jahära—grabbed; kim—what?; idam—is this; svayam—personally.

     After speaking these words, the Supreme Personality of Godhead suddenly grabbed the ragged pouch of rice and said, “What is this?

Text 51 

etat tvayopanétaà me
     sakhe parama-préëanam
viçvaà mäà tarpayiçyanti
     brahmann ete ca taëòuläù

     etat—this; tvayä—by you; upanétam—brought; me—to Me; sakhe—O friend; parama-préëanam—very pleasing; viçvam—the world; mäm—Me; tarpayiçyanti—will satisfy; brahmann—O brähmaëa; ete—this; ca—and; taëòuläù—rice.

     “O friend, you have brought something that is very pleasing. O brähmaëa, this rice will satisfy bith Me and the entire universe.

Text 52 

édåçä gokule bhuktäù
     çreçöhäù påthuka-taëòuläù
mätra yasodayä dattäù
     punas tan naiva dåçöavän

     édåçäù—like this; gokule—in Gokula; bhuktäù—eaten; çreçöhäù—the best; påthuka-taëòuläù—chipped rice; mätra—by My mother; yasodayä—Yaçodä; dattäù—given; punaù—again; tan—that; na—not; eva—indeed; dåçöavän—seen.

     “I used to eat excellent chipped rice like this in Gokula. My mother, Yaçodä-devé, would always give me rice like this. After that time I had never seen this kind of rice again."

Text 53 

ity eka-muçöià jagdhvä ca
     bhümijäà sampadaà dadau
dvitéyaà jagdhum ärebhe
     dätuà pätäla-sampadam

     ity—thus; eka-muçöim—with one hand; jagdhvä—eating; ca—and; bhümijäm—rice; sampadam—opulence; dadau—gave; dvitéyam—a second; jagdhum—to eat; ärebhe—began; dätum—to give; pätäla-sampadam—opulence.

     Lord Kåçëa then ate one palmful of that rice and He was about to eat a second.

Text 54 

tävad vakça-sthaläc chéghraà
     jaghåe çréù karaà hareù
aparädhäd vinä nätha
     kathaà mäà tyaktum icchasi

     tävat—then; vakça-sthaläc—from His chest; çéghram—quickly; jaghåe—grabbed; çréù—the goddess of fortune; karam—the hand; hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; aparädhät—an offense; vinä—without; nätha—O Lord; katham—why?; mäm—me; tyaktum—to abandon; icchasi—desire.

     Then the goddess of fortune, who was resting on His chest, suddenly grasped His hand and said, “Lord, I have not offended You. Why do You wish to leave Me?

Text 55 

etävatälaà çré-kåçëa
     çakra-tulyo dvijo bhavet
dvijena nirdhanenäpi
     na jïätaà tad-rahasyakam

     etävatä—by this; alam—greatly; çré-kåçëa—O Çré Kåçëa; çakra-tulyaù—equal to Lord Indra; dvijaù—the brähmaëa; abhavet—will become; dvijena—by the brähmaëa; nirdhanena—poor; api—also; na—not; jïätam—known; tad-rahasyakam—that secret.

     “Because of what You have just done, this brähmaëa will become King Indra's equal." The poverty-stricken brähmaëa did not understand the secret of what had just happened.

Text 56 

sampürëaà ca dhanaà präptaà
     sva-gåhe viçëu-mäyayä
uçitvä rajanim ekaà
     bhuktvä pétvä sukhaà gataù

     sampürëam—full; ca—and; dhanam—wealth; präptam—attained; sva-gåhe—in his own home; viçëu-mäyayä—by the potency of Lord Viçëu; uçitvä—residing; rajanim—night; ekam—one; bhuktvä—eating; pétvä—and drinking; sukham—happiness; gataù—attained.

     The brähmaëa stayed there for one night. Eating and drinking, he became happy. Meanwhile, Lord Viçëu's yogamäyä potency filled his home with all opulences.

Text 57 

çvo-bhüte sva-gåhän gantuà
     kåçëaà natvä mano dadhe
sa cäjïäpto bhagavatä
     vanditaù parirambhitaù

     çvo-bhüte—on the following day; sva-gåhän—his own home; gantum—to go; kåçëam—to Lord Kåçëa; natvä—bowing down; manaù—mind; dadhe—decided; sa—he; ca—and; äjïä—permission; äptaù—attained; bhagavatä—by the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vanditaù—bowed down; parirambhitaù—embraced.

     The next day the brähmaëa decided to return to his own home. He bowed down before Lord Kåçëa and received permission to leave. Then the Lord bowed before him and embraced him.

Text 58 

yäcanä na kåtä tena
     vréòitaù sva-gåhän yayau
brahmaëyatä mayä dåçöä
     vipra-devasya çré-pateù

     yäcanä—request; na—not; kåtä—done; tena—by him; vréòitaù—embarrassed; sva-gåhän—to his own home; yayau—went; brahmaëyatä—love for the brähmaëas; mayä—by me; dåçöä—seen; vipra-devasya—of the master of the brähmaëas; çré-pateù—the goddess of fortune's husband.

     Embarrassed, he had not asked for anything. As he returned home, he thought, “I have seen how Lord Kåçëa, the master of the brähmaëas and the husband of the goddess of fortune, dearly loves the brähmaëas.

Text 59 

ahaà daridraù kåçëasya
     bähubhyäà parirambhitaù
priyä-juçöe ca paryaëke
     bhräteva sthäpito dvijaù

     aham—I; daridraù—poor; kåçëasya—of Lord Kåçëa; bähubhyäm—bvy the arms; parirambhitaù—embraced; priyä-juçöe—with His wife; ca—and; paryaëke—on the bed; bhrätä—a brother; iva—like; sthäpitaù—placed; dvijaù—a brähmaëa.

     “I am only a poor brähmaëa. Still, Lord Kåçëa embraced me with His arms and had me sit on His wife's bed as if I were His brother.

Text 60 

véjito vyajanenäpi
     rukmiëyä satyabhämayä
nirdhanas tu dhanaà labdhvä
     çré-patià naiva saàsmaret

     véjitaù—fanned; vyajanenäpi—with afan; rukmiëyä—by Rukmiëé; satyabhämayä—and Satyabhämä; nirdhanaù—poor; tu—indeed; dhanam—wealth; labdhvä—attaining; çré-patim—the husband of the goddess of fortune; na—not; eva—indeed; saàsmaret—would remember.

     “Rukmiëé and Satyabhämä both fanned me. I am poor because if I became rich I would not continue to fix my thoights on Lord Kåçëa, the goddess of fortune's husband.

Text 61 

itthaà karuëayä mahyaà
     dhanaà kåçëo na dattavän
itthaà vicärayan gacchan
     saàsmaran brähmaëéà ruçä

     ittham—thus; karuëayä—with mercy; mahyam—to me; dhanam—wealth; kåçëaù—Lord Kåçëa; na—not; dattavän—gave; ittham—thus; vicärayan—thinking; gacchan—going; saàsmaran—remembering; brähmaëém—the brähmaëa's wife; ruçä—with anger.

     “It is for this reason that Lord Kåçëa, out of His great kindness, did not offer me any wealth." Then the brähmaëa remembered his wife. The thought made him angry.

Texts 62 and 63 

gåhäëa dhana-koöià ca
     gåhaà gatvä bravémy aham
brahmaëya-devo dätä ca
     çré-kåçëo 'yaà mayä çrutaù

pratyakça-dåçöaù kåpaëo
     garvito dhana-püritaù
çäpaà däsye kathaà mitre
     dhana-lobhäd ahaà våthä

     gåhäëa—take; dhana-koöim—wealth many millions fo times over; ca—and; gåham—hom; gatvä—going; bravémy—say; aham—I; brahmaëya-devaù—the master of the brähmaëas; dätä—generous; ca—and; çré-kåçëaù—Çré Kåçëa; ayam—He; mayä—by me; çrutaù—heard; pratyakça-dåçöaù—directly seen; kåpaëaù—a miser; garvitaù—proud; dhana-püritaù—filled with wealth; çäpam—a curse; däsye—I will give; katham—why?; mitre—to My friend; dhana-lobhät—out of greed for money; aham—I; våthä—for no reason.

     He thought, “If when I saw Him I had heard generous Lord Kåçëa, the master of the brähmaëas, say, `I say please take wealth many millions of times over,' then I would become a proud and wealthy miser. Lord Kåçëa must have thought, “Why should I curse My friend in this way, so for no reason he will become a greedy miser."

Texts 64 and 65 

yädåçé me kåtä prétis
     tädåçéà präpayiçyati
pitaräv asya kaàsena
     kärägare kåtau purä

kåçëas tu nanda-sadane
     para-gehe ca vardhitaù
sa däsyati kathaà dravyaà
     dhana-yukto 'pi nirdhanaù

     yädåçé—like which; me—for me; kåtä—done; prétiù—love; tädåçém—like that; präpayiçyati—will attain; pitarau—the parents; asya—of Him; kaàsena—by Kaàsa; kärägare—in prsion; kåtau—done; purä—before; kåçëaù—Lord Kåçëa; tu—indeed; nanda-sadane—in nanda's home; para-gehe—in the home of another; ca—and; vardhitaù—grew up; sa—He; däsyati—will give; katham—why; dravyam—wealth; dhana-yuktaù—wealthy; api—even; nirdhanaù—poor.

     “He will give me what makes me love Him more. He did that to His parents when they were locked in Kaàsa's prison and when He grew up in the home of His stepfather Nanda. Why would Kåçëa give me wealth if when I became wealthy with money I would also become poor in love for Him?

Text 66 

ratnaiù prapüritän gehän
     dåçövä väïchäà na kärayet
laläöe likhitaà yad yan
     na tan nyünaà bhaviçyati

     ratnaiù—with jewels; prapüritän—filled; gehän—home; dåçövä—seeing; väïchäm—desire; na—not; kärayet—does; laläöe—on the forehead; likhitam—written; yat yat—whatever; na—not; tat—that; nyünam—reduced; bhaviçyati—will be.

     “Even if one sees a palace filled with jewels, he should not desire to have it. A person's destiny is written on his forehead. That destiny cannot be changed."

Text 67 

iti saëkathayan vipro
     nija-pury-antike gataù
suvarëa-durga-samyuktaà
     kapäöa-dhvaja-maëòitam

     iti—thus; saëkathayan—saying; vipraù—the brähmaëa; nija-pury-antike—near his own home; gataù—came; suvarëa-durga—golden walls; samyuktam—with; kapäöa-dhvaja-maëòitam—decorated with flags and great gates.

     As he was thinking in this way, the brähmaëa came to his own home, which was surrounded by golden fortress walls, decorated with flags and great gates, . . .

Text 68 

toraëaiù kalaçaiç citraiù
     präsädaiù sujanair våtam
dvärakäm iva çobhäòhyäà
     sarva-ratnaiù prapüritäm

     toraëaiù—with arches; kalaçaiç—with domes; citraiù—wonderful; präsädaiù—with palaces; sujanaiù—with beautiful people; våtam—filled; dvärakäm—Dvärakä; iva—like; çobhäòhyäm—beautiful and opulent; sarva-ratnaiù—with all jewels; prapüritäm—filled.

 . . . filled with many palaces, great archways, and wonderful and colorful domes. It way made of jewels. It was filled with beautiful people. It was beautiful and opulent like Dvärakä.

Text 69 

dåçövä vipras tu kim idaà
     kasya sthänam iti bruvan
rathyäà rathyäà bhramantaà taà
     pratyagåhnan striyo naräù

     dåçövä—seeing; vipraù—the brähmaëa; tu—indeed; kim—what?; idam—this; kasya—of whom?; sthänam—the place; iti—thus; bruvan—saying; rathyäm—on path; rathyäm—after path; bhramantam—wandering; tam—that; pratyagåhnan—taking; striyaù—women; naräù—and men.

     As beautiful men and women walked on the wide pathways in the palace, the brähmaëa stared at everything and said, “What is this? Whose home is this?" 

Text 70

nägacchantaà dvijaà dåçövä
     kiëkaryaù kiëkaräs tathä
svaminyai kathayäm äsuù
     çrutvä sa vismayaà gatä

     na—not; ägacchantam—coming; dvijam—the brähmaëa; dåçövä—seeing; kiëkaryaù—the maidservants; kiëkaräù—the servants; tathä—so; svaminyai—to the mistress of the house; kathayäm äsuù—said; çrutvä—hearing; sä—she; vismayam—astonishment; gatä—attained.

     Seeing that the brähmaëa did not enter the palace, the servants and maidservants went to the queen of the house told her of it. When she heard of it she was very surprised.

Text 71

bhartäram ägataà çrutvä
     patné sambhrama-samyutä
niçcakrämälayät türëaà
     säkçäc chrér iva rüpiëé

     bhartäram—husband; ägatam—arrived; çrutvä—hearing; patné—the wife; sambhrama-samyutä—with great haste; niçcakräma—went; älayät—from the palace; türëam—at once; säkçät—directly; çréù—the goddess of fortune; iva—like; rüpiëé—beautiful.

     Hearing that her husband had come, the brähmaëa's wife hastily left the palace to greet him. She was now as beautiful as the goddess of fortune.

Text 72 

brähmaëé çibikärüòhä
     däsé-däsa-gaëair våtä
bhramantam agrahéd vipraà
     darçayitvä svakaà sukham

     brähmaëé—the brähmaëa's wife; çibikärüòhä—riding on a palanquin; däsé-däsa-gaëaiù—many servants and maidservants; våtä—with; bhramantam—wandering; agrahét—grasped; vipram—the brähmaëa; darçayitvä—showing; svakam—her own; sukham—happiness.

     Surrounded by many servants and maidservants, she rode to him on a palanquin. Showing how happy she was to see him, she embraced her husband as he was walking about.

Text 73 

dåçövä sphurantéà taruëéà ca bhäryäà
     svarëämbarai ratna-vibhüçaëaòhyäm
yathendiräà rüpavatéà vimäne
     mudänvitaù kåçëa-kåpäà ca mene

     dåçövä—seeing; sphurantém—splendid; taruëém—young girl; ca—and; bhäryäm—wife; svarëämbarai—with golden garments; ratna-vibhüçaëaòhyäm—rich with jewel ornaments; yathä—as; indiräm—the goddess of fortune; rüpavatém—beautiful; vimäne—in a spiritual airplane; mudänvitaù—happy; kåçëa—of Lord Kåçëa; kåpäm—the mercy; ca—and; mene—considered.

     Seeing that his wife had become a splendid young girl dressed in exquisite golden clothing, decorated with jewels, and beautiful like the goddess of fortune riding in a spiritual airplane, the brähmaëa became very happy and thought that this was all done by the mercy of Lord Kåçëa.

Texts 74 and 75 

nija-gehaà tayä yuktaù
     çré-kåçëa-bhavanopamaà
bhojanair dravya-ratnaiç ca
     paryaëka-vyajanäsanaiù

vitänaiù svarëa-pätraiç ca
     toraëaiù samalaëkåtam
dåçövä kåçëasya kåpayä
     sudämä taruëo 'bhavat

     nija-geham—to his home; tayä—her; yuktaù—with; çré-kåçëa-bhavanopamam—like Lord Kåçëa's palace; bhojanaiù—with food; dravya-ratnaiù—with jewels; ca—and; paryaëka-vyajanäsanaiù—with opulent beds, seats, and fans; vitänaiù—with awning; svarëa-pätraiç—golden vessels; ca—and; toraëaiù—with arches; samalaëkåtam—decorated; dåçövä—seeing; kåçëasya—of Lord Kåçëa; kåpayä—by the mercy; sudämä—Sudämä; taruëaù—youthful; abhavat—became.

     Accompanied by his wife, the brähmaëa looked at the palace, which, like Lord Kåçëa's own palace, was filled with jewels, comfortable beds and chairs, fans, awnings, archways, golden dishes, and delicious foods. Then Sudämä suddenly became a young man. 

Text 76 

bubhuje 'lampaöo vipraù
     samåddhià sväm ahaitukém
manasä jäyayä tyakçaï
     jïäna-vairägya-bhaktitaù

     bubhuje—enjoyed; alampaöaù—not materialistic; vipraù—the brähmaëa; samåddhim—opulence; sväm—own; ahaitukém—causeless; manasä—by the heart; jäyayä—with his wife; tyakçan—renouncing; jïäna—with knowledge; vairägya—renunciation; bhaktitaù—and devotion.

     Without becoming materialistic, the brähmaëa enjoyed the wealth he received by the Lord's causeless mercy. Filled with knowledge, renunciation, and devotion for the Lord, in their hearts he and his wife abandoned all material desires.

Text 77 

cakära tarkanäà vipraù
     kuto mama samåddhayaù
dattä brahmaëya-devena
     devänäm api durlabhäù

     cakära—did; tarkanäm—guess; vipraù—the brähmaëa; kutaù—from where?; mama—my; samåddhayaù—opulences; dattä—given; brahmaëya-devena—by the Lord of the brähmaëas; devänäm—by the demigods; api—even; durlabhaù—unattainable.

     The brähmaëa thought: Who gave me these opulences? It must be that Lord Kåçëa, who is the master of the brähmaëas, gave me these opulences even the great demigods cannot achieve.

Text 78 

idåçéà sampadaà dattvä
     näcaret kim api svayam
mama taëòula-muçöià ca
     prétyä pratyagrahéd dhariù

     idåçém—like this; sampadam—opulence; dattvä—giving; na—not; äcaret—may do; kim api—something; svayam—personally; mama—of me; taëòula-muçöim—the palmful of rice; ca—and; prétyä—with love; pratyagrahét—reciprocated; hariù—Lord Kåçëa.

     I did not do anything to make Lord Kåçëa give me opulence like this. It must be that He was pleased by the palmful of rice and out of love He gave me this in return.

Text 79 

tasya sakhyaà ca däsyaà ca
     bhüyän me janma-janmani
tat-padämburuha-dhyänät
     tariçye 'haà bhavärëavam

     tasya—of Him; sakhyam—the friendship; ca—and; däsyam—the service; ca—and; bhüyät—may be; me—of me; janma-janmani—birth after birth; tat-padämburuha-dhyänät—by meditating on His lotus feet; tariçye—will cross; aham—I; bhava—of birth and death; arëavam—the ocean.

     I pray that I may be His servant and friend birth after birth. By meditating on His lotus feet, I will cross the ocean of birth and death.

Text 80 

vicintya cetthaà manasä sudämä
     patnyävåtaù kåçëa-padäravinde
manaç ca kåtvä dhanam eva viprän
     dattvä harer dhäma paraà jagäma

     vicintya—thinking; ca—and; ittham—inj this way; manasä—in his mind; sudämä—Sudämä; patnyävåtaù—accompanied by his wife; kåçëa—of Lord Kåçëa; padäravinde—at the lotus feet; manaù—mind; ca—and; kåtvä—doing; dhanam—wealth; eva—indeed; viprän—to the brähmaëas; dattvä—giving; hareù—of Lord Kåçëa; dhäma—to the abode; param—supreme; jagäma—went.

     Engaged in meditating on Lord Kåçëa's lotus feet and giving charity to the brähmaëas, Sudämä and his wife finally returned to Lord Kåçëa's supreme abode.

Text 81 

etac chré-kåçëadevasya
     caritaà çåëuyän naraù
däridryän mucyate çéghraà
     bhakto bhagavato bhavet

     etat—this; çré-kåçëadevasya—of Lord Kåçëadeva; caritam—the pastimes; çåëuyän—may hear; naraù—a person; däridryän—from poverty; mucyate—si liberated; çéghram—quickly; bhaktaù—a devotee; bhagavataù—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhavet—becomes.

     A person who hears these pastimes of Lord Kåçëa becomes free of poverty and becomes a devotee of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 82 

çré-dvärakäyä nåpa khaëòam etan
     mayä tavägre kathitaà su-puëyam
kértià kulaà bhaktim atéva muktià
     dadäti räjyaà ca sadaiva çåëvatäm

     çré-dvärakäyä—of Çré Dvärakä; nåpa—O king; khaëòam—the khaëòa; etan—this; mayä—by me; tava—of you; agre—in the presence; kathitam—spoken; su-puëyam—very sacred; kértim—glory; kulam—family; bhaktim—devotional service; atéva—great; muktim—liberation; dadäti—gives; räjyam—kingdom; ca—and; sadä—always; eva—indeed; çåëvatäm—of they who hear.

     O king, now I have spoken to you the very sacred Dvärakä-khaëòa, which gives fame, good family, devotional service, and liberation to they who regularly hear it.

Canto Eight

Chapter Nine
Çré Räma-räsa-krédä
Lord Balaräma's Räsa Dance

Text 1

     duryodhana uväca muni-çärdüla bhagavän balabhadro näga-
kanyäbhir gopébhih kadä kälindé-küle vijahära.

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; muni-çärdüla—O tiger of sages; bhagavän—Lord; balabhadrah—Balaräma; näga—snake; kanyäbhih—with the girls; gopébhih—with the gopés; kadä—when?; kälindé-küle—on the Yamunä's shore; vijahära—enjoyed pastimes.

     Duryodhana said: O tiger of sages, when did Lord Balaräma enjoy the räsa dance on the Yamunä's shore with gopés that had been snake-girls in their previous birth?

Text 2 

     çré-präòvipäka uväca ekadä dvärakä-nägaräd dhi täläìkaà 
ratham ästhäpya surän didåkñuh param utkaëöho nanda-räja-gokula-
go-gopäla-gopé-gaëa-saìkulah saìkarñaëa ägataç cirotkaëöhäbhyäà 
nandaräja-yaçodäbhyäà pariñvakto gopé-gopäla-gobhir militvä tatra 
dvau masau vasantikau cävatsét.

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Supreme Personality of Godhe; ekadä—one day; dvärakä-nägarät—from Dvärakä; hi—indeed; täläìkam—marked with the sign of the palm tree; ratham—chariot; ästhäpya—mounting; surän—the demigods; didåkñuh—desiring to see; param—greatly; utkaëöhah—eager; nanda-räja-gokula—in King Nanda's Gokula; go-gopäla-gopé-gaëa—the cows, gopas, and gopés; saìkulah—agitated; saìkarñaëa—Lord Balaräma; ägataç—came; cirotkaëöhäbhyäm—yearning for a long time; nandaräja-yaçodäbhyäm—by Yaçodä and King Nanda; pariñvaktah—embraced; gopé-gopäla-gobhih—by the gopas and gopés; militvä—meeting; tatra—there; dvau—two; masau—months; vasantikau—in spirngtime; ca—and; ävatsét—resided.

     Çré Präòvipäka Muni said: One day, eager to see His devotees, Lord Balaräma mounted His chariot bearing a palm-tree flag, left Dvärakä, and, yearning to see the gopas, gopés, and cows, went to Gokula. Yaçodä and King Nanda embraced Him when He arrived. Later He met with the gopas and gopés. He stayed there for two months.

Text 3 

     atha ca yä näga-kanyäh pürvoktäs tä gopa-kanyä bhütvä 
balabhadra-präpty-arthaà gargäcäryäd balabhadrapaïcäìgaà 
gåhétvä tenaiva siddhä babhüvuh. täbhir baladeva ekadä prasannah 
kälindé-küle räsa-maëòalaà samärebhe. tadaiva caitra-pürëimäyäà 
pürëa-candro 'ruëa-varëah sampürëaà vanaà raïjayan vireje.

     atha—then; ca—and; ya—who; näga-kanyäh—the snake girls; pürvoktah—previously described; ta—they; gopa-kanyä—gopés; bhütvä—becoming; balabhadra-präpty-artham—to attain Lord Balaräma; gargäcäryät—from Garga Muni; balabhadra—of Lord Balaräma; païcäìgam—the five methods of worship; gåhétvä—accepting; tena—by that; eva—indeed; siddha—perfect; babhüvuh—became; täbhih—with them; baladeva—Balaräma; ekadä—one day; prasannah—happy; kälindé—of the Yamunä; küle—on the shore; räsa-maëòalam—the rasa-dance circle; samärebhe—attained; tadä—then; eva—indeed; caitra-pürëimäyäm—on the full moon of the month of Caitra; pürëa—full; candrah—moon; aruëa-varëah—red; sampürëam—full; vanam—forest; raïjayan—making red; vireje—shone.

     The previously described snake-girls became gopés and, in order to attain Lord Balaräma's association, on Garga Muni's advice followed the five methods of worshiping Lord Balaräma. In this way they became perfect. Pleased with them, Lord Balaräma enjoyed a räsa-dance with them on the full-moon night of the month of Caitra (March-April), a night when the red moon reddened the whole of Våndävana forest.

Text 4 

     çétalä manda-yänäh kamala-makaranda-reëu-vånda-
samvåtäh sarvato väyavah parivavuh kalinda-giri-nandiné-cala-
laharébhir änanda-däyiné pulinaà vimalaà hy acitaà cakära. tathä 
ca kuïja-präìgana-nikuïja-puïjaih 
sphural-lalita-pallava-puñpa-parägair mayüra-kokila-puàskokila-
küjitair madhupa-madhura-dhvanibhir vraja-bhümir vibhräjamänä 
babhüva.

     çétalä—cool; manda-yänäh—slowly moving; kamala-makaranda-reëu-vånda-samvåtäh—filled with lotus pollen; sarvatah—everywhere; väyavah—breezes; parivavuh—blew; kalinda-giri-nandiné-cala-laharébhih—moving the Yamunä's waves; änanda-däyiné—delightful; pulinam—the shore; vimalam—splendid; hy—indeed; acitam—collected; cakära.—did; tathä—so; ca—and; kuïja-präìgana-nikuïja-puïjaih—with the forest goves and courtyards; sphural-lalita-pallava—playfully blossoming petals; puñpa—flowers; parägaih—with pollen; mayüra—peacocks; kokila-puàskokila—and cuckoos; küjitaih—cooing; madhupa-madhura-dhvanibhih—with the sweet hummingof bees; vraja-bhümih—the land of Vraja; vibhräjamänä—shining; babhüva—became.

     Cooling, gentle, delightful, lotus-pollen filled breezes pushed the Yamunä's waves and blew to the splendid shore. Then the land of Vraja became very splendid, its many forest groves and courtyards filled with the fragrant pollen of playfully and gracefully blossoming flowers, with the cooing of cuckoos and peacocks, and with the sweet humming of bees.

Text 5 

     tatra kvaëad-ghaëöikä-nüpurah sphuran-maëi-maya-kaöaka-
kaöi-sütra-keyüra-hära-kiréöa-kuëòalayor upari kamala-patrair 
nélämbaro vimala-kamala-paträkño yakñébhir yakña-räò iva gopébhir 
gopa-räò räsa-maëòale reje.

     tatra—there; kvaëat—sounding; ghaëöikä—bells; nüpurah—anklets; sphuran-maëi-maya-kaöaka—glittering gend bracelets with jewels; kaöi-sütra—belts; keyüra—armlets; hära—necklaces; kiréöa—crowns; kuëòalayoh—and earrings; upari—above; kamala-patraih—with lotus petals; nélämbarah—blue garments; vimala-kamala-paträkñah—glistening lotus eyes; yakñébhih—with Yakñés; yakña-räò—Kuvera; iva—like; gopébhih—with the gopés; gopa-räò—the king of the gopas; räsa-maëòale—in the rasa-dance circle; reje—shone.

     Decorated with tinkling ankle-bells, glittering gold and jewel necklace, armlets, belt, crown, and earrings, and with many lotus petals, dressed in blue garments, and His eyes like glittering lotus petals, Lord Balaräma was splendid with the gopés in the räsa-dance circle. He was like Kuvera surrounded by a host of beautiful yakñés. 

Text 6 

     atha varuëa-preñitä väruëé devé puñpa-bhara-gandhi-lobhi-
milinda-nädita-våkña-koöarebhyah patanté sarvato vanaà surabhé-
cakära. tat-päna-mada-vihvalah kamala-viçäla-tämräkño 
makaradhväjäveça-calad-dhuryäìga-bhaìgo vihära-kheda-
prasvedämbu-kaëair galad-gaëòa-sthala-patra-bhaìgo gajendra-
gatir gajendra-çuëòädaëòa-sama-dordaëòa-maëòito gajébhir 
gaja-räjendra ivonmattah siàhäsane nyasta-halo musala-päëih 
koöéndu-pürëa-maëòala-saìkäçah prodgamad-ratna-maïjéra-
pracala-nüpura-prakvaëat-kanaka-kiìkinébhih kaìkaëa-sphurat-
täöaìka-puraöa-hära-çré-kaëöhäìguléya-çiromaëibhih 
praviòambiné-kåta-sarpiëé-çyäma-veëé-kuntala-lalita-gaëòa-
sthala-paträvalébhih sundarébhir bhagavän bhuvaneçvaro 
vibhräjamäno viraräja atha ca reme.

     atha—then; varuëa—by Varuëa; preñitä—sent; väruëé—Varu.né; devé—goddess; puñpa-bhara-gandhi-lobhi—made greedy by the scent of the flowers; milinda—of bees; nädita—sounded; våkña—of the trees; koöarebhyah—from the hollows; patanti—fall; sarvatah—everywheer; vanam—the forest; surabhé—fragrant; cakära—made; tat-päna-mada-vihvalah—eager to drink it; kamala-viçäla-tämräkñah—His eyes large red lotus flowers; makaradhväja—of Kämadeva; äveça—from the entrance; calat—moving; dhuryäìga-bhaìgah—great limbs; vihära-kheda—exhausted from pastimes; prasvedämbu-kaëaih—with drops of perspiration; galad-gaëòa-sthala-patra-bhaìgah—trickling down His cheeks; gajendra—of the king of elephants; gatih—walking; gajendra-çuëòädaëòa-sama-dordaëòa-maëòitah—decorated with arms like elephants' trunks; gajébhih—with female elephants; gaja-räjendra—the king of the kings of the kings of elephants; iva—like; unmattah—intoxicated; siàhäsane—on a throne; nyasta-halah—weakened; musala-päëih—club in hand; koöéndu-pürëa-maëòala-saìkäçah—splendid like millions of moons; prodgamad-ratna-ma 24jéra-pracala-nüpura-prakvaëat-kanaka-kiìkinébhih—with tinkling anklets and ornaments; kaìkaëa—bracelets; sphurat—glistening; täöaìka—earrings; puraöa—golden; hära—necklace; çré-kaëöha—graceful neck; aìguléya—rings; çiromaëibhih—crest jewels; praviòambiné-kåta—mocking; sarpiëé—snake girls; çyäma—black; veëé—braids; kuntala—hair; lalita—graceful; gaëòa-sthala—cheeks; paträvalébhih—with pictures and decorations; sundarébhih—beautiful; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhuvaneçvarah—the master of the worlds; vibhräjamänah—shining; viraräja—shone; atha—then; ca—and; reme—enjoyed.

     Then, sent by the demigod Varuëa, Goddess Varuëé, in the form of honey oozing from the hollows of trees filled with the humming of bees made greedy by the sweet scent of the flowers, made the entire forest very fragrant. Eager to drink that honey, His eyes now red lotus flowers, His limbs weakened by enjoying amorous pastimes, perspiration born from the fatigue of His pastimes now streaming down His cheeks and washing away the pictures and designs drawn there, walking like an elephant king, decorated with mighty arms like the trunks of elephant kings, as if intoxicated, sitting on a throne, relinquishing His plow, His club still in His hand, splendid like ten million full moons, His jewel anklets, bracelets, and other ornaments tinkling, His gold earrings, necklaces, finger-rings, and jewel crown glittering, and surrounded by beautiful gopés, their cheeks decorated with graceful pictures and designs and their black braids mocking the beautiful snake girls, Lord Balaräma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of the worlds, shone with great splendor, and enjoyed transcendental pastimes.

Text 7 

     atha ha väva kälindé-küla-käntära-paryaöana-vihära-
pariçramodyat-sveda-bindu-vyäpta-mukhäravindah snänärthaà jala-
kréòärthaà yamunäà dürät sa äjuhäva. tatas tv anägataà taöinéà 
halägreëa kupito vicakarña iti hoväca ca.

     atha—then; ha—indeed; väva—blew; kälindé-küla-käntära-paryaöana—wandering on the Yamunä's shore; vihära—from pastimes; pariçrama—from fatigue; udyat—manifesting; sveda-bindu—drops of perspiration; vyäpta—covered; mukhäravindah—lotus face; snänärtham—to bathe; jala—water; kréòä—pastimes; artham—for the purpose; yamunäm—the Yamunä; dürät—from afare; sa—He; äjuhäva.—called; tatah—then; tv—indeed; anägatam—not come; taöiném—the shore; hala—of His plow; agreëa—with the tip; kupitah—angered; vicakarña—dragged; iti—thus; ha—indeed; uväca—spoke; ca—also.

     His lotus face covered with perspiration born from the fatigue of wandering along the Yamunä's shore and enjoying many pastimes, Lord Balaräma called for the Yamunä to come to Him so He could bathe and enjoy water-pastimes. When the Yamunä did not come, Lord Balaräma became angry and began to drag it to Him, scratching its shore with the tip of His plow. Lord Balaräma said:

Text 8 

     adya mäm avajïäya nayasi mayähütäpi musalena tvaà käma-
cäriëéà çatadhä neñya eva nirbhartsitä sa bhüri-bhétä yamunä 
cakitä tat-pädayoh patitoväca.

     adya—today; mäm—Me; avajïäya—disrespecting; nayasi—you go; mayä—by Me; ähüta—called; api—even thoguh; musalena—with the club; tväm—you; käma-cäriëém—going as you like; çatadhä—into a hundred streams; neñye—I will lead; eva—indeed; nirbhartsitä—rebuked; sa—she; bhüri-bhétä—very afraid; yamunä—the Yamunä; cakitä—frightened; tat-pädayoh—at His feet; patitä—fallen; uväca—spoke.

     "Today you have no respect for Me. Even though I call, you ignore My order and go your own way as you wish. Now I will divide you into a hundred tiny streams." Rebuked with these words and now very afraid, the Yamunä came before Lord Balaräma, fell at His feet, and said:

Text 9 

     räma räma saìkarñaëa balabhadra mahä-bäho tava paraà 
vikramaà na jäne. yasyaikasmin mürdhni sarñapavat sarvaà 
bhü-khaëòa-maëòalaà dåçyate. tasya tava param anubhävam ajänantéà 
prapannäà mäà moktuà yogyo 'si. tvaà bhakta-vatsalo 'si.

     räma räma—Räma Räma; saìkarñaëa—Saìkarñaëa; balabhadra—Balabhadra; mahä-bähah—O mighty-armed; tava—of You; param—great; vikramam—power; na—not; jäne.—know; yasya—of whom; ekasmin—in one; mürdhni—head; sarñapavat—like a mustard seed; sarvam—entire; bhü-khaëòa-maëòalam—earth; dåçyate.—is seed; tasya—of Him; tava—of Yoiu; param—great; anubhävam—power; ajänantém—not knowing; prapannäm—surrenedered; mäm—to me; moktum—to realso; yogyah—is appropriate; asi—You are; tvam—You; bhakta-vatsalah—the lover of Your devotees; asi—are.

     "Räma! Räma! Saìkarñaëa! Balabhadra! O mighty-armed one! I did not know Your great power. The entire earth is seen resting like a single tiny mustard-seed on one of Your many heads. It is proper for You to release Me, who have now surrendered to You and who did not know Your true glories. You should release me because You are always affectionate to Your devotees.

Text 10 

     ity evaà yäcito balabhadro yamunäà tato vyamuïcat punah 
kareëubhih karéva gopébhir gopa-räò jale vijagäha. punar jaläd 
vinirgatya tata-sthäya balabhadräya sahasä yamunä copäyanaà 
nélämbaräëi hema-ratna-maya-bhüñaëäni divyäni ca dadau ha väva täni gopé-yüthäya påthak påthak vibhajya svayaà nélämbare vasitvä 
käïcanéà mäläà nava-ratna-mayéà dhåtvä mahendro väraëendra iva 
balabhadro vireje.

     ity evam—thus; yäcitah—requested; balabhadrah—Lord Balaräma; yamunäm—the Yamunä; tatah—then; vyamuïcat—released; punah—again; kareëubhih—with many female elephants; karé—a male elephant; iva—like; gopébhih—with the gopés; gopa-räò—the king of gopas; jale—in the water; vijagäha.—enjoyed pastimes; punah—again; jalät—from the water; vinirgatya—emerging; tata-sthäya—staying on the shore; balabhadräya—to Lord Balaräma; sahasä—quickly; yamunä—the Yamunä; ca—and; upäyanam—approach; nélämbaräëi—blue garments; hema-ratna-maya-bhüñaëäni—ornaments of gold and jewels; divyäni—splendid; ca—and; dadau—gave; ha—indeed; väva—went; täni—them; gopé-yüthäya—to the gopés; påthak påthak—each one; vibhajya—dividing; svayam—personally; nélämbare—the blue garments; vasitvä—dressing; käïcaném—gold; mäläm—necklace; nava-ratna-mayém—made of nine jewels; dhåtvä—taking; mahendrah—Indra; väraëendra—the king of elephants; iva—like; balabhadrah—Lord Balaräma; vireje—shone.

     Begged in this way, Lord Balaräma released the Yamunä. Then He enjoyed in the Yamunä's waters, as an elephant enjoys with its many wives. When He returned to the shore the Yamunä approached and gave Him gifts of many blue garments and many ornaments of gold and jewels. Lord Balaräma divided the gifts among the girls, giving some to each gopé. Then He dressed in one of the blue garments and decorated Himself with a necklace of gold and nine kinds of jewels. Then He enjoyed with the gopés as the king of elephants enjoys with its many wives.

Text 11 

     itthaà kauravendra yädavendrasya rämatah sarvä väsantikér 
niçä vyatétä babhüvuh. bhagavato balabhadrasya hastinäpuram iva 
véryaà sücayatéva hy adyäpi ca kåñöa-vartmanä yamunä vahati. imaà 
rämasya räsa-kathäà yah çåëoti çrävayati ca sa sarva-päpa-paöalaà 
chittvä tasya parasparam änanda-padaà pratiyäti. kià bhüyah çrotum icchasi.

     ittham—thus; kauravendra—O king of the Kauravas; yädavendrasya—of the king of the Yädavas; rämatah—from Lord Balaräma; sarvä—all; väsantikéh—springtime; niçä—night; vyatétä—passed; babhüvuh.—became; bhagavatah—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; balabhadrasya—Lord Balaräma; hastinäpuram—to Hastinäpura; iva—like; véryam—power; sücayati—shows; iva—like; hy—indeed; adyäpi—even today; ca—and; kåñöa-vartmanä—by the dragged path; yamunä—the Yamunä; vahati—flows; imam—this; rämasya—of Lord Balaräma; räsa—ofd the räsa dance; kathäm—the narration; yah—one who; çåëoti—hears; çrävayati—recounts; ca—and; sa—he; sarva-päpa-paöalam—the entirety of a great host of sins; chittvä—destroying; tasya—of him; parasparam—mutual; änanda-padam—the abode of bliss; pratiyäti—goes; kim—what?; bhüyah—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—do you wish.

     O king of the Kauravas, in this way Lord Balaräma, the king of the Yädavas, spent that springtime night with the gopés. Even today the Yamunä flows in many divided streams at that place, a testimony to the great strength, equal to that of a host of elephants, of Lord Balaräma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. A person who hears or recounts these pastimes of Lord Balaräma destroys the entirety of a great host of sins and attains transcendental bliss. What more do you wish to hear?
.pa

Chapter Ten
Çré Balaräma-paddhati-paöala
The Paddhati and Paöala of Lord Balaräma

Text 1

     duryodhana uväca bhagavan gargäcäryeëa gopé-yüthäya kathäà 
dattaà balabhadra-païcäìgaà tat-krpayä vadatät. tvaà sarvajïo 'si.

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; bhagavan—O master; gargäcäryeëa—by Garga Muni; gopé-yüthäya—to the gopés; kathäm—description; dattam—given; balabhadra-païcäìgam—the five metjods of worshiping Lord Balaräma; tat—that; krpayä—kindly; vadatät.—should tell; tvam—you; sarvajïah—all-knowing; asi—are.

     Duryodhana said: O master, you know everything. Please kindly repeat to me what Garga Muni spoke to the gopés to tell them of the five-part worship of Lord Balaräma.

Text 2 

     çré-präòvipäka uväca kauravendra ekadä gargäcäryah 
kalinda-nandinéà snätuà gargäcaläd vraja-maëòalaà cäjagäma. 
tatraikänte marul-léläijal-lalita-latä-taru-pallava-puñpa-gandha-
matta-milinda-puïje kälindé-küla-kalita-nikuïje çré-räma-kåñëa-
dhyäna-tat-paraà gargäcäryaà praëamya nagendra-kanyäh sma iti 
jäti-smarä gopa-kanyäh çrémad-balabhadra-präpty-arthaà sevanaà 
papracchus täsäà paramäà bhaktià vékñya paddhati-paöala-stotra-
kavaca-sahasra-nämäni gopé-yüthäya sa pradadau. kià bhüyas tvaà 
tad-grahaëaà kartum icchasi vadatät.

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Çré Präòvipäka Muni said; kauravendra—O king of the Kauravas; ekadä—one day; gargäcäryah—Garga Muni; kalinda-nandiném—to the Yamunä; snätum—to bathe; gargäcalät—from Mount Garga; vraja-maëòalam—to the circle of Vraja; ca—and; äjagäma—came; tatra—there; ekänte—in one place; marut—breezes; lélä—pastimes; ejat—moving; lalita—graceful; latä—vines; taru—trees; pallava—sprouts; puñpa—flowers; gandha—scent; matta—maddened; milinda-puïje—a host of bees; kälindé-küla—on the shore of the Yamunä; kalita—perceived; nikuïje—in the forest grove; çré-räma-kåñëa—of Kåñëa and Balaräma; dhyäna—meditation; tat—to that; param—intent; gargäcäryam—to Garga Muni; praëamya—bowing down; nagendra-kanyäh—the snake princesses; sma—indeed; iti—thus; jäti-smarä—remembering their previous birth; gopa-kanyäh—gopés; çrémad-balabhadra-präpty-artham—to attain Lord Balaräma; sevanam—service; papracchuh—asked; täsäm—of them; paramam—great; bhaktim—devotion; vékñya—seeing; paddhati-paöala-stotra-kavaca-sahasra-nämäni—the paddhati, paöala, stotra, kavaca, and sahasra-näma; gopé-yüthäya—to the gopés; sa—he; pradadau—gave; kim—what?; bhüyah—more; tvam—you; tad-grahaëam—understanding that; kartum—to do; icchasi—wish; vadatät—may speak.

     Çré Präòvipäka Muni said: O king of the Kauravas, one day Garga Muni left Mount Garga and went to Vraja to bathe in the Yamunä. In a certain forest grove by the Yamunä's shore, where gentle breezes moved the graceful trees, flowering vines, and new sprouts, and where the bees were maddened by the sweet scent of the flowers, some gopés bowed down before Garga Muni, who was rapt in meditation on Lord Kåñëa and Lord Balaräma. Remembering their previous birth as snake-princesses, the gopés asked him what kind of devotional service they should perform to attain the company of Lord Balaräma. Seeing their great devotion, Garga Muni gave these gopés the paddhati, paöala, stotra, kavaca, and sahasra-näma of Lord Balaräma. What more do you wish to hear? You may ask.

Text 3 

duryodhana uväca 

rämasya paddhatià brühi
     yayä siddhià vrajämy aham
tvaà bhakta-vatsalo brahman
     guru-deva namo 'stu te

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; rämasya—of Lord Balaräma; paddhatim—the paddhati; brühi—please tell; yayä—by which; siddhim—perfection; vrajämy—attain; aham—I; tvam—you; bhakta-vatsalah—affectionate to the devotees; brahman—O Brähmaëa; guru-deva—O Gurudeva; namah—obeisances; astu—should be; te—unto you.

     Duryodhana said: Please describe the paddhati of Lord Balaräma, reciting which I may attain perfection. O brähmaëa, you are affectionate to the devotees. O gurudeva, I bow down before you.

Text 4 

çré-präòvipäka uväca 

räma-märgasya niyamaà
     çåëu pärthiva-sattama
yena prasanno bhavati
     balabhadro mahä-prabhuh

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Çré Präòvipäka Muni said; räma-märgasya—of the path to Lord Balaräma; niyamam—the restrictions; çåëu—please hear; pärthiva-sattama—O best of kings; yena—by which; prasannah—pleased; bhavati—is; balabhadrah—Lord Balaräma; mahä-prabhuh—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     Çré Präòvipäka Muni said: O best of kings, please hear the regulative principles of the path to Lord Balaräma. When one follows these principles Lord Balaräma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, becomes pleased with him.

Text 5 

sahasra-vadano devo
     bhagavän bhuvaneçvarah
na dänair na ca térthaiç ca
     bhaktyä labhyas tv ananyayä

     sahasra-vadanah—who has a thousand heads; devah—the Lord; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhuvaneçvarah—the master of the worlds; na—not; danaih—by charity; na—not; ca—and; térthaih—by pilgrimages; ca—and; bhaktyä—by devotional service; labhyah—attainable; tv—indeed; ananyayä—without anything else.

     Lord Balaräma, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of the worlds, and who is also thousand-headed Lord Ananta, is not attained by giving charity or going on pilgrimage. He is attained only by devotional service. 

Text 6 

sat-saìgam etyäçu çikñed
     bhaktià vai çré-harer guroh
sa siddhah kathito jätaà
     yasya vai prema-lakñaëam

     sat-saìgam—association with devotees; etya—attaining; äçu—quickly; sékñet—should learn; bhaktim—devotion; vai—indeed; çré-hareh—of Lord Kåñëa; guroh—of the guru; sa—he; siddhah—perfect; kathitah—said; jätam—born; yasya—of whom; vai—indeed; prema-lakñaëam—characterized by love.

     By associating with the devotees, one quickly learns the truth of devotion to Lord Kåñëa and to one's guru. A person who learns this is said to have attained perfection. He has attained love for Lord Kåñëa.

Text 7 

brähme muhürte cotthäya
     räma-kåñëeti ca bruvan
natvä guruà bhuvaà caiva
     tato bhümyäà padaà nyaset

     brähme muhürte—at brahma-muhurta; ca—and; utthäya—rising; räma-kåñëa—Räma Kåñëa; iti—thus; ca—and; bruvan—saying; natvä—bowing; gurum—to the guru; bhuvam—the world; ca—and; eva—indeed; tatah—then; bhümyäm—on the ground; padam—foot; nyaset—should place.

     One should rise at brähma-muhürta, chant the holy names of Lord Kåñëa and Lord Balaräma, and bow down before one's guru. Only then should one place his feet on the ground.

Text 8 

väry upasparçya rahasi
     sthito bhütvä kuçäsane
hastäv utsaìga ädhäya
     sva-näsägra-nirékñaëah

     väry—water; upasparçya—touching; rahasi—in a secluded place; sthitah—staying; bhütvä—becoming; kuçäsane—on a kuça mat; hastäv—hands; utsaìge—in his lap; ädhäya—placing; sva-näsägra-nirékñaëah—gazing at the tip of the nose.

     In a secluded place one should touch water, sit on a kuça-grass mat, place his hands on his lap, and gaze at the tip of his nose.

Text 9 

dhyäyet paraà harià devaà
     balabhadraà sanätanam
gauraà nélämbaraà hy ädyaà
     vana-mälä-vibhüñitam

     dhyäyet—should meditate; param—then; harim—on Lord Hari; devam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; balabhadram—Lord Balaräma; sanätanam—eternal; gauram—fair; nélämbaram—with blue garmwents; hy—indeed; ädyam—the first; vana-mälä-vibhüñitam—decorated with a forest garland.

     Then one should meditate on Lord Balaräma, the eternal Supreme Personality of Godhead, whose compelxion is fair, and who is dressed in blue garments and decorated with a forest garland.

Texts 10 and 11 
evaà dhyäna-paro nityaà
     préty-arthaà halinah prabhoh
tri-käla-sandhyä-kåc chuddho
     mauné krodha-vivarjitah

akämé gata-lobhaç ca
     nirmohah satya-väg bhavet
dvi-väraà jala-pänärthé
     eka-bhukto jitendriyah

     evam—thus; dhyäna-parah—rapt in meditation; nityam—always; préty-artham—for the pleasure; halinah—of Lord Balaräma; prabhoh—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tri-käla-sandhyä—at sunrise, noon, and sunset; kåt—doing; çuddhah—pure; mauné—silent; krodha-vivarjitah—free from anger; akämé—free from lust; gata-lobhaç—free from greed; ca—and; nirmohah—free from ilussion; satya-väg—speaking truthfully; bhavet—should be; dvi-väram—twice; jala-pänärthé—drinking water; eka-bhuktah—eating once; jitendriyah—ccontrolling the senses.

     Pure, silent, free from anger, lust, greed, and illusion, speaking truthfully, controlling the senses, drinking water twice in a day and eating only once, to please Lord Balaräma one should thus meditate on Him at sunrise, noon, and sunset.

Text 12 
kñaumämbaro bhümi-çäyé
     bhütvä päyasa-bhojanah
evaà nirjita-ñaò-vargo
     bhaved ekägra-mänasah

     kñaumämbarah—wearing simple cotton clothing; bhümi-çäyé—sleeping on the ground; bhütvä—becoming; päyasa-bhojanah—eating milk; evam—thus; nirjita-ñaò-vargah—controlling the sex material tendencies; bhavet—should become; ekägra-mänasah—meditating with single-pointed concentration.

     Wearing simple cotton clothing, sleeping on the ground, and fasting from all but milk, one may conquer the six material tendencies and meditate with single-pointed concentration.

Text 13 
tasya prasanno bhavati
     sadä saìkarñaëo harih
paripürëatamah säkñät
     sarva-käraëa-käraëah

     tasya—with him; prasannah—pleased; bhavati—is; sadä—always; saìkarñaëah—Lord Balaräma; harih—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; paripürëatamah—perfect and complete; säkñät—directly; sarva-käraëa-käraëah—the cause of all causes.

     With such a person Lord Balaräma, the perfect and complete Supreme Personality of Godhead, the cause of all causes, becomes pleased.

Text 14 
itthaà çré-balabhadrasya
     kathitä paddhatir mayä
kauravendra mahä-bäho
     kià bhüyah çrotum icchasi

     ittham—thus; çré-balabhadrasya—of Lord Balaräma; kathitä—spoken; paddhatih—the paddhati; mayä—by me; kauravendra—O king of the kurus; mahä-bähah—O mighty-armed one; kim—what?; bhüyah—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—do you wish.

     O mighty-armed Kaurava king, now I have described to you the paddhati of Lord Balaräma. What more do you wish to hear.

Text 15 
duryodhana uväca 
munéndra deva-devasya
     paöalaà brühi me prabhoh
yena seväà karisyämi
     tat-padämbujayoh sadä

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; munéndra—O king of sages; deva-devasya—O master of the demigods; paöalam—the paöalam; brühi—please tell; me—me; prabhoh—of the Lord; yena—by whcih; seväm—service; karisyämi—I will do; tat-padämbujayoh—at His lotus feet; sadä—always.

     Duryodhana said: O king of sages, O master of the demigods, please describe to me the paöala of Lord Balaräma, following which I will always serve Lord Balaräma's lotus feet.

Text 16 
çré-präòvipäka uväca 
balasya paöalaà guhyaà
     viddhi siddhi-pradäyakam
ekänte brahmaëä dattaà
     näradäya mahätmane

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Çré Präòvipäka Muni said; balasya—of Lord Balaräma; paöalam—the paöala; guhyam—secret; viddhi—please know; siddhi—perfection; pradäyakam—giving; ekänte—at one place; brahmaëä—by Lord Brahmä; dattam—given; näradäya—to närada; mahätmane—the great soul.

     Çré Präòvipäka Muni said: Now please understand Lord Balaräma's paöala, which brings perfection, and which the demigod Brahmä gave to Närada Muni.

Text 17 
praëavaà pürvam uddhåtya
     käma-béjaà tatah param
kälindé-bhedana-padaà
     saìkarñaëam atah param

     praëavam—Oà; pürvam—first; uddhåtya—speaking; käma-béjam—the Kama-bija syllable; tatah—then; param—after; kälindé-bhedana-padam—the breaker of the Yamunä; saìkarñaëam—Lord Balaräma; atah param—then.

     First, speak the syllable Oà. Then, speak the Käma-béja syllable (kléà). Then recite the names Kälindé-bhedana (the breaker of the Yamunä) and Saìkarñaëa.

Text 18 

caturthyaà taà dvayaà kåtvä
     svähäà paçcäd vidhäya ca
mantra-räjam imaà räjan
     brahmoktaà ñoòaçäkñäram

     caturthyäm—fourth; tam—that; dvayam—both; kåtvä—doing; svähäm—Svähä; paçcät—then; vidhäya—placing; ca—and; mantra-räjam—king of mantras; imam—this; räjan—O king; brahmoktam—spoken by Brahmä; ñoòaçäkñäram—sixteen syllables.

     After speaking these two names, then recite the word svähä. O king, this sixteen-syllable king of mantras was spoken by the demigod Brahmä.

     Note: The mantra then is Oà kléà kälindé-bhedanäya saìkarñaëäya svähä.

Text 19 
japel lakñaà vraté bhütvä
     sahasräëi ca ñoòaça
ihämütra paräà siddhià
     sampräpnoti na saàçayah

     japet—one should chant; lakñam—a hundred thousand times; vraté—following a vow; bhütvä—becoming; sahasräëi—thousand; ca—and; ñoòaça—sixteen; iha—in this life; amütra—and the next; paräm—supreme; siddhim—perfection; sampräpnoti—attains; na—no; saàçayah—doubt.

     Following this vow one should chant this mantra 116,000 times. Thus one will attain the supreme perfection in this life and the next. Of this there is no doubt.

Texts 20 and 21

atha japtasya mantrasya
     mahä-püjäà samäcaret
dvatriàçat-patra-samyuktaà
     karëikä-keçarojjvalam

bhavyaà kaïjaà païca-varëaà
     likhitvä sthaëòile çubhe
tasyopari nyased räjan
     hema-siàhäsanaà çubham tasmin çré-baladevasya      paräm arcäà prapüjayet

     atha—then; japtasya—chanted; mantrasya—of the mantra; mahä-püjäm—great worship; samäcaret—should perform; dvatriàçat—32; patra—petals; samyuktam—with; karëikä-keçarojjvalam—splendid lotus whorl; bhavyam—beautiful; kaïjam—lotus flower; païca-varëam—five colors; likhitvä—drawing; sthaëòile—on the ground; çubhe—auspicious; tasya—that; upari—above; nyaset—should place; räjan—O king; hema-siàhäsanam—a golden trhone; çubham—beautiful; tasmin—there; çré-baladevasya—of Lord Balaräma; paräm—supreme; arcäm—worship; prapüjayet—should worship.

     Then the person who has chanted the mantra this number of times should perform the great worship of Lord Balaräma. On auspicious ground he should draw a thirty-two petal lotus of five colors and with a splendid whorl. O king, he should place there a beautiful golden throne, and on that throne He should place Lord Balaräma. Then he should perform the great worship of Lord Balaräma.

Text 22

     oà namo bhagavate puruñottamäya väsudeväya saìkarñaëäya 
sahasra-vadanäya mahänantäya svähä. anena mantreëa çikhä-
bandhanaà kåtvä sarvatas taà praëamya tat-sammukho bhütvä svayaà 
nato bhavet. oà jaya jayänanta balabhadra käma-päla täläìka 
kälindé-bhaïjana ävirävirbhüya mama sammukho bhaveti. 
anena mantreëävähanaà kuryät. oà namas te 'stu séra-päëe 
hala-musala-dhara rauhiëeya nélämbara räma revaté-ramaëa namo 
'stu te. anena mantreëäsana-padyärghya-snäna-madhuparka-dhüpa-
dépa-yajïopavéta-naivedya-vastra-bhüñaëa-gandha-
puñpäkñata-puñpäïjali-néräjaëädén upacärän 
prakalpayet. oà viñëave madhusüdanäya vämanäya trivikramäya 
çrédharäya håñékeçäya padmanäbhäya dämodaräya saìkarñaëäya 
väsudeväya pradyumnäyäniruddhäyädhokñajäya puruñottamäya çré-
kåñëäya namah. iti päda-gulpha-jänüru-kaöy-udara-pärçva-påñöhi-
bhuja-kandhara-netra-çiräàsi påthak påthak püjayäméti 
mantreëa sarväìga-püjäà kuryät. atha çaìkha-cakra-gadä-
padmäsi-dhanur-bäëa-hala-musala-kaustubha-vanamälä-çrévatsa-
pétämbara-nélämbara-vaàçé-vetra-garuòäìka-täläìka-ratha-
däruka-sumati-kumuda-kumudäkña-çrédämädén praëava-pürvena 
cäturthyaà tena namah samyuktena näma-mantreëa påthak påthak 
sampüjya. tathä viñvaksena-vedavyäsa-durgä-vinäyaka-dikpäla-
grahädén kamale sarvatah sve sve sthäne sampüjayet. punah 
parisamühanädé-sthälé-päka-vidhänena vaiçvänaraà sampüjya 
pürvoktena müla-mantreëa païca-viàçati-sahasräëy 
ähutér juhuyät. tathäñöau sahasräëi dvädasäkñäreëa 
tathäñöau sahasräëi catur-vyüha-mantreëähütir juhuyät. 
tato 'gnià pradakñiëé-kåtya namaskåtyäcäryaà mahärha-vastra-
suvarëäbharaëa-tämra-patra-savatsa-go-suvarëa-dakñiëäbhih 
sampüjya tathä brahmaëän bhojanädyaih sampüjya nagara-janebhyo 
bhojanaà dattväcäryän praëamet. itthaà balasya paöalänusäreëa 
yo 'nusmarati ihämütra siddhi-samåddhibhih samvåto bhavati. çré-
räma-paöalaà guhyaà mayä te hy anuvarëitam. sarva-siddhi-pradaà 
räjan kià bhüyah çrotum icchasi.

     om—Oà; namah—obeisances; bhagavate—to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; puruñottamäya—the supreme person; väsudeväya—the son of Vasudeva; saìkarñaëäya—Lord Saìkarñaëa; sahasra-vadanäya—who has a thousand heads; mahänantäya—the great Lord Anbanta; svähä—svähä; anena—with this; mantreëa—mantra; çikhä—çikhä; bandhanam—tying; kåtvä—doing; sarvatah—in all respects; tam—to Him; praëamya—bowing; tat-sammukhah—before Him; bhütvä—becing; svayam—personally; natah—bowed; bhavet.—should be; om—Oà; jaya—vitory; jaya—victory; ananta—O limitless one; balabhadra—O Balaräma; käma-päla—O fulfiller of desires; täläìka—O Lord who acrries the mark of the palm tree; kälindé-bhaïjana—O breaker of the Yamunä; ävirävirbhüya—appearing; mama—of me; sammukhah—in the presence; bhava—please become; iti—thus; anena—with this; mantreëa—mantra; ävähanam—invoking the presence; kuryät.—should do; om—Oà; namah—obeisances; te—to you; astu—should be; séra-päëe—plow in hand; hala-musala—plow and club; dhara—holding; rauhiëeya—O son of Rohiëé; nélämbara—dressed in blue garments; räma—O Balaräma; revaté-ramaëa—O lover of Revaté; namah—obeisances; astu—should be; te—to You; anena—with this; mantreëa—mantra; äsana—seat; padya—padya; arghya—arghya; snäna—bath; madhuparka—madhuparka; dhüpa—incense; dépa—lamp; yajïopavéta—sacred thread; naivedya—food; vastra—garments; bhüñaëa—ornaments; gandha—scent; puñpa—flowers; akñata—unbroken rice; puñpa—of flowers; aïjali—handful; néräjaëa—arati; ädén—beginning with; upacärän—services; prakalpayet—should perform; om—Oà; viñëave—to Lord Viñëu; madhusüdanäya—the killer of Madhu; vämanäya—Vämana; trivikramäya—Trivikrama; çrédharäya—Çrédhära; håñékeçäya—Håñékeça; padmanäbhäya—whose navel is a lotus flower; dämodaräya—who waist is bound with a rope; saìkarñaëäya—who was pulled from Devaké's womb; väsudeväya—the son of Vasudeva; pradyumnäya—Pradyumna; aniruddhäya—Aniruddha; adhokñajäya—Adhokñaja; puruñottamäya—the Supreme Person; çré-kåñëäya—Çré Kåñëa; namah.—obeisances; iti—thus; päda—feet; gulpha—ankles; jänu—knees; üru—thighs; kaöy—hips; udara—belly; pärçva—sides; påñöhi—back; bhuja—arms; kandhara—shoulders; netra—eyes; çiräàsi—and head; påthak påthak—each one individually; püjayämi—I worship; iti—thus; mantreëa—with the mantra; sarväìga-püjäm—the worship of all limbs; kuryät.—should perform; atha—then; çaìkha—conchshell; cakra—disc; gadä—club; padma—lotus; asi—sword; dhanuh—bow; bäëa—arrow; hala—plow; musala—club; kaustubha—Kaustubha jewel; vanamälä—forest garland; çrévatsa—Çrévatsa mark; pétämbara—yellow garments; nélämbara—blue garments; vaàçé—flute; vetra—stick; garuòa—Garuòa; aìka—mark; täla—palm tree; aìka—mark; ratha—chariot; däruka—Däruka; sumati—Sumati; kumuda—Kumuda; kumudäkña—Kumudäkña; çrédäma—Çrédäma; ädén—beginning with; praëava-pürvena—with Oà first; cäturthyam—fourth; tena—by that; namah—obeisances; samyuktena—with; näma-mantreëa—by tha mantras of names; påthak påthak—one after another; sampüjya.—should worship; tathä—so; viñvaksena—Viñvaksena; vedavyäsa—Vedavyäsa; durgä—Durgä; vinäyaka—Vinäyaka; dikpäla—the protectors of the directions; graha—the planets; ädén—beginning with; kamale—on the lotus flower; sarvatah—each; sve sve sthäne—in his own place; sampüjayet.—should worship; punah—again; parisamühana—sprinkling water; ädi—beginning with; sthaléin an earthen pot; päka—cooking; vidhänena—by the action; vaiçvänaram—Vaiçvänara; sampüjya—worshiping; pürvoktena—previously spoken; müla-mantreëa—with the mula-mantra; païca-viàçati-sahasräëy—25,000; ähutéh—oblations; juhuyät—should offer; tathä—so; añöau sahasräëi—8,000; dvädasäkñäreëa—with 12 syllables; tathä—then; añöau sahasräëi—8,000; catur-vyüha-mantreëa—with mantras to the catur-vyüha; ähutéh—oblations; juhuyät.—should offer; tatah—then; agnim—the sacred fire; pradakñiëé-kåtya—circumambulating; namaskåtya—bowing down; äcäryam—to the guru; mahärha—very valuable; vastra—garments; suvarëa—golden; äbharaëa—ornaments; tämra—red; patra—petals; savatsa—with calves; gah—cows; suvarëa—and gold; dakñiëäbhih—with dakñiëä; sampüjya—worshiping; tathä—so; brahmaëän—the brähmaëas; bhojanädyaih—beginning with food; sampüjya—worshiping; nagara-janebhyah—the residents of the city; bhojanam—food; dattvä—giving; äcäryän—to the gurus; praëamet—should offer obeisances; ittham—thus; balasya—of Lord Balaräma; paöalänusäreëa—by following the paöala; yah—one who; anusmarati—remembers; iha—in this life; amütra—and the next; siddhi—of perfection; samåddhibhih—with increase; samvåtah—accompanied; bhavati.—becomes; çré-räma-paöalam—the paöala of Lord Balaräma; guhyam—secret; mayä—by me; te—to you; hy—indeed; anuvarëitam.—described; sarva-siddhi-pradam—giving all perfection; räjan—O king; kim—what?; bhüyah—more; çrotum—to hear; icchasi—you wish.

     Chanting the mantra "oà namo bhagavate puruñottamäya väsudeväya saìkarñaëäya sahasra-vadanäya mahänantäya svähä" (Obeisances to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Saìkarñana, who is thousand-headed Lord Ananta, and who is the son of Vasudeva), one should tie his çikhä. Then one should bow down before the deity and in all directions.      Then, chanting the mantra "oà jaya jayänanta balabhadra käma-päla täläìka kälindé-bhaïjana ävirävirbhüya mama sammukho bhava" (Oà. O Lord Balaräma, O Lord Ananta, O fulfiller of desires, O Lord who carries a palm-tree flag, O Lord who broke the Yamunä, all glories to You! O Lord, please appear before me.), one should request Lord Balaräma to appear.      Then, chanting the mantra "oà namas te 'stu séra-päëe hala-musala-dhara rauhiëeya nélämbara räma revaté-ramaëa namo 'stu te" (O Lord who holds a plow in Your hand, O Lord who holds a plow and club, O son of Rohiëé, O Lord dressed in blue garments, O Balaräma, O husband of Revaté, obeisances to You!), one should offer a throne, padya, arghya, bath, madhuparka, incense, lamp, sacred thread, food, garments, ornaments, fragrant flowers, unbroken grains of rice, handsful of flowers, ärati, and other services.      Then, chanting the mantra, "oà viñëave madhusüdanäya vämanäya trivikramäya çrédharäya håñékeçäya padmanäbhäya dämodaräya saìkarñaëäya väsudeväya pradyumnäyäniruddhäyädhokñajäya puruñottamäya çré-kåñëäya namah. (Oà. Obeisances to Lord Viñëu, the killer of Madhu, the Lord who is the Vämana incarnation, the Lord who covered the universe in three steps, the Lord who maintains the goddess of fortune, the master of the senses, the Lord whose navel is a lotus flower, the Lord whose waist was bound by a rope, the Lord who was carried from Devaké's womb, the Lord who is the son of Vasudeva, the Lord who is Pradyumna, the Lord who is Aniruddha, the Lord who is beyond the material senses, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is all-attractive Çré Kåñëa!) and also the mantra "päda-gulpha-jänüru-kaöy-udara-pärçva-påñöhi-bhuja-kandhara-netra-çiräàsi påthak påthak püjayämi" (I worship the Lord's feet, ankles, knees, thighs, hips, belly, sides, back, arms, shoulders, eyes, and head.), one should worship all the limbs of Lord Balaräma.      Then, chanting the word namah before each one, and putting each word in the dative case, one should worship Lord Balaräma's conchshell (with the mantra çaìkhäya namah), disc (cakräya namah), club (gadäyai namah), lotus (padmäya namah), sword (asaye namah), bow (dhanuñe namah), arrows (bäëebhyah namah), plow (haläya namah), club (musaläya namah), Kaustubha jewel (kaustubhäya namah), forest garland (vanamäläyai namah), Çrévatsa mark (çrévatsäya namah), yellow garments (pétämbaräya namah), blue garments (nélämbaräya namah), flute (vaàçyai namah), stick (veträya namah), chariot marked with the flag of Garuòa (garuòäìka-rathäya namah), chariot marked with the flag of a palm tree (täläìka-rathäya namah), and His associates Däruka (darukäya namah), Sumati (sumataye namah), Kumuda (kumudäya namah), Kumudäkña (kumudäkñäya namah), and Çrédämä (çrédämäya namah).      Then one should place Viñvaksena, Vedavyäsa, Durgä, Gaëeça, the planets, and the protectors of the directions in their respective places in the lotus and then one should worship them. Then, sprinkling water and offering food cooked in an earthen pot, one should worship the sacred fire.      Then, chanting the previously described müla-mantra (oà kléà kälindé-bhedanäya saìkarñaëäya svähä) one should offer 25,000 oblations. Then, chanting the twelve-syllable mantra (oà namo bhagavate väsudeväya), one should offer 8,000 oblations. Then, chanting the catur-vyüha mantra (oà namo bhagavate tubhyaà väsudeväya säkñiëe, pradyumnäyäniruddhäya namah saìkarñaëäya ca), one should again offer 8,000 oblations.      Then one should circumambulate the sacred fire, bow down before the guru, worship him with dakñiëä of valuable garments, gold ornaments, copper vessels, cows with their newborn calves, and much gold, worship the brähmaëas by offering them food and gifts, feed the people of the city, and bow down before the gurus. Meditating on Lord Balaräma by following this paddhati, one attains perfection in this life and the next. In this way I have described to you Lord Balaräma's confidential paddhati, which gives all perfection. O king, what more do you wish to hear?
.pa

Chapter Eleven
Çré Balabhadra-stava-räja
The King of Prayers to Lord Balaräma

Text 1

duryodhana uväca 
stotraà çré-baladevasya
     präòvipäka mahä-mune
vada mäà kåpayä säkñät
     sarva-siddhi-pradäyakam

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; stotram—prayer; çré-baladevasya—of Lord Balaräma; präòvipäka—Çré Präòvipäka Muni; mahä-mune—O great sages; vada—please tell; mäm—me; kåpayä—mercifully; säkñät—directly; sarva-siddhi-pradäyakam—giving all perfection.

     Duryodhana said: O Präòvipäka, O great sage, please kindly tell me the prayer of Lord Balaräma, which grants all perfection.

Text 2 
çré-präòvipäka uväca 
stava-räjaà tu rämasya
     vedavyäsa-kåtaà çubham
 sarva-siddhi-pradaà räjan
     chånu kaivalyadaà nåëäm

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Çré Präòvipäka Muni said; stava—of prayers; räjam—the king; tu—indeed; rämasya—of Lord Balaräma; vedavyäsa-kåtam—written by Vedavyäsa; çubham—auspicious; sarva-siddhi-pradam—giving all perfection; räjan—O king; çånu—please hear; kaivalyadam—giving liberation; nåëäm—to the living entities.

     Çré Präòvipäka Muni said: O king, please hear the regal and beautiful prayer of Lord Balaräma, a prayer that brings liberation and all perfection. 
Text 3 
devädi-deva bhagavan
     käma-päla namo 'stu te
namo 'nantäya çeñäya
     säkñäd-rämäya te namah

     devädi-deva—O master of the demigods; bhagavan—O Supreme Personality of Godhead; käma-päla—O fulfiller of desires; namah—obeisances; astu—should be; te—to You; namah—obeisances; anantäya çeñäya—to Ananta Çeña; säkñäd-rämäya—who is directly Lord Balaräma; te—to You; namah—obeisances.

     O master of the demigods, O Supreme Personality of Godhead, O fulfiller of desires, obeisances to You! O Lord Ananta Çeña, obeisances to You! O Lord Balaräma, obeisances to You!

Text 4 
dharä-dharäya pürëäya
     sva-dhämne séra-päëaye
sahasra-çirase nityaà
     namah saìkarñaëäya te

     dharä-dharäya—the maintainer of the earth; pürëäya—perfect and complete; sva-dhämne—glorious; séra-päëaye—plow in hand; sahasra-çirase—a thousand heads; nityam—always; namah—obeisances; saìkarñaëäyA—to Lord Saìkarñaëa; te—to You.

     O Lord who maintains the earth, O glorious Lord, O perfect and complete Lord, O Lord who holds a plow in Your hand, O Lord who has a thousand heads, O Lord Saìkarñaëa, eternal obeisances to You!

Text 5 
revaté-ramaëa tvaà vai
     baladeväcyutägraja
haläyudha pralamba-ghna
     pähi mäà puruñottama

     revaté-ramaëa—O husband of Revaté; tvam—You; vai—indeed; baladeva—Balaräma; acyutägraja—O elder brother of Lord Kåñëa; haläyudha—carrying a plow-weapon; pralamba-ghna—killer of Pralambäsura; pähi—please proetct; mäm—me; puruñottama—O Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     O husband of Revaté, O Lord Balaräma, O elder brother of Lord Kåñëa, O Lord who holds a plow-weapon, O killer of Pralambäsura, O Supreme Personality of Godhead, please protect me!

Text 6 
baläya balabhadräya
     täläìkäya namo namah
nélämbaräya gauräya
     rauhiëeyäya te namah

     baläya—to Lord Balaräma; balabhadräya—to Lord Balaräma; täläìkäya—who carries the palm-tree flag; namah—obeisances; namah—obeisances; nélämbaräya—who wears blue garments; gauräya—whose complexion is fair; rauhiëeyäya—to the son of Rohiëé; te—to You; namah—obeisances.

     O Lord Balaräma, who carries a palm-tree flag, obeisances to You! O son of Rohiëé, O fair-complexioned Lord dressed in blue garments, obeisances to You! 
Text 7 
dhenukärir muñöikärih
     küöärir balvaläntakah
rukmy-arih küpakarëärih
     kumbhandäris tvam eva hi

     dhenukärih—the enemy of Dhenuka; muñöikärih—the enemy of Muñöika; küöärih—the enemy of Küöa; balvaläntakah—the killer of Balvala; rukmy-arih—the enemy of Rukmi; küpakarëärih—the enemy of Kupakarna; kumbhandärih—the enemy of Kumbandha; tvam—You; eva—indeed; hi—indeed.

     You are the enemy of Dhenuka, the enemy of Muñöika, the enemy of Küöa, the killer of Balvala, the enemy of Rukmé, the enemy of Küpakarëa, and the enemy of Kumbhanda.

Text 8 
kälindé-bhedano 'si tvaà
     hastinäpura-karñakah
dvividärir yädavendro
     vraja-maëòala-maëòaëah

     kälindé—of the Yamunä; bhedanah—the breaker; asi—You are; tvam—You; hastinäpura-karñakah—the dragger of Hastinäpura; dvividärih—the enemy of Dvivida; yädavendrah—the king of the Yadavas; vraja-maëòala-maëòaëah—the ornament of the circle of Vraja.

     You are the Lord who broke the Yamunä and dragged Hastinäpura. You are the enemy of Dvivida. You are the king of the Yädavas. You are the ornament of Vraja's circle.

Text 9 
kaàsa-bhrätå-prahantäsi
     tértha-yäträ-karah prabhuh
duryodhana-guruh säkñät
     pähi pähi prabho tv atah

     kaàsa-bhrätå-prahantä—the killer of Kaàsa's brothers; asi—You are; tértha-yäträ-karah—a pilgrim; prabhuh—the master; duryodhana-guruh—the guru of Duryodhana; säkñät—directly; pähi—please protect; pähi—please protect; prabhah—O Lord; tv—indeed; atah—then.

     You are the killer of Kaàsa's brothers. You are the supreme master, the Lord who went on pilgrimage, and Duryodhana's guru. O master, please protect me! Please protect me!

Text 10 

jaya jayäcyuta-deva parät para      svayam ananta-dig-anta-gata-çruta
sura-munéndra-phaëéndra-caräya te
     musaline baline haline namaù

     jaya—glory; jaya—glory; acyuta-deva—O infallible Lord; parät—than the greatest; para—greater; svayam—directly; ananta-dig-anta-gata-çruta—whose glories are heard in all directions without limit; sura-munéndra-phaëéndra-caräya—worshiped by the demigods, the kings of the sages, and the kings of the serpents; te—to You; musaline—holding a club; baline—powerful; haline—holding a plow; namaù—obeisances.

     O infallible Lord, greater than the greatest, O Lord whose glories are heard in all directions without limit, glory to You! Glory to You! O Lord served by the demigods, the kings of the sages, and the kings of the serpents, O powerful Lord who holds a plow and a club, obeisances to You!

Text 11 
yah paöhet satataà stavanaà narah
     sa tu hareh paramaà padam ävrajet
jagati sarva-balaà tv ari-mardanaà
     bhavati tasya dhanaà sva-janaà dhanam

     yah—one who; paöhet—recites; satatam—regulalrly; stavanam—prayer; narah—person; sa—he; tu—indeed; hareh—of Lord Hari; paramam—supreme; padam—abode; ävrajet—attains; jagati—in the universe; sarva-balam—all strength; tv—indeed; ari-mardanam—crushing enemies; bhavati—is; tasya—of him; dhanam—wealth; sva-janam—kinsmen; dhanam—wealth.

     A person who regularly recites this prayer attains Lord Hari's transcendental abode. All the strength in the universe is his. He crushes his enemies. He attains great wealth and a great dynasty.
.pa

Chapter Twelve
Çré Balabhadra-stotra-kavaca
The Prayer and Armor of Lord Balaräma

Text 1

duryodhana uväca 
gopébhyäà kavacaà dattaà
     gargäcäryena dhématä
sarva-rakñä-karaà divyaà
     dehi mahyaà mahä-mune

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; gopébhyäm—to the gopés; kavacam—the armor; dattam—given; gargäcäryena—by Garga Muni; dhématä—intelligent; sarva-rakña-karam—giving all protection; divyam—transcendental; dehi—please give; mahyam—to me; mahä-mune—O great sage.

     Duryodhana said: O great sage, please give me the transcendental Balaräma-kavaca, which wise Garga Muni gave to the gopés, and which gives all protection.

Text 2 
çré-präòvipäka uväca 
snätvä jale kñauma-dharah kuçäsanah
     pavitra-päëih kåta-mantra-marjanah
småtvätha natvä balam acyutägrajaà
     sandhärayed dharma-samähito bhavet

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Çré Präòvipäka Muni said; snätvä—bathing; jale—in water; kñauma-dharah—wearing clean cotton garments; kuçäsanah—sitting on a kuça grass mat; pavitra-päëih—clean hands; kåta-mantra-marjanah—purified by mantra; småtvä—meditating; atha—then; natvä—bowing; balam—to Lord Balaräma; acyutägrajam—the elder brother of Lord Kåñëa; sandhärayet—should meditate; dharma-samähitah—concentrating; bhavet—should be.

     Çré Präòvipäka Muni said: After bathing and dressing in clean cotton garments, a person should sit on a kuça-grass mat, purify his hands with mantras, bow down, and with fixed intelligence meditate on Lord Kåñëa's elder brother, Lord Balaräma.

Text 3 
goloka-dhämädhipatih pareçvarah
     pareñu mäà pätu pavitra-kértanaù

bhü-maëòalaà sarñapavad vilakñyate
     yan-mürdhni mäà pätu sa bhümi-maëòale

     goloka-dhämädhipatih—the master of the realm of Goloka; pareçvarah—the supreme controller; pareñu—among all controllers; mäm—me; pätu—may protect; pavitra—pure; kértanah—glories; bhü-maëòalam—the circle of the earth; sarñapavat—like a mustard seed; vilakñyate—is characterized; yan-mürdhni—on whose head; mäm—me; pätu—may protect; sa—he; bhümi-maëòale—in the circle of the earth.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is the master of Goloka, who is the supreme controller of all controllers, and whose fame is spotless, protect me. May Lord Balaräma, who on His head holds the earth as if it were a single mustard seed, protect me in this world.

Text 4 
senäsu mäà rakñatu séra-päëir
     yuddhe sadä rakñatu mäà halé ca
durgeñu cävyän musalé sadä mäà
     vaneñu saìkarñaëa ädi-devah

     senäsu—among armies; mäm—me; rakñatu—may protect; séra-päëih—who holds a plow in His hand; yuddhe—in battle; sadä—always; rakñatu—may protect; mäm—me; halé—holding a plow; ca—and; durgeñu—in fortresses; ca—and; avyät—may protect; musalé—holding a club; sadä—always; mäm—me; vaneñu—in forests; saìkarñaëa—Lord Balaräma; ädi-devah—the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     May Lord Balaräma protect me when I am surrounded by many armies. May Lord Balaräma, who holds a plow, always protect me in battle. May Lord Balaräma, who holds a club, always protect me in many fortresses. May Lord Balaräma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead protect me in the forest.

Text 5 
kalindajä-vega-haro jaleñu
     nélämbaro rakñatu mäà sadägnau
väyau ca rämo 'vatu khe balaç ca
     mahärëave 'nanta-vapuh sadä mäm

     kalindajä—of the Yamunä; vega—the power; harah—removing; jaleñu—in water; nélämbarah—dressed in blue garments; rakñatu—may protect; mäm—me; sadä—always; agnau—in fire; väyau—in wind; ca—and; rämah—Lord Balaräma; avatu—may protect; khe—in the sky; balah—Lord Balaräma; ca—and; mahärëave—in the great ocean; ananta-vapuh—whose form has no end; sadä—always; mäm—me.

     May Lord Balaräma, who wears blue garments and who stopped the Yamunä, always protect me in fire. May Lord Balaräma protect me in the wind. May Lord Balaräma protect me in the sky. May Lord Balaräma, who is Lord Ananta Himself, always protect me in the great ocean.

Text 6

çré-väsudevo 'vatu parvateñu
     sahasra-çérñä ca mahä-viväde
rogeñu mäà rakñatu rauhiëeyo
     mäà käma-pälo 'vatu va vipatsu

     çré-väsudevah—the son of Vasudeva; avatu—may protect; parvateñu—in the mountains; sahasra-çérñä—who has a thousand heads; ca—and; mahä-viväde—in great disputes; rogeñu—in diseases; mäm—me; rakñatu—may protect; rauhiëeyah—the son of Rohiëé; mäm—me; käma-pälah—the fulfiller of desires; avatu—may protect; vä—or; vipatsu—in calamities.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is Vasudeva's son, protect me on mountains. May Lord Balaräma, who has a thousand heads, protect me in great disputes. May Lord Balaräma, who is Rohiëé's son, protect me from diseases. May Lord Balaräma, who fulfills desires, protect me from catastrophes.

Text 7 
kämät sadä rakñatu dhenukärih
     krodhät sadä mäà dvivida-prahäré
lobhät sadä rakñatu balvalärir
     mohät sadä mäà kila mägadhärih

     kämät—from lust; sadä—always; rakñatu—may protect; dhenukärih—the enemy of Dhenuka; krodhät—from anger; sadä—always; mäm—me; dvivida-prahäré—the killer of Dvivida; lobhät—from greed; sadä—always; rakñatu—may protect; balvalärih—the enemy of Balvala; mohät—from illusion; sadä—always; mäm—me; kila—indeed; mägadhärih—the enemy of Jaräsandha.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is the enemy of Dhenukäsura, always protect me from lust. May Lord Balaräma, who killed Dvivida, always protect me from anger. May Lord Balaräma, who is the enemy of Balvala, always protect me from greed. May Lord Balaräma, who is the enemy of Jaräsandha, always protect me from illusion.

Text 8 
prätah sadä rakñatu våñëi-dhuryah
     prähne sadä mäà mathurä-purendrah
madhyandine gopa-sakhah prapätu
     svarät parähne 'vatu mäà sadaiva

     prätah—at sunrise; sadä—always; rakñatu—may protect; våñëi-dhuryah—the greatst of the Våñëis; prähne—in the morning; sadä—always; mäm—me; mathurä-purendrah—the king of Mathurä City; madhyandine—at noon; gopa-sakhah—the friend of the gopas; prapätu—may protect; svaräö—independent; parähne—in the afternoon; avatu—may protect; mäm—me; sadä—always; eva—indeed.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is the best of the Våñëis, always protect me at sunrise. May Lord Balaräma, who is the king of Mathurä City, always protect me in the morning. May Lord Balaräma, who is the friend of the gopas, always protect me at midday. May Lord Balaräma, who is supremely independent, always protect me in the afternoon.

Text 9 
säyaà phaëéndro 'vatu mäà sadaiva
     parät paro rakñatu mäà pradoñe
pürëe niçéthe ca duranta-véryah
     pratyüña-käle 'vatu mäà sadaiva

     säyam—at sunset; phaëéndrah—the king of serpents; avatu—may protect; mäm—me; sadä—always; eva—indeed; parät—than the greatest; parah—greater; rakñatu—may protect; mäm—me; pradoñe—in the evening; pürëe—full; niçéthe—in the middle of the night; ca—and; duranta-véryah—whose power is invicible; pratyüña-käle—at the next sunrise; avatu—may protect; mäm—me; sadä—always; eva—indeed.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is the king of serpents, always protect me at sunset. May Lord Balaräma, who is greater than the greatest, always protect me in the evening. May Lord Balaräma, whose power is invicible, always protect me in the middle of the night. May Lord Balaräma always protect me at every sunrise.

Text 10 
vidikñu mäà rakñatu revaté-patir
     dékñu pralambärir adho yadüdvahah
ürdhvaà sadä mäà balabhadra ärät
     tathä samantäd baladeva eva hi

     vidikñu—in the directions; mäm—me; rakñatu—may protect; revaté-patih—the husband of Revaté; dékñu—in the directions; pralambärih—the enemy of Pralamba; adhah—below; yadüdvahah—the best of the Yädavas; ürdhvam—above; sadä—alwys; mäm—me; balabhadra—Balaräma; ärät—near and far; tathä—so; samantät—everywhere; baladeva—Lord Balaräma; eva—indeed; hi—indeed.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is the master of Revaté, protect me from every direction. May Lord Balaräma, who is the enemy of Pralamba, protect me from every direction. May Lord Balaräma, who is the best of the Yädavas, protect me from below. May Lord Balaräma always protect me from above. May Lord Balaräma protect me from near and far. May Lord Balaräma protect me everywhere.

Text 11

antah sadävyät puruñottamo bahir
     nägendra-lélo 'vatu mäà mahä-balah
sadäntarätmä ca vasan harih svayaà
     prapätu pürëah parameçvaro mahän

     antah—within; sadä—always; avyät—may protect; puruñottamah—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bahih—without; nägendra-lélah—who enjoys pastimes as the king of serpents; avatu—may protect; mäm—me; mahä-balah—very powerful; sadä—always; antarätmä—within the heart; ca—and; vasan—residing; harih—Lord Hari; svayam—personally; prapätu—may protect; pürëah—perfect and complete; parameçvarah—the supreme controller; mahän—great.

     May Lord Balaräma, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, always protect me from within. May powerful Lord Balaräma, who enjoys pastimes as the king of serpents, protect me from without. May Lord Balaräma, who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the Supersoul residing in everyone's heart, always protect me. 
Text 12

deväsuräëäà bhaya-näçanaà ca
     hutäçanaà päpa-cayendhanänäm
vinäçanaà vighna-ghatasya viddhi
     siddhäsanaà varma-varaà balasya

     deväsuräëäm—of the demigods and demons; bhaya—of fear; näçanam—the destruction; ca—and; hutäçanam—the fire; päpa-cayendhanänäm—of the fuel of a host sins; vinäçanam—destruction; vighna-ghatasya—of a host of obstacles; viddhi—please know; siddhäsanam—the abode of perfection; varma-varam—the best of armors; balasya—of Lord Balaräma.

     Please know that this kavaca of Lord Balaräma is the best of armors. It destroys the fears of the demigods and demons. It is a blazing fire that burns up the fuel of a host of sins. It is the death of a host of obstacles. It is the abode of spiritual perfection.
.pa

Chapter Thirteen
Çré Balabhadra-sahasra-näma
A Thousand Names of Lord Balaräma

Text 1

duryodhana uväca 
balabhadrasya devasya
     präòvipäka mahä-mune
nämnäà sahasraà me brühi
     guhyaà deva-gaëair api

     duryodhana uväca—Duryodhana said; balabhadrasya—of Lord Balaräma; devasya—Lord; präòvipäka—O Pradvipaka; mahä—great; mune—sage; nämnäm—of the names; sahasram—thousand; me—to me; brühi—please tell; guhyam—secret; deva-gaëaih—by the demigods; api—even.

     Duryodhana said: O great sage Präòvipäka, please tell me the thousand names of Lord Balaräma, names kept secret from even the demigods.

Text 2 
çré-präòvipäka uväca 
sädhu sädhu mahä-räja
     sädhu te vimalaà yaçah
yat påcchase param idaà
     gargoktaà deva-durlabham

     çré-präòvipäka uväca—Çré Pradvipaka said; sädhu—good; sädhu—good; mahä-räja—O king; sädhu—good; te—of you; vimalam—pure; yaçah—fame; yat—what; påcchase—you ask; param—great; idam—this; gargoktam—spoken by Garga Muni; deva—to the demigods; durlabham—rare.

     Çré Präòvipäka said: Well done! Well done! Well done! O king, your fame is spotless. Your question has been answered by Garga Muni in words rarely heard by even the demigods.

Text 3 
nämnäà saharsaà divyänäà
     vakñyämi tava cägratah
gargäcäryeëa gopébhyo
     dattaà kåñëä-taöe çubhe

     nämnäm—of names; saharsam—thousand; divyänäm—divine; vakñyämi—I will tell; tava—to you; ca—and; agratah—in the presence; gargäcäryeëa—by Garga Muni; gopébhyah—to the gopés; dattam—given; kåñëä-taöe—on the shore of the Yamunä; çubhe—beautiful.

     I will tell you Lord Balaräma's thousand transcendental names, names that Garga Muni gave to the gopés on the beautiful bank of the Yamunä.

Text 4 
     oà asya çré-balabhadra-sahasra-näma-stotra-mantrasya gargäcärya åñih anuñöup chandah saìkarñaëah paramätmä devatä balabhadra iti béjaà revatéti çaktih ananta iti kélakaà balabhadra-préty-arthe jape viniyogah.

     om—Oà; asya—of Him; çré-balabhadra-sahasra-näma-stotra-mantrasya—of the mantra-prayer of thethousand names of Lord Balaräma; gargäcärya—Garga Muni; åñih—the sage; anuñöup—Anuñöup; chandah—the meter; saìkarñaëah—Balaräma; paramätmä—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; devatä—the Deity; balabhadra—balabhadra; iti—thus; béjam—the béja; revaté—Revaté; iti—thus; çaktih—the potency; anantah—Ananta; iti—thus; kélakam—the kélaka; balabhadra-préty-arthe—for the satisfaction of Lord Balaräma; jape—in chanting; viniyogah—stablished.

     Oà. Of the mantra-prayer of the thousand names of Lord Balaräma the sage is Garga Muni, the meter is anuñöup, the Deity is Lord Balaräma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the béja is Balabhadra, the çakti is Revaté, the kélaka is Ananta, and the purpose of chanting the names is the pleasure of Lord Balaräma.

Text 4 (b)

atha dhyänam 
sphurad-amala-kiréöaà kiìkiëé-kaìkaëärhaà
     calad-alaka-kapolaà kuëòala-çré-mukhäbjam
tuhina-giri-manojïaà néla-meghämbaräòhyaà
     hala-musala-viçälaà käma-pälaà saméòe

     atha—now; dhyänam—the meditation; sphurad-amala-kiréöam—a splendid crown; kiìkiëé-kaìkaëärham—with bracelets and tinkling ornaments; calad-alaka-kapolam—with locks of hair moving on His cheeks; kuëòala-çré-mukhäbjam—His lotus face decorated with earrings; tuhina-giri-manojnam—charming like a mountain of ice and snow; néla-meghämbaräòhyam—dressed in garmants like dark clouds; hala-musala-viçälam—holding a great plow and club; käma-pälam—fulfilling desires; saméòe—I praise.

Meditation

     I glorify Lord Balaräma, decorated with a glittering crown, bracelets, tinkling ornaments, moving locks of hair on His cheeks, splendid earrings on His handsome lotus face, and garments dark like monsoon clouds, holding a great club and plow, fulfilling all desires, and handsome like a mountain of ice and snow.

Text 5

oà balabhadro rämabhadro
     rämah saìkarñaëo 'cyutah
revaté-ramaëo devah
     käma-pälo haläyudhah

     Oà. Lord Balaräma is supremely powerful and happy (balabhadra), the supreme enjoyer (rämabhadra and (räma), all-attractive (saìkarñaëa), infallible (acyuta), the lover of Revaté (revaté-ramaëa), the splendid Supreme Personality of Godhead (deva), the Lord who fulfills desires (käma-päla), and He who carries a plow-weapon (haläyudha).

Text 6 

nélämbarah çveta-varëo
     baladevo 'cyutägrajah
pralambaghno mahä-véro
     rauhiëeyah pratäpavän

     He is dressed in blue garments (nélämbara), fair-complexioned (çveta-varëa), splendid and powerful (baladeva), the elder brother of the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead (acyutägraja), the killer of Pralamba (pralambaghna), a great hero (mahä-véra), the son of Rohiëé (rauhiëeya), and very powerful (pratäpavän).

Text 7 

täläìko musalé halé
     harir yadu-varo balé
séra-päëih padma-päëir
     laguòé venu-vädanah

     He bears the insignia of a palm tree (täläìka), holds a club (musalé), holds a plow (halé), takes away all that is inauspicious (hari), is the best of the Yadus (yadu-vara), is powerful (balé), holds a plow in His hand (séra-päëi), has lotus hands (padma-päëi), holds a club (laguòé), and plays the flute (venu-vädana).

Text 8 

kälindé-bhedano véro
     balah prabalah ürdhvagah
väsudeva-kalänantah
     sahasra-vadanah svaräö

     He divided the Yamunä (kälindé-bhedana). He is a heroic (véra), powerful (bala, and prabala), exalted (ürdhvaga), a plenary expansion of Lord Kåñëa (väsudeva-kalä), and limitless (ananta), has a thousand heads (sahasra-vadana), and is independent (svaräö).

Text 9 

vasur vasumaté-bhartä
     väsudevo vasüttamah
yadüttamo yädavendro
     mädhavo våñëi-vallabhah

     He is opulent (vasu), the goddess of fortune's husband (vasumaté-bhartä), the son of Vasudeva (väsudeva), the best of the Vasus (vasüttama), the best of the Yädavas (yadüttama), the king of the Yädavas (yädavendra), the goddess of fortune's husband (mädhava), and dear to the Våñëis (våñëi-vallabha).

Text 10 
dvärakeço mäthureço
     däné mäné mahä-manäh
pürëah puräëah puruñah
     pareçah parameçvarah

     He is the king of Dvärakä (dvärakeça), the king of Mathurä (mäthureça), generous (däné), noble (mäné), noble-hearted (mahä-manä), perfect (pürëa), the ancient Supreme Personality of Godhead (puräëa), the Supreme Person (puruña), the Supreme Master (pareça), and the Supreme Controller (parameçvara).

Text 11 
paripürëatamah säkñät
     paramah puruñottamah
anantah çäçvatah çeño
     bhagavän prakåteh parah

     He is the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead (paripürëatama), the Supreme Personality of Godhead directly (säkñät-parama), the Supreme Person (puruñottama), limitless (ananta), eternal (çäçvata), Lord Çeña (çeña), the supremely opulent Lord (bhagavän), and beyond the world of matter (prakåteh para).

Text 12 
jévätmä paramätmä ca
     hy antarätmä dhruvo 'vyayah
catur-vyühaç catur-vedaç
     catur-mürtiç catuñ-padah

     He is the father of all living entities (jévätmä), the Supersoul present in everyone's heart (paramätmä and antarätmä), eternal (dhruva), imperishable (avyaya), the origin of the catur-vyüha expansions (catur-vyüha), the author of the four Vedas (catur-veda), the origin of the catur-vyüha (catur-mürti), and the master of the four worlds (catuñ-pada).

Text 13 
pradhänaà prakåtih säkñé
     saìghätah saìghavän sakhé
mahä-manä buddhi-sakhaç
     ceto 'haìkära ävåtah

     He is pradhäna (pradhäna), prakåti (prakåti), the witness (säkñé), accompanied by His associates (saìghäta, saìghavän, and sakhé), noble-hearted (mahä-manä), and the best counselor (buddhi-sakha). He is consciousness (ceta), and ego (ahaìkära). He is accompanied by His associates (ävåta).

Text 14 
indriyeço devatätmä
     jïänaà karma ca çarma ca
advitéyo dvitéyaç ca
     niräkäro niraïjanah

     He is the master of the senses (indriyeça), the Supreme Personality of Godhead (devatä), the Supersoul (ätmä), knowledge (jïäna), action (karma), auspiciousness (çarma), one without a second (advitéya), different from the individual living entities (dvitéya), a person whose form is not material (niräkära), and not touched by matter (niraïjana).

Text 15 
viräö samräö mahaughaç ca
     dhärah sthäsnuç cariñëumän
phaëéndrah phaëi-räjaç ca
     sahasra-phaëa-maëòitah 

     He is the entire universe (viräö), the supreme monarch (samräö), a great flood (mahaugha), the maintainer of all (dhära), unmoving (sthäsnu), going everywhere (cariñëumän), the king of serpents (phaëéndra, and phaëi-räja), and the serpent with a thousand hoods (sahasra-phaëa-maëòita).

Text 16 
phaëéçvarah phaëé sphürtih
     phutkäré citkarah prabhuh
maëi-häro maëi-dharo
     vitalé sutalé talé

     He is the king of serpents (phaëéçvara, and phaëé), the Supreme Personality of Godhead who has appeared in the material world (sphürti), a hissing serpent (phutkäré, and citkara), the supreme master (prabhu), and decorated with a jewel necklace (maëi-hära, and maëi-dhara). He resides in Vitalaloka (vitalé), Sutalaloka (sutalé), and Talaloka (talé).

Text 17 
atalé sutaleçaç ca
     pätälaç ca talätalah
rasätalo bhogitalah
     sphurad-danto mahätalah

     He resides in Atalaloka (atalé), and is the king of Sutalaloka (sutaleça). He resides in Pätälaloka (pätäla), Talätalaloka (talätala), and Rasätalaloka (rasätala). He has great hoods (bhogitala), and glittering fangs (sphurad-danta). He resides on Mahätalaloka (mahätala).

Text 18 
väsukih çaìkhacüòäbho
     devadatto dhanaïjayah
kambaläçvo vegataro
     dhåtaräñöo mahä-bhujah

     He is Väsuki (väsuki). He is splendid like a conch-jewel (çaìkhacüòäbha), is the benefactor of the demigods (devadatta), and is the winner of wealth (dhanaïjaya). He is Kambaläçva (kambaläçva). He is the fastest (vegatara), the king (dhåtaräñöa), and the hero of mighty arms (mahä-bhuja).

Text 19 
väruëé-mada-mattäìgo
     mada-ghürëita-locanah
padmäkñah padma-mälé ca
     vanamälé madhuçraväh

     He is intoxicated by drinking väruëé (väruëé-mada-mattäìga), His eyes roll in intoxication (mada-ghürëita-locana), His eyes are lotus flowers (padmäkña), He wears a lotus garland (padma-mälé), and a forest garland (vanamälé), and His fame is sweet (madhuçravä).

Text 20 
koöi-kandarpa-lävaëyo
     näga-kanyä-samärcitah
nüpuré kaöisütré ca
     kaöaké kanakäìgadé

     He is more handsome than millions of Kämadevas (koöi-kandarpa-lävaëya), and He is worshiped by the näga-kanyäs (näga-kanyä-samärcita). He wears tinkling anklets (nüpuré), a belt (kaöisütré), golden bracelets (kaöaké), and golden armlets (kanakäìgadé).

Text 21 
mukuöé kuëòalé daëòé
     çikhaëòé khaëòa-maëòalé
kalih kali-priyah kälo
     niväta-kavaceçvarah

     He wears a crown (mukuöé) and earrings (kuëòalé). He carries a staff (daëòé). He wears a peacock featHer (çikhaëòé), and a khaëòa-maëòala (khaëòa-maëòalé). He likes to fight (kali and kali-priya), He is time (käla), and He is fitted with armor (niväta-kavaceçvara).

Text 22 
saàhära-kåd rudra-vapuh
     kälägnih pralayo layah
mahähih päëinih çästra-
     bhäñyä-kärah pataïjalih

     He destroys the universe (saàhära-kåt). He is the forms of the Rudras (rudra-vapu), the fire of time (kälägni), the destruction of the universe (pralaya and laya), a great serpent (mahähi), Päëini (päëini), the author of commentaries (çästra-bhäñyä-kära), and Pataïjali (pataïjali).

Text 23 
kätyäyanah pakvimäbhah
     sphoöäyana uraìgamah
vaikuëöho yäjïiko yajïo
     vämano hariëo harih

     He is Kätyäyana (kätyäyana), and He is glorious (pakvimäbhah and sphoöäyana). He is the serpent Ananta (uraìgama). He is the master of the spiritual world (vaikuëöha), the performer of yajïas  (yäjïika) yajïa itself (yajïa), Vämana (vämana), fair-compexioned (hariëa), and Lord Hari (hari).

Text 24 
kåñëo viñëur mahä-viñëuh
     prabhaviñëur viçeña-vit
haàso yogeçvaro kürmo
     varäho närado munih

     He is Kåñëa (kåñëa), Viñëu (viñëu), Mahä-viñëu (mahä-viñëu), all-powerful (prabhaviñëu), all-knowing (viçeña-vit), like a swan (haàsa), the master of yoga (yogeçvara), Kürma (kürma), Varäha (varäha), Närada (närada), and a great sage (muni).

Text 25 
sanakah kapilo matsyah
     kamaöho deva-maìgalaù
dattätreyah påthur våddha
     åñabho bhärgavottamah

     He is Sanaka (sanaka), Kapila (kapila), Matsya (matsya and kamaöha), the auspiciousness of the demigods (deva-maìgala), Dattätreya (dattätreya), Påthu (påthu), Våddha (våddha), Åñabha (åñabha), and the best of the Bhågu dynasty (bhärgavottama).

Text 26 
dhanvantarir nåsiàhaç ca
     kalkir näräyaëo narah
rämacandro räghavendrah
     koçalendro raghüdvahah

     He is Dhanvantari (dhanvantari), Nåsiàha (nåsiàha), Kalki (kalki), Näräyaëa (näräyaëa), Nara (nara), and Rämacandra (rämacandra, räghavendra, koçalendra, and raghüdvaha).

Text 27 
käkutsthah karuëä-sindhu
     räjendrah sarva-lakñaëah
çüro däçarathis trätä
     kauçalyänanda-vardhanah

     He is the most exalted (käkutstha), and ocean of mercy (karuëä-sindhu), the king of kings (räjendra), all glorious (sarva-lakñaëa), heroic (çüra), the son od Daçaratha (däçarathi), the great protector (trätä), and the bliss of Kauçalyä (kauçalyänanda-vardhana).

Text 28 
saumitrir bharato dhanvé
     çatrughnah çatru-täpanah
niñäìgé kavacé khaògé
     çaré jyähata-koñöhakah

     He is the son of Sumiträ (saumitri), Bharata (bharata), a great bowman (dhanvé), Çatrughna (çatrughna and çatru-täpana), a great bowman (niñäìgé), a warrior wearing armor (kavacé), a warrior carrying a sword (khaògé), and a great bowman (çaré and jyähata-koñöhaka).

Text 29 
baddha-godhäìguli-träëah
     çambhu-kodaëòa-bhaïjanah
yajïa-trätä yajïa-bhartä
     märéca-vadha-kärakah

     He wears the shoulder and finger armor of a bowman (baddha-godhäìguli-traëa). He broke Lord Çiva's bow (çambhu-kodaëòa-bhaïjana). He protected the yajïa (yajïa-trätä and yajïa-bhartä). He killed Maréca (märéca-vadha-käraka).

Text 30 
asuräris täöakärir
     vibhéñaëa-sahäya-kåt
pitå-väkya-karo harñé
     virädhärir vanecarah

     He is the enemy of the demons (asuräri), the enemy of Täöaka (täöakäri), the ally of Vibhéñaëa (vibhéñaëa-sahäya-kåt), a son who followed His father's order (pitå-väkya-kara), (harñé), happy (virädhäri), and the Lord who wandered in the forest (vanecara).

Text 31 
munir muni-priyaç citra-
     kutaräëya-niväsa-kåt
kabandhahä daëòakeço
     rämo räjiva-locanah

     He is a sage (muni), dear to the sages (muni-priya), a resident of Citraküöa forest (citraküöaräëya-niväsa-kåt), the killer of Kabandha (kabandhahä), the master of Daëòaka forest (daëòakeça), Lord Räma (räma), and lotus-eyed (räjiva-locana).

Text 32 
mataìga-vana-saïcäré
     netä païcavaté-patih
sugrévah sugréva-sakho
     hanumat-préta-mänasah

     He wandered in Mataìga forest (mataìga-vana-saïcäré). He is supreme leader (netä). He is the master of Païcavaté forest (païcavaté-pati). He has a graceful neck (sugréva), and is the friend of Sugréva (sugréva-sakha). In His heart He loves Hanumän (hanumat-préta-mänasa).

Text 33 
setubandho rävaëärir
     laìkä-dahana-tat-parah
rävaëyärih puñpakastho
     jänaké-virahäturah

     He built the bridge at Setubandha (setubandha), is the enemy of Rävaëa (rävaëäri), burned Laìkä to the ground (laìkä-dahana-tat-para), is the enemy of Rävaëa (rävaëyäri), traveled in a flower-chariot (puñpakastha), and was distressed in separation from Sétä (jänaké-virahätura).

Text 34 

ayodhyädhipatih çrémal
     lavaëärih surärcitah
sürya-vaàçé candra-vaàçé
     vaàçé-vädya-viçäradah

     He was the king of Ayodhyä (ayodhyädhipati), handsome and glorious (çrémal), the enemy of Lavaëäsura (lavaëäri), worshiped by the devas (surärcita), born in the Sürya dynasty (sürya-vaàçé), born in the Candra dynasty (candra-vaàçé), and expert at playful the flute (vaàçé-vädya-viçärada).

Text 35 
gopatir gopa-våndeço
     gopo gopéçatävåtaù
gokuleço gopa-putro
     gopälo go-gaëäçrayaù

     He is the master of the surabhi cows (gopati), the master of the gopas (gopa-våndeça), a gopa (gopa), surrounded by hundred of gopés (gopéçatävåta), the master of Gokula (gokuleça), the son of a gopa (gopa-putra), the protector of the cows (gopäla), and the shelter of the cows (go-gaëäçraya).

Text 36 
pütanärir bakäriç ca
     tåëävarta-nipätakah
aghärir dhenukäriç ca
     pralambärir vrajeçvarah

     He is the enemy of Pütanä (pütanäri), the enemy of Baka (bakäri), the killer of Tåëävarta (tåëävarta-nipätaka), the enemy of Aghäsura (aghäri), the enemy of Dhenuka (dhenukäri), the enemy of Pralamba (pralambäri), and the king of Vraja (vrajeçvara).

Text 37 
ariñöa-hä keçi-çatrur
     vyomäsura-vinäça-kåt
agni-päno dugdha-päno
     våndävana-latäçritah

     He is the killer of Ariñöa (ariñöa-hä), the enemy of Keçé (keçi-çatru), the killer of Vyomäsura (vyomäsura-vinäça-kåt), the swallower of a forest-fire (agni-päna), a child who drinks milk (dugdha-päna), and a boy who stays among the flowering vines of Våndävana forest (våndävana-latäçrita).

Text 38 
yaçomati-suto bhavyo
     rohiné-lalitah çiçuh
räsa-maëòala-madhya-stho

     räsa-maëòala-maëòaëah

     He is the son of Yaçodä (yaçomati-suta), glorious, charming, handsome, and auspicious (bhavya), a child who plays with Rohiëé (rohiné-lalita), a child (çiçu), the dancer in the middle of the räsa-dance circle (räsa-maëòala-madhya-stha), and the ornament of the räsa-dance circle (räsa-maëòala-maëòaëa).

Text 39 
gopikä-çata-yüthärthé
     çaìkhacüòa-vadhodyatah
govardhana-samuddhartä
     çakra-jid vraja-rakñakah

     He yearns to enjoy pastimes with hundreds of gopés (gopikä-çata-yüthärthé). He is the killer of Çaìkhacüòa (çaìkhacüòa-vadhodyata), the lifter of Givardhana Hill (govardhana-samuddhartä), the warrior who defeated Indra (çakra-jid), and the protector of Vraja (vraja-rakñaka).

Text 40 
våñabhänu-varo nanda
     änando nanda-vardhanah
nanda-räja-sutah çréçah
     kaàsärih käliyäntakah

     He is the groom King Våñabhänu chose for his daughter (våñabhänu-vara). He is bliss personified (nanda and änanda), delightful (nanda-vardhana), the son of King Nanda (nanda-räja-suta), the master of the goddess of fortune (çréça), the enemy of Kaàsa (kaàsäri), and the subduer of Käliya (käliyäntaka).

Text 41 
rajakärir muñöikärih
     kaàsa-kodaëòa-bhaïjanah
cänurärih küöa-hantä
     çaläris toçaläntakah

     He is the enemy of a washerman (rajakäri), the enemy of Muñöika (muñöikäri), the breaker of Kaàsa's bow (kaàsa-kodaëòa-bhaïjana), the enemy of Cäëüra (cäëüräri), the killer of Küöa (küöa-hantä), the enemy of Çäla (çaläri), and the killer of Toçala (toçaläntaka).

Text 42 
kaàsa-bhratå-nihantä ca
     malla-yuddha-pravärtakah
gaja-hantä kaàsa-hantä
     käla-hantä kalaìka-hä

     He is the killer of Kaàsa's brothers (kaàsa-bhratå-nihantä), an expert wrestler (malla-yuddha-pravärtaka), the killer of an elephant (gaja-hantä), the killer of Kaàsa (kaàsa-hantä), the killer of Käla (käla-hantä), and the killer of Kalaìka (kalaìka-hä).

Text 43 
mägadhärir yavana-hä
     päëòu-putra-sahäya-kåt
catur-bhujah çyämaläìgah
     saumyaç caupagavi-priyah

     He is the enemy of Jaräsandha (mägadhäri), the killer of Kälayavana (yavana-hä), the ally of the Päëòavas (päëòu-putra-sahäya-kåt), four-armed Lord Näräyaëa (catur-bhuja), dark-complexioned Lord Kåñëa (çyämaläìga), gentle (saumya), and dear to Aupagavi (aupagavi-priya).

Text 44 
yuddha-bhåd uddhava-sakhä
     mantré mantra-viçäradah
véra-hä véra-mathanah
     çaìkha-cakra-gadä-dharah

     He is a warrior (yuddha-bhåd), the friend of Uddhava (uddhava-sakhä), a counselor (mantré), expert at giving counsel (mantra-viçärada), a killer of great warriors (véra-hä and véra-mathana), and the holder of a conch, disc, and club (çaìkha-cakra-gadä-dhara).

Text 45 
revaté-citta-hartä ca
     raivaté-harña-vardhanah
revaté-präëa-näthaç ca
     revaté-priya-kärakah

     He charmed Revaté's heart (revaté-citta-hartä), delighted Revaté (raivaté-harña-vardhana), is the Lord of Revaté's life (revaté-präëa-nätha), and is the delight of Revaté (revaté-priya-käraka).

Text 46 
jyotir jyotiñmaté-bhartä
     revatädri-vihära-kåt
dhåta-nätho dhanädhyakño
     dänädhyakño dhaneçvarah

     He is splendor (jyoti), the master of Jyotiñmaté (jyotiñmaté-bhartä), the enjoyer of pastimes on Mount Revata (revatädri-vihära-kåt), the master of patience and tolerance (dhåta-nätha), the final judge (dhanädhyakña), (dänädhyakña), and the master of wealth (dhaneçvara).

Text 47 
maithilärcita-pädabjo
     mänado bhakta-vatsalah
duryodhana-gurur gurvé
     gadä-çikñä-karah kñamé

     His lotus feet were worshiped by the people of Mithilä (maithilärcita-pädabja), He gives honor to others (mänada), He loves His devotees (bhakta-vatsala), He is the guru of Duryodhana (duryodhana-guru), He is devoted to His guru (gurvé), He taught the art of fighting with a club (gadä-çikñä-kara), and He is tolerant and forgiving (kñamé).

Text 48 
murärir madano mando
     'niruddho dhanvinäà varah
kalpa-våkñah kalpa-våkñé
     kalpa-våkña-vana-prabhuh

     He is the enemy of Mura (muräri), handsome like Kämadeva (madana), gentle (manda), invincible (aniruddha), the best of bowmen (dhanvinäà vara), a kalpa-våkña tree (kalpa-våkña and kalpa-våkñé), and the master of a forest of (kalpa-våkña trees (kalpa-våkña-vana-prabhu).

Text 49 
symantaka-maëir mänyo
     gäëòivé kairaveçvarah
kumbhäëòa-khaëòana-karah
     küpakarëa-prahära-kåt

     He is the owner of the Syamantaka jewel (symantaka-maëi), glorious (mänya), the friend of Arjuna (gäëòivé), the king of the Kauravas (kauraveçvara), the killer of Kumbäëòha (kumbhäëòa-khaëòana-kara), and the killer of Küpakarëa (küpakarëa-prahära-kåt).

Text 50 
sevyo raivata-jämätä
     madhu-mädhava-sevitah
baliñöha-puñöa-sarväìgo
     håñöah puñöah praharñitah

     He is the final object of devotional service (sevya), the son-in-law of King Revata (raivata-jämätä), served by Lord Kåñëa and the residents of Mathurä (madhu-mädhava-sevita), most powerful in every limb (baliñöha-puñöa-sarväìga), happy (håñöa and praharñita), and stout and strong (puñöa).

Text 51 

väräëasé-gatah kruddhah
     sarvah pauëòraka-ghätakah
sunandé çikharé çilpé
     dviviòäìga-niñüdanah

     He traveled to Väräëasé (väräëasé-gata). He may become angry (kruddha). He is everything (sarva). He killed Pauëòraka (pauëòraka-ghätaka). He carries the sword Sunanda (sunandé), wears a crown (çikharé), is artistic (çilpé), and killed Dviviòa (dviviòäìga-niñüdana).

     Note: Sunanda is the name of Lord Kåñëa's sword.

Text 52 

hastinäpura-saìkarñé
     rathé kaurava-püjitah
viçva-karmä viçva-dharmä
     deva-çarmä dayä-nidhih

     He dragged the city of Hastinäpura (hastinäpura-saìkarñé), is a great chariot-warrior (rathé), is worshiped by the Kauravas (kaurava-püjita), created the universes (viçva-karmä), is the giver of religon to the universes (viçva-dharmä), is the happiness of the demigods (deva-çarmä), and is an ocean of mercy (dayä-nidhi).

Text 53 
mahä-räja-cchatra-dharo
     mahä-räjopalakñaëah
siddha-gétah siddha-kathah
     çukla-cämara-véjitah

     He holds the royal parasol (mahä-räja-cchatra-dhara), has all the qualities of a great king (mahä-räjopalakñaëa), is glorified by the siddhas (siddha-géta and siddha-katha), and is fanned with white cämaras (çukla-cämara-véjita).

Text 54 
täräkñah kéranäsaç ca
     bimboñöhah su-smita-cchavih
karéndra-kära-kodaëòah
     pracaëòo megha-maëòalah

     His eyes are glittering stars (täräkña), His nose is graceful like a parrot's beak (kéranäsa), His lips are bimba fruits (bimboñöha), His gentle smile is splendid and glorious (su-smita-cchavi), His arms are elephants' trunks (karéndra-kära-kodaëòa), He is ferocious (pracaëòa), and He is splendid like a host of monsoon clouds (megha-maëòala).

Text 55 

kapäöa-vakñah pénäàsah
     padma-päda-sphurad-dyutih
mahä-vibhütir bhüteço
     bandha-mokñé samékñaëah

     His chest is a great door (kapäöa-vakña), His shoulders are broad (pénäàsa), His feet are splendid lotus flowers (padma-päda-sphurad-dyuti), He is very powerful and glorious (mahä-vibhüti), He is the master of all living entities (bhüteça), He is the liberator from material bondage (bandha-mokñé), and He is the most wise and intelligent (samékñaëa).

Text 56 
caidya-çatruh çatru-sandho
     dantavakra-niñüdakah
ajäta-çatruh päpa-ghno
    hari-däsa-sahäya-kåt

     He is the enemy of Çiçupäla (caidya-çatru), the end of His enemies (çatru-sandha), the killer of Dantavakra (dantavakra-niñüdaka), a person who has no enemy (ajäta-çatru), the destroyer of sins (päpa-ghna), and the ally of Lord Kåñëa's servants (hari-däsa-sahäya-kåt).

Text 57 
çäla-bähuh çälva-hantä
     tértha-yäyé janeçvarah
naimiñäraëya-yäträrthé
     gomaté-téra-väsa-kåt

     His arms are like palm trees (çäla-bähu). He is the killer of Çälva (çälva-hantä), a pilgrim (tértha-yäyé), the master of all living entities (janeçvara), a pilgrim to Naimiñäraëya (naimiñäraëya-yäträrthé), and He who lived by the Gomaté river (gomaté-téra-väsa-kåt).

Text 58 
gaëòaké-snäna-vän sragvé
     vaijayanté-viräjitah
amläna-paìkaja-dharo
     vipäçé soëa-samplutah

     He bathed in the Gaëòaké river (gaëòaké-snäna-vän), wears a garland (sragvé), is splendid with a Vaijayanté garland (vaijayanté-viräjita), holds an unfading lotus (amläna-paìkaja-dhara), visited the Vipäçä river (vipäçé), and bathed in the Soëa river (soëa-sampluta).

Text 59 
prayäga-tértha-räjaç ca
     sarayüh setu-bandhanah
gayä-çiraç ca dhanadah
     paulastyah pulahäçramah

     He visited Prayäga, the king of holy places (prayäga-tértha-räja), and He also visited the Saräyu river (sarayü), and Setubandha (setu-bandhana). He touched His head to the holy city of Gayä (gayä-çira). He gives wealth in charity (dhanada). He visited the sage Pulastya (paulastya), and He visted the äçrama of the sage Pulaha (pulahäçrama).

Text 60 
gaìgä-sägara-saìgärthé
     sapta-godävaré-patih
veëé bhimärthé godä
     tämraparëé vaöodakä

     He visited Gaìgä-sägara (gaìgä-sägara-saìgärthé). He is the master of the seven Godävarés (sapta-godävaré-pati). He is the Veëé (veëé), Bhémarathé (bhémarathé), Godä (godä), Tämraparëé (tämraparëé), and Vaöodakä rivers (vaöodakä).

Text 61 
kåtamälä mahä-puëyä
     kaveré ca payasviné
pratécé suprabhä veëé
     triveëé sarayüpamä

     He is the Kåtamälä) (kåtamälä), Mahä-puëyä (mahä-puëyä), Kaveré (kaveré), Payasviné (payasviné), Pratécé (pratécé), Suprabhä (suprabhä), Veëé (veëé), Triveëé (triveëé), and and Sarayüpamä rivers (sarayüpamä).

Text 62 
kåñëä pampä narmadä ca
     gaìgä bhägérathé nadé
siddhäçramah prabhäsaç ca
     bindur bindu-sarovarah

     He is the Kåñëä (kåñëä), Pampä (pampä), Narmadä (narmadä), Gaìgä (gaìgä), and Bhägérathé rivers (bhägérathé). He is all sacred rivers (nadé). He is Siddhäçrama (siddhäçrama), Prabhäsa (prabhäsa), Bindu (bindu), and Bindu-sarovara (bindu-sarovara).

Text 63 
puñkarah saindhavo jambü
     nara-näräyaëäçramah
kurukñetra-paté rämo
     jämadagnyo mahä-munih

     He is Puñkara (puñkara), Saindhava (saindhava), Jambü (jambü), and Nara-näräyaëäçrama (nara-näräyaëäçrama). He is the master of Kurukñetra (kurukñetra-paté). He is Lord Räma (räma). He is Paraçuräma (jämadagnya). He is a great sage (mahä-muni).

Text 64 
ilvalätmaja-hantä ca
     sudäma-saukhya-däyakah
viçva-jid viçva-näthaç ca
     triloka-vijayé jayé

     He killed Narakäsura (ilvalätmaja-hantä), delighted Sudhämä (sudäma-saukhya-däyaka), conquered the universe (viçva-jid), is the master of the universe (viçva-nätha), is the master of the three worlds (triloka-vijayé), and is victorious (jayé).

Text 65 
vasanta-mälaté-karñé
     gado gadyo gadägrajah
guëärëavo guëa-nidhir
     guëa-pätro guëäkarah

     He is glorious with vasanta and mälaté flowers (vasanta-mälaté-karñé). He is strong like a great mace (gada). He is expert at fighting with a mace (gadya). He is the elder brother of Gada (gadägraja). He is an ocean of virtues (guëärëava and guëa-nidhi), and a reservoir of virtues (guëa-pätra and guëäkara).

Text 66 
raìgavallé-jaläkäro
     nirguëah saguëo båhat
dåñöah çruto bhavad bhüto
     bhaviñyac cälpa-vigrahah

     He is decorated with vine-flowers (raìgavallé), enjoys water-pastimes (jaläkära), is beyond the modes of material nature (nirguëa), is filled with transcendental qualities (saguëa), is the greatest (båhat), is seen by the great devotees (dåñöa), is heard by the great devotees (çruta), and is the present (bhavad), the past (bhüta), and the future (bhaviñyat). He is the Supersoul, whose form is so small He stays in every atom (alpa-vigraha).

Text 67 
anädir ädir änandah
     pratyag-dhäma nirantarah
guëätétah samah sämyah
     sama-dåì nirvikalpakah

     He is without beginning (anädi), is the beginning of everything (ädi), is bliss personified (änanda), is the Supersoul who stays in everyone's heart (pratyag-dhäma), is eternal (nirantara), is beyond the modes of nature (guëätéta), is equal to all (sama, sämya and nirvikalpaka), and sees everyone with equal vision (sama-dåk).

Text 68 
güòha-vyüòho guëo gauëo
     guëäbhäso guëävåtah
nityo 'kñaro nirvikäro
     'kñaro 'jasra-sukho 'måtah

     He is concealed (güòhä) and He is openly manifested (vyüòha). He is filled with transcendental virtues (guëa, gauëa, guëäbhäsa, and guëävåta). He eternal (nitya), imperishable (akñara), unchanging (nirvikära), undying (akñara), always happy (ajasra-sukha), and like nectar (amåta).

Text 69 
sarvagah sarvavit särthah
     sama-buddhih sama-prabhah
akledyo 'cchedya äpürëo
     'çoñyo 'dähyo nivartakah

     He is all-pervading (sarvaga), all-knowing (sarvavit), the most valuable (särtha), equal to all (sama-buddhi and sama-prabha), untouched by water (akledya), unbreakable (acchedya), perfect and complete (äpürëa), never dried or withered (açoñya), and never to be burned by fire (adähya). He is the destroyer of the worlds (nivartaka).

Text 70 
brahma brahma-dharo brahmä
     jïäpako vyäpakah kavih
adhyätmako 'dhibhütaç cä-
     dhidaivah sväçrayäçrayah

     He is Brahman (brahma), the origin of Brahman (brahma-dhara), the origin of demigod Brahmä (brahmä), the supreme teacher (jïäpaka), all-pervading (vyäpaka), and the greatest philosopher (kavi). He is present in the hearts of all living entities (adhyätmaka). He is present in the material elements (adhibhüta). He is present among the demigods (adhidaiva). He is the shelter of all shelters (sväçrayäçraya).

Text 71 
mahä-väyur mahä-véraç
     ceñöä-rüpa-tanu-sthitah
prerako bodhako bodhé
     trayo-viàçatiko gaëah

     He is the great wind (mahä-väyu). He is a great hero (mahä-véra). As the power of action He stays in every body (ceñöä-rüpa-tanu-sthita). He inspires the living entities (preraka), and enlightens them (bodhaka). He is the mist wise (bodhé). He is the master of the demigods (trayo-viàçatika-gaëa).

Text 72 
aàçäàçaç ca naräveço
     'vatäro bhüpari-sthitah
mahar janas tapah satyaà
     bhür bhuvah svar iti tridhä

     He expands in many incarnations (aàçäàça). He appears as a çakty-äveça incarnation (naräveça). He descends to the material world (avatära and bhüpari-sthita). He is Maharloka (mahah), Janaloka (jana), Tapoloka (tapah), and Satyaloka (satyam). He is the three planetary systems: Bhüloka (bhü), Bhuvarloka (bhuvah), Svarloka (svah). 
Text 73 
naimittikah präkåtika
     ätyantika-mayo layah
sargo visargah sargädir
     nirodho rodha ütimän

     Although He appears in the material world (naimittika and präkåtika), He is eternal (ätyantika-maya). He is cosmic devastation (laya), cosmic creation (sarga), the secondary stage of cosmic creation (visarga), and the beginning of creation (
sargädi). He is the greatest obstacle (nirodha and rodha), and the greatest protector (ütimän).

Text 74 
manvantarävatäraç ca
     manur manu-suto 'naghah
svayambhüh çämbhavah çaìkuh
     sväyambhuva-sahäya-kåt

     He appears as the Manvantarävatäras (manvantarävatära). He is Manu (manu) and the sons of Manu (manu-suta). He is sinless (anagha), self-born (svayambhü), and a friend of Lord Çiva (çämbhava). He is like a great lance (çaìku). He is the ally of Sväyambhuva Manu (sväyambhuva-sahäya-kåt).

Text 75 
surälayo deva-girir
     merur hemärcito girih
giriço gaëa-näthaç ca
     gairéço giri-gahvarah

     He is the home of the demigods (surälaya), the mountain of the demigods (deva-giri), Mount Meru (meru), splendid like gold (hemärcita), and a great ountain (giri). He stays on a mountain (giriça). He is the master of the devotees (gaëa-nätha) and a friend of Lord Çiva (gairéça). He stays in a mountain cave (giri-gahvara).

Text 76 
vindhyas triküöo mainäkah
     subalah päribhadrakah
pataìgah çiçirah kaìko
     järudhih çaila-sattamah

     He is the Vindhyä mountains (vindhya), Mount Triküöa (triküöa), and Mount Mainäka (mainäka). He is very powerful (subala). He is the päribhadraka tree (päribhadraka), the sun (pataìga), the winter season ( çiçira), Yama (kaìka), Järudhi (järudhi), and the best of mountains (çaila-sattama).

Text 77 
kälaïjaro brhat-sänur
     daré-bhån nandikeçvarah
santänas taru-räjaç ca
     mandärah pärijätakah

     He is Kälaïjara (kälaïjara) and Brhat-sänu (brhat-sänu). He stays in a mountain cave (daré-bhåt). He is Nandikeçvara (nandikeçvara), the santäna tree (santäna), the king of trees (taru-räja), the mandära tree (mandära), and the pärijäta tree (pärijätaka).

Text 78 
jayanta-kåj jayantäìgo
     jayanté-dig jayäkulah
våtra-hä devalokaç ca
     çaçé kumuda-bändhavah

     He is victorious (jayanta-kåt jayantäìga, jayanté-dig, and jayäkula). He is the killer of Våtra (våtra-hä). He is the planets of the demigods (devaloka), and the moon (çaçé and kumuda-bändhava).

Text 79 
nakñatreçah sudhä-sindhur
     mågah puñyah punarvasuh
hasto 'bhijic ca çravaëo
     vaidhåtir bhäskarodayah

     He is the moon (nakñatreça), an ocean of nectar (sudhä-sindhu), the star Mågaçérña (måga), the star Puñya (puñya), the star Punarvasu (punarvasu), the star Hasta (hasta), the star Abhijit (abhijit), and the star Çravaëa (çravaëa). He is the vaidhåti formation of the stars (vaidhåti), and He is the sunrise (bhäskarodaya).

Text 80 
aindrah sädhyah çubhah çuklo
     vyatépäto dhruvah sitah
çiçumäro devamayo
     brahmaloko vilakñaëah

     He is the star Aindra (aindra). He is Sädhyaloka (sädhya). He is the auspicious conjunction of stars (çubha). He is the bright fortnight (çukla). He is the astrological condition known as vyatépäta (vyatépäta). He is Dhruvaloka (dhruva). He is the bright fortnight (sita), the Çiçumära-cakra (çiçumära), the planets of the demigods (devamaya), and Brahmaloka (brahmaloka). He is beyond the material world (vilakñaëa).

Text 81 
rämo vaikuëöha-näthaç ca
     vyäpé vaikuëöha-näyakah
svetadvépo jita-pado
     lokälokäcaläçritah

     He is Lord Räma (räma). He is the master of Vaikuëöha (vaikuëöha-nätha and vaikuëöha-näyaka). He is all-pervading (vyäpé), the master of Çvetadvépa (svetadvépa), the Lord who has conquered everything (jita-pada), and the Lord who stays on Mount Lokäloka (lokälokäcaläçrita).

Text 82 
bhümi-vaikuëöha-devaç ca
     koöi-brahmäëòa-kärakah
asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-patir
     golokeço gaväm-patih

     He is the master of Bhümi-vaikuëöha (bhümi-vaikuëöha-deva), the creator of millions of universes (koöi-brahmäëòa-käraka), the master of countless universes (asaìkhya-brahmäëòa-pati), the master of Goloka (golokeça), and the master of the cows (gaväm-pati).

Text 83 
goloka-dhäma-dhiñaëo
     gopikä-kaëöha-bhüñaëah
çrédharah çrédharo lélä-
     dharo giri-dharo dhuré

     He resides in Goloka (goloka-dhäma-dhiñaëa). The gopés' embraces have become His necklace (gopikä-kaëöha-bhüñaëa). He is the master of the goddess of fortune (çrédhara). He is the master of all handsomeness, glory, and opulence (çrédhara). He is playful (lélä-dhara). He lifted Govardhana Hill (giri-dhara). He is the maintainer of the world (dhuré).

Text 84 
kunta-dhäré triçülé ca
     bébhatsé gharghara-svanah
çüla-sücy-arpita-gajo
     gaja-carma-dharo gajé

     He is Lord Çiva who carries a trident (kunta-dhäré and triçülé), who is terrifying (bébhatsé), who roars ferociously (gharghara-svana), who with His trident attacked an elephant (çüla-sücy-arpita-gaja), who wears an elephant-skin garemnt (gaja-carma-dhara), and who rides on an elephant (gajé).

Text 85 
antra-mälé muëòa-mälé
     vyälé daëòaka-maëòaluh
vetäla-bhåd bhüta-saìghah
     küñmäëòa-gaëa-samvåtah

     He is Lord Nåsiàha who wears a garland of entrails (antra-mälé). He is Lord Çiva who wears a necklace of skulls (muëòa-mälé), who is ferocious (vyälé), who carries a club (daëòaka-maëòalu), who is accompanied by Vetälas (vetäla-bhåd), who is accompanied by ghosts (bhüta-saìgha), and who is accompanied by Küñmäëòas (küñmäëòa-gaëa-samvåta).

Text 86 
pramatheçah paçu-patir
     måòänéço måòo våñah
kåtänta-käla-saìghärih
     küöah kalpänta-bhairavah

     He is Lord Çiva who is the master of the Pramathas (pramatheça), the master of the Paçus (paçu-pati), the husband of Pärvaté (måòänéça), gentle (måòa), powerful (våña), the killer of His enemies (kåtänta-käla-saìghäri), most exalted (küöa), and who appears as Bhairava at the end of time (kalpänta-bhairava).

Text 87 
ñaò-änano véra-bhadro
     dakña-yajïa-vighätakah
kharparäsé viñäçé ca
     çakti-hastah çivärthadah

     He is Kärttikeya, who has six heads (ñaò-änana). He is Vérabhadra (véra-bhadra). He destroyed the Dakña-yajïa (dakña-yajïa-vighätaka). He eats from a bowl that is a skull (kharparäsé). He drinks poison (viñäçé), holds a çakti weapon in His hand (çakti-hasta), and grants auspiciousness (çivärthada).

Text 88 
pinäka-öaìkära-karaç
     cala-jhaìkara-nüpurah
paëòitas tarka-vidvän vai
     veda-päöhé çrutéçvarah

     When He releases arrows from His bow it makes a great twanging sound (pinäka-öaìkära-kara). He wears tinkling anklets (cala-jhaìkara-nüpura). He is wise (paëòita), a master logician (tarka-vidvän), learned in the Vedas (veda-päöhé), and the master of the Vedas (çrutéçvara).

Text 89 
vedänta-kåt saìkhya-çästré
     mémäàsé kaëa-näma-bhäk
käëädir gautamo vädé
     vädo naiyäyiko nayah

     He is the author of Vedänta (vedänta-kåt), learned in Saìkhya (saìkhya-çästré), learned in Mémäàsä (mémäàsé), known by the name Kaëäda (kaëa-näma-bhäk and käëädi), known as Gautama (gautama), and expert in philosophical debate (vädé, väda, naiyäyika, and naya).

Text 90 
vaiçeñiko dharma-çästré
     sarva-çästrärtha-tattva-gah
vaiyäkaraëa-kåc chando
     vaiyyäsah präkåtir vacah

     He is learned in the Vaiçeña philosophy (vaiçeñika), learned in the dharma-çästras (dharma-çästré), learned in all the scriptures (sarva-çästrärtha-tattva-ga), the author of grammar (vaiyäkaraëa-kåt), learned in the meters of poetry (chanda), the Vyäsa's son (vaiyyäsa), nature (präkåti), and speech (vacah).

Text 91 
päräçaré-saàhita-vit
     kävya-kån näöaka-pradah
pauräëikah småti-karo
     vaidyo vidyä-viçäradah

     He is learned in the Paräçara-çästra (päräçaré-saàhita-vit), the author of poetry (kävya-kåt), the giver of dramas (näöaka-prada), learned in the Puräëas (pauräëika), the author of the Vedas (småti-kara), the first physician (vaidya), and very learned (vidyä-viçärada).

Text 92 
alaìkäro lakñaëärtho
     vyaìgya-viddhanavad-dhvanih
väkya-sphoöah pada-sphoöah
     sphoöa-våttiç ca särtha-vit

     He is the ornaments of poetry (alaìkära), the secondary meanings of words (lakñaëärtha), the hinted meanings of words (vyaìgya-viddhanavad-dhvani), and the meaning that first comes to mind when one hears a statement (väkya-sphoöa, pada-sphoöa, and (sphoöa-våtti). He knows the meanings of words (särtha-vit).

Text 93 
çåìgära ujjvalah svaccho
     'dbhuto häsyo bhayänakah
açvattho yava-bhojé ca
     yava-kréto yaväçanah

     He is decoration (çåìgära), splendor (ujjvala and svaccha), wonder (adbhuta), joking (häsya), fear (bhayänaka), the banyan tree (açvattha), and the philosopher Kaëäda (yava-bhojé, yava-kréta, and yaväçana).

Text 94 
prahläda-rakñakah snigdha
     aila-vaàça-vivardhanah
gatädhir ambaréñäìgo
     vigädhir gädhinäà varah

     He is the protector of Prahläda (prahläda-rakñaka), affectionate (snigdha), the glory of the Aila dynasty (aila-vaàça-vivardhana), free of anxiety (gatädhi), Ambaréña (ambaréñäìga), Gädhi (vigädhi), the best of Gädhi's descendents (gädhinäà vara).

Text 95 
nänä-maëi-samäkérëo
     nänä-ratna-vibhüñaëah
nänä-puñpa-dharah puñpé
     puñpa-dhanva su-puñpitah

     He is decorated with many jewels (nänä-maëi-samäkérëa and nänä-ratna-vibhüñaëa) and decorated with many flowers (nänä-puñpa-dhara, puñpé, and su-puñpita). He is Kämadeva who holds a bow of flowers (puñpa-dhanva).

Text 96 
nänä-candana-gandhäòhyo
     nänä-puñpa-rasärcitah
nänä-varëa-mayo varëo
     nänä-vastra-dharah sadä

     He is fragrant with sandal paste (nänä-candana-gandhäòhya), anointed with the fragrant juices of many flowers (nänä-puñpa-rasärcita), decorated with garments and ornaments of many colors (nänä-varëa-maya), glorious (varëa), always dressed in opulent and elaborate garments (nänä-vastra-dhara sadä).

Text 97 
nänä-padma-karah kauçé
     nänä-kauçeya-veña-dhåk
ratna-kambala-dhäré ca
     dhauta-vastra-samävåtah

     He holds many lotus flowers in His hand (nänä-padma-kara), is dressed in silk garments (kauçé nänä-kauçeya-veña-dhåk), wears a jewel cloak (ratna-kambala-dhäré), and is dressed in splendid clean garments (dhauta-vastra-samävåta).

Text 98 
uttaréya-dharah purëo
     ghana-kaïcuka-saìghavän
pétoñëéñah sitoñëéño
     raktoñëéño dig-ambarah

     He wears an upper garment (uttaréya-dhara). He is perfect (purëa). He wears strong armor (ghana-kaïcuka-saìghavän), a yellow turban (pétoñnéña), a white turban (sitoñëéña), or a red turban (raktoñëéña). Sometimes He wears the four directions as His garment (dig-ambara).

Text 99 
divyäìgo divya-racano
     divya-loka-vilokitah
sarvopamo nirupamo
     golokäìké-kåtäìgaëah

     His limbs are splendid (divyäìga), He is decorated with great splendor (divya-racana), the residents of Devaloka gaze on Him (divya-loka-vilokita), He is the best of all (sarvopama), He is without peer ( nirupama), and He stays with His associates in the realm of Goloka (golokäìké-kåtäìgaëa).

Text 100

kåta-svotsäìga-go lokah
     kuëòalé-bhüta ästhitah
mäthuro mathurä-darçé
     calat-khaïjana-locanah

     He stays in Goloka (kåta-svotsäìga-goloka), He is Lord Ananta (kuëòalé-bhüta), He is all-pervading (ästhita), He stays in Mathurä (mäthura), He gazes at the sights of Mathurä (mathurä-darçé), and His eyes are like restless khaïjana birds (calat-khaïjana-locana).

Text 101

dadhi-hartä dugdha-haro
     navanéta-sitäçanah
takra-bhuk takra-häré ca
     dadhi-caurya-kåta-çramah

     As a child He is a yogurt thief (dadhi-hartä), a milk thief (dugdha-hara), an eater of butter (navanéta-sitäçana), a drinker of buttermilk (takra-bhuk), a thief of buttermilk (takra-häré), and exhausted by stealing yogurt (dadhi-caurya-kåta-çrama).

Text 102 
prabhävaté-baddha-karo
     dämé dämodaro damé
sikatä-bhümi-cäré ca
     bäla-kelir vrajärbhakah

     As a child His hands were tied by His powerful mother (prabhävaté-baddha-kara), He was tied up (dämé), He was tied at the waist (dämodara), He was tied up (damé), He crawled on the ground (sikatä-bhümi-cäré), and He enjoyed the pastimes of a child (bäla-keli). He was a child in Vraja (vrajärbhaka).

Text 103 
dhüli-dhüsara-sarväìgah
     käka-pakña-dharah sudhéh
mukta-keço vatsa-våndäh
     kälindé-küla-vékñaëah

     As a child all His limbs were sometimes covered with dust (dhüli-dhüsara-sarväìga), He was decorated with crow's feathers (käka-pakña-dhara), He was intelligent (sudhé), His hair was sometimes dishevelled (mukta-keça), He stayed with the calves (vatsa-våndä), and He gazed at the Yamunä's shore (kälindé-küla-vékñaëa).

Text 104 
jala-kolähalé külé
     paìka-präìgana-lepakah
çré-våndävana-saïcäré
     vaàçévaöa-taöa-sthitah

     He played in the Yamunä's waves (jala-kolähalé), and on its shore (külé), As He crawled in the courtyard He became anointed with mud (paìka-präìgana-lepaka), He wandered in Våndävana forest (çré-våndävana-saïcäré), and He rested at Vaàçévaöa (vaàçévaöa-taöa-sthita).

Text 105 
mahävana-niväsé ca
     lohärgala-vanädhipah
sädhuh priyatamah sädhyah
     sädhv-éço gata-sädhvasah

     He resided in Mahävana (mahävana-niväsé), He was the king of Lohärgalavana (lohärgala-vanädhipa), He was a great saint (sädhu), the most dear (priyatama), attainable by the devotees (sädhya), the Lord of the devotees (sädhv-éça), and fearless (gata-sädhvasa).

Text 106 
raìga-nätho viööaleço
     mukti-nätho 'gha-näçakah
su-kértih su-yaçäh sphéto
     yaçasvé raìga-raïjanah

     He is the Lord of Raìgakñetra (raìga-nätha), the Lord of Viööala (viööaleça), the Lord of liberation (mukti-nätha), the destroyer of sins (agha-näçaka), glorious (su-kérti, su-yaçä, sphéta), and yaçasvé), and the delight of the devotees (raìga-raïjana).

Text 107 
räga-ñaöko räga-putro
     rägiëé-ramaëotsukah
dépako megha-mallärah
     çré-rägo mäla-koçakah

     He is the six kinds of rägas (räga-ñaöka). He is the rägas Räga-putra (räga-putra), Rägiëé-ramaëotsuka (rägiëé-ramaëotsuka), Dépaka (dépaka), Megha-mallära (megha-mallära), Çré-räga (çré-räga), and Mäla-koçaka (mäla-koçaka).

Text 108 
hindolo bhairaväkhyaç ca
     svara-jäti-smaro måduh
tälo mäna-pramäëaç ca
     svara-gamyah kaläkñarah

     He is the räas Hindola (hindola) and Bhairava (bhairaväkhya). He is love born by hearing beautiful melodies (svara-jäti-smara). He is gentle (mådu). He is graceful musical rhythms (täla and mäna-pramäëa). He is melody (svara-gamya), and He is graceful singing (kaläkñara).

Text 109 
çamé çyämé çatänandah
     çata-yämah çata-kratuh
jägarah supta äsuptah
     suñuptah svapna urvarah

     He self-controlled (çamé). He is dark-complexioned Lord Kåñëa (çyämé). He has a hundred blisses (çatänanda), He forgives a hundred offenses (çata-yäma), He performed a hundred yajïas (çata-kratu), He is awake and alert (jägara), He sleeps (supta, äsupta, suñupta, svapna). He is great (urvara).

Text 110 
ürjah sphürjo nirjaraç ca
     vijvaro jvara-varjitah
jvara-jij jvara-kartä ca
     jvara-yuk tri-jvaro jvarah

     He is power (ürja), and glory (sphürja). He is free from the fever of anxiety (nirjara, vijvara, jvara-varjita, and jvara-jit), He lights the fever of anxiety in the demons (jvara-kartä), He is passionate (jvara-yuk), He is the three passions (tri-jvara), and He is passion (jvara).

Text 111 
jämbavän jambukäsaìké
     jambudvépo dvipäri-hä
çälmalih çälmali-dvépah
     plakñah plakñavaneçvarah

     He is Jämbavän (jämbavän), He does not trust the demons (jambukäsaìké), He resides in Jambudvépa (jambudvépa), He killed an elephant that attacked Him (dvipäri-hä), He is Çälmali (çälmali), He resides in Çälmalidvépa (çälmali-dvépa), He is Plakña (plakña), and He is the master of Plakñavana forest (plakñavaneçvara).

Text 112 
kuça-dhäré kuçah kausé
     kauçikah kuça-vigrahah
kuçasthalé-patih käçé-
     nätho bhairava-çäsanah

     He holds a blade of kuça grass (kuça-dhäré, kuça, kauçé, kauçika, and kuça-vigraha). He is the king of Dvärakä (kuçasthalé-pati), the king of Väräëasé (käçé-nätha), and the master of Bhairava (bhairava-çäsana).

Text 113 
däçärhah sätvato våñëir
     bhojo 'ndhaka-niväsa-kåt
andhako dundubhir dyotah
     pradyotah satvatäm-patih

     He is the great descendent of King Daçärha (däçärha), and a great king of the Satvata dynasty (sätvata), the Våñëi dynasty (våñëi), and the Bhoja dynasty (bhoja). He stays among the kings of the Andhaka dynasty (andhaka-niväsa-kåt and andhaka). He is glorified by the sounding of Dundubhi drums (dundubhi). He is glorious (dyota and pradyota). He is the master of the Satvatas (satvatäm-pati).

Text 114 
çüraseno 'nuviñayo
     bhoja-våñëy-andhakeçvarah
ähukah sarva-néti-jïa
     ugraseno mahogra-väk

     He is Çürasena (çürasena), He is Anuviñaya (anuviñaya), He is the king of the Bhoja, Våñëi, and Andhaka dynasties (bhoja-våñëy-andhakeçvara), He is Ahüka (ähuka), He knows what is right (sarva-néti-jïa), He is Ugrasena (ugrasena), and He can speak very fiercely (mahogra-väk).

Text 115 
ugrasena-priyah prärthyah
     päryo yadu-sabhä-patih
sudharmädhipatih sattvaà
     våñëi-cakrävåto bhiñak

     He is dear to King Ugrasena (ugrasena-priya), the devotees offer prayers to Him (prärthya), He is the Päëòavas (pärtha), He is the leader of the assembled Yädavas (yadu-sabhä-pati), He is the leader of the Sudharma assembly (sudharmädhipati), He is existence (sattvaà), He is surrounded by the Våñëis (våñëi-cakrävåta), and He is the supreme physician (bhiñak).

Text 116 
sabhä-çélah sabhä-dépah
     sabhägniç ca sabhä-ravih
sabhä-candrah sabhä-bhäsah
     sabhä-devah sabhä-patih

     He is an exalted member of the assembly (sabhä-çéla), He is a lamp shining in the assembly (sabhä-dépa), the fire of the assembly (sabhägni), the sun of the assembly (sabhä-ravi), the moon of the assembly (sabhä-candra), the splendor of the assembly (sabhä-bhäsa), the Deity of the assembly (sabhä-deva), and the master of the assembly (sabhä-pati).

Text 117 
prajärthadah prajä-bhartä
     prajä-pälana-tat-parah
dvärakä-durga-saïcäré
     dvärakä-graha-vigrahah

     He fulfills the desires of the citizens (prajärthada), maintains the citizens (prajä-bhartä), protects the citizens (prajä-pälana-tat-para), guards the Dvärakä fort (dvärakä-durga-saïcäré), and stays in Dvärakä (dvärakä-graha-vigraha).

Text 118 
dvärakä-duhkha-saàhartä
     dvärakä-jana-maìgalah
jagan-mätä jagat-trätä
     jagad-bhartä jagat-pitä

     He removes all sufferings from Dvärakä (dvärakä-duhkha-saàhartä). He is the auspiciousness of Dvärakä's citizens (dvärakä-jana-maìgala), the mother of the universes (jagan-mätä), the protector of the universes (jagat-trätä), the maintainer of the universes (jagad-bhartä), and the father of the universes (jagat-pitä).

Text 119 
jagad-bandhur jagad-bhrätä
     jagan-mitro jagat-sakhah
brahmaëya-devo brahmaëyo
     brahma-päda-rajo-dadhat

     He is the friend of the universes (jagad-bandhu, jagan-mitra, and jagat-sakha), the creator of the universes (jagad-dhätä), and the Deity worshiped by the brähmaëas (brahmaëya-deva and brahmaëya). He respectfully touches the dust of the brähmaëas' feet (brahma-päda-rajo-dadhat).

Text 120 
brahma-päda-rajah-sparçé
     brahma-päda-niñevakah
vipräìghri-jala-pütäìgo
     vipra-sevä-paräyaëah

     He respectfully touches the dust of the brähmaëas' feet (brahma-päda-rajah-sparçé), He serves the brähmaëas' feet (brahma-päda-niñevaka), He purifies Himself by sprinkling on His head the water that has washed the brähmaëas' feet (vipräìghri-jala-pütäìga), and He devotedly serves the brähmaëas (vipra-sevä-paräyaëa).

Text 121 
vipra-mukhyo vipra-hito
     vipra-géta-mahä-kathah
vipra-päda-jalärdräìgo
     vipra-pädodaka-priyah

     He is the best of the brähmaëas (vipra-mukhya), the auspiciousness of the brähmaëas (vipra-hita), the supreme master whose glories are sung by the brähmaëas (vipra-géta-mahä-katha), and the supreme master who sprinkles on Himself the water that has washed the brähmaëas' feet (vipra-päda-jalärdräìga and vipra-pädodaka-priya).

Text 122 
vipra-bhakto vipra-gurur
     vipro vipra-padänugah
akñauhiëé-våto yoddhä
     pratimä-païca-samyutah

     He is devoted to the brähmaëas (vipra-bhakta), the guru of the brähmaëas (vipra-guru), a brähmaëa (vipra), a follower of the brähmaëas (vipra-padänuga), accompanied by an akñauhiëé military division (akñauhiëé-våta), a great warrior (yoddhä), and manifested as five Deities (pratimä-païca-samyuta).

Text 123 
catur aìgiräh padma-varté
     samäntoddhåta-pädukah
gaja-koöi-prayäyé ca
     ratha-koöi-jaya-dhvajah

     He is Catu (catu), Aìgirä (aìgirä), and Padmavarté (padma-varté). Samänta Muni worships His feet (samäntoddhåta-päduka). He is powerful like ten million elephants (gaja-koöi-prayäyé). His flag of victory flies over the defeat of ten million chariot-warriors (ratha-koöi-jaya-dhvaja).

Text 124 
mahärathaç cätiratho
     jaitraà syandanam ästhitah
näräyaëästré brahmästré
     raëa-çläghé raëodbhaöah

     He is a great chariot warrior (mahäratha and atiratha). He rides a victory-chariot jaitraà-syandanam-ästhita). He wields the näräyaëästra weapon (näräyaëästré) and the brahmästra weapon (brahmästré). He is a famous warrior (raëa-çläghé and raëodbhaöa).

Text 125 
madotkaöo yuddha-véro
     deväsura-bhayaìkarah
kari-karëa-marut-prejat-
     kuntala-vyäpta-kuëòalah

     He is a ferocious warrior (madotkaöa), a hero in battle (yuddha-véra), and frightening even to the demigods and demons (deväsura-bhayaìkara). Moving in the wind, His long hair and earrings are like a great elephant's ear (kari-karëa-marut-prejat-kuntala-vyäpta-kuëòala).

Text 126 
agrago véra-sammärdo
     mardalo raëa-durmadah
bhaöah pratibhaöah procyo
     bäëa-varñéñutoyadah

     He is the first before all others (agraga). He crushes the enemy warriors in battle (véra-sammärda, mardala, raëa-durmada, bhaöa, and pratibhaöa). He is glorious (procya). He rains a shower of arrows on the enemy (bäëa-varñé and iñu-toyada).

Text 127 
khaòga-khaëdéta-sarväìgah
     ñoòaçäbdah ñaò-akñarah
véra-ghoñah kliñöa-vapur
     vajräìgo vajra-bhedanah

     With His sword He cuts the enemy to pieces (khaòga-khaëdéta-sarväìga). He is a sixteen-year-old youth eternally (ñoòaçäbda). He does not suffer the six material distresses (ñaò-akñara). He makes a heroic roar (véra-ghoña). He brings distress to His enemies (kliñöa-vapu). His limbs are powerful like a series of thunderbolts (vajräìga). He breaks apart the thunderbolt weapons of His enemies (vajra-bhedana).

Text 128 
rugna-vajro bhagna-dantah
     çatru-nirbhartsanodyatah
aööa-häsah paööa-dhärah
     paööa-räjïé-patih paöuh

     He breaks apart the thunderbolt weapons of His enemies (rugna-vajra). He breaks His enemies' teeth (bhagna-danta). He rebukes His enemies (çatru-nirbhartsanodyata). He laughs loudly (aööa-häsa). He wears silk garments (paööa-dhära). He is the husband of a noble queen (paööa-räjïé-pati). He is very intelligent (paöu).

Text 129 
kälah pataha-väditro
     huìkäro garjita-svanah
sädhur bhakta-parädhénah
     svatantrah sädhu-bhüñaëah

     He is time (käla). Paöaha drums are sounded to celebrate His victory (pataha-väditra). He roars ferociously (huìkära and garjita-svana). He is saintly (sädhu), submissive to His devotees (bhakta-parädhéna), independent (svatantra), and decorated with the ornaments of saintly qualities (sädhu-bhüñaëa).

Text 130 
asvatantrah sädhumayah
     sädhu-grasta-manä manäk
sädhu-priyah sädhu-dhanah
     sädhu-jïätih sudhä-ghanah

     He is not independent (asvatantra). He is dependent on His devotees (sädhumaya). His heart is rapt in thinking of His devotees (sädhu-grasta-manä). He loves His devotees and they love Him (sädhu-priya). He is charitable to His devotees (sädhu-dhana). He is His devotees' kinsman (sädhu-jïäti). He is a monsoon cloud of nectar (sudhä-ghana).

Text 131 
sädhu-cäré sädhu-cittah
     sädhu-väsé çubhäspadah
iti nämnäà sahasraà tu
     balabhadrasya kértitam

     He stays among His devotees (sädhu-cäré and sädhu-väsé). His devotees stay in His heart (sädhu-citta). He is the abode of auspiciousness.      These are the thousand names of Lord Balaräma.

Text 132 
sarva-siddhi-pradaà nåëäà
     catur-varga-phala-pradam
çata-varaà paöhed yas tu
     sa vidyävän bhaved iha

     sarva-siddhi-pradam—giving all perfection; nåëäm—to the living entities; catur-varga-phala-pradam—giving the four goals of life; çata—a hundred; varam—times; paöhet—recites; yah—one who; tu—indeed; sa—he; vidyavän—wise; bhavet—becomes; iha—here.

     He becomes wise who a hundred times recites these names, which give the four goals of life and all perfection.

Text 133 
indiräà ca vimürtià cä-
     bhijanaà rüpam eva ca
bala-bhojaç ca paöhanät
     sarvaà präpnoti mänavah

     indiräm—wealth; ca—and; vimürtim—glory; ca—and; abhijanam—dynasty; rüpam—handsomeness; eva—indeed; ca—and; bala—strength; bhojah—enjoyment; ca—and; paöhanät—from reciting; sarvam—all; präpnoti—attains; mänavah—a person.

     One who recites these names pleases Lord Balaräma and thus attains all wealth, glory, good descendents, and handsomeness.

Text 134 
gaìgä-küle 'tha kälindé-
     küle devälaye tathä
sahasrävärta-päöhena
     balät siddhih präjayate

     gaìgä-küle—on the bank of the Gaìgä; atha—then; kälindé-küle—on the bank of the Yamunä; devälaye—in the temple of the Lord; tathä—so; sahasrävärta—a thousand times; päöhena—by reciting; balät—from Lord Balaräma; siddhih—perfection; präjayate—is born.

     By reciting these names a thousand times on the Gaìgä's shore, on the Yamunä's shore, or in the Lord's temple, by Lord Balaräma's mercy one attains perfection.

Text 135 
puträrthé labhate putraà
     dhanärtho labhate dhanam
bandhät pramucyate baddho
     rogé rogän nivartate

     puträrthé—desiring a son; labhate—attains; putram—a son; dhanärthah—desiring wealth; labhate—attains; dhanam—wealth; bandhät—from bondage; pramucyate—is freed; baddhah—bound; rogé—diseased; rogän—from disease; nivartate—is freed.

     One who desires a son attains a good son. One who desires wealth attains wealth. One who is imprisoned becomes free from prison. One who is diseased becomes cured of his disease.

Text 136 
ayutävärta-päöhe ca
     puräçcarya-vidhänatah
homa-tarpaëa-godäna-
     viprärcana-kåtodyamät

paöalaà paddhatéà stotraà
     kavacaà tu vidhäya ca
mahä-maëòala-bhartä syän
     maëòito maëòaleçvaraih

     ayuta—ten thousand; ävärta—times; päöhe—in reciting; ca—and; puräçcarya-vidhänatah—after performing puraçcarya; homa—homa; tarpaëa—tarpaëa; godäna—giving cows in charity; vipra—brähmaëas; arcana—worshiping; kåta-udyamät—than pious deeds; paöalam—paöala; paddhatém—paddhaté; stotram—stotra; kavacam—kavaca; tu—indeed; vidhäya—doing; ca—and; mahä-maëòala-bhartä—a great king; syän—becomes; maëòitah—decorated; maëòaleçvaraih—with many great kings.

     One who performs puräçcarya, recites the paöala, paddhaté, stotra, and kavaca, recites these names ten thousand times, offers homa and tarpaëa, gives cows in charity, and worships the brähmaëas becomes a great king decorated with a great host of vassal-kings.

Text 138 
mattebha-karëa-prahitä
     mada-gandhena vihvalä
alaìkaroti tad-dvaraà
     bhramad-bhåìgävalé bhåçam

     matta—maddened; ibha—elephant; karëa—ears; prahitä—sent; mada-gandhena—with the sweet freagtance; vihvalä—agitated; alaìkaroti—decorates; tad-dvaram—his door; bhramad-bhåìgävalé—many flying bees; bhåçam—greatly.

     Pushed by an elephant's ear, and maddened by the sweet fragrance they find there, a host of bees decorates his door.

Text 139 
niñkäraëah paöhed yas tu
     préty-arthaà revaté-pateh
nämnäà sahasraà räjendra
     sa jévan-mukta ucyate

     niñkäraëah—without any motive; paöhet—recites; yah—who; tu—indeed; préty-artham—for the pleasure; revaté-pateh—of Lord Balaräma; nämnäm—of names; sahasram—a thousand; räjendra—O great king; sa—he; jévan-mukta—liberated in this life; ucyate—is said.

     O great king, one who without any personal motive, only to please Lord Balaräma, recites these thousand names, is said to be liberated in this life.

Text 140

sadä vaset tasya gåhe
     balabhadro 'cyutägrajah
mahä-patäky api janah
     paöhen näma-sahasrakam

     sadä—eternally; vaset—resides; tasya—of him; gåhe—in the home; balabhadrah—Lord Balaräma; acyuta—of Lord Kåñëa; agrajah—the elder brother; mahä-patäky—a great sinner; api—even; janah—a person; paöhet—recites; näma-sahasrakam—thousand names.

     Lord Balaräma, the elder brother of Lord Kåñëa, eternally resides in the home of even a great sinner who recites these thousand names.

Text 141

chittvä meru-samaà päpaà
     bhuktvä sarva-sukhaà tv iha
parät paraà mahä-räja
     golokaà dhäma yäti hi

     chittvä—breaking; meru-samam—like Mount Meru; päpam—sin; bhuktvä—enjoying; sarva-sukham—all happiness; tv—indeed; iha—here; parät—than the greatest; param—greater; mahä-räja—O great king; golokam—to Goloka; dhäma—the realm; yäti—goes; hi—indeed.

     O great king, that person destroys a host of sins equal to Mount Meru. He enjoys great happiness, and then He goes to the realm of Goloka, which is above the highest place in the spiritual world.

Text 142

     çré-närada uväca iti çrutvacyutägrajasya baladevasya païcäìgaà dhåtimän dhärtaräñörah saparyayä sahitayä parayä bhaktyä präòvipäkaà püjayäm äsa tam anujïäpyäçiñaà dattvä präòvipäko munéndro gajähvayät sväçramaà jagäma.

     çré-närada uväca—Çré Närada said; iti—thus; çrutva acyutägrajasya—hearing of Kåñëa's elder brother; baladevasya—of Lord Balaräma; païcäìgam—five limbs; dhåtimän—self-controlled; dhärtaräñörah—the son of Dhrtarastra; saparyäya—wor5shiping; sahitäya—with; paräya—great; bhaktyä—devotion; präòvipäkam—Präòvipäka; püjayäm äsa—worshiped; tam—him; anujïäpya—taking permission;; äçiñam—blessing; dattvä—giving; präòvipäkah—Präòvipäka; munéndrah—the sage; gajähvayät—from Hastinäpura; sväçramam—to his own äçrama; jagäma—went.

     Çré Närada said: After hearing these five procedures for worshiping Lord Balaräma, the saintly son of Dhåtaräñötra worshiped Präòvipäka Muni with great devotion. After giving his blessings, Präòvipäka, the king of sages, left Hastinäpura and returned to his own äçrama. 
Text 143

     bhagavato 'nantasya balabhadrasya para-brahmaëah kathäà yah çåëute çrävayate tayänanda-mayo bhavati.

     bhagavatah—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; anantasya—Ananta; balabhadrasya—Lord Balaräma; para-brahmaëah—the Supreme Brahman; kathäm—topics; yah—one who; çåëute—hears; çrävayate—causes others to hear; tayä—by that; änanda-mayah—filled with bliss; bhavati—becomes.

     One who hears or repeats these descriptions of limitless Lord Balaräma. the Supreme Personality of Godhead, becomes filled with bliss.

Text 144

idaà mayä te kathitaà nåpendra
     sarvärthadaà çré-balabhadra-khaëòam
çåëoti yo dhäma hareh sa yäti
     viçokam änandam akhaëòa-rüpam

     idam—this; mayä—by me; te—to you; kathitam—spoken; nåpendra—O great king; sarvärthadam—giving all desires; çré-balabhadra—of Lord Balaräma; khaëòam—the canto; çåëoti—hears; yah—one who; dhäma—to the abode; hareh—of Lord Kåñëa; sa—he; yäti—goes; viçokam—without sufferings; änandam—bliss; akhaëòa—unbroken; rüpam—form.

     O great king, thus I have recited for you the Balaräma-khaëòa, which fulfills all desires. Anyone who hears it goes to Lord Kåñëa transcendental abode, which is eternal, full of bliss, and free of any suffering.
.pa

TEXT NUMBERS OF LORD BALARAMA'S THOUSAND NAMES

(The name is placed first and the Text Number follows.)

Abhijit, 79 * Acchedya, 69 * Acyuta, 5 * Acyutagraja, 6 * Adahya, 69 * Adbhuta, 93 * Adhibhuta, 70 * Adhidaiva, 70 * Adhyatmaka, 70 * Adi, 67 * Advitiya, 14 * Agha-nasaka, 106 * Aghari, 36 * Agni-pana, 37 * Agraga, 126 * Ahankara, 13 * Ahuka, 114 * Aila-vamsa-vivardhana, 94 * Aindra, 80 * Ajasra-sukha, 68 * Ajata-satru, 56 * Akledya, 69 * Aksara, 68 * Aksauhini-vrta, 122 * Alankara, 92 * Alpa-vigraha, 66 * Ambarisanga, 94 * Amlana-pankaja-dhara, 58 * Amrta, 68 * Amsamsa, 72 * Anadi, 67 * Anagha, 74 * Ananda, 40, 67 * Ananta, 11 * Andhaka, 113 * Andhaka-nivasa-krt, 113 * Angira, 123 * Aniruddha, 48 * Antaratma, 12 * Antra-mali, 85 * Anuvisaya, 114 * Apurna, 69 * Arista-ha, 37 * Asankhya-brahmanda-pati, 82 * Asosya, 69 * Asthita, 100, 124 * Asupta, 109 * Asurari, 30 * Asvatantra, 130 * Asvattha, 93 * Atali, 17 * Atiratha, 124 * Atta-hasa, 128 * Atyantika-maya, 73 * Aupagavi-priya, 43 * Avatara, 72 * Avrta, 13 * Avyaya, 12 * Ayodhyadhipati, 34 *  * Baddha-godhanguli-trana, 29 * Bakari, 36 * Bala, 8 * Bala-keli, 102 * Balabhadra, 5 * Baladeva, 6 * Bali, 7 * Balistha-pusta-sarvanga, 50 * Bana-varsi, 126 * Bandha-moksi, 55 * Bhagavan, 11 * Bhagirathi, 62 * Bhagna-danta, 128 * Bhairava-sasana, 112 * Bhairavakhya, 108 * Bhakta-paradhina, 129 * Bhakta-vatsala, 47 * Bharata, 28 * Bhargavottama, 25 * Bhaskarodaya, 79 * Bhata, 126 * Bhavad, 66 * Bhavisyat, 66 * Bhavya, 38 * Bhayanaka, 93 * Bhimarthi, 60 * Bhisak, 115 * Bhogitala, 17 * Bhoja, 113 * Bhoja-vrsny-andhakesvara, 114 * Bhu, 72 * Bhumi-vaikuntha-deva, 82 * Bhupari-sthita, 72 * Bhuta, 66 * Bhuta-sangha, 85 * Bhutesa, 55 * Bhuva, 72 * Bibhatsi, 84 * Bimbostha, 54 * Bindu, 62 * Bindu-sarovara, 62 * Bodhaka, 71 * Bodhi, 71 * Brahma, 70 * Brahma-dhara, 70 * Brahma-pada-nisevaka, 120 * Brahma-pada-rajah-sparsi, 120 * Brahma-pada-rajo-dadhat, 119 * Brahmaloka, 80 * Brahmanya, 119 * Brahmanya-deva, 119 * Brahmastri, 124 * Brhat, 66 * Brhat-sanu, 77 * Buddhi-sakha, 13 *  * Caidya-satru, 56 * Cala-jhankara-nupura, 88 * Calat-khanjana-locana, 100 * Candra-vamsi, 34 * Canurari, 41 * Carisnuman, 15 * Catu, 123 * Catur-bhuja, 43 * Catur-murti, 12 * Catur-veda, 12 * Catur-vyuha, 12 * Catus-pada, 12 * Cesta-rupa-tanu-sthita, 71 * Ceta, 13 * Chanda, 90 * Citkara, 16 * Citra-kutaranya-nivasa-krt, 31 *  * Dadhi-caurya-krta-srama, 101 * Dadhi-harta, 101 * Daksa-yajna-vighataka, 87 * Dami, 102 * Damodara, 102 * Danadhyaksa, 46 * Dandaka-mandalu, 85 * Dandakesa, 31 * Dandi, 21 * Dani, 10 * Dantavakra-nisudaka, 56 * Dari-bhrn, 77 * Dasarathi, 27 * Dasarha, 113 * Dattatreya, 25 * Daya-nidhi, 52 * Deva, 5 * Deva-giri, 75 * Deva-mangala, 25 * Deva-sarma, 52 * Devadatta, 18 * Devaloka, 78 * Devamaya, 80 * Devasura-bhayankara, 125 * Devatatma, 14 * Dhanada, 59 * Dhanadhyaksa, 46 * Dhananjaya, 18 * Dhanesvara, 46 * Dhanvantari, 26 * Dhanvi, 28 * Dhanvinam, 48 * Dhara, 15 * Dharma-sastri, 90 * Dhauta-vastra-samavrta, 97 * Dhenukari, 36 * Dhrta-natha, 46 * Dhrtarasta, 18 * Dhruva, 12, 80 * Dhuli-dhusara-sarvanga, 103 * Dhuri, 83 * Dig-ambara, 98 * Dipaka, 107 * Divya-loka-vilokita, 99 * Divya-racana, 99 * Divyanga, 99 * Dravayu, 22 * Drsta, 66 * Dugdha-hara, 101 * Dugdha-pana, 37 * Dundubhi, 113 * Duryodhana-guru, 47 * Dvaraka-duhkha-samharta, 118 * Dvaraka-durga-sancari, 117 * Dvaraka-graha-vigraha, 117 * Dvaraka-jana-mangala, 118 * Dvarakesa, 10 * Dvipari-ha, 111 * Dvitiya, 14 * Dvividanga-nisudana, 51 * Dyota, 113 *  * Gada, 65 * Gada-siksa-kara, 47 * Gadagraja, 65 * Gadhinam, 94 * Gadya, 65 * Gairisa, 75 * Gaja-carma-dhara, 84 * Gaja-hanta, 42 * Gaja-koti-prayayi, 123 * Gaji, 84 * Gana, 71 * Gana-natha, 75 * Gandaki-snana-van, 58 * Gandivi, 49 * Ganga, 62 * Ganga-sagara-sangarthi, 60 * Garjita-svana, 129 * Gata-sadhvasa, 105 * Gatadhi, 94 * Gauna, 68 * Gautama, 89 * Gavam-pati, 82 * Gaya-sira, 59 * Ghana-kancuka-sanghavan, 98 * Gharghara-svana, 84 * Giri, 75 * Giri-dhara, 83 * Giri-gahvara, 75 * Girisa, 75 * Go-ganasraya, 35 * Goda, 60 * Gokulesa, 35 * Goloka-dhama-dhisana, 83 * Golokanki-krtam-gana, 99 * Golokesa, 82 * Gomati-tira-vasa-krt, 57 * Gopa, 35 * Gopa-putra, 35 * Gopa-vrndesa, 35 * Gopala, 35 * Gopati, 35 * Gopika-kantha-bhusana, 83 * Gopika-sata-yutharthi, 39 * Gopisatavrta, 35 * Govardhana-samuddharta, 39 * Gudha-vyudha, 68 * Guna, 68 * Guna-nidhi, 65 * Guna-patra, 65 * Gunabhasa, 68 * Gunakara, 65 * Gunarnava, 65 * Gunatita, 67 * Gunavrta, 68 * Gurvi, 47 *  * Halayudha, 5 * Hali, 7 * Hamsa, 24 * Hanumat-prita-manasa, 32 * Hari, 7, 23 * Hari-dasa-sahaya-krt, 56 * Harina, 23 * Harsi, 30 * Hasta, 79 * Hastinapura-sankarsi, 52 * Hasya, 93 * Hemarcita, 75 * Hindola, 108 * Hrsta, 50 * Hunkara, 129 * Hy, 12 *  * Ilvalatmaja-hanta, 64 * Indriyesa, 14 *  * Jagad-bandhu, 119 * Jagad-bharta, 118 * Jagad-bhrata, 119 * Jagan-mata, 118 * Jagan-mitra, 119 * Jagara, 109 * Jagat-pita, 118 * Jagat-sakha, 119 * Jagat-trata, 118 * Jaitram, 124 * Jala-kolahali, 104 * Jamadagnya, 63 * Jambavan, 111 * Jambu, 63 * Jambudvipa, 111 * Jambukasanki, 111 * Jana, 72 * Janaki-virahatura, 33 * Janesvara, 57 * Jarudhi, 76 * Jayakula, 78 * Jayanta-krt, 78 * Jayantanga, 78 * Jayanti-dig, 78 * Jayi, 64 * Jita-pada, 81 * Jivatma, 12 * Jnanam, 14 * Jnapaka, 70 * Jvara, 110 * Jvara-jit, 110 * Jvara-karta, 110 * Jvara-varjita, 110 * Jvara-yuk, 110 * Jyahata-kosthaka, 28 * Jyoti, 46 * Jyotismati-bharta, 46 *  * Kabandhaha, 31 * Kairavesvara, 49 * Kaka-paksa-dhara, 103 * Kakutstha, 27 * Kala, 21, 129 * Kala-hanta, 42 * Kalagni, 22 * Kalaksara, 108 * Kalanjara, 77 * Kalanka-ha, 42 * Kali, 21 * Kali-priya, 21 * Kalindi-bhedana, 8 * Kalindi-kula-viksana, 103 * Kaliyantaka, 40 * Kalki, 26 * Kalpa-vrksa, 48 * Kalpa-vrksa-vana-prabhu, 48 * Kalpa-vrksi, 48 * Kalpanta-bhairava, 86 * Kama-pala, 5 * Kamatha, 25 * Kambalasva, 18 * Kamsa-bhratr-nihanta, 42 * Kamsa-hanta, 42 * Kamsa-kodanda-bhanjana, 41 * Kamsari, 40 * Kana-nama-bhak, 89 * Kanadi, 89 * Kanakangadi, 20 * Kanka, 76 * Kapata-vaksa, 55 * Kapila, 25 * Kari-karna-marut-prejat-kuntala-vyapta-kundala, 125 * Karindra-kara-kodanda, 54 * Karma, 14 * Karuna-sindhu, 27 * Kasi-natha, 112 * Kataki, 20 * Katisutri, 20 * Katyayana, 23 * Kaurava-pujita, 52 * Kausalyananda-vardhana, 27 * Kausi, 97, 112 * Kausika, 112 * Kavaci, 28 * Kaveri, 61 * Kavi, 70 * Kavya-krn, 91 * Kesi-satru, 37 * Khadga-khadnita-sarvanga, 127 * Khadgi, 28 * Khanda-mandali, 21 * Kharparasi, 87 * Kiranasa, 54 * Klista-vapu, 127 * Kosalendra, 26 * Koti-brahmanda-karaka, 82 * Koti-kandarpa-lavanya, 20 * Krsna, 24, 62 * Krta-svotsanga-ga, 100 * Krtamala, 61 * Krtanta-kala-sanghari, 86 * Kruddha, 51 * Ksami, 47 * Kuli, 104 * Kumbhanda-khandana-kara, 49 * Kumuda-bandhava, 78 * Kundali, 21 * Kundali-bhuta, 100 * Kunta-dhari, 84 * Kupakarna-prahara-krt, 49 * Kurma, 24 * Kuruksetra-pati, 63 * Kusa, 112 * Kusa-dhari, 112 * Kusa-vigraha, 112 * Kusasthali-pati, 112 * Kusmanda-gana-samvrta, 85 * Kuta, 86 * Kuta-hanta, 41 *  * Lagudi, 7 * Laksanartha, 92 * Lanka-dahana-tat-para, 33 * Lavanari, 34 * Laya, 22, 73 * Lila-dhara, 83 * Lohargala-vanadhipa, 105 * Loka, 100 * Lokalokacalasrita, 81 *  * Mada-ghurnita-locana, 19 * Madana, 48 * Madhava, 9 * Madhu-madhava-sevita, 50 * Madhusrava, 19 * Madotkata, 125 * Magadhari, 43 * Maha, 72 * Maha-bhuja, 18 * Maha-mana, 10, 13 * Maha-muni, 63 * Maha-punya, 61 * Maha-raja-cchatra-dhara, 53 * Maha-rajopalaksana, 53 * Maha-vayu, 71 * Maha-vibhuti, 55 * Maha-vira, 6, 71 * Maha-visnu, 24 * Mahahi, 22 * Maharatha, 124 * Mahatala, 17 * Mahaugha, 15 * Mahavana-nivasi, 105 * Mahogra-vak, 114 * Mainaka, 76 * Maithilarcita-padabja, 47 * Mala-kosaka, 107 * Malla-yuddha-pravartaka, 42 * Mana-pramana, 108 * Manada, 47 * Manak, 130 * Manda, 48 * Mandara, 77 * Mani, 10 * Mani-dhara, 16 * Mani-hara, 16 * Mantra-visarada, 44 * Mantri, 44 * Manu, 74 * Manu-suta, 74 * Manvantaravatara, 74 * Manya, 49 * Mardala, 126 * Marica-vadha-karaka, 29 * Matanga-vana-sancari, 32 * Mathura, 100 * Mathura-darsi, 100 * Mathuresa, 10 * Matsya, 25 * Megha-mallara, 107 * Megha-mandala, 54 * Meru, 75 * Mimamsi, 89 * Mrda, 86 * Mrdanisa, 86 * Mrdu, 108 * Mrga, 79 * Mukta-kesa, 103 * Mukti-natha, 106 * Mukuti, 21 * Munda-mali, 85 * Muni, 24, 31 * Muni-priya, 31 * Murari, 48 * Musali, 7 * Mustikari, 41 *  * Nadi, 62 * Naga-kanya-samarcita, 20 * Naimisaranya-yatrarthi, 57 * Naimittika, 73 * Naiyayika, 89 * Naksatresa, 79 * Nana-candana-gandhadhya, 96 * Nana-kauseya-vesa-dhrk, 97 * Nana-mani-samakirna, 95 * Nana-padma-kara, 97 * Nana-puspa-dhara, 95 * Nana-puspa-rasarcita, 96 * Nana-ratna-vibhusana, 95 * Nana-varna-maya, 96 * Nana-vastra-dhara, 96 * Nanda, 40 * Nanda-raja-suta, 40 * Nanda-vardhana, 40 * Nandikesvara, 77 * Nara, 26 * Nara-narayanasrama, 63 * Narada, 24 * Naravesa, 72 * Narayana, 26 * Narayanastri, 124 * Narmada, 62 * Nataka-prada, 91 * Navanita-sitasana, 101 * Naya, 89 * Neta, 32 * Nilambara, 6 * Nirakara, 14 * Niranjana, 14 * Nirantara, 67 * Nirguna, 66 * Nirjara, 110 * Nirodha, 73 * Nirupama, 99 * Nirvikalpaka, 67 * Nirvikara, 68 * Nisangi, 28 * Nitya, 68 * Nivartaka, 69 * Nivata-kavacesvara, 21 * Nrsimha, 26 * Nupuri, 20 *  * Pada-sphota, 92 * Padma-mali, 19 * Padma-pada-sphurad-dyuti, 55 * Padma-pani, 7 * Padma-varti, 123 * Padmaksa, 19 * Pakvimabha, 23 * Pampa, 62 * Pancavati-pati, 32 * Pandita, 88 * Pandu-putra-sahaya-krt, 43 * Panini, 22 * Panka-prangana-lepaka, 104 * Papa-ghna, 56 * Para, 11 * Parama, 11 * Paramatma, 12 * Paramesvara, 10 * Parasari-samhita-vit, 91 * Paresa, 10 * Paribhadraka, 76 * Parijataka, 77 * Paripurnatama, 11 * Parna, 98 * Parya, 115 * Pasu-pati, 86 * Pataha-vaditra, 129 * Patala, 17 * Patanga, 76 * Patanjali, 22 * Patta-dhara, 128 * Patta-rajni-pati, 128 * Patu, 128 * Paulastya, 59 * Paundraka-ghataka, 51 * Pauranika, 91 * Payasvini, 61 * Phani, 16 * Phani-raja, 15 * Phanindra, 15 * Phanisvara, 16 * Phutkari, 16 * Pinaka-tankara-kara, 88 * Pinamsa, 55 * Pitosnisa, 98 * Pitr-vakya-kara, 30 * Plaksa, 111 * Plaksavanesvara, 111 * Prabala, 8 * Prabhasa, 62 * Prabhavati-baddha-kara, 102 * Prabhavisnu, 24 * Prabhu, 16 * Pracanda, 54 * Pradhanam, 13 * Pradyota, 113 * Praharsita, 50 * Prahlada-raksaka, 94 * Praja-bharta, 117 * Praja-palana-tat-para, 117 * Prajarthada, 117 * Prakrte, 11 * Prakrti, 13, 90 * Prakrtika, 73 * Pralambaghna, 6 * Pralambari, 36 * Pralaya, 22 * Pramathesa, 86 * Prarthya, 115 * Pratapavan, 6 * Pratibhata, 126 * Pratici, 61 * Pratima-panca-samyuta, 122 * Pratyag-dhama, 67 * Prayaga-tirtha-raja, 59 * Preraka, 71 * Priyatama, 105 * Procya, 126 * Prthu, 25 * Pulahasrama, 59 * Punarvasu, 79 * Purana, 10 * Purna, 10 * Purusa, 10 * Purusottama, 11 * Puskara, 63 * Puspa-dhanva, 95 * Puspakastha, 33 * Puspi, 95 * Pusta, 50 * Pusya, 79 * Putanari, 36 *  * Raga-putra, 107 * Raga-satka, 107 * Raghavendra, 26 * Raghudvaha, 26 * Ragini-ramanotsuka, 107 * Raivata-jamata, 50 * Raivati-harsa-vardhana, 45 * Rajakari, 41 * Rajendra, 27 * Rajiva-locana, 31 * Raktosnisa, 98 * Rama, 5, 31, 63, 81 * Ramabhadra, 5 * Ramacandra, 26 * Rana-durmada, 126 * Rana-slaghi, 124 * Ranga-natha, 106 * Ranga-ranjana, 106 * Rangavalli-jalakara, 66 * Ranodbhata, 124 * Rasa-mandala-madhya-stha, 38 * Rasa-mandala-mandana, 38 * Rasatala, 17 * Ratha-koti-jaya-dhvaja, 123 * Rathi, 52 * Ratna-kambala-dhari, 97 * Rauhineya, 6 * Ravanari, 33 * Ravanyari, 33 * Revatadri-vihara-krt, 46 * Revati-citta-harta, 45 * Revati-prana-natha, 45 * Revati-priya-karaka, 45 * Revati-ramana, 5 * Rodha, 73 * Rohini-lalita, 38 * Rsabha, 25 * Rugna-vajra, 128 *  * Sabha-bhasa, 116 * Sabha-candra, 116 * Sabha-deva, 116 * Sabha-dipa, 116 * Sabha-pati, 116 * Sabha-ravi, 116 * Sabha-sila, 116 * Sabhagni, 116 * Sad-aksara, 127 * Sad-anana, 87 * Sada, 96 * Sadhu, 105, 129 * Sadhu-bhusana, 129 * Sadhu-cari, 131 * Sadhu-citta, 131 * Sadhu-dhana, 130 * Sadhu-grasta-mana, 130 * Sadhu-jnati, 130 * Sadhu-priya, 130 * Sadhu-vasi, 131 * Sadhumaya, 130 * Sadhv-isa, 105 * Sadhya, 80, 105 * Saguna, 66 * Sahasra-phana-mandita, 15 * Sahasra-vadana, 8 * Saila-sattama, 76 * Saindhava, 63 * Sakhi, 13 * Sakra-jid, 39 * Saksat, 11 * Saksi, 13 * Sakti-hasta, 87 * Sala-bahu, 57 * Salari, 41 * Salmali, 111 * Salmali-dvipa, 111 * Salva-hanta, 57 * Sama, 67 * Sama-buddhi, 69 * Sama-drn, 67 * Sama-prabha, 69 * Samantoddhrta-paduka, 123 * Sambhava, 74 * Sambhu-kodanda-bhanjana, 29 * Samhara-kadru, 22 * Sami, 109 * Samiksana, 55 * Samrat, 15 * Samya, 67 * Sanaka, 25 * Sanghata, 13 * Sanghavan, 13 * Sankarsana, 5 * Sankha-cakra-gada-dhara, 44 * Sankhacuda-vadhodyata, 39 * Sankhacudabha, 18 * Sankhya-sastri, 89 * Sanku, 74 * Santana, 77 * Sapta-godavari-pati, 60 * Sarayu, 59 * Sarayupama, 61 * Sarga, 73 * Sargadi, 73 * Sari, 28 * Sarma, 14 * Sartha, 69 * Sartha-vit, 92 * Sarva, 51 * Sarva-laksana, 27 * Sarva-niti-jna, 114 * Sarva-sastrartha-tattva-ga, 90 * Sarvaga, 69 * Sarvavit, 69 * Sarvopama, 99 * Sasi, 78 * Sastra-bhasya-kara, 22 * Sasvata, 11 * Sata-kratu, 109 * Sata-yama, 109 * Satananda, 109 * Satru-nirbhartsanodyata, 128 * Satru-sandha, 56 * Satru-tapana, 28 * Satrughna, 28 * Sattvam, 115 * Satvata, 113 * Satvatam-pati, 113 * Satyam, 72 * Saumitri, 28 * Saumya, 43 * Sesa, 11 * Setu-bandhana, 59 * Setubandha, 33 * Sevya, 50 * Siddha-gita, 53 * Siddha-katha, 53 * Siddhasrama, 62 * Sikata-bhumi-cari, 102 * Sikhandi, 21 * Sikhari, 51 * Silpi, 51 * Sira-pani, 7 * Sisira, 76 * Sisu, 38 * Sisumara, 80 * Sita, 80 * Sitosnisa, 98 * Sivarthada, 87 * Smrti-kara, 91 * Snigdha, 94 * Sodasabda, 127 * Sona-sampluta, 58 * Sphita, 106 * Sphota-vrtti, 92 * Sphotayana, 23 * Sphurad-danta, 17 * Sphurja, 110 * Sphurti, 16 * Sragvi, 58 * Sravana, 79 * Sri-raga, 107 * Sri-vrndavana-sancari, 104 * Sridhara, 83 * Srimal, 34 * Srisa, 40 * Srngara, 93 * Sruta, 66 * Srutisvara, 88 * Sthanu, 15 * Su-kirti, 106 * Su-puspita, 95 * Su-smita-cchavi, 54 * Su-yasa, 106 * Subala, 76 * Subha, 80 * Subhaspada, 131 * Sudama-saukhya-dayaka, 64 * Sudha-ghana, 130 * Sudha-sindhu, 79 * Sudharmadhipati, 115 * Sudhi, 103 * Sugriva, 32 * Sugriva-sakha, 32 * Sukla, 80 * Sukla-camara-vijita, 53 * Sula-sucy-arpita-gaja, 84 * Sunandi, 51 * Suprabha, 61 * Supta, 109 * Sura, 27 * Suralaya, 75 * Surarcita, 34 * Surasena, 114 * Surya-vamsi, 34 * Susupta, 109 * Sutalesa, 17 * Sutali, 16 * Sutoyada, 126 * Sva, 72 * Svaccha, 93 * Svapna, 109 * Svara-gamya, 108 * Svara-jati-smara, 108 * Svarat, 8 * Svasrayasraya, 70 * Svatantra, 129 * Svayambhu, 74 * Svayambhuva-sahaya-krt, 74 * Sveta-varna, 6 * Svetadvipa, 81 * Syamalanga, 43 * Syami, 109 * Syandanam, 124 * Symantaka-mani, 49 *  * Takra-bhuk, 101 * Takra-hari, 101 * Tala, 108 * Talanka, 7 * Talatala, 17 * Tali, 16 * Tamraparni, 60 * Tapa, 72 * Taraksa, 54 * Tarka-vidvan, 88 * Taru-raja, 77 * Tatakari, 30 * Tirtha-yayi, 57 * Tosalantaka, 41 * Trata, 27 * Trayo-vimsatika, 71 * Tri-jvara, 110 * Tridha, 72 * Trikuta, 76 * Triloka-vijayi, 64 * Trisuli, 84 * Triveni, 61 * Trnavarta-nipataka, 36 *  * Uddhava-sakha, 44 * Ugrasena, 114 * Ugrasena-priya, 115 * Ujjvala, 93 * Urangama, 23 * Urdhvaga, 8 * Urja, 110 * Urvara, 109 * Utiman, 73 * Uttariya-dhara, 98 *  * Vaca, 90 * Vada, 89 * Vadi, 89 * Vai, 88 * Vaidhrti, 79 * Vaidya, 91 * Vaijayanti-virajita, 58 * Vaikuntha, 23 * Vaikuntha-natha, 81 * Vaikuntha-nayaka, 81 * Vaisesika, 90 * Vaiyakarana-krt, 90 * Vaiyyasa, 90 * Vajra-bhedana, 127 * Vajranga, 127 * Vakya-sphota, 92 * Vamana, 23 * Vamsi-vadya-visarada, 34 * Vamsivata-tata-sthita, 104 * Vanamali, 19 * Vanecara, 30 * Vara, 48, 94 * Varaha, 24 * Varanasi-gata, 51 * Varna, 96 * Varuni-mada-mattanga, 19 * Vasanta-malati-karsi, 65 * Vasu, 9 * Vasudeva, 9 * Vasudeva-kalananta, 8 * Vasuki, 18 * Vasumati-bharta, 9 * Vasuttama, 9 * Vatodaka, 60 * Vatsa-vrnda, 103 * Veda-pathi, 88 * Vedanta-krt, 89 * Vegatara, 18 * Veni, 60, 61 * Venu-vadana, 7 * Vetala-bhrd, 85 * Vibhisana-sahaya-krt, 30 * Vidya-visarada, 91 * Vigadhi, 94 * Vijvara, 110 * Vilaksana, 80 * Vindhya, 76 * Vipasi, 58 * Vipra, 122 * Vipra-bhakta, 122 * Vipra-gita-maha-katha, 121 * Vipra-guru, 122 * Vipra-hita, 121 * Vipra-mukhya, 121 * Vipra-pada-jalardranga, 121 * Vipra-padanuga, 122 * Vipra-padodaka-priya, 121 * Vipra-seva-parayana, 120 * Vipranghri-jala-putanga, 120 * Vira, 8 * Vira-bhadra, 87 * Vira-ghosa, 127 * Vira-ha, 44 * Vira-mathana, 44 * Vira-sammarda, 126 * Viradhari, 30 * Virat, 15 * Visarga, 73 * Visasi, 87 * Visesa-vit, 24 * Visnu, 24 * Visva-dharma, 52 * Visva-jid, 64 * Visva-karma, 52 * Visva-natha, 64 * Vitali, 16 * Vittalesa, 106 * Vraja-raksaka, 39 * Vrajarbhaka, 102 * Vrajesvara, 36 * Vrddha, 25 * Vrndavana-latasrita, 37 * Vrsa, 86 * Vrsabhanu-vara, 40 * Vrsni, 113 * Vrsni-cakravrta, 115 * Vrsni-vallabha, 9 * Vrtra-ha, 78 * Vyali, 85 * Vyangya-viddhanavad-dhvani, 92 * Vyapaka, 70 * Vyapi, 81 * Vyatipata, 80 * Vyomasura-vinasa-krt, 37 *  * Yadavendra, 9 * Yadu-sabha-pati, 115 * Yadu-vara, 7 * Yaduttama, 9 * Yajna, 23 * Yajna-bharta, 29 * Yajna-trata, 29 * Yajnika, 23 * Yasasvi, 106 * Yasomati-suta, 38 * Yava-bhoji, 93 * Yava-krita, 93 * Yavana-ha, 43 * Yavasana, 93 * Yoddha, 122 * Yogesvara, 24 * Yuddha-bhrd, 44 * Yuddha-vira, 125